HUGO'S  FRENCH  SIMPLIFIED 

The  book  comprises  the  following  : 

I.    A  Simple  bat  Complete  Grammar,  containing  all  the  mlef  ne- 
cessary for  speaking  and  writing  French  correctly. 
II.    French  Pronunciation;  a  series  of  Easy  Anecdotes,  with  the 
Translation  and  Pronunciation  of  every  word,  and  complete 
rules  on  Pronunciation. 

III.  French  Idioms;  Practical  Sentences,  introducing  all  the  Im- 

portant Idioms  and  peculiarities  of  French  construction. 

IV.  A  Key  to  the  Conversational  Exercises  in  the  Grammar. 

296  Pages.     12mo,  Cloth,  $1.00 

HUGO'S  FRENCH  VERBS  SIMPLIFIED 

Rules  for  the  formation  of  tenses ;  and  complete  tables  for  refer- 
ence, showing  at  a  glance  the  conjugation  of  every  verb,  regular 

Limp  Cloth,  50  cents 

HUGO'S  SPANISH  SIMPLIFIED 

This  book  comprises  the  following : 
I.    A  Grammar,  containing  all  the  rules  necessary  for  speaking 

and  writing  Spanish  correctly. 

II.    Spanish  Reading:  Made  Easy,  a  collection  of  Short  Stories  with 
foot-notes  to  each  page. 

III.  Spanish  Conversation,  being  practical  and  colloquial  sentences 

introducing  all  the  important  idioms. 

IV.  A  Key  to  the  Exercises  in  Grammar. 

220  Pages.     12mo,  Cloth,  $1.00 

HUGO'S  SPANISH  VERBS  SIMPLIFIED 

An  exhaustive  treatise,  with  original  rules  on  the  formation  of 
tenses,  showing  the  easiest  and  quickest  way  of  learning  all  Spanish 
verbs,  Regular  and  Irregular.  With  tables  for  reference,  which  show 
at  a  glance  the  complete  conjugation  of  every  Spanish  Verb. 
Complete  Lists  and  Tables  for  Reference 

96  Pages.    Limp  Cloth,  50  cents 

HUGO'S  RUSSIAN  GRAMMAR  SIMPLIFIED 

The  Only  Real  Self  Instructor 

Exercises,  Key  and  Vocabularies  with  the  Pronunciation  of 
Every  Word  Exactly  Imitated 

The  Russian  is  guaranteed  correct,  such  as  is  used  by  the  educa- 
ted classes  in  Moscow  and  Petrograd.  Every  word  has  been  written 
by  a  Russian  University  man,  and  carefully  revised  by  other  edu- 
cated Russians. 

12mo,  Cloth,  $1.00 


f>H 


HUGO'S 

SPANISH 

SIMPLIFIED 

COMPLETE— CONSISTING  OF 
I —A  SIMPLE  BUT  COMPLETE  GRAMMAR 

Containing  all  the  Rules  necessary  for 
Speaking  and  Writing  Spanish  correctly 

The  Pronunciation  of  Every  Word  Exactly  Imitated 

II.— SPANISH  READING  MADE  EASY 

Consisting  of  Anecdotes  and  Short  Stories,  with  about  Sixty 

foot-notes  on  each  page,  so  that  reading  becomes  a  pleasant 

recreation,  even  to   beginners 

III— SPANISH  CONVERSATION 

Practical  and  Colloquial  Sentences,  in- 
troducing   all    the    important     Idioms 

IV —A  KEY  to  the  EXERCISES  in  the  GRAMMAR 


PHILADELPHIA 

DAVID   McKAY,  Publisher 

604-8  S.  Washington  Square 


CONTENTS. 

SECTION  I. — Grammar  (with  Exercises  and  Pronunciation). 
„     II.— Anecdotes  (with  Notes)  for  Reading  Practice. 
„  III.— Idiomatic  Conversation. 
„  IV.—  Key  to  Exercises  in  Grammar. 


INSTRUCTIONS  TO  STUDENTS. 

After  acquiring  a  general  idea  of  the  Pronunciation,  learn 
five  or  six  lessons  in  the  Grammar.  This  can  best  be  done  by 
reading  carefully  several  times  through  each  rule,  pronouncing  the 
new  words  aloud,  and  writing  out  the  translation  to  the  Exercise 
oil  that  rule.  Then  compare  your  work  carefully  with  the  Key, 
marking  all  errors,  and  afterwards  reading  again  through  the  Ex- 
amples to  the  rule  forgotten.  If  necessary,  translate  the  Exercise 
a  second  or  third  time,  and  on  no  account  attempt  the  Collective 
Exercise  until  you  can  do  the  short  Exercises  correctly. 

(Students  who  experience  a  difficulty  in  translating  the  Col- 
lective Exercises  may  first  translate  them  from  the  Key  into 
English.) 

After  having  mastered  five  or  six  lessons  in  this  way,  a  page 
or  two  of  the  Reading  matter  may  be  advantageously  translated 
with  each  lesscta.  This  will  relieve  the  -monotony  of  learning  so 
many  rules,  and  greatly  enlarge  the  number  of  words  at  the 
student's  command,  if  each  page  is  gone  through  two  or  three 
times.  No  attempt  need  be  made  to  learn  the  words  iu  the 
reading  pages  by  heart ;  they  will  be  acquired  gradually  and 
without  effort. 

Advanced  Students  will  derive  great  benefit  from  writing  out  the 
literal  translation  of  these  pages  in  English,  afterwards  re-trads- 
lating  without  reference  to  the  original. 

The  conversation  pages  will  well  repay  the  trouble  of  careful 
study  ;  but  12  or  14  lessons  should  be  learned  before  this  section 
*  uttered.  JVJ120311 


'RESERVATION 
OPY  ADDED 


PREFACE. 

All  Hugo's  Grammars  are  contained  in  about  a  fourth  of  the  usual 
compass,  because  rules  which  are  the  same  in  English  are  omitted  ;  but 
everything  necessary  for  practical  purposes  is  fully  given,  and  clearly 
explained.  It  is  not  assumed  that  the  student  is  an  expert  in  English 
grammar,  a  mistake  which  most  grammarians  make,  with  the  result  that 
their  rules  are  quite  incomprehensible  to  the  average  man. 

Our  rules  are  given  in  the  order  best  tending  to  rapid  progress,  and 
in  such  a  way  that  the  student  can  at' once  make  practical  use  of  what  he 
has  learnt.  This -departure  from  custom  will  be  found  of  special  ad- 
vantage with  the  Verbs,  which  are  given  in  the  way  that  shows  how  each 
Tense  can  be  most  naturally  formed  from  another  previously  learnt. 

After  the  Regular  Verbs  have  been  fuliy  treated,  the  Irregular  ones 
follow,  in  order  of  importance. 

As  no  one  should  attempt  a  systematic  study  of  the  Irregular  Verbs 
until  he  has  thoroughly  mastered  the  Regular  ones,  we  have  saved  space, 
and^iraplified  the  students  work,  by  only  giving  the  Tenses  that  need 
be  learnt.  All  other  Tenses  are  regular,  or  formed  according  to  our 
rules  on  the  Irregular  Verbs.. 

The  Familiar  Form,  which  is  quite  useless  to  foreigners,  is  dealt 
with  in  a  manner  which  still  further  simplifies  the  Verb.  In  the 
conjugation  of  each  Tense,  this  form  merely  appears  as  a  note,  so  that 
the  student  has  only  three  or  four  endings  to  learn  instead  of  six. 

The  Subjunctive  Mood,  a  grammatical  nicety  which  few  natives 
understand  properly,  was  dealt  with  in  the  original  edition  for  reference 
purposes  only.  We  have  now  added  a  simple  explanation  of  all  the  im- 
portant rules  on  the  use  of  this  Mood,  together  with  practical  exercises. 

The  Pronunciation  is  given  in  the  first  twelve  lessons  ;  but  as  every 
Spanish  word  is  pronounced  according  to  the  few  simple  rules  on  pages 
5  to  9,  the  student  cannot  fail  to  pronounce  any  new  word  correctly,  long 
before  he  has  reached  Lesson  12. 

Special  attention  is  called  to  the  remarks  on  varying  pronunciations 
on  page  9.  The  Spanish  Academy  says  that  B,  D,  and  V  should  be  pro- 
nounced in  Spanish  as  in  French  and  English,  and  there  is  no  reason 
whatever  for  foreigners  to  depart  from  this  rule,  although  they  will  often 
hear  educated  natives  do  so. 


I 

Tfae  Augmentative  and  Diminutive  terminations  were  needlessly 
introduced  in  his  grammar  by  a  pedant  more  than  a  century  ago ;  and 
his  idea  was  copied  by  all  succeeding  grammarians,  until  we  bad  the 
courage  to  ignore  precedent,  and  relegate  this  utterly  trivial  matter  to 
the  Appendix.  These  terminations  have  in  the  past  made  many  a  student 
discontinue  the  study  of  Spanish  in  despair.  Yet  a  knowledge  of  them  is 
absolutely  useless,  because  «io  foreigner  can  possibly  know  to  which  words 
they  may  be  added.  A  dictionary  will  always  tell  him  this^j  it  is  the 
grammarian's  province  to  teach  what  CANNOT  be  found  in  dictionaries. 

Hugo's  Spanish  Grammar,  originally  published  in  1888,  was  the  first 
attempt  ever  made  to  simplify  that  language.  All  previous  grammars 
dealt  with  the  ten  parts  of  speech  in  the  old-fashioned  stereotyped  order, 
without  any  attempt  at  simplification,  condensation,  or — what  is  most 
important  of  all — separation  of  trivial  detail  from  matters  of  fundamental 
importance.  An  enormous  number  of  the  original  edition  have  been 
sold,  and  the  numerous  highly  flattering  testimonials  received  from  all 
parts  of  the  world  testify  to  its  clearness,  conciseness,  and  simplicity. 

The  principle  on  which  the  work  is  written  was  copied  almost  imme- 
diately in  various  quarters,  often  without  acknowledgment.  In  one  case, 
a  well-known  firm  of  London  publishers  brought  out  a  Spanish  Grammar 
which  calmly  appropriated,  not  only  the  wording  and  order  of  our  original 
rules,  but  even  our  exercises  and  vocabulary,  with  hardly  a  word  altered.* 

As  our  original  edition  applied  for  the  first  time  the  principles  of 
Hugo's  *  French  Simplified*  to  Spanish,  it  speedily  became  the  standard 
text-book  on  the  subject ;  but  it  bore  many  traces  of  the  haste  with  which 
it  was  written,  to  meet  the  sudden  demand  occasioned  by  the  Argentine 
Republic  boom  of  some  twenty  years  ago.  Since  then,  we  have  used  the 
book  for  teaching  thousands  of  students,  and  consequently  learnt  its  weak 
points.  Guided  by  this  extended  experience,  We  have  re-writlen  the  work 
with  the  utmost  care,  correcting  errors,  improving  the  rules,  and  adding 
many  additional  explanations  ;  while  every  word  /of  the  Spanish  has  been 
revised  and  re-revised  by  competent  educated  natives. 

Th3  work  therefore  now  takes  a  permanent  stereotyped  form  ;  and  we 
•hall  watch  that  this  present  improved  and  revised  edition  is  not  copied. 

Teachers  and  students  are  hereby  warned  that  any  other  book 
purporting  to  be  Hugo's  Spanish  System  is  nothing  of  the  so?*/,  but 
merely  an  imitation  of  the  first  edition,  with  just  enough  alterations 
to  spoil  the  arrangement,  and  make  the  exercises  laughable.* 

*We  may  mention  a  very  amusing  instance  of  this.  Not  to  copy  our 
exercises  exactly,  the  plagiarist  altered  one  of  our  sentences, '  Is  your  bro- 
ther smoking  ? '  to  *  la  your  sister  smoking  ? '  thus  avoiding  the  charge  of 
copying  Word  for  word,  but  making  himself  ridiculous  in  the  process* 


CONTENTS. 


Accents,  Signs  of  Punctua- 
tion, etc.          ...         PAGE  9 

Adjectives,  Qualifying    ...    20 

Adjectives,  Feminine  and 
Plural  of          ...  20, 21 

Adjectives,  Contractions 
of         57 

Adverbs ...  ...  ...    49 

Adverbs  and   Adjectives, 
Comparison  of    36, 49,  72, 79 

Alphabet  ...          ...      5 

Articles,  Definite,  Indefi- 
nite, and  Partitive 

11,12,56,58,71 

Demonstrative  Adjectives 
and  Pronouns  ...          ...    27 

Familiar  Form    ...  ...    83 

Hour  of  the  Day  ...  ...    53 

Indefinite  Adjectives  and 
Pronouns         ...  56, 58 


Interjections 


85 


Interrogative    Adjectives 
and  Pronouns  ...  ...    30 

Negations  10,14,  25, 50,  58 
Nouns,  Gender  of  ...  11 

Nouns,  Plural  of  1 1, 90 

Numbers,  Cardinal  ...  52 
Numbers,  Ordinal  ...  55 

Personal  Pronouns 

10,  13,  44,  46  to  48 

Polite  form  of  address  10,13 
Possessive  Adjectives  ...  16 
Possessive  Pronouns  33,  34 

Prepositions  and  Conjunc- 
tions   ...          ...  13, 65 

Pronunciation  ...  6  to  9, 22,  26 
Relative  Pronouns  39, 40 


Syllables,  Division  Of 
words  into  ...  ...  8 

Terminations,  Augmenta- 
tative  and  Diminutive  ...  90 

"to "before an  Infinitive  74,75 

Use  of  "a"  before  Object 
when  a  person  ...    31 

REGULAR  VERBS      23  to  51 

Participles,  Present  and 
Past...  ...       28,78,79 

Present  Tense ...  23, 24 

Perfect  Tense  ...  ...    31 

Imperfect  Tense  ...    43 

Past  Definite  Tense  38,  39 

Future  Tense  ...  34, 35 

Conditional  Mood  ...    44 

Imperative  Mood  ...    41 

Subjunctive  Mood  50, 51 

Subjunctive  Mood,   use 
of     ...          ...  •       86  to  91 

IRREGULAR  VERBS  67  to  85 

Verbs  changing  stressed 
Vowel  of  Stem  63, 64, 81, 82 

Auxiliary  Verbs 

10,  14,  17,  28,  35,  39,  41,  43, 
50,51,73,75,  76 

Reflective  Verbs       59, 60, 61 
Impersonal  Verbs         70, 71 

Negative  and  Interroga- 
tive Forms   ...       10,25,28 

Passive  Voice  ...          ...    61 

Changes    in    Stem    of 
Regular  Verbs  62, 84 

Conjugation  of '  tener  * 
(see  Auxiliary  Verbs) 

*  Ser '  and  4  estar,'  differ- 
ence between  ...    18 


SPECIAL  NOTE.  —  These  five  preliminary  pages  need  not  be 
learnt  at  first.  They  merely  contain  the  Rules  of  Pronunciation  ; 
and  as  the  pronunciation  of  each  new  word  is  given  as  it  occurs  in 
the  Rules  or  Exercises,  THE  STUDENT  SHOULD  AT  ONCE  COMMENCE 
AT  THE  FIRST  LESSON  (page  10).  Pages  5  to  9  can  best  be  mas- 
tered gradually,  by  occasional  perusal. 

In  studying  the  Lessons,  first  read  each  Rule  carefully,  com- 
paring with  the  Examples  underneath.  Then  translate  and 
re-translate  (preferably  in  writing)  the  Exercise  which  follows, 
until  you  can  translate  every  sentence  correctly  and  readily. 


THE   SPANISH   ALPHABET  (for  reference  only); 

with  the  names  of  the  29  letters. 
(K  and  w  only  occur  in  words  taken  from  other  languages) 

ABCCHDJEFGHI 

Pron. :    ah*    bay    thay*      chay     day        ay    eff-ay*  //ay*  ah-chay  ee 

JKLLL          M          N  NOPQ 

/fo-tah*   kah  ell-ay  ^11-yay  exnm-ay  enn-ay  enn-yay    o*    pay   koo 

RSTUV  W  X  Y  Z 

airr-ay  es-ay*  tay    oo  vay  do-blay-vay  ay-kis*  ee  gre'ay-gah  thay-tah 

*If  our  Imitated  Pronunciation  is  pronounced  as  if  each  syllable  were 
part  of  an  English  word,  it  will  always  be  understood ;  but  the  exact 
Hound  will  be  still  more  nearly  obtained  if  the  following  instructions  are 
borne  in  mind : 

th     must  be  pronounced  like  TH  in  *  thin,'  never  like  TH  in  *  they.* 

H     is  to  be  pronounced  gutturally. 

3       is  always  to  be  pronounced  like  the  S3  in  '  missing/  never  like  the 
Sin  'easy.' 

a  Thu  Spanish  a  is  pronounced  like  'ah/  but  shorter  ^than  in  'harm* 
'  part/  'cast.'  We  imitate  it  by  'ah/  because  the  sound  is  never 
like  a  in  *  hat ' ;  but  the  '  ah  *  must  be  pronounced  short  and  sharp 

O  The  Spanish  o  resembles  the  sound  of  o  in  '  not/  and  even  slightly 
a** > roaches  the  aw  in  *  law.'  It  is  not  so  long  as  in  the  o  in  go." 
t 


PRONUNCIATION  OF  THE  VOWELS. 

The  VOWELS  in  Spanish  are  a,  e,  i,  0,  U,  y.   The  remaining 
letters  are  CONSONANTS. 


A  is  pronounced  like  all 
E  „  ay 

I  or  Y       „  ee 

O  „  o 

U  „  oo 


EXAMPLES. 
AL,  LA,  AMAN 
MEj  DE,  LE 
MI,  PEIMA,  Y 
LO,  NO,  SIDO 
TU,  SU,  UNO 


PRONOUNCED  : 

ahl,  lah,  ,ah.-mahn* 
may,  day,  lay 
mee,  pree-mah,  ee 
lo,  no,  see-do 
too,  soo,  OO-no 


*The  syllable  that  takes  the  stress  is  printed  throughout  in  thick  type." 

REMARKS. — Each  vowel  has  only  one  sound  in  Spanish,  which  sound 
is  not  quite  so  long  and  broad  as  the  English  equivalent  given  above.  The 
pronunciation  of  the  vowels  is  also  shortened,  as  in  other  languages,  when 
they  occur  in  an  unstressed  word  or  syllable,  or  precede  a  consonant. 


EMPHASIS  OR  STRESS  IN   PRONUNCIATION. 

Words  ending  in  a  Consonant  stress  the  last  syllable  ;  words 
ending  in  a  Vowel  stress  the  last  syllable  but  one,  thus : 

papel       baston       tomar       edad       pluma       rico       golpe 
paper  stick          to  take  age  pen  rich  blow 

pah-pel   bah-ston     to-mar     ay-dahdf    ploo-mah  rree-ko  goll-pay 

But  the  Consonants  (always  n  or  s)  which  are  merely  added  to 
form  the  Plural  do  not  then  affect  the  stress,  which  is  always  the 
same  in  the  Plural  as  in  the  Singular,  thus  : 

la    otra    pluma,  las    otras    plumas 


the    other        pen 
lahf  o-trah  ploo-mah 

the 
lahsf 

other        pens 
0-trahs  ploo-mahs 

mi 

my 
me 

primo 

cousin 
pree-mo 

lee 

reads 
lay-ay 

una 
a 
OO-nah 

hermosa 
nice 
air-mo-sah 

novela 
novel 
no-vay-lah 

mis 
my 

mis 

primos 
cousins 
pree-mos 

leen 
read 
lay-en 

unas 
some 
OO-nahs 

hermosas 
nice 
air-mo-sahg 

novelas 
novels 
no-vay-lahs 

t'ah '  always  to  be  pronounced  short, — see  previous  page. 


PRONUNCIATION    OF   THE   CONSONANTS. 

Z  is  pronounced  like  th  in  MONTH  or  THICK,  thus : 

voz      luz      paz        zapato        capaz       vez 
voice    light     peace  shoe  capacious    -time 

voth    looth     pahth    thah-pah-to    kah-pahth    veth  (or  vayth) 

J  is  pronounced  like  the  German  guttural  ch'  (as  in  AUCH),  or  as 

in  the  Scotch  word  LOCH,  thus  : 

ojo          jugar          juzgar          jefe          bajo         caja 
eye  to  play  to  judge          chief  under  box. 

o-Ho     #oo-gar      #ooth-gar    ^ay-fay    bah-#o    kah-jEfah 

This  sound  is  merely  the  English  h,  pronounced  in  the  throat ;  an<jl 
students  who  experience  any  difficulty  with  the  Spanish  guttural  are 
advised  to  pronounce  it  like  an  aspirated  h. 

Z  and  J  are  the  only  two  consonants  pronounced  quite  unlike  the 
English  way  ;  but  the  following  points  should  be  noted. 

C  before  e  or  i  is  pronounced  like  the  Spanish  z  ;  and 
G  „  „  „  „  j,thus: 

cena        cinco        once        general        giganie       Coger 

supper         five  eleven  general  giant         to  seize 

thay-nah  thin-ko    on-thay  ^ay-nay-rahl  ZTe-galm-tay  ko-5air 

O    before  any  other  letter  is  like  g  in  GO  ; 

QU  before  e  or  i  is  pronounced  like  the  g  in  GO ;  before  any 

other  vowel  like  gw  or  goo  ; 
H     is  not  pronounced  at  all,  thus  :. 

gato     guerra     guia    bablar    ha  hijo    herir  htuno 

cat           war         guide     to  speak  -has  son    to  wound  smoke  • 

gab-to  gairr-rah  ghee-ah  ah-blar  ah  ee-#o  ay-reer  oo-mo 
(gh  as  in  GHOST) 

LL  is  pronounced  nearly  like  11  in  MILLION  ; 

S"         „  „  „       ni  in  COMPANION,  thus : 

calle        silla        liamar        nino        senor        cuna 
street         chair  to  call          child  sir  wedge 

kah-1'yay  see-ryah  1'yah-mar  nee-n*yo  say-a'yor    koo-n'yah 


QU  is  pronounced  like  k  ; 

CH  „  as  iii  the  English  CHEAP  or  MUCH  ; 

R     is  rolled  (on  the  tip  of  the  tongue)  more  than  in  English, 
especially  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  or  syllable  ; 

S      is  always  pronounced  sharp,  as  in  SEE  or  LAST  ;  never  like 
Z,  as  in  EASY,  MISER,  thus  : 

quo        quince        muchacha        raro       casa      mesa 
that  fifteen  girl  rare         house        table 

kay       kin-thay    moo-chah-chah     rrali-ro    kah-sah  may-sah 

DIVISION  OF  WORDS  INTO  SYLLABLES. 

A^already  shown,  words  ending  in  a  consonant  stress  the  last  syllable, 
while  words  ending  in  a  vowel  stress  the  last  syllable  but  one.  The 
following  rules  are  therefore  important. 

RULE. 

When  two  vowels  come  together,  they  are  pronounced  separately, 
and  form  DISTINCT  SYLLABLES  ;  as, 

deseo,  desire  ;    teatro,  theatre  (PBON.  day-say-o,  tay-ah-tro). 

EXCEPTION. 

If,  however,  one  of  the  vowels  is  i  or  u,  the  other  vowel 
takes  the  stress,  and  the  i  or  u  is  lightly  pronounced  in  the  SAME 
SYLLABLE  (i.e.,  with  the  same  emission  of  the  voice)  ;  as, 

cuando,  when  ?  jaula,  cage ;    aire,  air ;    viaje,  voyage. 
(PBON.  koo'alin-do,  /7ah'oo-lab,  ah'e-ray,  ve'ah-#ay) 

Wheri  i  and  u  occur  together,  the  stress  is  on  the  vowel  which 
comes  last ;  as,  viuda,  widow  ;  cuita,  grief  (ve'oo-dah,  koo'ee-tah) 

When  the  stress  is  not  in  accordance  ^ith  rule,  an  acute  accent 
is  always  placed  in  Spanish*  over  the  emp.  asized  vowel ;  as, 
alii,  there  ;  h&bil,  clever  (?RON.  ah-fyee,  ah-bil). 

*Until  the  latter  half  of  the  nineteenth  century,  the  stress  was  not  marked 
in  words  ending  in  n  or  s,  thus  •  nacion,  jamas.  But  ,as  n  and  s  are  the 
two  consonants  added  when  forming  the*  plural  in  Spanish,  it  is  now  cus- 
tomary to  add  the.  accent  (naci6n,  jamas,  baston,  despues,  etc.),  to 
show  that  the  n  or  s  is  not  merely  a  plural  termination. 

Similarly,  it  is  no  longer  customary  to  mark  the  accent  in  words  ending 
in  n  or  s  when  the  stress  is  not  on  the  last  syllable,  thus  :  antes,  joven 
(pronounced  ahn-tace,  176- ven),  and  formerly  writ! en  antes,  jdven. 


9 

VARYING  PRONUNCIATIONS. 

The  lisping  pronunciation  of  z,  and  of  c  before  e  or  i  (ce=ze,  Ci=zi), 
is  usual  in  Castile ;  and  as  Castilian  is  considered  the  best  Spanish,  we 
advise  Englishmen  to  adopt  this  pronunciation  in  preference,  thus :  luz 
(LIGHT),  '  looth ' ;  cinco  (FIVE),  « thin-ko ' ;  once  (ELEVEN),  on-tbay, 
and  so  on.  But  in  South  and  Central  America,  and  in  some  parts  of 
Spain,  it  is  usual  to  pronounce  z,  and  c  before  e  or  i,  like  the  English  s. 

Many  Spaniards  pronounce  the  final  d  like  th  in  the  English  THIN, 
MYTH  ;  and  some  pronounce  d  in  the  middle  of  a  word  something  like  th 
in  the  English 4  THEN/  Thus,  edad  (AGE)=ay-dahth ;  madre  (MOTHER) 
=mah-thray. 

It  is  also  not  unusual  for  Spaniards  to  confuse  the  soumd  of  b  with 
that  of  v.  But  foreigners  should  pronounce  the  Spanish  d,  to,  V,  exactly  as 
they  are  pronounced  in  English,  not  making  the  final  d  too  sharp  and  distinct 


ACCENTS,   SIGNS    OF    PUNCTUATION,    ETC. 

The  ACUTE  ACCENT  (  ')  is  the  only  accent  used  in  Spanish.  It 
indicates  that  the  STRESS  or  EMPHASIS  is  to  be  laid  on  the  vowel  over 
which  it  is  placed  ;  as,  medico,  physician  (PRON.  may-de-ko).  It  is  also 
used  to  distinguish  between  words  similarly  spelt,  but  of  different  meaning: 
te,  thee ;  te,  tea  (PRON.  of  both,  tay)  It  never  alters  the  pro- 
nunciation of  a  letter. 

The  accent  is.  also  used  in  such  words  as  cuando  (WHEN),  donde 
(WHERE),  when  they  actually  ask  a  question,  thus  :  When  does  the  boat 
arrive  ?  i  Cuando  llega  el  buque  ?  but :  Does  he  know  when  the  boat 
arrives  1  Sabe  el  cuando  llega  el  buque  1 

(Literally,  when  arrives  the  boat  ?      knows  he  when  arrives  the  boat  7 
pronounced  :  sab-bay  el  kwahn-do  1'yay-gah  el  boo-kay). 

The  NOTES  or  INTERROGATION  and  EXCLAMATION  are  placed  at  both 
ends  of  the  phrase,  the  first  one  being  inverted  :  as, 

I  qu6  tiene  el  7  what  has  he  7— j  gracias  a  Dios !  thank  God  I 

The  DIARESIS  (••)  is  placed  over  u  (ii)  preceded  by  g,  to  indicate 
that  the  u  must  be  pronounced ;  as,  agiiero,  omen  (PRON.;  ah-goo'ay-ro). 

The  TILDE  (~  )  is  placed  over  n,  when  that  letter  is  to  be  pronounced 
like  ni  in  union  ;  as,  nifio,  child  (PRON.:  nee-n'y°)« 


10 
FIRST    LESSON- 


1.  SINGULAR. 

1st  Pa-son  I       yo 

2nd    „       thou  tli 

3rd    „       he,  61 ;  she,  ella 


PLUEAL. 

1st  Person  we  nOSOtrOS* 
2nd  „  you  vo&Otros* 
3rd  „  they  ellOS* 


*~  •]•,  7      —  —      »  » 

*  When  these  words  are  FEMININE,  the  ending  OS  is  changed  to  as 

FRON.  yo,  too,  ell,  ell-yah,  nos-o-tros,  vos-o-tros,  ell-yos,  etc. 
The  SECOND  PERSON  is  only  used  in  addressing  near  relations,  very 
intimate  friends,  children,  and  animals.    The  ordinary  polite  form  of  address 
is  usted  (SINGULAR), commonly  written  V.  or  Vd.,  and  nstedes  (PLU- 
RAL), written  Vs.  VV.  or  Vds.         PRON.   oos-ted,  oos-tay-dace. 

Usted  is  a  contraction  of  vuestra  merced  (your  honor),  and  the 
Verb  of  which  it  is  the  subject  must  therefore  be  in  the  THIRD  PERSON  : 
you  have  (siNG.)=your  honor  has        Vd.  tiene 
„      „      (pLTJB,)=your  honors  have    Vds.  tienen 
have  you  (STNG.)=has  your  honor  ?     i  tiene  Vd.  ?  etc. 
The  Second  Person  (i.e.,  the  familiar  form)  is  given  throughout  this  book 
for  Reference  only,  as  foreigners  must  always  use  the  polite  form  when  ad- 
dressing any  adult.     The  employment  of  the  Familiar  Form   will  be 
explained  later  on. 

2.  PRESENT  TENSE  0/to  have,  tener. 

we  (M.)  have  nosotros  I  tenemos 

we  (F.)     „  nosotras  f tenemos 

you          „  Vds.    f 

they  (M.)  „  ellos  <  tienen 


I  have  yo  tengo 
you;  Vd.  ( 
he  has  61      \  tiene 
she  „  ella  ( 


they  (F.)  „     ellas  ( 

PRON.  ten-go,  te-ay-nay,  tay-nay-mos,  te-ay-nen. 
Familiar  Form  :  thou  hast,  tu  tienes  ;  you  have,  vosotros  teneis. 


3.  NOT  is  translated  by  no,  which  is  placed  BEFORE  THE  VERB  ;  as, 
I  have  not,  yo  no  tengo ;  has  he  not  ?  i  no  tiene  61  ? 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  ellos  tienen  ;  2.  i  tengo  yo  ?  3.  ,;  no  tengo  yo  ?  4.  ella 
no  tiene  ;  5.  i  tenemos  nosotros  ?  6.  Vd.no  tiene  ;  7.  i  no 
tienen  ellas  ?  8.  i  tienen  Vds.?  9.  nosotros  no  tenemos. 

10.  she  has  ;  11.  have  they  not  ?  12.  have  you  (SING.)  ? 
13.  I  have  not ;  14.  you  (PLUR.)  have  not ;  15.  have  I  not  ? 
16.  we  have ;  17.  have 'you  (PLUR.)  not  ?  18.  she  has  not. 


11 

THE  PLURAL  OF  NOUNS. 

4.    The  PLURAL  is  formed  by  adding 

S  to  Nouns  ending  in  a  VOWEL  ; 

es  to  Nouns  ending  in  a  CONSONAOT  or  y. 
boy,  muchacho  ;  boys,  muchachoS  ;    train;  trea ;  trains,  trenES ; 
pen,  pluma  ;  pens,  plumaS  ;  king,  rey ;  kings,  reyES. 

If  the  SINGULAR  ends  in  z,  the  PLURAL  is  formed  by  changing  the  z 
into  ces  ,  as  voice,  voz ,  voices,  voces. 

PRONUNCIATION:  moo-chah-cho,  moo-chah-chos ;  trane,  tray-nace ; 
ploo-mah,  ploo-mahs ;  ray'e,  ray-yace  ;  votb,  vo-thace. 


THE  GENDER  OF  NOUNS. 

(Names  of  living  beings  have  the  same  Gender  as  in  English.) 

5.    Nouns  ending  in  a,  ion,  d,  Z,  are  FEMININE.       All  others 
are  MASCULINE. 

The  Gender  of  Nouns  will  only  be  given  in  the  Vocabularies  when  not 
In  accordance  with  the  foregoing  rule. 

EXERCISE  II, 

Form  the  Plural  of  :— 1.  padre,  father  ;  2.  libro,  book  ; 
t3.  nuez,  nut ;  4.  seJaor,  gentleman ;  5.  Idpiz  (MASC.), 
pencil ;  6*  pluma,  pen  ;  7.  ciudad,  town  ;  8.  hombre, 

man;  9.  luz,  light;    10.  tia,  aunt;    11.  iglesia,  church; 
12.  ley  (FEM.),  law ;  13.  sombrero,  hat. 

PRON.:  Tpah-dray  ;  2lee-bro  ;  3  noo'aith  ;  4say-n'yor ;  6  lah-pith  ; 
6  ploo-mah  ;  7  the'oo-dahd  ;  8om-bray  ;  9  looth  :  10  tee-ah  ;  11  e-glay- 
se-ah  ,  12  lay-e  r  3  3  som-bray-ro. 


6  THE   ARTICLES. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

a,  an  un  (M.),  una  (F.)  [    some,  any    unos  (M.),    Unas  (F.) 
the    el  (M.),  la     (F.)  I    the  los     (M.),    las      (F.) 

PRON.:  oonn  s  00-nah;   el;   lah(*ah'  always  pronounced  short); 
OO-nos  ;  oo-nahs ;  los  ;  lahs. 

Articles  take  the  GENDER  and  NUMBER  of  the  following  NOUN  ,  as, 
a  man,  un  hoxnbre ;  an  aunt,  una  tia 

the  man,  el  hombre ;  the  aunt,  la  tia ; 

some  men,  unos  hombres  :  some  aunts,  unas  tias  ; 
the  men,  los  hombres ;        the  aunts*  las  tias. 


12 

V.  The  MASCULINE  ARTICLE  is  used  before  a  FRMTNTNE  SIN- 
GULAR NOUN  commencing  with  a  or  ha,  if  the  a  or  ha  takes  the 
stress ;  as, 

the  wing,  el  ala  (fern.)  r  a  beech,  un  haya  (fern.)  ; 

but .  the  flour,  la  harina  ,  a  spider,  una  arafia. 
REMARK.— The  Neuter  Article  lo,  which  has  no  plural,  is  only  used 
before  other  Parts  of  Speech  used  as  JNouns,  thus     lo  dificil,  the  difficult. 
PRON,:  ah-lah  ,  ah-yah  ,  ah-ree-nah  ;  ah-rah-n'yah;  de-fee-thill. 

EXERCISE*  III. 

1.  a  brother1  ;  2.  a  sister2 ;  3.  some  brothers1 ;  4.  some 
sisters2 ;  5.  the  brother  ;  6.  the  brothers  ;  7.  the  sister  ; 
8.  the  sisters  ;  9.  the  houses3 ;  10.  the  water4 ;  11.  a  wing5 ; 
12.  the  beautiful6 ;  13.  a  father  ,  14.  the  books  ;  15.  a  pen  ; 
16.  the  pencil  ;  17  the  ink7 ;  18.  some  pencils  ;  19.  a  village8. 

1  hermano  ;  2  hermana  ,  3  casa  ;  4  agua  ,  5  ala  ;  6  hcrmoso  ;  7  tinta; 
8  aldea.  PRON.  1  air-mah-no  ,  2  air-mah-nah  •  3  kah-sah  ;  4  ah- 
gwah  or  ah-goo'ah  ;  5  ah-lah  ;  6  air-mo-so  ;  7  .tin-tab  ;  8  ahl-day-ah^ 

EXERCISE  IV. 

TRANSLATE  : — 1.  Yo  no  tengo  un  libro.  2.  £  Tiene  el 
las  plumas  ?  3.  Nosotros  tenemos  una  casa.  4.  Yds.  tienen 
unas  plumas  ;  nosotros  tenemos  unos  libros. 

5.  You  have  a  brother.  6.  The  bird1  has  two2  wings. 
7.  You  (PLURAL)  have  not  the  books.  8.  Has  he  not  the 
ink  ?  9.  The  mother3  has  two2  houses.  10.  I  have  not  a 
pen,  but4  my5friend6  has  some  pens.  11.  Has  he  the  letter7  ? 

1  pajaro  ;  2  dos  ;  3  inadre  ,  4  pero  ,  5  mi ;  6  amigo  ;  7  carta. 
PRON.  1  pah-/7ah-ro ;    2  clos  ;   3  mall -dray  ;    4  pay-ro  ;    5  me  ; 
6  ah-tnee-go ;  7  kar-tah. 


READING  AND  PRONUNCIATION  EXERCISE. 

Vd.      los     niimeros    esparioles  ?        Si;    son    los 
Know         you        the        numbers  Spanish  ?       Yes ;  (they)  are  the 

sah-bay  oos-ted    los    noo-may-ros  es-pah-n'yo-lace       see        son     los 

siguientes  :  uno,  dos,  tres,  cuatro,    cinco,  seis,    siete,    ocho, 
following :         one,  two,  three,     four,          five,        six,      seven,    eight, 
se-ghe-en-tace  oo-no  dos  trace  koo'ah-tro  thin-ko  say-is  se-ay-tay  o-cho 

nueve,        diez,    once,    doce,      trece,       catorce,     quince, 
nine,  ten,       eleven,    twelve,    thirteen,        fourteen,         fifteen, 

noo'ay-vay  de-eth  on-thay  do-tbay  tray-thay  kah-tor-tbay  kln-thay 


SECOND    LESSON. 

8.  OF  or  FROM  is  translated  by  de  (PRON.  day) ; 
TO  or  AT  is  translated  by  a  (PRON.  ah). 

de  el  is  contracted  to  del,  and  d  el  to  al ;  as, 

of  the  man,  del  hombre  ,  to  the  father,  al  padre 
de  and  &  are  NOT  contracted  with  any  word  but  el,  thus  ; 
of  the  houses,  de  las  caaas ;  to  the  men,  a  16s  hombres ; 
of  a  pen,  de  una  pluma ,       to  a  father,  a  un  padre. 

9.  Thfcre  is  NO  POSSESSIVE  CASE  in  Spanish.     The  construction 

must  therefore  be  changed  as  in  the  following  examples, 
my  friend's  houses=the  houses  of  my  friend,  las  casas  de  mi  amigo  ; 
the  man's  hat       =the  hat  of  the  man,  el  sombrero  del  hombre  ; 
the  boys'  books  =the  books  of  the  boys,  los  libros  de  los  muchachos. 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  of  the  man1 ;  2.  to  a  man1 ;  3.  from  the  church8 ;  4.  of 
the  water  of  the  pond3 ;  5.  to  a  book  ;  6.  of  the  mothers  ; 
7.  to  the  stones4 ;  8.  of  some  letters  ;  9.  from  the  wings  of  a 
bird ;  10.  to  some  books ;  11.  of  some  birds  ;  12.  to  a  house; 
13.  to  the  book  ;  14.  of  the  ink  ;  15.  of  the  brothers  ;  16.  of 
the  wings  of  the  birds  ;  17.  the  boy's5  book  ;  18.  a  soldier's6 
horse7  \  19.  the  soldier's  horses. 

1  hombre  ;  2  iglesia  ;  3  pantano  ;  4  piedra  ;  5  muchacho  ;  6  sold  ado  ; 
7caballo.  PRON.  1  om-bray  ;  2  e-glay-se-ah  ;  3  pahn-tah-no ;  4pe-ay- 
drah ;  5  moo-chah-cho  ;  6  sol-dah-do ,  7  kah-bah-1'yo. 


10.    The  "Pronoun  which  is  the  SUBJECT  of  a  Spanish  Verb  is 
generally  omitted,  if  the  meaning  is  clear  without  it ;  as, 
I  have  a  pen,  tengo  una  pluma  or  yo  tengo  una  pluma  , 
have  I  a  pen  ?  j  tengo  una  pluma  1  or  i  tengo  yo  una  pluma  ? 

It  is,  however,  never  wrong  to  insert  the  Pronoun ;   and  it 
cannot  be  omitted  when  emphasized,  thus  : 

SHE  has  two  books,  and  WE  have  three,  ella  tiene  dos  libros,  y 
nosotros  tenemos  tres. 

Usted  cannot  be  omitted,  as  ifc  stands  for  vuestra  merced  (your 
tartt),  and  is  therefore  really  a  Noun. 


u 

11.  PRESENT  TENSE  <?/to  hare,  haber. 


I  have    yo  he 


ou  „      Vd.  ) 
e  has     61      >  ha 
she  „      ella  ) 


y 
h 


we  (M.)  have  nosotros  )  t,A%v^«, 

we  (P.)    „  nosotras  f  nemos 

you         „  Yds.     i 

they  (M.)  „  ellos    >  han 

they(r.)  „  ellas    ) 


PRON.:  ay,  ab,  ay-mos,  ahn. 
Familiar  Form  :  them  hast,  tii  has  ,  you  have,  vosotros  habeis. 

12.     There  are  two  Spanish  Yerbs  meaning  '  to  have.'   Tener  is 
used  as  a  principal  Verb,  meaning  to  hold,  to  possess. 

Haber  is  only  used  as  an  AUXILIAKY  ;  i.e.,  to  form  the 
COMPOUND  TENSES  of  other  Verbs.  It  must  therefore 
precede  a  Past  Participle. 

].i  *  possess '  can  be  substituted  for  l  have,'  tener  must  be  employed. 
Thus,  in  the  Collective  Exercise  below,  sentences  3  and  4  might  be  worded  : 
4  Do  we  not  possess  the  hats  ? '  '  Does  the  church  possess  an  altar  I ' 
Therefore,  tener  is  the  verb  to  employ. 

But  in  sentences  1  and  2,  *  we  possess  written,'  4  you  possess  not 
seen,'  makes  no  sense  whatever.  Haber  must  therefore  be  used. 

The  Student  should  carefully  compare  the  following  examples  : 


I  have  a  house 

(Yo)  tengo  una  casa 

They  have  the  letter 

(Ellos)  tienen  la  carta 

You  have  a  book 

Vd.  tiene  un  libro 


I  have  seen  a  house 
(Yo)  he  visto  una  casa 
They  have  written  the  letter 
(Ellos)  han  escrito  la  carta 
You  have  taken  a  book 
Vd.  ha  tornado  un  libro 


13.    (A)  In  Compound  Tensfcs,  no  precedes  the  AUXILIARY  ;  as, 
He  has  not  written  the  letter,  (el)  no  ha  escrito  la  carta. 
(B)  In  Compound  Tenses  formed  with  the  Present  Tense  of 
haber,  the  Subject  in  questions  is  usually  placed  AFTER  the  Past 
Participle,  this  construction  being  considered  more  elegant ;  as, 
Have  you  seen  the  house  ?          j  Ha  visto  Vd.  la  casa  ? 
Has  he  not  taken  the  nuts  ?        j  No  ha  tornado  el  las  nueces  ? 
Have  the  men  written  1  i  Han  escrito  los  hombres  ? 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. 

1.  We  have  written1  some  letters.  2.  You  have  not  seen2 
the  houses.  3.  Have  \ve  not  the  hats3  ?  4.  Has  the  church 
an  altar4  ?  5.  I  have  seen2  the  altar4  of  the  church.  6.  The 
kings  have  the  horses.  7.  Who5  has  taken6  the  in<<c  ? 


15 

8.  The  man  lias  an  axe 7     9.  The  vessel8  has  an  anchor.0 

10.  Has  the  servant11  given10  a  chair12  to  the  gentleman13  ? 

11.  I  have  not  an  envelope,14  but  my15  brother  has  some 
envelopes.     12.  What16  have  you  (PLUR.)  done17  ?     13.  Have 
you  seen  the  king's  gardens18  ?    14.  The  men  have  some 
horses.      15.   Why19  have  you  not   written1    the  letters  ? 
16.  A  man  has  spoken20  with21  the  servant.11     17.  Have  we 
not  a  book  for22  the  woman23  ?      18.  Yes,24  we  have  a  book 
and  two  pens.     19.  We  have  not  seen  the  man's  house. 

'20.  The  girls25  have  not  taken6  the  pens.  21.  You  have 
some  letters.  22.  You  have  not  the  books.  23.  The  girl's25 
brother  has  not  written  a  letter  to  the  gentleman.13 

1  escrito  ,  2  visto  ;  3  sombrero  ;  4  altar  ;  5  qui&i  ?  6  tornado  ; 
7  hacha  ;  8  buque  ;  9  ancla  ;  10  dado  ;  11  criado  :  12  silla  ;  13  caba- 
llero ;  14  sobre  ;  15  mi ;  16  qud  ?  17  becho  ;  18  jardin  ;  19  por  qu£  1 
20  hablado ;  21  con  ;  22  para  ;  23  mujer  ;  24  si ;  25  muchacha. 

PBON.:  1  es-kree-to ;  2  vis-to  ,  3  som-bray-ro ;  4  ahl-tar ; 
5  ke-en  ;  6  to-mah-do ;  7  ah-chah  ;  8  boo-kay  ;  9  ahn-klah  ; 
10  dah-do  ;  11  kre-ah-do;  12  see-l'yah  ;  13  kah-bah-l'yay-ro ; 
14  so-bray  ;  15  me  ;  16  kay  ;  17  ay-cho  ;  18  JiTar-deen  ;  19  por  kay  ; 
20  ah-blah-do;  21  kon  ;  22  pah  -rah  ;  23  moo-J2air  ;  24  see; 
25  moo-chah-chab. 


READING  AND  PRONUNCIATION  EXERCISE. 

Los  otros    numeros  son  :  dieciseis  or  diez  y  seis,  dieeisiete, 
The    other        numbers      are .  sixteen,  seventeen, 

los     o-tros  noo-may-ros    son       de-eth-e-say-is,     de-eth-e-se-ay-tay 

dieciocho,  diecinueve>  veinte,  etc. 

eighteen,  nineteen,  twenty,  etc. 

de-eth-e-o-cho    de-eth-e-noo'ay-vay     vay-in-tay    et-thay-tay-rah 

<;  C6mo    esta    Vd.  ?      Muy    bien,    gracias.      La         Have 
How        are        you  ?          Very        well,        thanks.  key 

ko-mo  es-tah  oos-ted      moo'e    be-en  grah-the-ahs  lab    Tyah-yay 

de    la    puerta    no    esta    aqui.    <;  Quien    esta      hablando 

door  is          here.  Who        is  speaking 

day  lah  poo'air-tah  no    es-tah  ah-kee      ke-en     ee-tah  ah-blahn-do 

en        la       calle  ?        La       cerveza       no      es      buena. 
in  street?  beer  is  good, 

en       lah     kah-1'yay        lah    thair-yay-thah  no       ess    boo'ay-nah 


16 
THIRD   LESSON, 


14.  POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES. 


SINGULAR. 

1st  Person    my  mi 

2nd        „  thy  tu 

3rd     „         his,  her,  its  su 


PLURAL. 
our       nuestro* 

your       vuestro* 
their      SU 


*  When  the  following  Noun  is  FEMININE,  the  final  o  is  changed  to  a  ; 

thus : — nuestrA,  vuestrA. 

mi,  tu,  su,  are  ALIKE  in  Masculine  and  Feminine. 

PBON.  me,  too,  soo,  noo'es-tro,  noo'es-trah,  etc. 

15.    The  PLURAL  of  these  words  is  formed  by  adding  s  to  the 
Singular,  thus  :       miS,  nuestroS,  nuestraS,  suS. 

Possessive  Adjectives  always  take  the  GENDER  and  NUMBEB  of  the 
following  NOUN,  thus : 

my  house,  mi  casa ;  my  houses,  mis  casas ; 

his,  her  or  their  pencil,  su  lapiz  ;*  his,  her  or  their  pencils,  SUS  lapices  ; 
our  book,  nuestro  libro ,  our  books,  nuestros  libros  ; 

our  church,  nuestra  iglesia :       our  churches,  nuestras  iglesias ; 
my  brother,  mi  hermano  ;  my  sisters,  mis  hermanas ; 

his,  her  or  their  aunt,  su  tia ;         his,  her  or  their  aunta,  sus  tiaa, 


16.    YOUR  (polite  form),  su  (singular),  SUS  (plural). 

Foreigners  cannot  employ  tu  (thy)  or  vuestro  (your),  any  more  than 
tu  (thou)  or  vosotros  (you).  As  all  adults  must  be  addressed  as  Usted 
(=your  honor),  phrases  like  '  have  you  lost  your  hat  ? '  become  *  has  your 
honor  lost  HIS  hat  ? '  Q  Ha  perdido  Vd.  su  sombrero  ?)  and  so  on. 
Consequently,  su  is  used,  not  only  for  HIS,  HER,  THEIR,  but  also  for  YOUB, 
the  context  usually  showing  which  is  meant.  In  conversation,  su  usuaUy 
means  YOUR,  unless  another  person  has  just  been  mentioned.  When  it  is 
desired  to  make  a  distinction,  « the  hat  of  you,'  '  the  books  of  her,'  *  the 
mother  of  them/  etc.,  must  be  employed,  thus  :  el  sombrero  de  Vd.,  los 
libros  de  ella,  la  madre  de  ellos  (or  ellas). 

[After  a  Preposition,  HIM  is  el,  HER  ella,  and  THEM  ellos,  ellas,— 
see  paragraph  65.] 

The  construction  »u  sombrero  de  Vd.,  sus  libroa  dt  ella,  »u 
madre  de  ellos,  is  also  occasionally  used 


if 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  my  garden  ;  2.  his  ink ; '  8.  her  ink  ;  4.  their  ink  ; 
5.  our  glass1 ;  6.  our  village  ;  7.  my  aunt2 ;  8.  my  aunts2 ; 
9.  their  cat3 ;  10.  their  cats3 ;  11.  our  gloves4  ;  12.  his  shoes5; 
13.  his  sisters  ;  14.  her  sisters  ;  15.  their  money6 ;  16.  my 
servant ;  17.  our  hands7  ;  18.  his  eyes8 ;  19.  her  wish9 ; 
20.  his  wish9 ;  21.  their  namos10  ;  22.  your  pen  ;  23.  your 
book  ;  24.  your  (PLUR.)  house  ;  25.  your  (SING.)  hands7 ; 
26.  your  (PLUR.)  hands  ;  27.  lie  has  not  broken11  his  pipe12  ; 
28.  Have  the  children13  taken  your  gloves4  ?  29.  Have  you 
taken  your  money6  ? 

1  vaso  ;  2  tla ;  3  gato  ;  4  guante  ;  5  zapato  ;  6  dinero  ;  7  mano  (PEM.); 
8  ojo  ;  9  deseo  ;  10  nombre  ;  11  roto  ;  12  pipa  ;  13  nino. 

PEON.  1  vah-so  ;  2  tee-ah  ;  3  gali-to ;  4  goo'ahn-tay  ;  5  tbah- 
pah-to ;  6  de-nay-ro ;  7  mah-no ;  8  o--£fo ;  9  day-say-o  ;  10  nom-bray  ; 
11  rro-to ;  12  pee-pah ;  13  nee-n'yo. 


17.          PEESBNT  TENSES  of  to  be,  estar  and  ser. 

estar        ser  estar  ser 


I  am  estoy    soy 


we  are      estamos   somos 


PBON.  es-to'e,  es-tah,  es-tah-mos,  es-tahn  ;  so'e,  ess,  so-mos,  son. 
Familiar  Form  of  estar  :    estas  (sing.),  estais  (plur.)  ; 
„        ,,       of  ser  :       eres  (sing.),  sois  (plur.). 

The  full  conjugation  is  as  follows  : 

estar       ser  estar  ser 


f  art        yo  estoy  yo  soy 

tbou  art  tu  estas  tu  erea 

he  is       41  esta  61  es 

«be  is      ella  esta  ella  es 


we  are      nosotros  estamos  nosotroa  somos 

you  are     vosotros  estais  vosotros  sois 

tbey  are  ellos  estau  ellos  SOQ 

„  (F.)  ellas  estan  ellas  son 


EXERCISE  II.  (on  ser). 

1.  somos ;  2.  no  son  ;  3.  &  soy  yo  ?  4.  ella  no  es ;  5.  <{  no 
somos  nosotros  ?  6.  no  soy  ;  7.  <j  es  Vd*?  8.  Yds.  no  son. 

9.  is  she  ?  10.  he  is  not ;  11.  are  they  (FEM.)  not  ?  12.  you 
(PLUR.)  are  ;    13.  are  you  not  ?  14.  are  we  ?  15.  am  I  not  ? 
16.  I  am  ;  17.  she  is  not ;  18.  I  am  not. 
#.&£* 


18 

EXERCISE  III.  (on  estar). 

t.  no  estoy;  2.  i  esta  el  ?  3.  <;  no  estamos  nosotros? 
4.  Vd.  no  esta  ,  5.  I  estan  ellos  ?  6.  <?  esta  Vd.  ?  7.  Vds.  estan. 

8.:  \ve  are  ;  9.  are  you  not  ?  10.  they  (F.)  are  not  ;  11.  am 
I  ?  12.  you  (PLUR.)  are  ;  13.  is  he  not?  14.  she  is  not  ; 
15.  are  we  ?  16  you  are  not  ;  17,  I  am  not  ;  18.  are 


18.    Estar  is  used  in  speaking  of  any  TEMPORARY  condition  or 
action,  or  of  the  place  in  which  a  person  or  thing  is,  thus  : 
be  is  at  the  door,  esta  a  la  puerta*  ;    I  am  here,  estoy  aqui 
we  are  speaking,  estamos  hablando  ; 
they  are  not  busy,  no  estan  ocupados 

Ser  is  used  in  speaking  of  a  PERMANENT  state  or  condition, 

a  profession  or  calling,  or  a  natural  characteristic. 
am  I  tall  ?  j  soy  yo  alto  1      he  is  not  English,  no  es  ingles  ; 
they  are  soldiers,  son  soldados  ; 

the  paper  is  white,  el  papel  es  bianco  ; 

he  is  the  manager  of  the  firm,  es  el  gerente*  de  la  casa. 

SPECIAL    REMARKS. 

Estar  is  of  course  used  before  any  Present  Participle,  as  the  phrase 
then  expresses  WHAT  ONE  is  DOING  at  the  time  only. 

I  am  smoking  estoy  fumando 

PLACE  is  always  expressed  by  estar,  no  matter  how  long  the  person 
or  thing  has  been  in  the  place  referred  to.  Estar  is  really  almost  equiva- 
lent to  4  stand,*  thus  : 

Madrid  is  (=stands)in  Castile,  Madrid  esta  en  Castilla* 
the  Bank  of  England  is  in  London, 
el  Banco  de  Inglaterra*  esta  en  Londres* 

^ST  Ser  should  always  be  employed,  unless  the  action  or  condi- 
tion spoken  of  must  necessarily  by  its  nature  be  temporary. 

Property  in  (i.e.  possession  of)  anything  is  always  expressed  by  ser, 
thus  :  this  book  is  mine,  este  libro  es  mio. 

The  Passive  Voice  is  always  expressed  by  ser  :  he  is  loved,  es  amado 

'PRONOUNCED  :  poo'air-tah,  /fey-ren-tay,  kah-stee-l'yah, 
in-glab-tairr-rah,  Ion-dress. 

EXERCISE  IV.  (on  ser  and  estar). 

1.  We  are  not  workmen.1  2.  Are  you  ready2  ?  3.  They 
(PEM.')  are  here.3  4.  Are  you  [a]  soldier  ?  5.  I  am  not  lis- 
tening.4 6.  Who  is  in  the  street5?  7,  He  is  very6  indus- 


19 

trious.7  8.  I  am  [an*]  Englishwoman.8  9.  I  am  not  [an] 
Italian.*  10,  We  are  speaking10  with  his  cousin.11  11.  Are 
they  nob  princes12?  12.  We  are  sailors.13  13.  He  is  not 
writing.14  14.  He  is  [a]  postman.15  15.  We  are  not  smoking.16 
16.  Are  you  [a]  Spaniard17  ?  17.  They  are  my  uncles.18  18. 
My  aunt  is  not  here.8  19.  She  is  not  at19  home.19  20.  We 
are  waiting.20  21.  He  is  [a]  professor.21 

1  obrero  ;  2  listo  ;  3  aqui ;  4  escuchando ;  5  calle  (FEM.)  ;  6  muy  ;  7 
laborioso  :  8  inglesa  ;  9  italiano  ;  10  hablando  ;  11  primo(M.),  prima  (F.)  , 
12  prlricipe  ;  13  marinero  ;  14  cscribiendo  ;  15  cartero  ;  16  fumando  ;  17 
espaflol  ;.  18  tto ;  19  en  casa  ;  20  aguardando  ;  21  profesor. 

PRON.  1  o-bray-ro  ;  2  lis-to  ;  3  ah-kee  ;  4  es-koo-chahn-do  ; 
6  kah-1'yay  ;  6  moo'e  ;  7  lah-bo-re-o-so  ;  8  in-glay-sah  ;  9  e-tah-le-ah- 
no  ;  10  ah-blahn-do  ;  11  pree-mo  ;  12  prin-the-pay  ;  13  mah-re-nay- 
ro?  14  es-kree-be-en-do  ;  15  kar-tay-ro  ;  16  foo-mahn-do  ;  17  es-pah- 
n'yol ;  18  tee-o  ;  19  enn  kali-sab  ;  20  ah-goo'ar-dahn-do  ;  21  pro-fess-or. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. 

1.  Our  friends1  are  in2  the  garden,  looking3  for3  their  dogs.4 
2.  Are  you  my  friend's  uncle  ?  3.  No,6  sir,6  I  am  not  his 
uncle,  I  am  his  father.  4.  My  friend  is  in2  the  street, 
smoking  a  cigar.7  5.  Who  is  there8  ?  6.  What  are  you 
(PLUB.)  looking3  for3  ?  7.  I  am  writing  a  letter  to  your 
father.  8.  Your  children9  are  growing10  very11  fast.11  9.  My 
friend's  brother  "is  not  industrious.12 10.  Have  you  a  servant  ? 
11.  Our  sister  is  clever.13  12.  Your  mother  is  in  the  garden. 
13.  My  shoes  are  on2  the  floor,14  near15  the  chair.  14.  You 
are  not  soldiers.  15.  My  book  is  in  the  drawer.16  16.  Is 
yourb  brotherb  smokinga  ?  17.  To  whom17  have  you  written  a 
letter  ?  18.  We  are  not  studying18  our  lessons.19' 

1  amigo  (M.),  amiga  (F.)  ;  .  2  en  ;  3  buscando  ;  4  perro  ;  5  no  ;  6 
senor  ;  7  cigarro  ;  8  alii ;  9  hi  jo  (*OTI);  10  crcciendo  ;  11  mucho  (much')  ; 
12  laborioso  ;  13  babil  ;  14  suelo  ;  15  cerca  de  ;  16  caj6n  ;  17  qui£n  ;  18 
estudiando;  19  leccion. 

PRON.  1  ah-me-go ;  2  enn  ;  3  booss-kahn-do  ;  4  pairr-ro  ;  5  no  ; 
6  say-n'yor  ;  7  the-gahrr-ro  ;  8  ab-l'yee  ;  9  ee-Ho  ,  10  kray-the-en- 
do  ;  11  moo-cho  ;  12  lah-bo-re-o-so  ;  13  ah-bil ;  14  soo'ay-lo  ;  15  thair- 
kab  day  ;  16  kah-TZon  ;  17  ke-en  ;  18  es-too-de-ahn-do  ;  19  lek-the-on. 

*In  the  Exercises,  words  not  to  .be  translated  are  placed  between  square 
brackets  [  ],  and  words  which  are  required  in  Spanish,  but  not  in  Eng- 
lish, between  parentheses  (  ). 


20 
FOURTH    LESSON. 

QUALIFYING    ADJECTIVES. 

19.     Adjectives  agree  in  Gender  and  Number  with  the  Noun 
ihey  qualify  ;  and  generally  FOLLOW  that  Noun.    Thus  : 
a  cheap  watcb,  un  reloj  barato;     cheap  watches,  relojes  baratoa 
a  cheap  chain,  una  cadena  barata  ;  cheap  chains,  cadenas  baratas 
an  English  newspaper,  un  pefiodico  ingles 
English  newspapers,  periodicos  ingleses 
French  literature,  la  literatura  francesa 
Spanish  grammars,  gramaticas  espanolas 


.—  Adjectives  generally  PRECEDE  the  Noun  they  qualify  if  they 
are,  shorter  than  the  Noun,  or  are  used  figuratively  ;  as, 

a  poor(=in  poverty)  writer  un  escritor  pobre 

a  poor(=unfertunate)  writer         un  pobre  escritor 
PRON.  ray-lo#,  bah-rah-to,  kah-day-nah,   pay-re  -o-de-ko,  in-gless, 
le-tay-rah-too-rah  frahn-thay-sah,  grah-mah-te-kahs  es-pah-n'yo-labs, 
cs-kre-tor,  po-bray. 

Btieno  (good)  and  malo  (bad)  usually  precede  the  Noun. 
They  acfe  then  contracted  to  buen  and  mal,  but  in  the  MASCULINE 
SINGULAR  ONLY,-  see  Paragraph  94. 

PRON.  boo'ay-no,  mah-lo,  boo'en,  mahl. 

An.  Adjective  is  sometimes  put  before  the  Noun  for  EMPHASIS  : 
a  magnificent  day,  un  magnificodia  ;  a  splendid  day,  un  csplendido  dia 
PRON.  mahg-nee-fe-ko,  es-plen-de-do,  dee-ah. 

The  position  of  the  Adjective  before  or  after  the  Noun  which  it  qualifies 
is  largely  a  matter  of  taste  and  euphony,  respecting  which  no  exact  rules 
ca»  be  fiven. 

A  few  Adjectires  nearly  always  precede  the  Noun,  —  see  pars.  9*1,  95. 


THE  FEMININE  OP  ADJECTIVES. 

80.    'If  the  MASCULINE  ends  in  o,  the  FEMININE  is  formed  by 
changing  the  o  into  a  ;  as, 

industrious,  laborioso  (masc.),  laboriosA  (fern.) 
Busritn,  ruso  (masc.),  rusA  (tern.) 


21 

81.  If  the  Adjective  denotes  NATIONALITY,*  and  ends  in  a  con- 
sonant, the  Feminine  is  formed  by  adding  a  to  the  Mas- 
culine ;  as, 

Spanish,  espafiol  (m.),  espafiola  (f.);  English,  ing!6s(m.),  inglesa  (f.) 

REMARK  I.— Adjectives  denoting  NATIONALITY  can  also  be  used  as 
Nouns :  an- Englishman,  un  Ingles  ;  an  Englishwoman,  una  Ingksa. 

REMARK  II.— Most  other  Adjectives  which  can  be  used  as  Nouns  de- 
noting a  person  add  a  in  the  FEMININE,  \vhether  used  as  Nouns  or  Adjec- 
tives. These  generally  end  in  n  or  or.  Thus  : 

an  idle  servant,  un  criado  holgazan  (m.),  una  oriada  holgazanA  (£.) 

an  idler,  un  holgazdn  (m.),  una  holgazanA  (f.) 

22.  Adjectives  not  included  in  the  foregoing  Rules  DO  NOT 
CHANGE  in  the  Feminine  ;  as, 

an  easy  book,  un  libro  f&cil ;  easy  books,  libros  faciles 

an  easy  lesson,  una  leccion  facil ;     easy  lessons,  lecciones  faciles 
PBON.  ol-gah-thahn,  fah-thil,  leck-the-on. 

THE  PLURAL  OP  ADJECTIVES. 

23.  The  Plural  of  Adjectives  is  formed  in  the  same  way  as  the 
Plural  of  Nounsf  (see  paragraph  4)  ;  as, 

a  skilful  workman,  un  obrero  hdbil :  skilful  workmen,  obreros  habiles 
a  happy  girl,  una  muchacha  feliz  ;    happy  girls,  muchachas  felloes 
a  sick  child,  un  nino  enfermo  ;  sick  children,  ninos  enfermos 

an  English  manuscript,  ufca  escritura  inglesa 
English  manuscripts,  escrituras  inglesas 
PBON.  fay-leeth  or  fay-lith,  en-fair-mo,  es-kre-too-rah. 

EXERCISE  I. 

Form  the  Feminine  Singular,  and  the  Masculine  and  Feminine  Plural, 
of  the  following  Adjectives  : 

1.  good,  bueno  ;  2.  dear,  caro  ;  3.  capacious,  oapaz  ; 
4.  diligent,  aplioado,  laborioso ;  5.  French,  franoes ; 
6.  easy,  fdoil ;  7.  cheap,  baratO  ;  8.  dry,  seco  ;  9.  brave, 

*  These  Adjectives  do  not  commence  with  a  capital  letter  in  Spanish. 
f  The  Plural  is  of  course  formed  from  the  Singular  of  the 


valiente  ;  10.  cold,  frio  ;  ll.  hot,  cdlido ;  12.  German, 
alemdn ;  13.  difficult,  difioil ;  14.  English,  ingles  ; 
15.  heavy,  pesado ;  161  Persian,  persa. 

17.  a  good  horse  ;  18.  good  horses  ;  19.  a  bad  pen  ;  20.  bad 
pens  ;   21.  a  difficult  lesson  ;   22.  difficult  lessons. 

PRON.  1  boo'ay-no;    2  kah-ro ;    3kah-pahth;  4  ah-ple-kah-do ; 
5  frahn-thess  ;  6fah-thil  ;  7bah-rah-to«  8say-ko;  9  vah-le-ezm-tay; 
10  free-o ;    11  kah-le-do  ;    12  an-lay-malm  ;    13  de-fee-tbil ;    14  in- 
gless ;  15  pay-sah-de  ,*  16  pair-sah. 


COLLECTIVE   EXERCISE. 

1;  His  friends  are  not  brave.  2.  The  French  milliner1  has 
sold2  a  cheap  hat.  3.  Our  lessons3  are  very  easy.  4.  Have 
you  a  good  servant  ?  5.  No,  sir,  my  servants  are  not  good 
[ones].  6.  I  have  seen  (to)*  a  brave  soldier.  7.  1  have  [some] 
cold  meat.4  8.  We  are  English  sailors.  9.  Why  are  you 
(PLUR.)  not  studying6  your  lessons  ?  10.  The  German  girls 
are  happy6.  11.  To  whom7  have  you  given  your  books  ?  12. 
I  have  given  my  Spanish  books  to  my  friend's  cousin.  13. 
Our  lesson  is  very  difficult.  14.  How8  are  you  ?  15.  Very 
well,9  thank10  you10  ;  but  I  have  been11  ill.12  16.  Your  sister  is 
not  ill.12  17.  Your  (PLUR.)  aunts  are  very  clever.  18. 
Her  brothers  are  ill.  19.  Your  friend  (FBM.)  is  [an] 
Italian.  20.  She  is  not  Italian,  she  is  Spanish.  21.  What 
have  you  done  with  my  book  ?  22.  It  is  on  the  table.18 

1  modista  ;  2  vendido  ;  3  Iecci6n  ;  4  came  (FEM.)  ;  5  estudiando  ;  6. 
feliz  ;  7  quten  ?  8  como  ?  9  bicn  ;  10  gracias  (thanks)  ;  11  estado  ;  12 
enfermo  ;  13  mesa.  *  see  paragraph  37. 

PBON.  1  rno-dis-tah  ;  2  ven-dee-do  ;  3  lek-the-on  ;  4  kar-nay  j 
5  es-toode-ahn-do  ;  6  fay-leeth  ;  7  ke-en  ;  8  ko-mo  ;  9  be-en  ;  10  grab- 
tbe-ahs  ;  11  es-tah-do  ;  12  en-fair-mo  ;  13  may-sab. 

SPECIAL  REMARK. — It  must  be  constantly  borne  in  mind  that  the 
English  and  Spanish  vowel  sounds  do  not  correspond  exactly,  and  that  the 
Spanish  sounds  are  not  so  long  as  those  given  in  our  Imitated  Pronuncia- 
tion. THEY  SHOULD  ALL  BE  PRONOUNCED  SHORT  (especially  '  ah '  and 
*ay ?).  To  remind  students  of  this,  we  give  such  words  as  Irenes,  feliz,  in- 
differently as  trenn-ess  or  trane-acc,  fay-leeth,  lay -lith,  or  fell-ith. 


FIFTH  LESSON. 

REGULAR  VERBS 

The  INFINITIVE  of  every  Spanish  Verb  ends  in  ar,  er,  or  ir. 
The  part  PRECEDING  these  terminations  is  called  the  STEM. 
Thus  :  INFINITIVE  :— to  speak  hablAR    STEM  :— habl... 
„  to  owe    debER         „        deb... 

„  to  live    vivIR  „        viv... 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE  OP  REGULAR  VERBS. 

24.  The  Present  Indicative  of  Verbs  ending  in  ar  is  formed  by 
adding  to  the  STEM  the  following  terminations  : 

SING.— 1st  Pers.  2nd  Pers.  3rd  Pers.    PLUR.— 1st  Pers.  2nd  Pers.  3rd  Pers. 

O          as         A  AMOS     ais        AN 

The  full  Conjugation  of  the  Present  Indicative  is  therefore  as  follows  ; 

we  speak  (nosotros)  hablAMOS 
you    „     Vds. 
they  „     (ellos) 
PRON.  ah-blo,  ah-blah,  ah-blah-mos,  ah-blahn. 
Familiar  Form  :  thou  speakest,  (tu)  hablas  ;  you  speak,  (vosotros)  bablais. 

NOTE. — Except  in  the  FIRST  PERSON  SINGULAR,  these  terminations 
are  the  same  as  those  of  estar  (see  Paragraph  17)  ;  but  in  Regular  Verbs 
the  STRESS  IS  REGULAR  (see  page  6). 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  1  buy1 ;  2f  y<jsu  buy  ;  3.  he  buys ;  4.  we  buy ;  5. 
you  (PLUR.)  buy  ;  6.  they  buy  ;  7.  he  takes2 ;  8.  we  find3  ; 
9.  1  find  ;  10.  they  (F.)  take ;  11.  you  find  ;  12.  you  (PLUR.) 
take  ;  13.  he  smokes* ;  14,  they  smoke ;  15.  you  carry5 ; 
16.  I  carry  ;  17.  we  send6 ;  18.  you  (PLUR.)  send. 

1  comprar  ;  2  tomar  ;   3  hallar  ;   4  f umar  ;   5  llevar  ;   6  enviar. 
PRON.  1  kora-prar ;   2  to-mar  ;    3  ah-l'yar ;   4  foo-mar :  5  1'yay- 
var;  6en-ve-ar. 

25.  The  Present  Indicative  of  Verbs  ending  fn  er  is  formed 
like  that  of  Verbs  ending  in  ai%  except  that  E  is  substituted 
for  A  in  the  terminations. 


I  speak        (yo)  hablO 
you  speak    Vd.    ) -u^-un  A 
bespeaks     (el)   } hablA 


24 

The  full  Conjugation  of  the  Present  Indicative  is  as  follows: 


I  owe      (jo)  debO 


we  owe    (nosotros)  debEMOS 


debE 

PRON.  day-bo,  day-bay,  day-bay-mos,  day-ben. 
Familiar  Form  :  thou  owest,  (tu)  debes  ;  you  owe,  (vosotros)  debeis. 

EXERCISE  II. 

1.  I  drink1  ;  2.  you  drink  ;  3.  he  drinks ;  4.  we  drink  ;  5. 
you  (PLUR.)  drink  ;  6.  they  drink  ;  7.  he  believes2 ;  8.  we 
believe;  9.  they  eat3 ;  10.  I  eat  ;  11.  you  learn4  ;  12.  you  (P.) 
believe  ;  13.  he  learns  ;  14. 1  possess5 ;  15.  they  possess. 

1  beber  ;  2  creer ;  3  comer  ;  4  aprender  ,  5  poseer.     PRON.  1  bay-bair  ; 
2  kray-air  ;   3  ko-mair  ;  4  ah-pren-dair  ;    5  po-say-air. 

26.  In  the  Present  Indicative  of  Verbs  ending  in  ir,  IMOS  is 
added  to  the  Stem  to  form  the  IST  PERSON  PLURAL,  and  IS 
to  form  the  2ND  PERSON  PLURAL. 

^-  The  terminations  of  the  er  and  ir  Verbs  are  otherwise 
EXACTLY  ALIKE,  in  every  other  Mood  and  Tense.* 

The  full  Conjugation  of  the  Present  Indicative  is  as  follows: 

we  live    (nosotros)  vivIMOS 


I  live        (yo)  VivO 
'ou  live   Vd. 
e  lives    (el) 


y 


you  „      Vds. 
they,,      (ellos) 


PRON.  vee-vo,  vee-vay,  ve-vee-mos,  vee-ven. 
Pam.  Form  :  thou  livest,  (tii)  vivcs  ;   you  live,  (vosotros)  vivls  (vc-veess) 

EXERCISE   III. 

1.  1  receive1  ;  2.  you  receive  ;  3.  he  receives  ;  4.  we  receive; 
5.  you  (PLUR.)  receive  ;  6.  they  receive  ;  7.  he  writes2  ; 
8.  we  write  ;  9.  you  supply3;  10.  I  supply  ;  11.  he  divides1  : 
12.  we  divide  ;  13.  you  (PLUR.)  wrftef;  14.  we  supply. 

1  recibir  ;  2  escribir  ,   3  surtir  ,   4  dividir. 

PRON.  1  rray-the-beer  ;  2  es-kre-beer  ;  3  soor-teer  ;  4  de-ve-deer. 
*  The  only  (tther  exception  is  the  Plural  Familiar  Form  of  the  Impera- 
tive (sec  par.  57).  It  is  therefore  the  simplest  plan  for  foreigners,  who 
should  never  use  the  Familiar  Form,  to  consider  the  ir  Verbs  as  conjugate! 
exactly  like  the  er  Verbs  throughout,  except  that  the  former  take  IMQ3 
instead  of  EMOS  in  the  First  Person  Plural  of  the  Present  Indicative. 


25 

NOTE.— -ALL  REGULAR  VERBS  ending  in  AR  are  conjugated  like 
hablar,  all  in  ER  like  deber,  and  all  in  IR  like  vivir, 
Tener,  haber,  ser  and  estar  are  irregular. 

27.  QUESTIONS  are  formed  by  putting  the  Verb  before  the 
Subject ;  DO,  DOES,  DID,  are  not  translated.    Thus  : 

does  he  speak  ?=speaks  he  ?  i  habla  el  ? 

does  his  friend  smoke  ?=smokes  his  friend  ?  i  fuma  sn  amig-o  ? 

do  you  owe  ?=owe  you  ?  £  debe  Vd.  ? 

do  the  men  write  ?=write  the  men  ?  i  escriben  los  hombres  ? 

28.  NEGATIONS  are  formed  by  putting  no  before  the  Verb  or 
Auxiliary  (see    paragraph   13) ;    DO,  DOES,  DID,  are    not 
translated.    Thus : 

you  do  not  buy=you  buy  not  Vd.  no  compra 

do  you  not  buy  ?=buy  you  not  ?       i  no  compra  Vd.  ? 

the  boy  does  not  learn=the  boy  learns  not    el  muehacho  no  aprende 

does  not  the  b$y  learn  ?=learns  the  boy  not  ?  I  no  aprende  el  muohacho  ? 

does  the  train  start  ?=starts  the  train  1  i  sale  el  tren  ? 

does  not  the  boat  arrive=arri  ves  not  the  boat  ?    i  no  llega  el  buque  ? 

EXERCISE  IV. 

1.  you  find,  you  do  not  find ;  2.  do  you  find  ?  do  you 
not  find  ?  3.  the  men  drink,  the  men  do  not  drink  ;  4.  do 
the  men  drink  ?  do  the  men  not  drink  ?  5.  we  discover} 
we  do  not  discover ;  6.  do  we  discover  ?  do  we  not  dis- 
cover ;  7.  I  receive,  I  do  not  receive  ;  8.  do  I  receive  ?  do 
I  not  receive  ?  9.  the  girl  owes,  the  girl  does  not  owe  ;  10. 
does  the  girl  owe  ?  does  the  girl  not  owe  ?  1.  descubrir. 


COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  owe  [any]  money  to  my  friend  ?  2. 1  do  not 
owe  [any]  money  to  your  friend.  3.  The  Spanish  servant 
calls1  to  his  dog.  4.  We  do  not  smoke  cigars.  5.  The  indus- 
trious pupil2  learns  hisb  less<msb  *  easily.3*  6.  What  does 
your  mother  want4  ?  7.  Do  they  (PEM.)  not  work5  well? 

'Words  and  phrases  marked  A  precede  in  Spanish  those  marked  &, 


M 

8.  Who  livet  in  your  aunt's  hous«  ?  9.  My  ooueina 
there,  but  my  uncle  i*  in  Madrid.6  10.  The  officer7  drinks  a 
delicious8  wine.9  11.  We  receive  letters  from  your  uncles 
every10  day.11  12.  I  do  not  want*  a  stick12,  because13  I  have 
an  umbrella.14  13.  We  believe  that15  his  samples16  are  in  the 
shop.17  14.  How18  much18  money  do  we  owe  ?  15.  I  believe 
that  we  owe  four19 shillings20  to  the  shopkeeper,21  and  three22 
shillings  to  the  servant.  16.  Perhaps*3  he  does  not  smoke. 
17.  Who  lends24  money  to  my  friend  ?  18.  I  often255  lend* 
money  to  your  friend.  19.  At- what  time26  does  the  train27 
for  London28  leave29  ?  20.  My  train27  does  not  start29  yet.80 

21.  I  do  not  fear31  the  punishment32 ;  it  is  not  very  great.8* 

22.  The  boys  do  not  throw34  stones.    23.  You  do  not  drink 
beer.35     24.  Do  you  not  understand36  the  lesson  ?      25.  I 
understand36  the  lessons  very  well.    26.  Do  they  understand 
your  explanation37  ?    27.  Where38  do  your  cousins  live  ?    28. 
My  cousin  (FEM.)  lives  in  Madrid,  and  I  live  in  London.28 

1  llamar  ;  2  discipulo  (M.),  disclpula  (F.)  ;  3.  facilmente  ;  4.  desear  ; 
5  trabajar  ;  6  Madrid  ;  7  oficial ;  S  delicioso  ;  9  vino  ;  10  cada  (e.acli)  ;  1 1  dla. 
(MASC.)  ;  12  bast6n  ,  13.  porque  ;  14  paraguas  (SING,  and  PLUB.  the 
same)  ;  15  que  ;  16  muestra  ;  17  tienda  ;  18  cuanto?  19  cuatj-o  ;  20 
chelin  ;  21  tende.ro  ;  22  tres  ;  23  tal  vez  ;  24  prestar  ;  25  amenudo ; 
26  hora  ;  27  tren;  28  Londres  ;  29  salir  (par.  148);  30  todavia ; 
31  temer ;  32  casiigo ;  33  grande  ;  34  tirar  ;  $5  cerveza  ;  36  comprender ; 
37  explicaci6n  ;  38  d6nde  ? 

PEON.*  1 ryah-mar  ;  2  dis-thee-poo-lo  ,  3  fah-thil-men-tay  ;  4  day- 
say-ar  ;  5  trah-bah-//ar  ;  6  mah-drid  ;  7  o-fee-the-ahl ;  8.  day-lee-the- 
O-so  ;  9  vee-no  ;  10  kah-dah  ;  11  dee-ah  ;  12  bahs-ton  ;  13  por-kay  ; 
14  pah-rah-goo'ahs  ;  15  kay  ;  16  moo'ess-trah  ;  17  te-en-dah  ;  18 
koo'ahn-to  ;  19  koo'ah-tro  ;  20  chay-leen  ;  21  ten-day-ro  ;  22  tress  ; 
23  tahl  veth  ;  24  pres-tar  ;  25  ah-may -noo-do  ;  26  o-rah  ;  27  tren  ; 
28  Ion-dress  ;  29  sab-leer  ;  30  to-dah-vee-ab  ;  31  tay-mair  ;  32  kahs- 
tee-go  ;  33  grahn-day  :  34  te-rar  ;  35  thair-vay-thab  ;  36  kom-pren-  , 
dair  ;  37  ex-plc-kah-the-on  ;  38  don-day. 

*  Respecting  tbe  Imitated  Pronunciation,  note  once  more  tbat  TH 
must  always  be  pronounced  as  in  '  montb,'  and  S  SHARP,  like  SS  in  'hiss.1 
Tbe  vowel  sounds  must  not  be  made  too  long ;  peseta  (franc),  for 
example,  which  we  give  as  '  pay-say-tah/  might  almost  as  weJl  be 
imitated  thus  :  '  pess-ett-ab.' 


2? 

SIXTH    LESSON. 


DEMONSTRATIVE  ADJECTIVES  &   PRONOUNS.* 

29.  MASC.      FEM>  MASC.  FEM. 


this          este    esta 
(this)  that  ese     esa 
that         aquel  aquella 


these  estos      estas 

(these)  those  esos       esas 
those         aquellos  aquellas 


PRON.  es-tay,  ay-say,  ah-kel ;  es-tah,  ay-sah,  ah-kell-yah;  es-tos,  etc. 

Note  that  the  Feminine  Plural  is  formed  by  adding  s  to  the  Singular, 
and  that  the  Masculine  Plural  only  differs'from  the  Feminine  in  the  vowel 
of  the  termination.  Examples  : 

this  man,  este  hombre  these  men,  estos  hombres 

that  pencil,  ese  or  aquel  lapiz  ;  those  pencils,  esos  or  aquellos  l&pices 

this  letter,  esta  carta  these  letters,  estas  cartas 

•that  house,  esa  or  aquella  casa  ;  those  houses,  esas  or  aquellas  oasas 

;  Este  usually  indicates  something  near  the  speaker,  ese  something 
near  the  person  addressed,  and  aquel  something  near  neither.  Thus  :  these 
chairs  (close  to  me),  estas  sillas ;  those  chairs  (close  to  you),  esas 
'Sillas  ;  those  chairs  (close  to  neither),  aquellas  eillas. 

pQ/   The  Neuter   forms  for  THIS    (esto)    and   THAT.  (6SO, 
o"|tquellO)  differ  in  the  same  way  as  the  above.      They  have 
no  plural,  and  neither  precede  nor  replace  a  Noun,  thus  : 
*  Who  has  done  this  ?  i  Quien  ha  hecho  esto  ? 

I  have  not  heard  that.        No  he  oido  eso. 

Kjuello  is  seldom  used  unless  three  things  are  referred  to  ;  as, 
»•  I  take  this,  my  friend  takes  that,  and  his  brother  takes  that 
yo  tomo  esto,  mi  amigo  toma  eso,  y  su  hermano  toma  aquello 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  that  boy  ;  2.  these  women  ;  3.  those  envelopes  ;  4.  this 
table  ;  5.  that  church  ;  6.  those  streets  :  7.  these  horses  ; 
8.  this  ink  ;  9.  this  cat ;  10.  those  pictures1 ;  11.  that  bread2;, 
12.  this  town  ;  13.  these  numbers3 ;  14.  that  lady4 ;  15.  we 
are  not  sure5  of  that ;  16.  I  do  not'  believe  this. 

1  cuadro  ;  2  pan  ;  3  niimero  ;  4.senora  ;  5.  seguro.  PEON.  1  koo'ah- 
dro  ;  2  pahn  ;  3  noo-may-ro  ;  4  say-n'yo-rah  ;  5  say-goo-ro. 

'ADJECTIVES  are  always  followed  by  a  Noun,  and  take  the  Gender 
and  Number  of  that  Noun.  PRONOUNS  are  used  instead  of  a  Noun, 
and  take  the  Gender  and  Number  of  that  Noun. 


II 

PRESENT  AND  PAST  PARTICIPLES. 

31.    The  Participles    are  formed  bj  adding  to  the  STEM  the 
following  terminations : 

PRESENT  PARTICIPLE.  PAST  PARTICIPLE. 
Verbs  ending  in  ar               ...ANDO  —ADO 

erorir      ...IENDO  ...IDO 

EXAMPLES. 

1  speaking,  hablando  ;  spoken,  hablado ; 

2  owing,  debiendo  ;  owed,  debido  ; 

3  living,  viviendo  ;  lived,  vivido  ; 

4  sending,  enviando ;  sent,  enviado  ; 

5  receiving,  recibiendo  ;  received,  recibido  ; 

6  believing,  creyendo*  ;  believed,  creido. 

An  unaccented  i  between  two  vowels  is  always  changed  toy. 
The  Stress  in  Past  Participles  is  invariably  on  the  first  vowel  < 
termination 

PRON.  1  ah-blahn-do,  ah-blah-do ;    2  day-be-en-do,  day-' 
3.  vee-ve-en-do,  ve-vee-do  ;  4  en-ve-ahn-do,  en-ve-ah-do  ;  5  rray 
be-en-do,  rray-the-bee-do  ;  6  kray-yen-do,  kray-ee-do.* 

The  Participles  of  tener,  haber,  ser,  and  estar  are  regular,^ 
1  having,  teniendo,  habiendo  ;  2  had,  tenido,  habid 
3  being,  siendo,  estando  ;  4  been,  sido,  estado-^ 

PBOK.  1    tay-ne-en-do,  ab-be-en-do  ;      2  tay-nee-do,    ah-tp 
3  se-en-do,  es-tafcn-do ;    4  see-do,  es-tah-do. 


32.    When  the  Subject  in  questions  is  a  Noun,  it  is  ft      buaes 

put  last  ;  as, 

Is  the  girl  industrious  ?  i  Es  aplicada  la  muchachs 
Is  my  servant  waiting  ?  i  Esta  agruardando  mi  cfl 
Are  not  the  men  drinking  ?  i  No  estan  bebiendo  lo  ^pbbrtft  ? 
Is  that  wine  good  ?  i  Es  bueno  ese  vino  ? 

(see  also  Paragraph  13) 

This  is  optional,  the  English  construction  being  preferable  when  the 
meaning  would  otherwise  be  doubtful.  Thus  :  Is  the  boy  ill-treating  the 
dog  ?  i  Esta  el  muchacfco  maltratando  el  perro  ?  The  other  con* 
ftiuotion  might  mean  '« Is  the  dog  ill-treating  the  boy  V9 


ft 

EXERCISE  II. 

1.  smoking,  smoked  ;  2.  owing,  owed  ;  3.  living,  lived  ; 
4.  asking,1  asked  ;  5.  reading2,  read  ;  6.  have  you  not  had  ? 
7. 1  am  not  having  ;  8.  being  soldiers ;  9.  being  in  the  room8  ; 
10.  not  having  written  the  letter ;  11.  Have  you  been  in 
Spain4  ?  12.  We  have  not  been  sailors.  13.  She  is  not 
reading.  14.  What  is  he  drinking  ?  15.  Where  has  the  man 
been  ?  16.  Are  not  the  English  soldiers  brave  ?  17.  Is  not 
this  lady  speaking  ?  18.  My  uncle  has  not  arrived.5 

1  preguntar  ;   2  leer  ;   3  cuarto  or  babitucion  ;  4  Espana  ;  6  llegar. 
PBON.  1  pray-goonn-tar  ;  2  lay-air  ;  3  koo'ar-to,  ah-be-tah-the-on ; 

4  ess-palm-n'yah  ;    5  1'yay-gar. 

COLLECTIVE   EXERCISE. 

1.  Have  you  not  read  that  letter  ?  2.  Why  is  that  boy  not 
studying  his  lessons  ?  3  Those  servants  have  drunk  a  bottle1 
of  good  wine,  and  five2  bottles  of  German  beer.  4.  Are 
they  smoking  cigars  ?  5.  Having  read  the  book,  I3  shall  send 
it*  to  my  brother.  6.  When4  does  the  boat5  start  ?  7.  How 
much  money  has  the  merchant6  sent  to  his  banker7  ?  8. 
Have  not  the  pupils  learned  these  lessons  ?  9.  These  white8 
envelopes  are  my  uncle's  [translate  :  of  my  uncle].  10. 
Those  ladies  are  my  nieces.9  11.  The  Spanish  professor  is 
speaking  now.10  12.  I  am  reading  a  French  newspaper.11  13. 
We  have  been  in  the  country.12  14.  These  bottles1  are  not 
full.18  15.  I  have  been  [a]  carpenter.14  16.  Have  you  had 
time15  to16  read16  this  letter  ?  17.  Have  you  forgotten17  this  ? 
18.  Are  those  ladies  looking  for  a  cab18  ?  19.  Do  you  believe 
that  ?  20.  I  do  not  understand  this.  21.  Not  being  satisfied1* 
with  the  book,  I20  shall  sell  it.20  22.  Is  not  that  dog  ugly21  ? 

1  botella  ;    2  cinco  ;    3  lo  enviare*  (see  pars.  43  and  67)  ;    4  cuando  ? 

5  buque  ;  6  comerciante  ;    7  banquero  ;  8  bianco  ;   9  sobrina  ;    10  ahora  ; 
11  periddico  ;    12  campo  ;  13  lleno  ;   14  carpintero ;   15  tiempo  ;    16  para 
leer*;     17  olvidar  ;     18  cocbe  ;  19  satisfecho  ;     20  lo  vender^  ;  21  feo. 

PEON.  1  bo- tell -yah  ;  2  thin-ko ;  3  lo  en-ve-ah-ray ;  4  koo'ahn-do ; 
5  boo-kay  ;  6  ko-mair-the-ahn-tay  ;  7  bahn-kay-ro  ;  8  blahn-ko ;  9  so- 
bree-nab  ;  10  ab-o-rab  ;  11  pay-re-o-de-ko  ;  12  kahm-po  ;  13  Pyay-no  ; 
14  kar-pin-tay-ro ;  15  te-em-po ;  17  ol-re-dar ;  18  ko*chay ;  19  sab-tig- 
fay-cho ;  20  to  ven-Hay-ray ;  21  fay-o. 


so 

SEVENTH  LESSON. 


INTERROGATIVE  ADJECTIVES  AND  PRONOUNS. 

33.    who  ?  whom  ?  quien  ?  (SING.)  qui^nes  ?  (PLUR.) 

WHOSE  ?    I  de  quien  ?  literally  :  of  whom  ? 

Who  is  upstairs  ?  ^  Quien  esta  arriba  ? 

To  whom  are  you  speaking  ?  ^  A  quien  esta  Vd.  hablando  ? 

Whose  are  these  pens  1  i  De  quien  son  estas  plumas  ? 

Whose  hat  is  this  ?  ^  De  quien  es  este  sombrero  ? 


34.  which  or  which  one  ?  cudl  ?  which  or  which  ones  ? 

what  ?  que  ?  (SING.  &  PLUR.) 

which  brother  ?  £  cual  hermano  ?      which  house  ?  £  cual  casa  ? 
which  men  ?  £  cuales  hombres  ?       which  chairs  ?  i  cuales  sillas  ? 
what  dog  ?  i  que  perro  ?  what  village  ?  £  que  aldea  ? 

what  churches  ?  i  que  iglesias  ?    which  churches  !  i  cuales  iglesias  ? 
what  is  that  ?  i  que  es  eso  ? 

WHAT  ?  is  translated  by  cudl  ?  cudles  ?  if  preceding  part  of  ser 

followed  by  a  Noun. 

What  is  your  opinion  ?  i  Cual  es  su  opinion  (de  Vd.)  ? 

What  are  his  intentions  ?  i  Cuales  son  sus  intenciones  ? 

35.  que  is  also  used  for  WHAT  A  !  in  exclamations  ;  as, 
what  a  misfortune  \  \  que  desgracia  I    what  a  hat  !  \  que  sombrero  ! 
what  pictures  I  j  qu6  cuadros  !  what  a  mistake  !  \  que  error  ! 

KoTE.  —  If  an  Adjective  occurs  in  such  exclamat  ions,  tan  (so)  is  generally 
inserted  for  emphasis  ;  as, 

what  an  ugly  dog  !  |  quo"  perro  tan  feo  (=so  ugly)  ! 

what  beautiful  horses  I     j  que  caballos  tan  hermosos  f 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  which  gentleman  ?  2.  which  gentlemen  ?  3.  which 
chair  ?  4.  which  streets  ?  5.  what  name  ?  6.  which  shoe  ? 
7.  what  men  ?  8.  what  a  noise1  !  9.  which  train  ?  10. 
what  a  fog2  !  11.  what  a  pity3  !  12.  which  woman  ? 
13.  which  days  ?  14.  which  lamps4  ?  15.  which  cup5  ? 
16.  what  hats  !  1  7.  Whose  is  this  knife6  ?  18.  Whose  ink 


is  this  ?  19%  Whose  friends  are  these  ladies  ?  20.  Whose  is 
this  ?  21.  What  idle7  boys !  22.  What  a  great  mistake8 ! 
23.  What  is  the  price9  of  this  ?  24.  What  is  the  number10  ? 

1  ruido  ;  2  niebla  ;  3  lastima  ;  4  lampara  ;  5  taza  ;  6  cuchillo  ;  7  hol- 
gazan  ;  8  error  ;  9  precio  ;  10  numero.  PRON.  1  rroo-ee-do  ;  2  ne-ay-blah  ; 
3  lahss-te-mah  ;  4  lahm-pah-rah  ;  5  tah-thah  ;  6  koo-chee-l'yo  ; 
7  oll-gah-thahn  ;  8  airr-ror ;  -9  pray-the-o  ;  10  noo-may-ro. 


36.  The  Past  Tense  can  sometimes  be  rendered  in  Spanish  by 
the  Perfect  Tense,*  thus  : 

PAST.  PERFECT, 

he  spoke  he  has  spoken  ha  hablado 

did  hq  speak  ?          has  he  spoken  ?  i  ha  hablado  (el)  ? 

he  did  not  speak      he  has  not  spoken       no  ha  hablado 
did  he  not  speak  ?    has  he  not  spoken  1    i  no  ha  hablado  (el)  ? 
[NOTE  CAREFULLY  that  the  Past  Participle  must  be  preceded  by  part  of 
haber  (to  have).    For  instance,  Vd.  visto,  yo  escrito,  etc.,  is  an  incorrect 
construction,  just  as  'you  seen,1  'I  written,'  etc.,  is  impossible  ill  English.] 

EXERCISE  II. 

1.  he  (has)  bought ;  2.  have  they  bought  ?  3. 1  have  not 
bought ;  4.  have  you  not  bought  ?  5.  have  they  (FEM.) 
spoken  ?  6.  the  girl  has  spoken  ;  7.  has  the  doctor2  written1? 
8.  the  merchant  has  not  sold3 ;  9.  have  not  the  ships  arrived  ? 
10. 1  have  not  dined  (Beaten)  ;  11.  has  not  the  shopkeeper 
sent  ?  12.  you  have  written1 ;  13.  you  (PhUR.)  have  seen4 ;  14. 
have  they  not  found  ? 

1  escrito  ;   2  m<Sdico  ;   3  to  sell,  vender  ;  4  visto. 
PRON.  1  ess-kree-to  ;    2  may-de-ko  ;    3  ven-dair ;    4  viss-to. 

37.  When  the  Object  of  a  Verb  is  a  person  or  persons,  &  (to) 
should  precede  the  Object ;  as, 


I  do  not  understand  your  friend. 
Do  you  believe  the  boys  ? 
BUT :  I  do  not  understand  this  letter. 
Do  you  believe  that  story  ? 


No  comprendo  4  sn  amigo. 
I  Cree  Vd.  a  los  nnichachos  ? 
No  comprendo  esta  carta. 
I  Cree  vd.  ese  cuento  ? 


Tener  is  an  important  exception  to  this  Rule,  thus  : 
I  have  a  sister. Tengo  una  hermana. 

*  The  ordinary  English  Past  Tense  (I  spoke,  he  wrote,  we  did  not  lend, 
etc.)  is  usually  best  rendered  by  the  Spanish  Past  Definite.  The  formation 
of  the  Past  Definite  is  explained  in  Lesson  9  ;  student*  may  meanwhile 
translate  the  English  Past  by  the  Spanish  Perfect  Tense, 


EXERCISE  HI. 

1.  We  have  seen  a  very  celebrated1  general.2  2.  Have 
you  (PLUR.)  found  your  friends  ?  3.  Has  he  [any]  brothers  ? 
4.  I'have  seen  that  gentleman  in  Madrid.  5.  Do  you  expect3 
your  nieces  to-day4  ?  6/We  do  not  expect?  [any]  letters. 
7.  We  are  looking5  for5  our  keys.6  8.  Are  you  looking5  for5 
your  nephew7  ?  0.  i  have  not  seen  theb  kingb<fe>-day.a 

1  cdlebrc  ;  2  genera!  ;  3  esperar  ;  4  boy  ;  5  buscar  (to  seek,  look  for) ; 
C  Have  (FEM.)  ;  7  sobrino: 

PRON.  1  thay-lay.bray  ;  2  //ay-nay-rahl ;  3  Css-pay-rar  ;  4  oh-e  ; 
0  booss-kar  ;  C  i'yah-vay  ;  7  so-bree-no. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. 

1.  Have  you  found  my  brother  in  the  garden  ?    2.  Which 
book  have  you  had  ?  3.  Whose  is  thai  horse  ?    4.  What  man 
does  not  love1  his  mother?  .  5.  Whose  is  this  umbrella  ?     6. 
Have  you  (PLUR.)  seen  the  English  travellers2  ?    7.  What  a 
cheap  watch3  youb  have51  bought*  this  morning4 !     8.  The 
clerk5  has  received  that  money.  9.  Who  is  smoking  in  this 
room?  10.Hehasnotsentthegoods$in(=:to)time.7  11. "What 
easy  lessons  youb  havea  !      12.  For  whom  are  these  letters  ? 
13.  To  whom  have  you  lent  your  knife  ?   14.  Who  are  these 
men  ?  15.  What  people8  are9  there9  in  the  house  ?  1C.  Have 
you  not  called  the  servant  (FEM.)  ?   17.  Which  cups  has  she 
broken  ?  18.  In  which  room  have  you  found  the  red10  ink  ? 
19.  What  a  b'ad  pen  this5  isa!      20v\Vhich  [ones]  do  you 
want?     21.  Which   is  the  "way11  'to  the  station12?      22. 
What  is  the  cause13  of  his  silence14  ?  123.  What  are  their 
plans15  ?     24.  What  is  (hat  ? __ 

1  amar ;  2  viajcro  ;  3  reloj ,  4  maftana  ;  f>  depcndientc  ;  6  gcneros 
(PLUR.)  ;  7  tiempo  ;  8  gente  (FEM.)  ;  0  hay  ,  10  rojo  ;  11  camino  ; 
12  cstaci6n  ;  13  causa;  14  silencio  ;  15  plan. 

PRON.  1  ah-mar;  2  ve-ah-7/ay-ro,  3rray-lo//;  4  mah-n'yah-nah  ; 
5  de-penn-dc-enn-tay ;  C  //ay-nay-ros ;  7  te-em-po  ;  8  /fenn-tay  ; 
9  ah'e  or  i ;  10  rro-//o  ;  11  kah-mee-no  ;  12  es-tah-the-on ;  13  kafc'oo- 
aab ;  H  se-lenu-the-o ;  15  piabu. 


33 
EIGHTH    LESSON. 

POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS. 

38.    mine,  mio  ;      ours,  nuestro  ;    his,  hers,  theirs, 

FAMILIAR  FORM  :  2nd  Pers.  thine,  tuyo  ?  yours,  vuestro. 
The  Feminine  is  formed  by  changing  the  o  into  a,  and  the  Plural  by 
adding  3  to  the  Singular  (Ex.  mia,  mios,  mias,  suya,  snyos,  suyas,  etc.) 

PRON.  me-o,  noo'es-tro,  soo-yo.  too-yo,  vob'es-tro,  me-os,  me-ahs,  «tc. 


Your  sister  is  in  London,  and 
mine  is  in  the  country. 

His  friends  are  English,  and 
ours  are  Americans. 


Su  hermana  de  Vd.  esta  en  Londres, 
y  la  mia  esta  en  el  campo. 

Los  amigos  de  el  son  ingleses,  y  los 
nuestros  son  americanos. 


These  words  are  preceded  by  the  Definite  Article,  except  when 
used  with  ser,  in  a  phrase  meaning  TO  BELONG  TO. 

This  pipe  is  not  his  ;  it  is  mine.  Esta  pipa  no  es  de  el  (or  suya),*  es  mia. 
Those  pictures  are  not  ours.       Esos  cuadros  no  son  nuestros. 
This  trunk  is  mine.  Este  baiil  es  mio  5  BUT. 

Here  is  your  trunk  ;  where  is       Aqui  est&  su  baiil ;  i  donde  est& 

mine  ?  el  mio  ? 

Mine  (FEM.)  is  on  the  table.       La  mia  esta  sobre  la  mesa. 

NOTE  that  Possessive'  Pronouns  take  the  Gender  and  Number  of  the 
Noun  they  stand  for,  NOT  the  Gender  and  Number  of  the  Possessor. 

*  de  el,  de  ella,  etc.,  being  clearer,  are  preferable  to  suyo,  suya. 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  This  stick  is  not  mine.  2.  Is  that  house  his  ?  3.  These 
letters  are  ours.  4.  Your  pupils  are  industrious,  and  mine 
are  idle.  5.  These  pencils  are  hers.  6.  Our  friend  (F.)  is 
here,  but  hers  has  not  arrived  yet.  7.  That  key  is  mine. 
8.  Our  lessons  are  difficult,  but  theirs  are  very  easy. 


39.  If  any  emphasis  is  placed  on  the  Possessive  Adjectives  (see 
par.  14),  mio,  SUyo,  etc,  are  used  instead,  after  the  Noun  : 

It  is  not  HIS  mistake!  J     No  es  error  suyo. 

It  is  OUR  fault.  |     Es  culpa  nuestra. 

40.  The  phrases  '  of  mine,  of  ours,  of  his/  etc.  are  also  usually 
translated  mio,  nuestro,  SUyO,  etc.  ;  as, 

a  relation  of  mine  I     un  pariente  mio 

two  friends  of  bis  \     dos  amigos  suyoo 


u 

41.    YOURS  (polite  forin)  is  translated  suyo,  or  (preferably)  el 
de  Vd.,  la  de  Vds.,  etc.    Examples : 


He  Has  brought  my  letters,  but  he 

has  forgotten  yours. 
Is  this  cab  ours,  or  yours  (plur.)  ? 

'This  hat  is  .yours. 

Are  not  those  cigars  yours  ? 


Ha  traido  mis  cartas,pero  ha 

olvidado  las  de  Vd. 
I  Es  este  coche  nuestro,  6  de 

Vds.? 

Este  sombrero  es  de  Vd.* 
i  No  son  de  Vd.  esos  oigarros  ? 


42.*   De  Vd.,  de  61,  de  ella,  etc.,  are  usually  employed  in 
preference  to  suyo,  suya,  suyos,  suyas,  for  greater 
clearness, 
my  gloves,  his  and  hers,  mis  guantes,  los  suyos  y  los  de  ella. 

*Este  sombrero  es  el  de  Vd.  would  mean  *  This  hat  is  THE  ONE  WHICH 
belongs  to  you  *  (in  contradistinction  to  another  that  does  not). 

The  phrases  el  de  Vd.,  la  de  ella,  etc.,  must  be  employed 
in  such  phrases  as  the  following  : 

my  house  or  my  father's  mi  casa  6  la  de  mi  padre       [amigos 

our'horses  and  our  friends*          nuestros  caballos  y  los  de  nuestros 
neither  his  mistake  nor  his  servant's     ni  su  error  ni  el  de  su  criado 

EXERCISE  II. 

1.  my  oak1  and  mahogany2  tables  ;  2.  my  dear3  mother  ; 
3.  an  aunt  of  his  ;  4.  my  wishes,  hers,  and  theirs  ;  5.  This  is 
HEE  work  (=  a  work  of-hers).  6.  He  is  a  clerk  of -mine.  7. 
Is  this  garden  yours  (PLUR.)  ?  8.  Those  keys  are  not  yours, 
they  are  mine.  9.  Is  this  newspaper  yours  ?  10.  They  are 
frien'ds  of -ours,  11.  That  is  not  MY  mistake  ;  it  is  hers- 
12.  Neither4  hi$  shop  nor5  his  neighbour's6  is  open.7 

f  roble  ,    2  caoba  (translate :  tables  of  oak  and  the  of  mahogany)  ,  3 
querido  (beloved)'',  4  m  ;  5  ni ,  6  vecino  ,  7  abierto  (translate  :  are  open). 

^  PEON.  1  rro-blay ';  2  kab-o-bab  ;  3  kay-ree-dp  ,  4,  5  ne  ;  6  vay-thee- 
QO  '  1  ah-be-air-to. 

THE  FUTURE  TENSE. 

43.    The  Future  Tense  of  all  Regular  Verbs  is  formed  by  adding 

to  the  Infinitive  the  following  terminations : 
SING.— 1st  Pers.  2ndPers.  3rd  Pers.     PLUE.— 1st  Pers.  2nd  Pers.  3rd  Pers. 

E  4s         A  EMOS      eis       AN 

These  terminations  ace  the  same  as  those  of  the  Present  Tense  of  haber. 


S5 


The  full  conjugations  are  therefore  as  follow  : 

hablare 
hablara 


hablaremos 
hablaran 


—  «   debere 
debera 


73  JJ 

"*  o 


deberemos 
deberan 


5  *.  vivira 
10  £  viviremos 
l~'~  viviran 


I  shall  speak 
h«  will      „ 
we  shall    „ 
they  will  ,, 

PEON,  ah-blah-ray,  ah-blah-rab,  ah-blah-ray-mos,  ah-blah-ralm ; 
day-bay-ray,  etc, ;    ve-ve-ray,  etc. 

Fam.  Forms  :  hablaras,  hablardis  ;  deberas,  debereis  ;  viviras,  vivirdis. 

44.  The  Future  Tense  of  tener  is  formed  by  adding  these 
terminations  to  tendr...,  and  of  haber  by  adding  them  to 
habr... 

The  Future  Tenses  of  ser  and  estar  are  REGULAR. 
The  full  conjugations  are  as  follow  : 


I  shall  be  sere        estare 
he  will   „  sera        estara 
we  shall  „  seremos  estaromos 
they  will  ,v  seran      estaran 


I  shall  have  tendre  ~      habre 
he  will     „    tendra         habra 
we  shall    „    tendremos  habremos 
they  will  „    tendran       habran 

PRON.  ten-dray,  etc. ;  ah-bray,  etc. ;  say-ray,  etc. ;  es-tah-ray,  etc. 
F.  Form  :  tendras,  tendr^is  ;  habras,  habr^is  ;  seras,  sereis  ;  estaras,  estar^is. 

EXERCISE    III. 

1.  estaremos  ;  2.  i  no  tendra  (el)  ?  3.  ^  hablaran  Vds.  ?  4.  no 
recibire  ;  5.  Vd.  no  bebera  ;  6.  <j  hallara  (ella)  ?  7.  escribiran. 

8.  shall  I  take  ?  9.  you  will  not  have  (tener)  ;  10.  will 
they  be  (ser)  ?  11.  We  shall  not  be  (estar)  ;  12.  he  will 
divide  ;  13.  you  will  not  have  sold  ;  14.  they  will  smoke  ; 
15,  shall  we  have  sent  ?  16.  shall  I  have  (tener)  ? 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. 

1.  The  professor  has  corrected1  my  exercises,2  but  not 
yours.  2.  Where  shall  you  be  to-morrow3  ?  3.  My  friend 
will  be  [a]  doctor.  4.  I  shall  not  have  enough4  money.  5. 
We  shall  speak  to  your  father.  6.  How  much  will  you 
receive  ?  7.  My  friend  has  sold  his  house,  and  his  son's5 ;  he 
will  now6  live  in  mine.  8.  I  shall  buy  a  table  and  six7 
chairs.  9.  That  mistake  will  be  very  serious.8  10.  They 
will  break  that  window*9  11.  I  shall  not  buy  this  house.  12 
I  shall  have  sent  his  orders10  and  his  neighbours'.  13.  His 
sister  has  found  her  gold11  and  her  silver12  rings.13  14.  Here 


Is  my  stick  f  where  is  yours  ?  15.  We  have  seen  our  mother 
and  his,  but  not  hers.    16.  It  will  be  his  fault,14  not  yours. 

17.  Why  have  you  brought16  your  umbrella,  and  not  mine  ? 

18.  We  shall  keep16  this  watch,  and  .(shall)  sell  the  other.17 

1  corregir ;  2  tema(MASC.)  ;  3  mafiana  ;  4  bastante  ;  5  hijo  ;  6  ahora  ; 
7  seis  ;  8  grave  ;  9  ventana  ;  10  pedido  ;  11  oro  ;  12  plata ;  13  sortija  ; 
14  falta  i  15  traido  ;  16  guardar  ,  17  otro. 

PEON.  1  kor-rray-#eer  ;  2  tay-mah  ;  3  mah-n'yah-nah  ;  4  bahs- 
tahn-tay  ,  5  ee-Ho ;  6  ah-o-rah  \  7  say-iss ;  S  grah-vay  ;  9  ven-tah- 
nah  ;  10  pay -dee -do  ;  11  o-ro  ;  12  plah-lab  ;  13.sor-tee-£fab  ;  14 
fahl-tah;  16  trah-ee-do  ;  16  goo'ar-dari  17o-tro. 


NINTH    LESSON. 

COMPARISON  OP  ADJECTIVES. 
more,  m6s  ;       less,  menos;        than,  que. 

PEON,  mahss,  may-nos,  kay. 
EXAMPLES. 


I  Es  el  Zar  mas  poderoso  que 
el  emperador  aleman  ? 

Estas  fiores  son  menos  hermo- 
sas  que  las  otras. 


IB   the    Czar  more  powerful  than 

the  German  Emperor  ? 
These  flowers  are  less  beautiful  than 

the  others. 

The  Comparative  is  always  formed  vith  mds,  thus  : 

She  is  worse  (i.e  more  ill)  to-day. 
The  climate  of  Norway  is  colder  than 
the  climate  of  England. 


Esta  hoy  mas  enferma. 
El  clima  de  Nornega  es  mas  frio 
que  el  clima  de  Inglaterra. 


THAN'IS  translated  by  de  before  a  Number,  and  by  de  lO 
before  a  Verb.     Examples  : 

I  have  more  than  ten  pounds.      Tengq  mas  de  diez  libras. 

His  trunk  is  heavier  thaif  he  says.  Su  baul  es  mas  pesado  de  lo  qne  dice. 

46.    The  following  Comparatives  are  irregular : 


great,  grande  greaterj  mayor 
small,  pequeno  smaller,  menor 
good,  bneno  better,  mejor 


bad,  malo  worse,  peer 

high,  tall,  alto        higher,  superior 
low,  short,  bajo      lower,  inferior 


These  words  can  also  be  compared  regularly  (mas  grande,  etc.)  ;  but 
mas  bueno  and  maB  malo  are  hardly  ever  employed. 

PEON,  grahn-day,  mah-yor  ;   pay-kay-n'yo,  may-nor ;     bcx/ay-no^ 
;  mali-lo,  pay -or ;  abl»to,  soo-pay-re-or ;  bah-JSTo,  in-fay-re-or 


87 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  The  coffee1  is  colder  than  the  tea.2  2.  That  man  is 
stronger8  than  you.  3.  The  apples4  are  not  riper6  than  the 
pears6.  4.  This  water  is  not  colder  than  the  other.  5. 
London  is  larger  than  Paris.7  6.  Is  not  the  city  of  Madrid 
smaller  than  Paris  ?  7.  This  beer  is  very  good,  but  the  wine 
is  better.  8.  I  shall  not  receive  less  than  five  shillings, 
9.  This  house  is  cheaper  than  you  believe. 

1  cafe"  ;   2  te  ;  3  fuerte  :  4  manzana  ;  5  raaduro  ;    6  pera  ;  7  Paris. 
PRON.  1  kah-fay  ;  2  tay  ;  3  foo'air-tay  ;  4  mahn-thah-nah  ;  5  man- 
dOO-ro  ;  6  pay-rah  ;   7  pah-riss. 

47.  The  Superlative  is  the  same  as  the  Comparative,  but  the 
former  is  always  preceded  by  "  THE  "  ;  as, 

His  exercise  is  the  worst.  Su  tema  es  el  peor. 

The  largest  towns  of  France.  Las  ciudades  m£s  grandes  de  Francia 

They  are  the  least  clever  of  Son  los  menos  habiles  de  mis  disci- 

my  pupils.  pulos. 

48.  When  MOST  means  VERY,  EXTREMELY,*  it  is  generally 
translated  muy. 

NOTE. — A  more  emphatic  way  is  to  add  isimo  (-ma,  -mos,  -mas)  to 
the  Adjective,  omitting  final  vowels  (see  par.  157),  thus  : 

They  are  most  polite.        Son  muy  corteses  or  Son  cortesisimos 
She  is  most  diligent.          Es  muy  aplicada  or  Es  aplicadiaima 
*  *.e.,  when  it  is  not  used  in  a  Comparison. 

EXERCISE  II. 
1.  He  is  the  idlest  of  your  servants.  2.  It  is  most  difficult 

3.  That  picture  is  the  most  beautiful  in1  the  collection.* 

4.  This  water  is  the  clearest.3    5.  These  windows  are  the 
smallest.     6.  The  smallest  mistake  has  at  times4  most  serious 
consequences5.     7.  Our  house  is  the  most  convenient. 

1  IN  after  a  Superlative  is  de  :  2  coleccio'n  ;  3  claro  ;  4  vez  ;  5  consecuencia. 
2  ko-lek-the-on  ;  3  klah-ro  ;  4  veth  ;  5  kon-say-koo'en-the-fih. 


49.    as...as,  tan...como;    as  much.. .as,  tanto...como. 

PRON.  tahn,  ko-mo  ;  tahn-to,  ko-mo. 

REMARK  I. — tan  is  invariable,  and  is  used  before  Adjectives  and  Ad- 
verbs ;  tanto  takes  the  Gender  and  Number  of  the  following  Noun. 


3$ 

REMARK  II.— When  following  a  NEGATION,  the  first  AS  is  generally 
changed  to  SO  in  English  ;  but  the  Spanish  is  the  same.  The  Plural  of 
MUCH  is  MANY.  Examples  : 

She  is  as  diligent  as  you.  Es  tan  aplicada  como  Vd. 

They  arc  not  so  good  as  his.  No  son  tan  buenos  como  los  de  el. 

I  eat  as  much  meat  as  you.  Como  tanta  carne  como  Vd. 

You  have  not  found  so  many  Vd.  no  ha  hallado  tantos  nombres 
names  as  your  sister.  como  su  hermana. 

EXERCISE   III. 

1.  Have  you  received  as  much,  money  to-clay  as  yesterday? 
2.  Your  son  is  as  clever  as  [he  is]  industrious.  3.  These 
chairs  are  as  cheap  as  those.  4.  Have  y £nl  as  many  pens  as 
I  [have]  ?  5.  This  lady  is  not  so  tall  as  you.  6.  He  has  brought 
as  many  presents1  as  she  [has].  7.  We  have  not  bought  so 
much  furniture2  as  you. 

1  regalo  ;.  2  rauebles  (PLUR.).      PRON.  1  rray-gah-lo  ;  2-mbo' ay-bless. 


50.    THE  PAST  DEFINITE  is  formed  by  adding  to  the  STEM 
,the  following  terminations : 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

Verbs  ending  in  AR  :      6     aste      6      amOS    asteis    aron 
„     ER  or  IR  :  i     iste     16    imos    isteis    ieron 


The  full  conjugation  is  as  follows  : 


I    apoke  hable 

he      „  hab!6 

we     „  hablamos 

they  „  hablaron 


I    owed  debi 

ne      „  debio 

we     „  debimos 

they  „  debieron 


I     lived  vivi 

he      „  vivi6 

we     „  vivimos 

they  „  vivieron 


PRON.  ah-blay,  ah-blo,  ah-blah-mos,  ah-blah-ron ;    day-bee,  day- 
be-o,  day-bee-mos,  day-be-ay-ron  ;    ve-vee,  etc. 
Fam.  Forms  :  hablaste,  hablasteis  ;  debiste,  debisteis  ;  viriste,  vi?isteis. 

51.  The  Past  Definite  Stem  of  tener  is  tUV. .  .,  that  of  haber 
is  hub...,  and  that  of  estar  is  estuv... 

52.  Whenever  the  STEM  of  the  PAST  DEFINITE  is  irregular,  the 
Singular  terminations  are  the  same  as  those  of  the  ar  Verbs/ 
and  the  Plural  terminations  the  same  as  those  of  the  er  and 
ir  Verbs.    The  STRESS  in  the  Singular,  however,  is  regular. 

'Except  the  Familiar  Form,  where  the  Termination  is  iste,  not  aste. 


Ser  is  quite  irregular  (see  last  column  of  table). 
The  full  conjugations  are  as  follow  : 


I     had  tuve         hube 

he     „  tuvo         hubo 

we     „  tuvimos   hubimos 

they  „  fcuvieron  hubieron 


I      was  cstuve  fui 

he     „  estuvp  fue 

we  were  estuvimos  fuimos 

they  „  estuvieron  fueron 


PEON,  too-vay,  too-vo,  too-vee-mos,  too-ve-ay-ron  ;    oo-bay,  etc. ; 
es-too-vay,  etc. ;    foo'ee,  foo'ay,  foo-ee-mos,  foo-ay-ron. 

Fam.  Forms  :  tuviste,  tuvisteis  ;  hubiste,  hubisteis  ;  estuviste,  estuvisteis  ; 
fuiste,  fuisteis. 

EXERCISE  IV.  (on  the-PAST  DEFINITE*). 
1.  I  sold ;  2.  did  they  buy  ?  3.  you  (PLUR.)  received  ;  4. 
did  she  not  arrive  ?  5.  they  had  not  (tener)  ;  6.  was  he 
(estar)  ?  7-  did  we  fear  ?  8.  I  smoked  ;  9.  we  did  not  find  ; 
10.  you  were  not  (ser)  ;  11.  did  you  send  ?  12.  had  I  not 
(haber)  ?  13.  we  wrote  ;  14.  you  (PLUR.)  had  not 
learned  ;  15.  were  they  not  in  the  room  ? 

*  This  Tense  is  used  in  speaking  of  an  event  entirely  past.  The  Perfect 
Tense  (see  par.  36)  can  be  employed  instead,  as  in  English,  if  a  recent  past 
is  referred  to.  Thus :  I  (have)  received  your  letter  this  morning  ; 

Recibi  (orHerecibido)su  carta  esta  maiiana- 


TENTH   LESSON. 

RELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

Relative  Pronouns  relate  or  refer  to  a  preceding  word  or  sentence. 
In  Spanish,  they  are  the  same  as  thfe  Interrogative  Pronouns  (see  Para- 
graphs 33, 34),  except  that  the  Relative  Pronoun  cual,  cuales  is  preceded 
by  the  Definite  Article,  and  that  *  WHOSE/  when  Relative,  is  usually 
translated  cuyo  (koo-yo),  enya,  cuyos,  ciiyas,  instead  of  de  quien. 
the  gentleman  whose  bouse  is  there  el  senor  cuya  casa  esta  alii 

63.    WHO,  WHICH,  THAT  (relative)  are  generally  translated  que. 


the  man  who  has  done  this 
the  girls  who  are  downstairs 
the  houses  which  they  built 
the  money  that  the  child  has  lost 


el  hombre  que  ha  hecho  esto 
las  muchachas  que  estanabajo 
las  casas  que  edificaron 
el  dinero  que  el  nino  ha  perdido 


Paragraphs  54  and  55  show  when  que  is  NOT  employed. 


40 

64.  WHOM  after  a  Preposition  is  translated  qtlien,  quiene&;  as, 


the  person  of  whom  you  spoke 

the  gentleman  with  whom  we  dined 

the  lawyer  whom  I  shall  consult 


la  persona  de  quien  Vd.  hablo 
el  senor  con  quien  comimos 
el  abogado  a  quien  consultare 


WHO  is  translated  quien,  quienes  after  part  of  'TO  BE' 
and  a  Noun  or  Pronoun  ;  as, 

I  Es  el  quien  ha  hecho  el  error  ? 


Is  it  he  who  has  made  the  mistake  ? 
It  is  this  workman  who  smokes. 
It  ia  we  who  have  spoken  to  the 
banker. 


Es  este  obrero  quien  fuma. 
Somos*  nosotros  quienes  ne- 
mos hablado  al  banquero. 


*Note  that  ser  takes  the  same  Number  and  Person  as  its  SUBJECT. 

55,  WHO  and  WHICH,  preceded  by  a  comma,*  are  generally  trans- 

lated el  cual,  la  cual,  los  cuales,  las  cuales ;  as, 

Your  aunt,  who  was  here  yesterday,  I    Su  tia,  la   cual   estuvo   gqui 
will  return  to-morrow.  |       ayer,  volvera  mafiana. 

*i  e.,  when  the  Relative  Sentence  is  as  important  as  the  Principal  Sen- 
tence, not  subordinate  to  it. 

REMARK  I — If  cual  is  indirectly  Interrogative,  it  is  not  preceded  by 
the  Definite  Article ;  as, — He  does  not  know  which  of  the  two  I  shall 
choose,  No  sabe  cual  de  los  dos  eligire. 

REMARK  II.— WHICH  is  translated  lo  que  if  referring  to  a  preceding 
sentence  instead  of  to  a  word.  He  has  forgotten  the  pronunciation,  which 
is  not  very  surprising.  Ha  olvidado  la  pronunciaci6n,  lo  que 
no  es  muy  estrano. 

56.  The  Relative  Pronoun  can  NEVER  be  omitted  as  in  English : 

the  man  he  met  el  hombre  4  quien  encontro 

This  is  not  the  hat  I  bought.     Este  ho  es  el  sombrero  que  compre. 

The  Subject  in  Relative  Sentences  is  frequently  put  LAST,  if  the  trans- 
position does  not  make  the  meaning  doubtful  (see  par.  32)  as, 

the  windows  you  have  broken,      las  ventanas  que  ha  roto  Vd. 
the  goods  the  shopkeeper  sells      los  g6neros  que  vende  el  tendero 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  The  house  you  (PLUR.)  have  bought  is  more  convenient1 
than  mine.  2.  Is  this  the  captain2  whose  ship  you  have  seen  ? 
3.  The  gentleman  who  spoke  with  the  children  is  their 
uncle.  4.  We  are  not  sure  which  [ones]  he  will  keep.  5.  Tho 


41 

boy  we  saw  (translate  :  have  seen)  is  ill.  6.  Have  you  forgot- 
ten  the  name  of  the  gentleman  I  live  with  (=with  whom  I 
live)  ?  7.  He  has  read  the  letter  I  received,  which  is  a  pity. 
8.  The  horse  I  have  bought  is  not  very  strong.  9.  I  have 
brought  six  books,  which  I  shall  lend  this  evening3  to  your 
brother.  10.  No,  it  is  not  this  gentleman  who  is  smoking. 

1  convenient  ;    2  capitan  ;    3  tarde  (FEM.). 
PEON.  1  kon-vay-ne-en-tay  ;    2  kah-pe-tahn ;    3  tar-day. 


67.  The  IMPEBATIVE  MOOD  is  formed  by  adding  to  the  STEM  the 
following  terminations : 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

Verbs  ending  in  ar :  E  emos  EN 

„         „       erorir:      A  axnos          AN 

The  Imperative  (Familiar  Form  excepted)  can  therefore  be  formed  from 
the  Present  Indicative,  simply  by  REVERSING  THE  TERMINATIONS  ;  that 
is,  by  substituting  E  for  A  in  the  ar  Verbs,  and  A  for  E  in  the  others. 

The  following  are  the  full  conjugations  : 

let  us  speak  hablemos  I  let  us  owe  debamos  I  let  us  live  vivamos 

speak  hable  (s.),  hablen  (pi.)  |  owe  deba,  deban     |  live  viva,  vivan 

PRON,  ah-blay-mos,  ah-blay,  ah-blen  ;  day-bah-mos,  day-ban,  day* 
bahn  ;  vee-vah-mos,  vee-vab,  vee-vahn. 

Familiar  Forms  :  habla,  hablad  j  debe,  debed  ;  vive,  vivid. 

Vd.  is  generally  added  to  the  Polite  Form  of  the  Imperative  : 
Do  not  read  the  letters.  No  lea  las  cartas. 

Send  (PLUR.)  the  goods.  Manden  los  generos. 

more  elegantly,  no  lea  Vd.  las  cartas,  manden  Vds.  los  generos. 

68.  The  Imperatives  of  TO  HAVE  and  TO  BE  are  as  follow : 

tener.          haber.  ser.          estar. 


let  us  have    tengamos    hayamos 
have          Jtenga          haya 
(tengan        hayan 


let  us  be    seamos    estemos 
.  ( sea          est6 

( sean        esten 


PRON.  ten-gab,  etc.;  ah-yah,  etc.;  say -ah,  ete.;es-tay,  es-tay-mos,  es-ten^ 

Familiar  Forms  :  ten,  tened  ;  he\  habed  ;  s<5,  sed  ;  esta,  estad. 
59.    Such  phrases  as '  let  him  speak/  *  let  her  owe/ c  let  them  live/ 
are  usually  rendered  by  putting  que  before  the  3rd  Person  of 
the  Imperative,  thus : 

let  him  wait  que  espere  (61) 

let  them  send  the  wine  que  manden  el  vino 


When  LET  means  TO  ALLOW,  it  is  translated  by  dejar. 

Let  the  children  (=allow  them     |      Dejen  Vds.  &  los 
to)  play  in  th*.  room.  |         en  este  cuarto. 

EXERCISE  II. 

1.  Bebamos  agua.  2.  Venda  (Vd.)  su  caballo.  3.  No  aguar- 
dernos.  4.  No  compre  (Vd.)  estos  cigarros.  5.  No  guardemos 
estas  muestras.  6.  No  fumen  (Vds.)  todavia.  7.  Este  (Vd.)en 
tiempo.  8.  \  Tenga  (Vd.)  lastima  !  9.  Tome  (Vd.)  esta  silla. 

10.  Lend  your  umbrella  to  my  cousin.  11.  Let  the  boy 
speak  ==  allow  the  boy  to  speak.  12.  Let  us  dine  now.  13. 
Let  them  wait.  14.  Let  her  buy  the  dress.1  15.  Be  there 
this  evening.  16.  Send  the  parcels2  to  my  house.  17*  Have 
the  kindness3  to4  wait  a  little6. 

1  vestido  ;     2  paquete  ;     3  bondad  ;    4  de  ;     5  poco. 
PRON.  1  ves-tee-do  ;   2  pah-kay-tay  ;  3  bon-dahd  ;  4  day  ;   5  po-ko. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. 

1.  Take  the  umbrella  which  is  in  the  corner.1  2%  Do  not 
break  the  plates2  I  bought  yesterday.  3.  Do  not  forget 
(PL.)  to3  buy  [some]  tea,  coffee,  and  sugar.*  4.  Do  not  lend 
[any]  money  to  that  man.  5.  Let  us  eat  this  fruit.5  6.  Look6 
at6  those  shops.  7.  Do  not  break  that  glass.  8.  Do  not  let  us 
speak  to  that  man.  9.  The  person7  for  whom  he  works  is 
here.  10.  The  officers  you  (have)  found  downstairs8  will 
be  here  to-morrow.  11.  The  bread  you  ate  is  as  good  as  this. 
12.  They  have  not  received  the  newspapers  I  sent,  which  is 
very  strange.9  13.  Guess10  which  of  the  girls  is  the  best.  14. 

I  have  found  several11  important12  documents,13  which  I  shall 
send  to  our  lawyer.   15.  Do  not  answer14  (to)  that  question.16 
16.  Is  it  they  who  are  working  ?  17.  Do  not  be  so  impolite.1 

1  rinc6n  ;  2  plato  ;  3  de  ;  4  aziicar  ;  5  fruta  ;  6  mirar  ;  7  persona ; 
8  abajo  ;  9  estraiio  ;  10  adivinar  ;  11  varies  ;  12  importante  ;  18  docu» 
mento  ;  14  contestar  ;  15  pregunta  ;  16  descorte"s. 

PRON.  1  rrin-kon  ;  2  plah-to  ;  4  ah-thoo-kar  ;  5  froo-tah  ;  6  me* 
rar  ;  7  pair-SO-nah  ;  8  ah-bah-^o  ;  9  es-trah-n'yo  ;  10  ah -de  ve-nar  }• 

II  vah-re-os  ;  12  im-por-tahn-tay  ;  13  do-koo-mea-to ;  14  kon-tess-t&T  « 
15  pray-£00un-tah  ;   16  dess-kor-tess. 


41 

ELEVENTH    LESSON. 

REGULAR  VERBS— (continued.) 

The  six  remaining  Tenses  are  formed  according  to  this  simple  Rule  : 

60.  In  the  Imperfect,  the  Conditional,  and  the  four  Tenses  of  the 
Subjunctive,  the  Third  Person  Singular  is  like  the  First. 
The  remainder  of  the  Tense  can  always  be  formed  by  adding 
to  the  First  Person  Singular  the  following  terminations  : 

SING.— 1st  Pers.  2nd  Pers.  3rd  Pers.     PLUR.— 1st  Pers.  2nd  Fers.  3rd  Pers. 

—  s  MOS        is          N 

These  endings  are  the  same  as  in  the  PRESENT  TENSE. 

€5*  In  all  parts  of  the  Verb  except  the  three  Present  Tenses  (Indica- 
tive, Imperative,  and  Subjunctive)  the  STRESS  is  on  the 

FIRST  SYLLABLE  OF  THE  TERMINATION. 

61.  THE  IMPERFECT  TENSE  is  formed  by  adding  to  the  STEM 
the  following  terminations : 

Verbs  ending  in  ar  :  ABA  ;    Verbs  ending  in  er  or  ir :  iA* 

The  following  are  the  full  conjugations  t 
JL    j  was  speaking  or  used  to  speak  hablaba 

we  were        „  „          „    habldbamosJ 

they  were      „  „  „    hablaban 

I  was  owing  or  used  to  owe,  etc.,  debia,  debiamos,  debian 
I  was  living  or  used  to  live,  etc.,  vivia,  viviamos,  Vivian 

PRON.  ah-blah-bah,  ah-blah-bah-mos,  ah-blah-bahn ;   day-bee-ah, 
day-bee-ah-mos,  day-bee-ahn  ;    ve-vee-ah,  etc. 

Familiar  Forms :  hablabas,  hablabais :  debias,  debiais ;  vivias,  viviais. 

62.  The  Imperfect  of  SEE  is  era,  dramos,  eran. 

Fam.  Forms  :  eras,  erais.        PRON.  ay-rah,  ay-rah-mos,  ay-rahn. 

Tener,  haber  and  estar  are, regular  in  the  Imperfect,  thus : 
tenia,  etc. ;  habia,  etc. ;  estaba,  etc. 

63.  HAD,  WAS,  WERE  are  generally  rendered  by  the  Imperfect 
Tense;  as, 

he  had  forgotten,  habia  olvidado  ;       it  was  not  mine,  no  era  mio 
we  were  not  writing,  no  est&bamos  escribiendo,  or  no  escribiamos 


44 

EXERCISE  L  (on  the  IMPERFECT*), 
1.  yon  used  to  have  ;  2.  were  they  not  smoking  ?  3. 1 
used  not  to  divide ;  4.  was  she  eating  ?  5.  I  used  to  b© 
(S8r)  ;  6.  we  were  not  (estar)  ;  7.  had  you  (PLUR.)  not 
taken  ?  S.  used  you  not  to  smoke  ?  9.  we  used  not  to  be 
(ser)  ;  10.  had  he  dined  ?  11.  he  was  listening ;  12.  used 
you  to  read  ?  13.  we  were  working  ;  14.  were  they  not 
calling  ?  15.  They  were  friends  of  mine.  16.  He  hadn't 
time.  17.  We  had  forgotten  her  name. 

*The  Imperfect  Tense  is  used  in  referring  to  a  CONTINUOUS,  an  INCOM- 
PLETE, or  a  FREQUENTLY  REPEATED  past  action. 


64.  THE  CONDITIONAL  MOOD  is  formed  by  adding  ia  to  the 
STEM,  of  the  Future,  thus  : 

I  should  speak  I  T.Q^IQ^Q    I  we  should  speak    hablariamos 
he  would    „    l&aDiana  |  they  would   „      hablarian 
I  should  owe,  etc.,  deberia,  deberiamos,  deberian 
I  should  have,  etc.,  tendria,  etc. ;  habria,  etc. 
I  should  be,  etc.,  seria,  etc. ;  estaria,  etc. 

PBON  ah-blah-ree-ah,  ah-blah-ree-ab-mos,  ah-blah-ree-ahn  ;  day- 
bay-ree-ah,  etc. ;  ten-dree-ah,  etc. ,  ah-bree-ah,  etc. ;  say-ree-ah,  etc. ; 
es-tah-ree-ah,  etc.  Familiar  Forms : 

hablarias,  hablarlais  ;  deberias,  deberlais  ;  tendrlas,  tendrfais,  etc. 

REMABK. — As  in  the  Imperfect,  the  Stress  is  invariably  on  the  first  Vowel 
of  the  Termination. 

EXERCISE  II.  (on  the  CONDITIONAL). 
1.  they  would  receive  ;  2.  I  should  riot  find  ;  3.  would 
you  believe  ?  4f  we  should  have  ;  5.  I  should  not  have 
sold  ;  6.  would  he  be  (ser)  ?  7.  you  would  not  be  (estar) ; 
8.  would  you  (PETJR.)  not  have  spoken  ?  9.  we  should 
break ;  10.  she  would  not  write ;  11.  we  should  send  ;  12. 
would  you  learn  ° 

DISJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

(i.e.,  NOT  Object  of  the  Verb) 

65.  me,  ml ;        himself,  herself,  itself,  themselves,      )  gj 
thee,  tl ;          yourself,  yourselves  (Polite  Form)     } 


45 

These  forms  are  used  after  Prepositions,  thus : 

for  me,  para  mi ;  without  thee.  sin  ti  ;  of  herself,  de  si. 
conmigo  is  used  for  con  mi  (with  me),  contigo  for  con  ti,  and 
consigo  for  con  si.    PEON,  mee,  tee,  see  ;  kon-mee-go,  etc. 

After  Prepositions,  the  other  Pronouns  retain  the  forms  given  in  Para- 
graph 1  ;  but  si  is  used  in  preference  for  Pronouns  of  the  3rd  Person,  and 
for  Vd.,  Yds.,  when  the  person  has  already  been  mentioned  in  the  sentence, 
by  us,  por  nosotros ;       with  him,  con  el  or  consigo 
to  her,  &  ella ;  for  them,  para  ellos  or  para  si 

for  you,  para  Vd.  or  para  si. 

EXERCISE  III. 

1.  for  her ;  2.  towards1  us  ;  3.  by2  him  ;  4.  of  you  ;  5. 
without8  them  (FEM.)  ;  6.  with  you  (PLUR.)  ;  7.  in  him  ; 
8.  at  me  ;  9.  to  her  ;  10.  from  them  ;  11.  with  me  ;  12.  by 
us  (F.)  ?  13.  without  him  ;  14.  against4  you  ;  15.  among5  your- 
selves ;  16.  for  them  ;  17.  with  her  ;  18.  for  yourself. 

1  hacia  ,   2  por  ;   3  sin  ;   4  contra  j  5  entre. 
PEON.  1  ah-the-ah  ;  2  por  ;   3  sin  ;  4  kon-trah  ;  5  en-tray. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. 

1.  We  were  working  with  him.  2.  We  should  study 
Spanish.  3.  The  milk1  was  in  the  jug.2  4.  Would  you 
speak  to  the  merchant  ?  5.  The  paper3  was  not  good,  but  the 
pens  were  very  good.  6.  They  have  always4  beei}  with  me. 
7.  Who  used  to  be  the  captain  of  this  ship  ?  8.  Used  we  not 
to  have  seven5  chairs  in  this  room  ?  9.  Was  (PAST  DBF.) 
it  not  you  who  brought  this  present  for  me?  10.  The 
spoons6  were  not  ours.  11.  It  was  (fueron)  these  soldiers 
who  won7  the  battle.8  12.  Was  it  not  early9  when  he  arrived  ? 
13.  Would  you  buy  these  knives  and  forks10  ?  14.  I  should 
not  keep  that  dress.  15.  He  used  always4  to  speak  of  himself. 
16.  We  used  not  to  travel11  without  him.  17.  At  what  time 
used  you  to  dine12  ?  18.  Take13  your  children  with  you. 

1  leche  (FEM.)  ;  2  jarro  ;  3  papel  ;  4  siempre  ;  5  siete  ;  6  cuchara  ; 
7  ganar  ;  8  batalla  ;  9  temprano  ;  10  tenedor  ;  11  viajar  ;  12  comer  ; 
13  llevar  (convey,  carry). 

PRON.  1  lay-chay  ;  2  jE/ar-rro  ;  3  pah -pel ,  4  se-em-pray  ;  5  se- 
ay-tay  ;  6  koo-chall-rah  ;  7  gah-nar  ;  8  bah-tah-Fyah  ;  9  tem-prah» 
no ;  10  tay-nay-dor ;  11  ve-ah-Z/ar  ;  12  ko-mair  ,  13  Tyay-var. 


46 

TWELFTH  LESSON. 
66.    me,  to  me,  me ;  us,  to  us,  nos 

thee,  to  thee,  te  ;  you,  to  you  (Fam.  Form);  OS 

him,  lo  ;       her,  la  ;        to  him,  to  her,  le  ;        to  them,  les 
it,  lo  (MASC.),  la  (FEM.)  ;  them,  los  (MASC.),  las  (FEM.) 

PRON.  may,  tay,  lo,  lah,  lay  ;  uos,  os,  less,  loss,  labss. 

The  above  words  (called  Conjunctive  Personal  Pronouns)  usually 
PRECEDE  the  Verb  of  which  they  are  the  Object. 


I  have  it  lo  tengo 

do  you  lend  us  1  i  nos  presta  Vd.? 


he  does,not  send  me     no  me  envia 
shall  I  have  them  ?       ;  los  tendre  ? 


I  should  not  wait-for  her     No  la'  esperaria 
In  the  polite  form  of  address,  YOU  must  be  rendered  thus  : 

MASC.  SING.    FEM.  SING.         MASC.PLUR.        FEM.PLUR. 

YOU  lo  la  los  las 

TO-YOU  le  le  les  les 

I  do  not  understand  you  (PLUR.)  no  los  (or  las)  comprendo 

we  send  to  you  (PL.)  les  enviamos  he  lends  (to)  you   le  presta 

In  the  Masculine  Singular,  le  is  often  used  instead  of  lo,  as  a 
translation  of  YOU  or  HIM.  But  this  substitution  of  le  for  lo  is  only 
permissible  when  ONE  MALE  person  is  spoken  to  or  of,  thus  : 


Don't  you  believe  him  ? 
Don't  you  believe  it  ? 
Don't  you  believe  her  ? 
Don't  you  believe  them  ? 


No  lo  (or  le)  cree  Vd.  ? 
I  No  lo  cree  Vd.  ? 
I  No  la  cree  Vd.  ? 
I  No  los  (or  las)  cree  Vd.  ? 


67.  In  Compound  Tenses,  these  words  PRECEDE  the  Auxiliary,  as : 
He  has  given  me  ten  shillings.      |  .Me  ha  dado  diez  chelines. 
Have  you  sold  him  your  house  ?  I  i  Le  ha  vendido  Vd.  su  casa  ? 
That  man  had  spoken  to  us.       |  Ese  hoinbre  nos  habia  hablado. 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  We  have  it  (P.).  2.  He  has  taken  them.  3.  Do  you 
understand  me  ?  4. 1  shall  buy  it  to-morrow.  5.  The  shop- 
keeper does  not  believe  us.  6.  Have  you  paid1  him  the  bill2  ? 
7,  We  have  seen  them  in  the  street.  8. 1  should  not  wait3 
for3  them.  9.  Would  you  have  sold  it  ?  10.  My  friend 
will  keep  them  (F.).  11.  Your  uncle  had  forgotten  us. 
12.  I  shall  speak  to  you  this  evening, 

1  pagar ;  2cuenta ;  Saguardar.  1  pah-gar  j  2  koo'en-tah ;  3  ah-goo'ar-dar. 


47 


88.     When  two  Pronouns  are  Objects  of  the  same  Verb,  the 
Indirect  Object  (i.e.  the  PERSON)  is  put  first. 

The  Object  is  always  Indirect  when  preceded  by  TO,  or  when  TO  can 
be  placed  before  it  without  altering  its  meaning.     Examples  : 


Does  he  sell  it  (F.)  to  us  ? 

He  will  lend  it  (to)  me. 

My  friend  has  not  sent  them  to  me. 

09.     When  both  the  Object  Pronouns  are  in  the  Third  Person, 
the  first  (i.e.  le  or  les)  is  changed  to  se  ;  as, 


I  N  os  la  vende  ? 
Me  lo  prestara. 
Mi  amigro  no  me  los  ha  enviado. 


I  used  to  owe  it  (F.)  to  them. 
We  often  lend  them  to  her. 
She  Bas  brought  them  to  him. 
My  clerk  will  send  it  to  you. 
We  shall  not  sell  them  to  you. 


(Yo)  se  la  debia. 

Se  los  prestamos  amenudo. 

Se  los  ha  traido. 

Mi  dependiente  se  lo  enviara. 

No  se  los  venderemos. 


70.  d  61,  &  ellas,  £  Vd.  etc.,  (see  page  45)  may  be  placed  after 
the  Verb,  to  make  the  meaning  of  se,  le  or  les  clearer,  thus  : 


Why  does  he  not  sell  it  to  them  ? 
The  banker  will  lend  them  to  him. 
Who  has  given  you  the  key  ? 
We  do  fcot  owe  her  the  money. 


I  Por  que  no  se  lo  vende  a  ellps  ? 
El  banquero  se  los  prestara  a  61. 
I  Quien  le  ha  dado  la  Have  a  Vd? 
No  le  debemos  el  dinero  a  ella. 


He  has  written  to  us  and  to  you. 
[  shall  lend  them  to  her,  but  not  to 

her  sister. 
They  owe  the  money  to  me,  but  not 

to  my  cousin. 


71.  a  mi,  d  61,  d  nosotros,  d  Vd.  etc.,  MUST  be  added,  as 
shown  in  the  preceding  paragraph,  if  there  is  any  emphasis  on 
the  Indirect  Object : 

Nos  ha  escrito  a  nosotros  y  a  Vd 
Se  los  prestare  a  ella,  pero  no  a 

su  hermana. 

Me  deben  el  dinero  a  mi,  pero 
no  a  mi  primo. 

EXERCISE  II. 

1.  They  used  to  send  it  to  me  every  day.  2.  Has  she  sent 
them  to  us  ?  3.  He  has  written  to  her,  and  (to)  her  mother. 
4.  His  aunt  has  spoken  to  me,  but  not  to  you.  5.  Did  she  read 
it  to  them  yesterday  ?  6.  The  banker  will  lend  it  to  them, 
but  not  to  their  lawyer.1  7.  Have  you  explained2  it  to  them  ? 
8.  I  have  riot  explained  it  to  them  yet,  but  I  shall  explain  it 
to  them  to-night3.  9.  We  sell  to  you  (PLUR.),  not  to  them. 
10.  He  will  sell  it  (FEM.)  to  us  to-morrow.  11.  The  clerk  has 
not  explained  them  (FEM.)  to  me. 

1  abogado  ;  2  explicar  ;   3  this  night  (noche,  FEM.). 
PEON.  1  ah-bo-gah-do  ;  2  ex-ple-kar  ;  3  no-chay. 


48 

72.  The 'Object  Pronouns  are  placed  AFTER*  the  Infinitive  and 
the  Present  Participle  ;  and  when  they  follow  the  Verb,  they 
form  one  word  with  it,  but  do  not  alter  the  Stress.  Examples  : 

to  find  them,  hallarlos  I    to  lend  them  to  me,  prest&rmelos^ 

owing  you  (PL.),  debiendoles  j    sending  it  to  him,  envi&ndoselo 
*  This  is*  optional  when  an  Auxiliary  Verb,  or  a  Verb  used  as  an 
Auxiliary,  precedes.      Examples  :  She  was  writing  to  us,  estaba  escri- 
biendonos  ;  or,  nos  estaba  escribiendo  ;    I  want  to  speak  to  you, 
deseo  hablarle ;  or,  le  deseo  hablar. 

73.  The  Object  Pronouns  are  also  placed  AFTER  the  Imperative, 
unless  it  is  in  the  Negative,  thus : 


buy  them,  comprelos  Vd. 
send  (PL.)  it  to  me,-  envienmelo 

Yds. 
lend  it  to  her,  presteselo  Vd. 


do  not  buy  them,  no  los  compre  Vd» 
do  not  send  it  to  me,  ne  me  lo  envien 
Vds.  [  Vd. 

do  not  lend  it  to  her,  510  se  lo  presto 


send  it  to  them  (p.),  and  not  to  me,  envieselo  Vd.  d  ellas,  y  no  a  mi. 
let  him  read  it,  que  lo  lea  (Subjunctive,  therefore  Pronoun  precedesX 

EXERCISE  III. 

1.  Read  it  to  me.  2.  Read  me  the  letter.  .3.  Read  that 
letter  to  us.  4.  Do  not  read  them  (FEM.)  to  us.  5.  Sell  them 
your  watch.  6.  Do  not  send  her  the  letter.  7.  Buy  (PLUR.) 
it.  8.  Was  he  speaking  to  you,  or  to  your  .father  ?  9.  Lend  it 
to  them.  10.  Do  not  lend  him  [any]  money.  11.  It  is  not 
easy  [to]  understand  him.  12.  Teach1  (PLUR.)  it  to  them.  13. 
Do  not  teach1  (PLtTR.)  it  to  them.  14.  Let  him  listen2  tome. 

lensefiar;    2escuchar.  PRON.  1  en-say-n'yar  ;  2  es-koo-cfcar. 


COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. 

1.  Look  at  him,  not  at  me.  2.  Let  me  (i.e.  allow  me  to) 
have  it.  3.  Why  have  you  sold  her  your  ring  ?  4.  He  will 
not  forget  you  (TLUR.).  5.  Do  they  owe  it  to  us  ?  6.  Do 
not  listen  to  him.  7.  He  has  not  brought  them  (FEM.)  to  us. 
8.  He  used  to  lend  money  to  you,  but  not  to  me,  9.  When 
shall  you  (PLUR.)  buy  it  ?  10.  Who  has  done  it  ?  11.  How 
much  money  do  we  owe  him  ?  12. 1  have  lent  them  to  her, 
13.  He  will  have  them  to-morrow.  14.  Sell  (PLUR.)  them 
to  him.  15.  Do  not  send  it  to  me.  16.  Does  he  owe  it  to 
as  ?  17.  Let  us  keep  it.  18.  Do  you  expect  him  to-day  ? 


THIRTEENTH    LESSON. 

74.  Adverbs  which  are  formed  in  English  by  "adding  LY  to  the 
Adjective  are  formed  in  Spanish  by  adding  MENTB  to 
the  Feminine  Singular  of  the  Adjective.  Examples : 

A^-    f ™  f  dear    caro         I         AA     ,      f  dearly    caraxnente 
Adjectives  |  ^    ficil         j         Adverbs  |  ^y     facilmente 

PRON..  kah-rah-men-tay ;  fah-thil-men-tay. 
NOTE. — If  two  or  more  Adverbs  ending  in  mente  occur  together,  the 
termination  is  added  to  the  LAST  only  ;  as, 

They  have  fought  bravely,  enthusiastically,  and  nobly. 
Han  peleado  valiente,  entusiastica  y  noblemente. 

EXERCISE  I. 
1.  surely  ;  2.  cheaply  ;  3.  heavily  ;  4,  coldly  ;  5.  cleverly  ; 

6.  bravely  ;     7.  gladly1 ;     8.  doubly2 ;    9.  purely.8 

1  glad,  alegre  ;  2  double,  doble  ;  3  pure,  puro. 


75.    The  Adverb  usually  follows  the  Verb  (or  the  Participle  in 
Compound  Tenses),  and  precedes  the  Noun  which  is  the 
Direct  Object  of  the  Verb.* 
*  This  is  customarily  the  case  ;  but  the  position  of  the  Adverb  is  varied, 

as  in  other  languages,  for  emphasis  or  euphony.     It  is  therefore  to  a  large 

extent  optional.        Examples : 


The  child  does  not  always  read. 
I  am  now  writing  to  my  uncle. 
They  often  used  to  speak  to  me. 
He  will  not  find  the  house  easily. 


El  nino  no  lee  siempre. 

Estoy  escribiendo  ahora  &  mi  tio 

Me  hablaban  amenudo. 

No  hallara  facilmente  la  casa. 


EXERCISE  II. 
1.  Copy1  the  names  carefully.  2.  Are  they  still2  listening  ? 

3.  Yesterday  I,  bought  a  watch,  and  to-morrow  I  shall  sell  it. 

4.  This  man  does  not  always  work  well.  5.  Hardly3  had  I  fi- 
nished4!^ work  when  my  friends  arrived.  6. We  always  drink 
tea  and  coffee.  7.  To-morrow  we  shall  receive  eight5  pounds.* 

1  copiar  ;  2  aiin  ;  3  apenas  ;  4  acabar  ;  5  ocho ;  6  libra. 
76.    Adverbs  are  compared  like  Adjectives  (see  9th  Lesson) ;  as, 


coldly  friamente 

more  coldly       mas  friamente 
the  most  coldly  lo  mas  friamente 


easily  fdcilmente 

more  easily       mas  fdcilmente 
the  most  easily  lo  mas  facilmentO 


most  surely,  muy  seguramente,  or  segurisimamente 
B.8.S.4.) 


NEGATIONS. 

77.    never,  nunca,  jam&s*;  nobody,  nadie ;  nothing,  nada: 

neither... nor,  ni...ni  ;  no,  not  any,  ninguno,  ninguna. 
PKON.  noonn-kah,  /Zah-mahs,  nah -de-ay,  nah-dah ;  nee,  nin-goo-no. 

When  the  above  words  follow  a  Verb,  no  must  precede  the 
Verb,  thus : 


I  have  never  seen  it. 
He  spoke  to  nobody. 
I  have  neither  your  pen  nor  your  pen- 
He  has  no  houses.  [cil. 


No  lo  he  visto  nunca. 

No  hablo  a  nadie. 

No  tengo  ni  su  pluma  ni  su  lapiz. 

No  tiene  ningunaf  casa. 


If,  however,  these  words  precede  the  Verb,  no  is  not  used  ;  as, 


Nobody  has  been  her^e. 
Never  will  I  believe  that. 
To-day  no  letter  has  arrived. 


Nadie  ha  estado  aqui. 
Jamas  (or  Nunca)  creere  eso. 
Hoy  no  ha  llegado  ninguna  carta 


EXERCISE  III. 

1.  I  shall  not  have  any  difficulty.1        2.  Neither  my  bus- ' 
band2  nor  my  son  is3  upstairs.4      3.  The  servant  has  neither 
brought  coffee  nor  tea.  4.  Nobody  is  do\vnstairs.  5. 1  met  no- 
body in  the  garden.       6.  No  house  would  be  largeb  enough.44 
7.  Nothing  is  more  certain.5  8.  This  boy  understands  nothing. 

1  dificultad  ;  2  esposo j  3=are  ;  4  arriba  ;  5  seguro. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

(for  Reference  only) 

78.    The  Third  Person  Singular  of  the  PKESENT  Subjunctive  is 
the  same  as  the  Imperative,  thus  : 

liable-          deba          tenga          haya          sea  este 

hablemos    debamos    tengamos    hayamos    seamos    estemos 
bablen.        deban        tengan        hayan        sean        esten 

Fam,  Forms :  babies,  hableis  ;  debas,  debais ;  tengas,  tengdis  ;  hayas, 
hayais  ;  "seas,  seals  ;  est^s,  est^is. 

*  Jamas  is  seldom  used  except  with  a  Future  Tense. 
t  The  Plural  Forms  ningunos,  ningunas,  are  not  used. 


51 

79-    TbT  Stem  of  "the  IMPERFECT,^  FUTURE 

Subjunctive  is  obtained  by  taking  ron  from  the  3rd  Person 
Plural  of  the  Past  Definite  (see  Paragraphs  50  to  52),  thus  : 
habla...,   debie...,  vivie...,  tuvie...,  hubie...,  fue...,  estuvie... 
To  this  STEM  the  following  Terminations  are  added  : 

IMPERFECT  se  ;    FUTURE  re  ;    CONDITIONAL  ra 

The  full  Conjugations  are  therefore  as  follow  : 

IMPERFECT  :      hablase,  hablasemos,  hablasen  ;    debiese,  etc. ; 

tuviese,  etc. ;  fuese,  etc. 
FUTURE  :          hablare,  hablaremos,  hablaren ;    debiere,  etc. ; 

tuviere,  etc. ;  fuere,  etc. 
CONDITIONAL  :  hablara,  hablaramos,  hablaran  ;  debiera,  etc. ; 

tuviera,  etc. ;  fuera,  etc. 

Fam.  Forms  :  IMPERFECT  :  hablases,  hablaseis,  etc. ;    FUTURE  :  hablartfi, 
hablareis,  etc. ;  CONDITIONAL  :  hablaras,  hablarais,  etc. 

The  STRESS  is  always  on  the  vowel  preceding  the  termination 
se,  re  or ra. 

NOTE. — The  Subjunctive  is  used  under  certain  conditions,  no  rdatter 
what  the  English  construction  is.  We  therefore  refrain  from  the  mis- 
leading custom  of  giving  MAY,  MIGHT,  etc.,  as  the  English  of  the 
Subjunctive,  because  this  would  often  be  a  totally  incorrect  translation. 
The  use  of  this  Mood  is  explained  in  Lesson  24. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. 

1.  I  have  a  blue1  dress  here.  2.  He  hardly*  waitedb  a 
minute.2  3.  Perhaps  I  shall  receive  some  presents  to- 
morrow. 4.  That  customer3  has  already4  bought  the  lamp. 
5.  I  shall  certainly5  speak  to  them  to-night.  6.  Did  you 
not  find  my  umbrella  here  ?  7.  Nobody  is  listening.  8. 
He  firmly6  refused7  [to]  continue.8  9.  Sometimes9 1  drink 
beer,  but  I  never  drink  wine.  10.  I  want  principally10  [to] 
speak  to  him,  not  to  his  partner.11  11.  He  spoke  clearly  and 
energetically.12  12.  Do  you  expect  a  letter  to-day  ?  13.  It 
is  of  no  consequence.  14.  He  believes  nothing.  15.  They 
found  nobody  at  home.  16.  Never  have  I  read  [a]  betterb  book,a 

1  azul ;  2  minuto ;  3  parroquiano  ;  4  ya  ;  5  de  seguro  ;  6  firme 
(Adjective)  ;  7  rehusar ;  8  continual ;  9  4  veces  ;  10  principal  (Adjective)  ; 
11  socio  ;  12  eneVgico  (Adjective). 


^FOURTEENTH    LESSON. 


80.  CARDINAL  NUMBERS. 

(Those  printed  in  thick  type  are  all  that  need  be  learned.      The 
remainder  are  Compound  Numbers  formed  regularly.) 

101  ciento  uno,  (una,  F.) 
200  doscientos  (M.),  dos- 

cieutas  (F.) 
300  trescientos,  -tas 
400  cuatrocientos,  -tas 
500  quinientos,  -tas 
600  seiscientos,  -tas 
700  setecientos,  -tas 
800  ochocienlos,  -tas 
900  novecientos,  -tas 

1.000  mil 

1.001  mil  uno,  (una  F.) 

1.100  mil  cien(lo)t 

1.101  mil  ciento  uno 
1,200  mil  doscientos,  -tas 
2,000  dos  mil  J 
100.000  cien  mil 
200',000  doscientos  mil 
1,000,000  un  millon 
2,000,000  dos  millones 

PEON.  1  OO-no,  00-nah  ;  2  doss  ;  3  tress  !  4  koo'ah-tro  ;  5  thin-ko  ; 
6  say-iss  ;  7  se-ay-tay  ;  8  o-cho  ;  0  noo'ay-Tay  ;  10  de-eth  ;  Jl  on- 
thay  ;  12do-thay;  13  tray -t  bay  ;  14  kah-tpr-thay ;  15  kin-thay  ; 
16  de-eth-e -say-iss  ;  20  vay-in-tay  ;  30  tray-in-tah,  etc. 

*  The  Compoiuid  Numbers  (17  to  99,  except  the  even  tens)  can  also  be 
spelt  diez  y  seis,  veinte  y  dos,  cuarenta  y  cinco,  etc. 

t  The  numbers  1,100,  1,200,  etc.,  cannot  be  translated  oncecientOS, 
etc.    The  correct  form  is  mil  cien(to),  mil  doscientos,  etc. 

J  mil  employed  as  a  Numeral  has  no  plural ;  as, 
6,000  iBeis  mil ;  BUT,  300  trescientos;  8,000,000 -ocho  millones. 

81.  TJHO  is  contracted  to  un  if  a  Noun  or  an  Adjective  follows, 
and  Ciento  to  cien,  unless  a  Numeral  Adjective  follows. 

fifty -one  books,  cincuentiun  libros 

cien  buenos  marineros 

cien  mil  gracias 

cien  millones  de  hombres 

mil  and  millon  are  considered  as  Nouns.  de  is  always  placed 

after  millon,  millones,  if  the -Noun  immediately  follows. 


1  uno  (M.),  una  (F.) 

21  veintmno* 

l 

2  dos 

veintiuna 

2 

3  tres 

22  veintidos 

4  cuatro 

23  veintitres 

3 

5  cinco 

54  veinticuatro 

4 

6  seis 

25  veinticinco 

5 

7  siete 

26  vcintiseis 

6 

8  ocho 

27  veintisiete 

7 

9  nueve 

28  veintiocho 

8 

10  diez 

29  veintinueve 

9 

11  once 

30  treinta 

1 

12  doce 

31  treintiuno,  -na 

1 

13  trecc 

32  treintidos,*  etc. 

1 

14  catorce 

40  cuarenta 

1 

15  quince 

50  cincuenta 

1 

16  dieciseis* 

60  sesenta 

2 

17  diecisietfe 

70  setenta 

1 

18  dieciocho 

80  ochenta 

2 

19  diecinueve 

90  noventa 

1 

20  veinte 

100  cien,  ciento 

2 

one  man,  un  hombre 
a  hundred  good  sailors 
a  hundred  thousand  thanks 
a  hundred  million  men 


53 

82.    All  the  Cardinal  Numbers  are  invariable  except  UHO  and 
CientOS,  which  change  in  the  Feminine  to  una,  Cientas  : 
one  woman,  una  mujer  ;  four  hundred  houses,  cuatrocientas  casaa. 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  thirty-five  children  ;  2.  nineteen  days  ;  3.  six  weeks1  ; 
4.  twelve  months2  ;  5.  eighty-eight  years3  ;  6.  one  minute  ; 
7.  one  week1  ;  8.  ninety-seven  pounds  ;  9.  twenty-three 
shillings  ;  10.  eighteen  pence4  ;  11.  forty-two  dollars5  ; 
12.  one  hundred  and  seven  books  ;  13.  five  hundred  and 
seventy-three  shillings  ;  14.  thirteen  hundred  and  fifty-one 
houses  ;  15.  five  thousand  and  twelve  hours6  ;  16.  sixteen 
thousand  seven  hundred  and  sixty-four  miles7  ;  17.  a  hun- 
dred million  pounds;  18.  a  hundred  schools8;  19.  five 
million  two  hundred  and  eighty-six  thousand  four  hundred 
and  fifteen  inhabitants.9 

1  semana  ;    2  mes  ;    3  aiio  ;    4  penique  ;    5  duro  or  peso  ;    6  hora  ; 
7  milla  ;  8  escuela  ;  9  habitante. 


83.  The  HOUR  OF  THE  DAY  is  expressed  in  Spanish  thus  : 

one  o'clock,  la  una  ;  two  o'clock,  las  dos  ;  five  o'clock,  las  cinco,  etc. 
la,  las  are  used  because  hora  (hour),  which  is  understood,  is  feminine. 

84.  QUARTER  is  translated  cuarto,  and  HALF  media. 

PRON.  koo'ar-to,  may-de-ah. 
Note  the  following  expressions  :  twelve  minutes  past  six,  las 


a  quarter  past  four,  las  cuatro  y  cuarto 

half  past  four,  las  cuatro  y  media 

a  quarter  to  five,las  Cinco  menos  cuarto 


seis  y  doce 
twenty  minutes  to  seven,  las 
siete  menos  veinte 


85.    "!T  is"  is  translated  es  before  la  una,  and  son  before 

the  other  hours,  thus  ? 
it  is  one  o'clock,  es  la  una ;  is  it  half  past  two  ?  i  son  las  dos  y  media  ? 

EXERCISE  IT. 

1.  eleven  o'clock  ;  2.  twenty-five  minutes  to  eight ;  3, 
half  past  ten  ;  4.  a  quarter  to  eleven  ;  5.  five  minutes  past 
one  ;  6.  ten  minutes  to  eight ;  7.  It  is  a  quarter  past  nine. 
8.  Is  it  one  o'clock  ?  9.  It  is  not  twelve  o'clock  yet.  10. 
It  is  nineteen  minutes  to  three. 


54 

86.    The  names  of  the  DAYS  and  MONTHS  are  as  follow  * 
Sunday,  Domingo  January,  Enero       ,    July,  Julio 


Monday,  Lunes 
Tuesday,  Martes 
Wednesday,  Miercoles 
Thursday,  Jueves 
Friday,  Viernes 


February,  Febrero 
Marchr  Marzo 
April,  Abril 
May,  Mayo 
June,  Junio 


August,  AgostO 
September,  Septiembre 
October,  Oetubre 
November,  Noviembre 
December,  Diciembre 


Saturday,  Sabado 

PRON.  do-min-go,  loo-ness,  mar-less,  me-air-ko-less,  #ooay-vess, 
ve-air-ness,  sah-bah-do;  ay-nay-ro,  fay-bray-ro,  mar-tho,  ah-bril, 
mah-yo,  ^Too-ne-o,  J3bo-le-o,  ah-gos-to,  sep-te-em-bray,  ok-too-bray, 
no-ve-em-bray,  dee-the- em-bray. 


COLLECTIVE    EXERCISE. 

1.  What  time  (trans,  hour)  is  it  ?  2.  I1  do  not  know1 
what  time  it  is.  3.  It  is  half  past  twelve.  4.  The  train 
starts  at  twenty -three  minutes  past  eight.  5.  He  has 
travelled  two  hundred  and  eighty-one  miles.  6.  We  have 
in  the  bank2  £1,954  17s.  6d.  7.  This  country3  has  [a]  hun- 
dred million  inhabitants.  8.  I  lent  them  eighteen  hundred 
and  fifty  pounds.  9.  There4  are4  not  [a]  hundred  good  soldiers 
in  the  regiment.5  10.  He  will  be  here  at  ten  minutes  to  one. 
11.  It  is  a  quarter  to  twelve.  12.  That  merchant  has  £500,000. 
13.  Fourteen  thousand  eight  hundred  and  fifty  soldiers 
fought6  in  that  battle.  14.  It  is  not  a  quarter  past  three  yet. 

15.  They  have  sent  [off]  ninety-two  parcels,  haven't7  they7  ? 

16.  How8  many8  days  are4  there4  in  a  week  ?    17.  There4  are* 
seven  days,  a  hundred  and  sixty-eight  hours,  or  ten  thou- 
sand  and    eighty    minutes    in    a    week.      18.  What  are 
the  names  of  the  days  ?  19.  Sunday,  Monday,  Tuesday,  Wed- 
nesday, Thursday,  Friday,  Saturday.    20.  There4  are4  twelve 
months,  or  three  hundred  and  sixty-five  days,  in  a  year.  21.  The 
months  are  : — January,  February,  March,  April,  May,  June, 
July,  August,  September,  October,  November,  December. 

1  no  *6 ;     2  banco  ;     3  pals  ;    4  hay  ;     5  regimieflto ;     6  peleor  ; 
7  i  no  ot  veidad  ?  (is  it  not  truth  ?) ;    8  cudntos  ? 


55 
FIFTEENTH    LESSON. 


87.  ORDINAL  NUMBERS, 

1st    primero  6th  sexto  llth  und£cimo  or  d&fmo 

2nd  segundo  7th   septimo  primero 

3rd  tercero  8th  octavo  12th  duodecimo  or  d£cimo 

4th  cuarto  9th  noveno,  nono  20th  vig&imo    [segundo 

6th  quinto  10th  decimo  21st  vige*simo  priraero,  etc. 

(The  student  need  only  learn  the  first  ten  words  in  the  above  list. 
Beyond  the  *  TENTH,'  Cardinal  Numbers  are  nearly  always  used  in  prefe- 
rence to  the  Ordinal,  the  latter  being  very  lengthy  and  cumbrous.  Thus  : 

the  36th  page,  la  pagina  trigesima  sexta ;  but  better,  la  pagina 
treintiseis ;  the  27th  chapter  =  chapter  27,  el  capitulo  veintisiete). 

88.  All  the  ORDINAL  NUMBERS  form  their  Feminine  and  Plural 
in  the  usual  way,  thus  : 

the  fifth  street*  la  quinta  calle  ;  the  first  names,  los  primeros  nombrea 

89.  The  Cardinal  Numbers  are  used  for  expressing  the  DAYS  OB 
THE  MONTH,  the  first  (el  primero)  excepted  ;  as, 

the  1st  of  July  el  primero  de  Julio ;  the  2nd  of  August  el  dos  de  Agoato 
the  1 1  th  of  March  el  once  de  Marzo ;  „  30th  of  May  el  treinta  de  Mayo 

90.  In  writing  the  date  with  figures,  no  letters  corresponding  to 
the  English  th.  are  used  after  the  figure,  THE  IST  (1°)  again 
excepted,  thus : 

London,  July  1st.  Londres,  (el)  1°  de  Julio. 

Madrid,  August  21st.  Madrid,  (el)  21  de  Agosto. 

Dates  can  also  be  written  thus  :  Agosto  21  de  1907,  etc. 

91.  After  the  names  cf  monarchs,  etc.,  the  Ordinal  Numbers  are 
used  (WITHOUT  the  article)  up  to  the  10th.     Beyond  the 
lOfch,  Cardinal  Numbers  are  generally  employed  ;  as, 

Henry  II.,  Enrique  II.  (segundo)  ;  Catherine  III.,  Catalina  III.  (ter- 
ccra)  ;   BUT— Louis  XIV.,  Luis  XIV.  (catorce). 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  the  first  inhabitants  ;   2.  the  eighth  part1 ;  3.  the  tenth 
mistake  ;   4.  the  fifth  shop  ;    5.  the  second  classes2 ;    6.  the 


se 

seventh  street  on3  the  right3 ;  7.  the  third  window  on4  thd 
left4 ;  8.  the  15th  of  October  ;  9.  the  first  of  May ;  10; 
the  25th  of  August ;  11.  Pius5  the  ninth  ;  12.  Isabella6  II. ; 
13.  Charles7  XII. ;  14.  Paris,  June  18th,  1907, 

1  parte(FEM.)  ;  2clase  (FEM.)  ;  3  £  la  derecha*  ;  4a  la  izquierda*  ;  5  Pio  J 
6  Isabel ;  7  Carlos.      *  Feminine,  Jsecaupe  mano  (hand)  is  Feminine. 

INDEFINITE  ADJECTIVES  AND  PRONOUNS.t 

92.     The  following  words  form  their  Feminine  and  Plural  in  the 
usual  way  (see  Paragraphs  20  and  23)  : 

any,  some,  alguno ;  no,  none,  not -any,  ninguno  ;t 

muoh,J  mucho  how  much  ?  <{  cudtito  ? 

other,  otro  ;  same,  mismo  ;  all,  the  whole,  everything,  todo  ; 
too  much,  demasiado  ;  little,  a  few,  poco. 

PRON.   ahl-goojno  ;    nin-goo-.no;    moo-cho  ;  koo'ahn-to  j  0-tro  ; 
mi3-mo:  to-do;  day-mah-se-ah-da ;  po-ko. 


the  other  men,  los  otros  hombres 
all  the  ink,  toda  la  tinta 
how  much  money  ?  ;cu£,nto  dinero  ? 
ti  many  streets  ?  i  cuantas  calles  1 


much  patience,  mucha  paciencia 
many  numbers,  muchos  numeros 
the  same  book,  el  mismo  libro 
the  same  cups,  las  mismas  tazas 


93.    The  following  words  do  not  change  : 

anyone,  anybody,  alguien  ;  nobody,  nadie  ; 
each,  every,  cada  ;  nothing,  nada  ;  something,  anything, 

PKON.     ahlg-e-cn  ;  nah-de-ay  ;  kah-dah  ;  nah-dah  ;  ahl-go. 
EXAMPLES  :  every  three  weeks,  oada  tres  semanas  ; 

is  (there)  any  one  at  home  ?    I  hay  alguien  en  casa  ? 

EXERCISE  II. 

1.  I  have  found  nothing.  2.  A  rich1  man  always  has 
[a  great]  many  friends.  3.  They  looked  at  it  every  ten 
minutes.  4.  How  many  pounds2  do  I  owe  you  ?  .5.  Do  not 
drink  all  the  water.  6.  Have  you  bought  any  books  to-day  ? 
7.  Is3  there3  anybody  upstairs  ?  8.  We  sold  it  to  them  the 
other  day.  9.  You  have  too  many  dogs. 

1  rico  ;   2  libra  ;   3  hay. 
tw*  foot-notas,  pages  27  and  50.      \  The  Plural  of  MUCH  is  MANY, 


5? 

04.  The  final  o  of  primero  (first),  tercero  (third),  bueno 
(good),  malO  (bad),  alguno  (some,  any),  and  ninguno 
(no,  none),  is  omitted  if  a  Noun  immediately  follows ;  as, 

have  you  any  money  ?    i  tiene  Vd.  algiin  dinero  ? 
the  first  day,  el  primer  dia  ;    a  good  soldier,  un  buen  soldado 
BUT  :  a  good  and  brave  soldier,  un  bueno  y  valiente  soldado 

The  final  A  of  Feminine  Forms  is  not  omitted ;  as, 

the  third  door  la  tercera  puerta 

This  is  not  a  good  pen.  Esta  no  es  una  buena  pltuna. 

95.  When  grande  (great,  large)  precedes  the  Noun,  the  final 
de  is  generally  omitted. 

grande  precedes  the  Ncun  when  refferjing  to  QUALITY  instead  of  to 
tactual  size  (see  Remark  to  Paragraph  19),  fcbijs  : 

a  great  queen,  una  gran  reina  ;  a  great  friend  of  mine,  un  gran 
amigo  mio ;  BUT— a  great  (i.e.,  large)  ship,  un  buque  grande. 

06.  Santo  (Saint)  is  contracted  to  San  when  preceding  the 
name  of  a  saint ;  as, 

St.  Peter,  San  Pedro  ;        a  great  saint,  un  gran  santO 

EXERCISE   III. 

L  a  bada  voyage111 ;  2.  a  greata  noiseb  ;  3.  a  great  chimney2; 
4.  a  great  favor3  ;  5.  St.  Paul4 ;  6.  the  third  boy  in  the  first 
class  ;  7.  There5  is5  a  little  (of)  coffee,  but  I  have  neither 
sugar  nor  milk.  8.  He  never  spends  [any]  money  here. 
9.  I  have  a  bad  pen,  but  good  paper. 

1  viaje  ;  2  chimenea  ;  3  favor  ;   4  Pablo  ;   5  hay. 


COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. 

1.  Alexander1 1.  died2  December  1st,  1825.  2.  How  much 
ink  is8  there3  in  the  inkstands4  ?  3.  This  is  a  good*  boy,b  but 
the  others  have  not  done  any  work.  4.  He  is  the  first  in5 
his  class,  which  is  very  large.  5.  My  cousins  (PEM.) 
are  almost6  always  the  first  in  the  list,7  and  my  sister  is  the 
last.  6.  Who  was  (PAST  DEF.)  the  first  King  of  Spain8  ?  7. 
Copy  every  fourth  line.9  8.  How  many  words10  have, you 
(PLUR.)  written  ?  9.  Catherine11  II.  was12  born12  May  2nd, 


sa 

1729,  and  died2  Nov.  17th,  1796.  10.  This  is  the  first  tim* 
that  I  have  found  anyone  at  home.  11.  The  second  lesson 
is  the  most  difficult.  12.  On13  the  contrary,13 1  think14  that 
the  first  lessons  are  very  easy,  and  that  the  eighth  is  the  most 
difficult.  13.  Do  yomnot  think14  that  the  Iast15a  chapters16bof 
this  book  are  very  amusing17  ?  14.  She  was  (PAST  DBF.)  a  great 
queen.18  15.  This  is  the  first  mistake  I  have  made  to-day.  16. 
I  have  filled19  this  inkstand,4  and  my  brother  has  filled  all  the 
others.  17.  How  many  brothers  have  you  ?  I  have  only^one. 

1  Alejandro  ;  2  mnri6  (see  par.  163)  ;  3  hay  ;  4  tintero  ;  5  de  ;  6  casi ; 
7  lista  ;  8  Espana  ;  _9  renglbn  ;  10  palabra  ;  ]  1  Catalina  ;  12  nacio"  (see 
par.  168);  13  al  contrario  ;  )  4  use  creer  (to  believe)  ;  15iiltimo;  16oa» 
pltulo  ;  17  divertido  ;  18  reina  ;  19  llenar  ;  20  solamente. 


SIXTEENTH    LESSON. 

INDEFINITE  ADJECTIVES  &  PRONOUNS  (concluded). 

97.  SOME  and  ANT  before  a  Noun  in  the  Singular  are  either  not 
translated,  or  rendered  un  poco  or  un  poco  de  (A  LITTLE)  : 

He  has  given  me  some  sugar.   Me  ha  dado  un  poco  (de)  azucar. 

98.  SOME  and  ANY  before  a  Noun  in  the  Plural  (i.e.  meaning  A 
FEW)  are  either  not  translated,   or  rendered  by  unos  or 
algunOS;  as, 

Have  you  any.nuts  ,{  *  ««•  Vd.^ece^^algunas  nueces, 

99.  After  a  Negation,  ANY  is  translated  ninguno,  and  ANY- 
BODY (or  ANYONE)  nadie,  thus  : 

They  have  not  built  anyhouse[s].    No  han  edificado  ninguna  casa. 
I  have  not  seen  anybody.  No  he  visto  a  nadie. 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  Lend  him  some  tools.1  2.  We  have  some  salt,2  but  we 
have  neither  mustard3  nor  pepper.4  3.  Have  you  not  met5 
anybody  ?  4.  Has  the  waiter6  brought  [any]  bread  and 
cheese  ?  5.  My  wife7  has  bought  some  furniture.  6.  Haven't 
you  seen  any  samples  to-day  ?  7.  This  pupil  hasn't  [any] 


59 

ink.  8.  That  servant  (PEM.)  has  broken  some  plates,  but 
she  has  not  broken  any  glass  [es].  9.  He  has  given  me 
some  presents  for  my  daughter.8 

1  herramienta  ;  2  sal  (PEM.)  ;   3  mostaza  ;  4  pimienta ;  6  encontrar ; 
6  mozo  ;   7  esposa  (or  senora)  ;   8  hija. 

REFLECTIVE  VERBS. 

When  the  Object  of  a  Verb  is  the  same  person  or  thing  as  its  Subject, 
the  Verb  is  called  REFLECTIVE.      Examples  : 

NOT  REFLECTIVE.  REFLECTIVE. 

He  amused  me.    I  amuse  him.  He  amused  himself.    I  amuse  myself. 

The  boys  amused  us.  The  boys  amused  themselves. 

100.  The  Reflective  Pronouns  MYSELF,  THYSELF,  OURSELVES, 
YOURSELVES  (Fam.  Form),  are  translated  me,  te,  BOS,  OS. 

Note  that  these  are  the  same  as  the  ordinary  Object  Pronouns  (see  Par.  66). 
himself,  herself,  itself,  one's  self,  )         „  translated  q™ 

themselves,  yourself,  yourselves  (Pol.  Form)  )  a 

101.  These  words  immediately  precede  or  follow  the  Verb,  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  Rules  in  the  12th  Lesson,  thus  : 


to  wash  one's  self,  lavarse 
I  wash  myself,  me  lavo 
you  wash  yourself,  Vd.  se  lava 
has  the  boy  washed  himself  ?  j  se  ha 

lavado  el  nmchacho  ? 
wash  yourself,  lavese  Vd. 
do  not  wash  yourself,  no  se  lave 

Vd. 


washing  one's  self,  lavandose 
we  wash  ourselves,  nos  lavamos 
you  wash  yourselves,  Vds.  se  lavan 
the  childrenwill  not  wash  themselves 

los  ninos  no  se  lavaran 
let  us  wash  ourselves,  lavemonos* 
do  not  let  us  wash  ourselves,  no  nos 

lavemos,  etc.,  etc. 


*  The  final  S  or  D  of  the  Imperative  is  omitted  "before  the  Reflective 
Pronouns  nos  and  os.  Thus,  the  Familiar  Form  for  "  wash  yourselves  " 
is  lavaos,  not  lavados. 

EXERCISE  II. 

1.  I  shall  wash  myself  ;  2.  we  are  not  washing  ourselves ; 
3.  have  they  not  washed  themselves  ?  4.  you  will  tire1  your- 
self ;  5.  she  would  congratulate2  herself  ;  6.  do  not  tire1 
yourselves  ;  7.  has  he  hurt3  himself  ?  8.  have  you  not 
hurt3  yourselves  ?  9.  they  congratulate2  themselves  ;  10. 
wash  yourselves  ;  11.  the  workmen  used  to  tire1  them- 
selves ;  12.  we  shall  congratulate2  ourselves. 

1  cansar  ;  2  felicitar ;  3  lastimar. 


60 


102.    Many  Verbs  are  reflective  in  Spanish,  but  not  in  EngKdi. 


to  make  a  mistake,  equivocarse 

to  get  up,  levantarse 

to  complain,  qnejarse 

to  aJight,  apearse  or  bajarse 


1  made  a  mistake,  me  he  equivocado 
he  used  to  get  up,  se  levautaba 
we  do  not  complain,  no  nos  quejamos 
you  will  alight,  Vd  se  apeara  or  bajar£ 


EXERCISE  III. 

1.  do  not  complain ;  2.  my  friend  has  made  a  mistake; 
3.  why  do  you  interfere1  ?.  4.  I  shall  interfere  ;  5.  they  used 
not  to  interfere  ;  6.  has  the  man  escaped2  ?  7.  get  up  im- 
mediately3 !  8.  I  am  getting4  tired4  ;  9.  has  he  not  alighted 
yet  ?  10.  we  should  get  up  ;  11.  let  us  rejoice5 ;  12.  get  down 
(=alight)  here  ;  13.  they  have  got  married,6 

1  to  interfere,  meterse  ;    2  to  escape,  escaparse  ;    3  inmediaiamente  ; 
4  to  get  tired,  cansarse  ;  5  to  rejoice,  alegrarse  ;  6  to  get  married,  casarse.  * 


COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. 

1.  That  clerk  is  very  careless,1  but  he  thinks2- that  he 
never  makes  a  mistake.  2.  They  alighted  at  the  door3 of  the 
church.  3.  I  do  not  complain  of  this,  but4  of  that.  4.  Why 
does  that  boy  not  wash  himself  ?  5. 1  have  not  made  a  mistake 
this  time.5  6.  We  get  up  every  day  at  half  past  six.  7.  We 
shall  not  interfere  in  that.  8.  The  children  laave  behaved6 
themselves6  very  well.  9.  Your  friend,  congratulated  himself 
too7  soon.8  10.  Do  not  tire  yourselves.  11.  We  do  not  want 
[to]  tire  ourselves.  12.  Let  us  get  out  (  =  alight)  at9  this 
station.  13.  They  sold  me  some  good  tobacco,10  and  him 
some  veryb  goodb  cigars.a  14.  This  is  a  good  pupil ;  he 
rarely11  makes  a  mistake.  15.  At  what  time  do  they  get  up  ? 
16.  We  shall  alight  at  the  door3  of  the  hotel.12  17.  He 
always  gets  up  too7  late.13  18.  Don't  interfere  in  these 
matters.1*  19.  When  will  they  get  married  ?  20.  They 
have  already  got  married*  21.  Why  don't  you  get  up  ? 

1  descuidado  ;  2  creer  (to  believe)  ;  3  puerta  ;  4  sino  (see  par.  115)  ; 
5  time=iocca8ion,  vez  ;  6  comportarse  ;  7  demasiado  ;  8  pronto ;  9  =2»  ; 
10  tftbaco  ;  ILraramente  ;  12  hotel ;  13  tarde ;  J4  asunta 


61 
SEVENTEENTH    LESSON. 


THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 
A  Verb  is  made  Passive  by  changing  its  Object  into  the  Subject,  thus : 

ACTIVE  VOICE.  I  PASSIVE  VOICE. 

Our  mother  loves  us  We  are  loved  by  our  mother 

I  did  not  write  the  letter  |     The  letter  was  not  written  by  me 

103.    The  Passive  Voice  is  formed  in  Spanish  with  Ser,  the 
Past  Participle  taking  the  Gender  and  Number  of  the  Subject. 


1  (M.)  am  respected,  soy  respetado 
I  (F.)  am  respected,  soy  respetada 
will  she  be  respected  ?  i  sera  respetada  ? 
is  he  not  respected  ?  j  no  es  respetado  ? 


they  (F.)  are  not  .respected,  no 
_son  respetadas 
were  we  (M.;  not  respected  ? 
i  no  eramos  respetados  ? 


EXERCISE  I.  (on  the  PASSIVE  VOICE). 

1.  they  are  not  believed  ;     2.  are  you  (PEM.  SING.)  not 

feared  ?  3.  we  were  called  ;  4.  is  she  loved  ?  5.  the  glasses  will 

be  broken  ;  6.  the  window  was  broken  by  the  servant;  7.  the 

queen  is  loved ;    8.  am  I  not  believed  ?    9.  they  are  not  loved. 


104.    After  the  Passive  Voice,  BY  is  usually  translated  de  if  the 
Verb  expresses  a  MENTAL  action  ;  otherwise  por  is  used. 


He  was  respected  by  all  his  family 
The  houses  were  built  by  these 


masons 


Fue  respetado  de  toda  su  familia 
Las  casas  fueron  consfruidas  por' 
estos  albaniles 

105.  The  Passive  Voice  is  not  much  used  in  Spanish,  the 
Reflective  Form  (or  the  Active  Voice)  being  generally  em- 
ployed instead,  thus  : 


it  is  believed 
Spanish  spoken 
that  house  was  sold 


se  cree 


se  habla*  espanol 
esa  casa  se  vendio 


*In  such  phrases,  the  Subject  is  often  placed  after  the  Verb. 

106.  The  Reflective  Form  is  also  generally  used  in  phrases  like 
PEOPLE  BELIEVE,  THEY  (not  meaning  certain  persons) 
BELIEVE,  etc. 

they  expect,  people  expect,  it  is  expected  =  it  expects  itself,  se  espera 

NOTE.— The  Reflective  Form  should  be  avoided  if  the  Verb  expresses 
a  mental  actipn.  For  instance,  'the  Queen  is  loved'  is  better  translated 
la  reina  es  amada,  because  la  reina  &e  ama  means  *  the  Queen 
loves  herself.' 


62 


EXERCISE   II. 

(In  translating  this  ExercisS,  only  use  the  Passive  Voice  befor^BY.) 

1.  Foreign1  money  is  changed2  in  that  shop.     2.  Are  these 

'books  lent  to3  read3  ?     3.  People  believe  that  the  queen  is 

very  ill.         4.  These  oranges4  are  sold  at  sixpence  a5  dozen.6 

5.  Those  masters7  are  respected8  by  their  servants.     6.  Milkc 

.  soldbhere.a    7.  Cigars6  soldb  here.a     8.  The  box9  was  (PAST 

DEF.)  inad610  by  this  carpenter.      9.  It  .is  feared  that  the 

accident11   will  be  serious.       10.   Money   lent.       11.   The 

letters  will  be  written  by  the  clerk.        12.  It  is  hoped 

that  he  ^will  arrive  to-morrow. 

1  cxtranjero  ;    2  cambiar  ;    3  para  leer  ==for  readying')  ;   4  naranja  ; 
;  6docena  ;  7  amo  ;  Srespetar  ;  9  caja  ;  10  hecho  ;  11  accidente. 


REMARKS  ON  THE  STEM  OF  REGULAR  VERBS. 

107.  The  spelling  of  the  STEM  of  some  Regular  Verbs  is  slightly  al- 
tered in  'certain  parts  of  the  Conjugation,  so  that  the  ORIGINAL 
PRONUNCIATION  may  be  preserved.    These  alterations  are  : 
VBBBS  ENDING'IN 


car 

gar 

zar 

ceroroir 

gerorgir 

quir 


change  the  C  into  QU  before  e 
„         0   „  GU 


Z 
C 
G- 

QU 


C 
Z 
J 
C 


e 


a  or  o 


aoro 


aoro 


EXAMPLES. 

-to  look  f  or,  Jbuscar  ; 

1  looked  for,  -busque 
(.to  pay,  pagar  ; 
( let  him  pay,  que  pague 
J  to  attain,  alcanzar  ; 
( let  us  attain,  alcancemos 
j  to  conquer,  veneer  ; 
( I  conquer,  venzo  • 
J  to  direct,  diyigir; 
( let  us  direct,  dirijamos 
( tp  transgress,  delinquir  ; 
( I  trangress,  delinco 


eer  change  the^  unstressed  i  of  the  termina-  j  to  read,  leer 
tion  into  y,  whenever  it  occurs  between  •]  be  read,  Iey6 
two  vowels,—see  page  28.  I  BUT  :  he  used  to  read,  leia 

EXERCISE  III. 

1.  they  believed  ;  2.  let  us  pay1  ;  3.  Do  not  let  us  pick2 
it  up3  ;  4.  I  attained3 ;  5.  Let  us  touch4 ;  6.  let  him  pick2 
it  up2  ;  7.  do  I  conquer5  ?  8.  he  read  ;  9.  I  did  not  read  ; 
10.  I  enjoyed6  ;  11.  touch4  them ;  12.  do  not  touch  (PLUR.) 
them  ;  13.  do  not  arrive  too  late  ;  14.  pay1  me ;  15.  let 


63 

him  pay  ;  16.  I  touched  ;  17.  Let  us  conquer5  this  difficulty. 
18.  Pick2  up2  thac  apple.  19.  Let  us  look  for  a  cab.  20. 
Direct7  the  letters.  21.  Do  not  touch  those  books. 

1  pagar ;  2  recoger ;  3  alcanzar  ;  4  tocar  ;  5  veneer  ;  6  gozar  ;  7  dirigir. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. 

1.  Newspapers  sold  here.  2.  Pay  the  carpenter.1  3.  This 
window  was  not  broken  yesterday.  4.  I  arrived  [on]  the 
tenth  of  December.  5.  As2  soon  as2  I  overtook3  him,  I  spoke 
to  him.  6.  Pick  up  that  stone  ;  I  want  [to]  examine4  it. 
7.  They  believed  that  I  had  made  a  mistake.  8.  Without 
doubt5  the  parcels6  will  be  found  by  the  boy.  9.  The  message* 
was  sent  to  the  captains.  10.  Let  us  take8  hold  of8  this  rail9 ; 
the  staircase10  is  not  very  safe.11  11.  Do  not  let  us  touch  the 
papers,  because  we  shall  disarrange12  them.  12.  He  addressed18 
himself  to  his  friend,  but  received  no  answer.14  13.  It  is 
believed  that  a  ship  has  been  wrecked.15  14.  A  good 
mother  is  loved  by  her  children.  15.  They  were  wounded 
by  the  soldiers.  16.  It  is  doubted16  whether17  he  will  ha<ve 
enough  patience.  17.  I  advanced18  carefully  towards- 

the  horse's  head.19  18.  People  believed  (IMPERF.)  that  the 
message7  had  arrived.  19.  Luggage20  is  not  received  here. 

1  carpintero  ;  2  luego  que  or  tan  pronto  como  ;  3  alcanzar  ;  4  examinar ; 
5  duda  ;  6  paquete  ;  7  parte  ;  8  coger;  9  barandilla  ;  10  escalera* ;  11  seguro  ; 
12  desarreglar;  13  dirigir  ;  14  contestation ;  15  to  be  wrecked,  nau- 
fragar ;  JL6  dudar ;  17  si ;  18  avanzar  ;  19  cabeza  ;  20  equipajes  (PLUR.> 

EIGHTEENTH    LESSON. 


VERBS  SLIGHTLY  IRREGULAR. 

108.  Many  Verbs  change  the  VOWEL  OF  THE  STEM  whenever  it 
takes  the  STRESS,*  but  are  otherwise  quite  Regular.  These 
Verbs  consist  of  the  following  two  classes  f 

(1)  Verbs  which  change  the  E  of  the  Stem  to  IE 

(2)  „  „        O      „          „      UE 

*  i.e.,  in  all  the  Persons  of  the  Singular,  and  in  the  Third  Person  Plural, 
of  the  IMPERATIVE,  PRESENT  INDICATIVE  and  PRESENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Tbe  remaining  Tenses  are  perfectly  Regular,  as  the  Stress  is  ON  THE  TER- 
MINATION,—see  par.  60. 


64 


EXAMPLES, 
to  shut,  cerrar ;  to  lose,  perder  ;  to  cost%  costar ;  to  move,  mover.' 


SINGULAR.. 

PLURAL. 

/I  shut,  etc.,   cierro     cierra 

cerramos 

cierran 

PRES.  INDIC. 

1  1  lose,  etc.,     pierdo    pierde 
1  1  cost,  etc.     cuesto    cuesta 

perdemos 
costamos 

pierden 
cuestan 

VI  move,  etc.,  muevo    mueve 

movemos 

mueven 

rshut,  etc  *            cierre 

cerremos 

cierren 

IMPERATIVE 

1  lose,  etc.,              pierda 
1  cost,  etc.,            cueste 

perdamos 
costemos 

pierdan 
cuesten 

Vmovc,etc.,            nmeva 

movamos 

muevan 

{that  I  shut,  etc.,    cierre 

cerremos 

cierren 

PRES.  SUBJ. 

„    I  lose,  etc.,     pierda 
„   I  cost,  .etc.,    cueste 

perdamos 
costemos 

pierdan 
cuesten 

„   I  move,  etc.    mueva 

movamos 

muevan 

The  Familiar  Form  changes  the  stem  vowel  in  the  Singular,  being 
stressed  (cierras,  piercles,  etc.)  ;  fbut  not  in  the  Plural,  as  the  termination 
takes  the  Stress  (cerrais,  perdeis,  etc.). 

THE  CONJUGATION  OP  THESE  VERBS  REQUIRES  NO  LEARNING,  their , 
terminations  being  perfectly  regular.  When  once  it  is  known  that  the 
Verb  belongs  to  one  of  these  groups,  it  is  simply  necessary  to  change 
the  stressed  vowel  of  the  stem  always, — the  unstressed  vowel  never. 

Complete  lists  of  these  groups  are  given  in  Hugo's  '  Spanish  Verbs 
Simplified.' 

109.     The  following  are  the  principal  Verbs  conjugated  like 
cerrar  or  perder : 


to  begin,  empezar 
to  commence,  comeuzar 
to  defend,  defender 
to  deny,  negar 


to  freeze,  helar* 
to  light,  encender   [dar 
to  recommend,  recomen- 
to  sit  down,  sentarse 


to  snow,  nevar* 

to  think,  pensai 

to  understand,entender 

to  warm,  calentar 


110.    The  following  are  the  principal  Verbs  conjugated  like 
costar  or  moveir : 


to  approve,  aprobar 

to  dream,  sofiar 

to  fly,  volar 

to  go  to  bed,  acostarse 


to  remember,  acordarse 
to  return,  comeback,  vol- 
to  show,  mostrar        [ver 
to  thunder,  trouar* 


to  meet,  encontrar 
to  prove,  probar 
to  rain,  llover  * 
to  relate,  contar 

'Impersonal  Verbs  are  only  used  in  the  3rd  Pers.  Sing., — see  par.  129. 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  let  us  shut  ;  2.  do  not  shut ;  3.  it  costs  ;  4.  they 
cost ;  5.  I  do  not  move  ;  6.  do  we  move  ?  7.  they  lose  ; 
8,  we  do  not  lose  ;  9.  it  rains  ;  10.  is  it  not  raining  ?  11. 
I  shall  return ;  12.  were  you  not  relating  ?  13.  does  the 


childlifibw  ?  14."dolT6t  show  us ;  ISrwe  should  think  ; 
16.  do  you  think  ?  17. 1  do  not  deny  it.  18.  show  me  ;  19. 
let  us  sit  down  ;  20,  Why  do  you  not  sit  down  ?  21.  Do 
you  think1  (that)  it  will  freeze  to-morrow  ?  22.  Let  us  return 
home2 ;  itb  will  rainb  soon.a  23.  If3  I  meet  him,  I  shall  speak 
to  him.  24.  They  would  come  back  at  half  past  nine.  25. 
It  does  not  thunder  now.  26.  Why  does  not  your  servant 
come  back  ?  27.  If  they  deny  it,  I  shall  not  believe  them.  28. 
Has  he  not  lighted  the  fire  yet  ?  1  use  creer ;  2  &  casa  ;  3  si. 


REMARKS  ON  PREPOSITIONS  AND  CONJUNCTIONS. 

111.  Verbs  immediately  preceded  by  a  Preposition  must  be  in" 
the  Infinitive ;  as, 

in  speaking,  en  hablar  |  without  arriving  late,  sin  llegar  tarde 

before  reading,  antes  de  leer  |  after  having  seen,despu6s  de  haber  visto 

112.  FOR    (para)   is    translated    por  when    referring   to  an 
EXCHANGE  or  EQUIVALENT  ;  i.e.,  when  meaning  in  exchange 
for,  in  return  for  : 


He  has  given  me  his  watch  for  mine. 
I  shall  change  this  shilling  for  twelve 
pennies. 


Me  ha  dado  su  reloj  por  el  xnio. 
Cambiar6  este  chelin  por  doce 
peniques. 


113.  AND  (y)  is  translated  6  before  words  commencing  with  i  pr 
lli  :  as, 

He  is  very  clever  and  ingenious.        I  Es  muy  habil  e  ingenioso. 
The*  poems  and  stories  of  this  author.  |  Laspoesias  6  historias  de  este 

escritor. 

114.  OR  (6)  is  translated  u  before  words  commencing  with  o  or 
hO;  as, 

Lend  me  seven  or  eight  pounds.        [  Presteme  Vd.  siete  u  ocho  libras 
Did  you  break  it  yesterday  or  to-day?  |  i  Lo  rompio  Vd.  ayer  u  hoy? 

115.  BUT  (pero)  is  translated  sino  after  a  Negation,  unless 
a  Verb  follows  ;  as, 


I  have  not  seen  him,  but  his  wife. 
BUT — I  have  not  seen  him,but  I  have 
seen  his  partner. 


No  le  he  visto  a  el,  sino  a  su  es- 

posa.  [&  su  socio. 

No  le  he  visto  a  61,  pero  he  visto 


116.    The  Conjunction  que  (that)  should  not  be  omitted  in 
Spanish;  as, 
I  am  sure  it  does  not  freeze.       |     Estoy  seguro  que  no  hieia. 


C6 

.  EXERCISE"  11^ 

I.  in  working;  2.  after1  having  waited;  3.  silver  or 
gold  ;  4.  sons  and  daughters  ;  5.  sons  or  daughters  ;  6. 
before2  starting  ;  7.  without  drinking  ;  8.  before2  lending 
it ;  9,  brothers  and  sisters  ;  10.  after  having  shown  me  his 
music3  and  instruments4;  11.  in  showing  them  to  him; 
12.  ten  or  eleven  ^hillings  ;  13.  Change  this  cup  for  the 
other.  14.,  It  is  not  my  fault,5  but  his.  15.  The  boat  has 
uot  arrived  to-day,  but  perhaps  it  will  arrive  to-morrow» 

1  despu&  de  ;  2  antes  de  ;   3  iniisica  j   4  instrumento  ;   5  culpa, 

COLLECTIVE    EXERCISE. 

1.  His  master1  does  not  approve  [of]  his  conduct.2  2. 
Before  recommending  the  book,  I  shall  examine  it.  .3.  They 
bought  it  without  examining  it,  4.  I  believed  it  would  rain. 
5.  After  having  sat  down,  I  related  the  facts3  and  incidents4 
of  my  voyage.  6.  Is  your  room  light5  or  dark6  ?  7.  He  did 
not  show  his  ticket7  to  me,  but  to  you.  8.  Do  you  deny  that 
the  discoveries8  and  inventions9  of  this  century10  have  been 
very  useful11  ?  9.  Let  us  begin  now.  10.  Do  not  begin 
yet ;  I  am  not  ready.  It.  Do  not  light  the  fire  in  my  room, 
but  shut  the  windows.  12.  If  I  return  in  time,  I  will  explain 
&11  my  opinions12  and  ideas.13  13.  Show  me  what14  you 
have  in  your  (translate  :  the)  hand.  14.  I  have  seven  or 
eight  shillings  in  my  pocket.15  15.  He  sold  me  his  ring  for 
sixty  dollars,  16.  He  returned  last16  week.1G  17*  Do  not 
come  back  without  speaking  to  him.  18.  Warm  yourself 
before  starting,  19.  How  much  did  you  receive  for  your 
watch  ?  g£).  After  having  done  their  work,  they  will  come 
back,  21.  He  recommended  a  grammar17  to  us,  but  we  have 
forgotten  the  title,18  22.  My  breakfast19  costs  me  about20  two 
shillings  a21  day.  23.  Mine  costs  me  more. 

1  amo  ;42  conducta  ;  3  hecho  ;  4  incidente  ;  5  claro  ;  6  obscuro  ;  7  billetc  ; 
8  descubrimiento  ;  9  invenci6n  ;  lOsiglo  :  11  litil ;  12  opinion  ;  13  idea  ;  14 
lo  que  (=  that  v:hich)  ;  15  bolsillo  ;  16  la  semana  pasada  ;  17  gramatica; 
18  titulo  ;  19  almuerzo  ;  20  aproximadamente  ;  21=eacA. 


C7 
mNETEENTH    LESSONl 

IRREGULrAR  VERBS. 

117.  Verbs  which  differ  in  any  respect  from  the  regular  Con- 
jugations, either  in  stem  or  termination,  are  called  IRREGULAR. 
Even  the  irregularities,  however,  are  subject  to  certain  rules  ; 
and  when  these  rules  are  mastered,  the  Irregular  Verbs  present 
little  difficulty.     The  following  are  the  chief  points  to  be 
remembered  :— 

I. — The  Termination's  of  every  Tense  except  the  PRESENT 
INDICATIVE  are  QUITE4  REGULAR.* 

II. — The  Stem  of  the  IMPERFECT  is  regular. 

Exceptions  :  ir,  to  go  ;  ver,  to  see  ;  ser,  to  be. 
III. — The  PAST  DEFINITE  follows  the  Rule  in  Paragraph  52.f 

Exception  :  ir,  to  go,  the  Past  Definite  of  which  is  the  same  as  that  of  ser. 
IV. — The  IMPERATIVE  (polite  form)  is  formed  by  changing 
the  final  vowel  of  the  FIRST  PERSON  SINGULAR  of  the  PRESENT 
INDICATIVE. 

Exceptions  :  ir,  to  go  ;  dar,  to  give  ;  saber,  to  know. 

V. — The  CONDITIONAL  and  SUBJUNCTIVE  are  always  formed 
according  to  the  Rules  in  Paragraphs  64,  78,  79, — no  exceptions. 

i^T  Therefore,  to  be  able  to  conjugate  any  Irregular  Verb  in 
full,  the  Student  WHO  HAS  LEARNT  THE  REGULAR  CONJUGATIONS, 

AND  THE  ABOVE  RULES, 

need  only  know  the  irregularities  in  the  PRESENT  INDICATIVE,  the 
FUTURE  and  PAST  DEFINITE  STEMS,  the  Singular  (familiar  form) 
of  the  IMPERATIVE,  and  the  PARTICIPLES. 

We  now  proceed  to  give  the  important  Irregular  Verbs.  All  the  irregu- 
larities are  printed  in  thick  type,  the  few  exceptions  to  the  above  Rules 
being  indicated  by  CAPITALS,  and  given  in  this  lesson.  TENSES  FORMED 
ACCORDING  TO  OUR  RULES  ARE  OMITTED  HERE;  the  full  conjugation  of  every 
Irregular  Verb  is  giveu  for  reference  in  Hugo's  *  Spanish  Verbs  Simplified.' 

118.  to  give,  dar. 

PRES.  INDIC.  I  give,  etc.,  doy,  das,  da  ;   damos,  dais,  dan. 

PAST  DEF.      I  gave,  etc.,  di,  diste,  dio  ;  dimos,  disteis,  dieron. 

*  Excepting  also  the  Singular  (familiar  form)  of  the  Imperative,  the  final 
vowel  of  which  is  sometimes  omitted. 

f  A  few  Verbs  ending  in  ir  change  the  Vowel  of  the  Stem  in  the  Third 
Person  of  the  Past  Definite.  These  will  be  found  ia  the  23rd  Lesson. 


119.  to  know,  saber. 

PRES.  INDIC.  I  know,  etc.,  se,  sabes,  sabe  ;  sabemos,  sabe'is,  saben. 
PAST  DBF*      I  knew,  etc.,  supe,  snpiste,  supo  ;  supimos,  supisteis,  supieron 
FUTURE          I  shall  know,  etc.,  sabre*,  sabrds,  sabra  ;  sabremos,  sabreis. 
IMPERATI1  E  know,  etc.,  sabe,  sEPa  ;  sepamos,  sabed,  sepan.        [sabrani 

120.  to  go,  ir  (to  go  away,  irse). 
PRES.  PARTIO.  going,  yendo.        PAST  PARTIC.  gone,  ido. 
PRES.  INDIC.     I  go,  etc.,  voy,  vas,  va  ,-  vamos,  vais,  van. 

IMPERFECT        I  used  to  go,  etc.,  iBa,  ibas,  iba  ;    ibamos,  ibais,  iban. 

PAST  DEF.         I  went,  etc.,  fuf,  fuiste,  fuE  ;    fuimog,  fuisteis,  fueron. 
IMPERATIVE     go,  etc.,  Ve,  VAYa  ;  vamos,  id,  vayan. 

121.  Such  phrases  as  *  I  am  going '  cannot  be  rendered   by 
yendo  preceded  by  part  of  estar.    The  simple  Tense  of  ir 
must  be  used,  thus  : 

Was  be  not  going  to  speak  ?    i  No  iba  el  a  hablar  ? 

122.  TO  or  AND,  if  preceded  by  part  of  ir,  and  followed  by 
another  Verb,  is  translated  &. 

I  am  going  to  smoke,  voy  a  fumar  ;  go  and  look  for  it,  Vaya  a  buscarlo. 

EXERCISE  L 

1.  I  gave  ;  2.  I  shall  not  give  ;  3.  do  you  know  ?  4.  he 
did  not  go  ;  5.  will  they  know  ?  6.  I  do  not  give  ;  7.  they 
knew  ;  8.  let  us  go  ;  9.  I  do  not  know ; .  10.  going ;  11. 1 
go  ;  12.  you  used  not  to  give  ;  13.  used  they  to  kno\y  ?  14. 
go  away  !  15.  do  you  go  away  ?  16.  we  do  not  give  ;  17.  do 
not  give  (PLUR.)  ;  18.  know  !  19.  go  away  (PLUR.)  !  20.  Let 
us  give  him  this  grammar.  21.The  professor  is  giving  a'lesson. 
22.  Go  (PLUR.)  to  his  house  the1  day  after  to-morrow.1  23. 
Give  it  to  us  soon.  24.  We  gave  it  to  you  last2  week.2  25. 
Will  your  cousin  not  go  to-night3  ?  26.  Do  you  know  it  ? 
27.  I  do  not  know  who  has  gone  to  buy  them. 

i  pasado  manana  ;  2  la  semana  pasada  (  past)  ;  3=this  night. 

123.  to  say,  to  tell,  decir. 

PRES.  PARTIC.  saying,  diciendo  ;    PAST  PARTIC.  said,  dicho. 

PRES.  INDIC.  I  say,  etc.,  digo,  dices,  dice  ;  decimos,  decis,  dicen. 

PAST  DEF.  I  said,  etc.,  dije,  dijiste,  dijo ;    dijimos,  dijisteis,  dyeron. 

FUTURE  I  shall  say,  etc.,  dire\  diras,  dira  ;  diremos,  dir^is, dir&n. 

IMPERATIVE  say,  etc.,  dl,  diga ;  digamos,  decid,  digaru 


124.  to  see,  ver. 

PBES.  PARTIC.  seeing,  viendo  ;    PAST  PARTIC.    seen,  visto ; 

PRES.  INDIC.  I  see,  etc.,  veo,  ves,  ve  ;     vemos,  veis,  ven. 

IMPERFECT  I  used  to  see,  etc.,  vEia,  velas,  vela  ;  veiamos,  veiais,  veiah. 

IMPERATIVE  see,  etc.,   ve,  vea  ;   veamos,  ved,  v'ean. 

125.  to  err,  errar  (very  rarely  employed). 

PRES.  INDIC.      I  err,  etc.,    yerro,  yerras,  yerra  ;  erramos,  errais,  yerrari. 
IMPERATIVE      err,  etc.,  Yerra,  yerre  ;   erremos,  errad,  yerren. 

EXERCISE  II. 

1.  let  us  see  ;  2.  they  said  ;  3.  I  do  not  see  ;  4.  shall 
we  not  tell  ?  5.  they  say  ;  6.  he  used  to  see ;  7.  we  do  not 
see  ;  8.  what  is  he  saying  ?  9.  you  saw  ;  10.  we  have  told  ; 
11.  do  not  say  ;  12.  seeing  ;  13.  did  we  say  ?  14.  do  not  see  ; 
15.  I  do  not  say  ;  16.  Go  and  see  who  is  in  the  garden.  17. 
Tell  me  whether  you  are  tired.  18.  He  has  told  me  nothing. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. 

1.  The  captain  did  not  give  anything  to  the  sailors.  2. 
They  told  me  that  their  clerk  had  no  experience.1  3.  Let  us 
tell  them  what2  we  think.  4.  I  do  not  kno\y  whether  they 
go  every  day  by  rail.3  5.  When  I  go  into4  the  country,  I  see 
them.  6.  Let  us  see  who  has  gone  home.  7.  He  does  not 
understand  what2  they  are  saying.  8.  I  am  going  to  explain 
it  to  him.  9.  We  are  going  to  see  our  uncle.  10.  Go  and  see 
who  is  at  the  door.  11.  He  used  to  know  several  languages,5 
but  he  has  forgotten  them.  12.  Tell  me  when  he  will  come 
back.  13.  Why  do  they  not  tell  us  the  truth6  ?  14.  Go  home  ; 
your  father  wants  to  see  you.  15.  If  I  see  the  man,  I  will 
tell  him  what2  you  want.  16.  We  went  to  London  last7  year/ 
17.  They  used  often  to  go  to  the  theatre.8  18.  We  never  see 
our  friends  until9  (the)  evening.10  19.  Why  do  you  not  give 
him  a  chair  ?  20.  Who  told  her  that  ?  21. 1  tell  you  it  is 
true.11  22.  When  I  saw  him,  he  was  going  home.  23.  I  shall 
soon  know  it.  24.  I  never  give  it  to  him.  25.  I  shall  go  to  the 
station  to-morrow.  26.  Do  not  give  it  to  him,  but  to  me. 

1  experiencia  ;  2  what-=that  which  is  translated  4  lo  quc  '  ;  3  ferro- 
carril  ;  4=/o  ;  5  idioma  (MASC.)  ;  6  verdad  ;  7  el  afio  pasado  ;  8  teatro ; 
9  hasta  ;  10  nocbe OEM.)  ;  \\=ztruth>  verdad. 


70 
TWENTIETH    LESSON. 


126.  to  do,  to  make,  nacer. 

PAST  PARTIC.  done,  made,  hecho. 

PRES.  INDIC.  I  do,  I  make,  etc.,  bago,  haces,  hace  ;  hacemos,  hace'is,  hacen. 

PAST  DEF.  1  did,  J  made,  etc.,  hice,  hiciste,bizo  ;  hicimos,  hicisteis,  hi- 

FUTURE  I  shall  do  or  make,  etc.,  hare\  haras,  hara,  etc.            [cieron 

IMPERATIVE  do,  make,  etc.,  haz,  haga  ;    hagamos,  haced,  hagan. 

127.  to  put,  poner. 

PAST  PARTIC.  put,  puesto. 

PRES.  INDIC.  I  put,  etc.,  pongo,  pones,  pone  ;  ponemos,  pond's,  pdhen, 

PAST  DEF.  I  put,  etc.,  puse,  pusiste,  puso  ;     pusimos,  pusisteis,  pu- 

FUTURE  I  shall  put,  etc.,  pondr£,  etc.  [sieron 

IMPERATIVE  put,  etc.,  pon,  ponga  ;  pongamos,  poned,  pongan. 

128.  to  be  worth,  valer. 

PRES.  INDIC,      I  am  worth,  etc.,  valgo,  vales,  vale  ;  valemos,  valets,  valen. 

FUTURE  I  shall  be  worth,  etc.,  valdxe',  etc. 

IMPERATIVE     be  worth,  etc.,  val  or  vale,  valga  ;  valgamos,  valed,  valgan. 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  he  would  put ;  2.  I  do  not  make  ;  3.  let  us  do  ;  4.  do 
not  put  (PLUR.)  ;  5.  am  I  worth  ?  6.  they  are  not  worth  ; 
7.  you  have  put ;  8.  we  shall  make  ;  9.  will  it  be  worth  ? 
10.  putting  ;  11.  they  did  not  make  ;  12.  we  do  ;  13.  did 
you  put  ?  14.  I  do  not  put ;  15.  let  us  be  worth  ;  1C., 
would  it  not  be  worth  ?  17.  Where  shall  we  put  them  ?  18. 
Do  not  do  it  yet.  19.  Put  them  in  the  corner.  20.  Does  he 
put  his  letters  here  ?  21.  He  used  not  to  maKe  them,  22.  What 
have  you  done  this  morning  ?  23. 1  am  not  doing  any  thing 

IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

129.  Impersonal  Verbs  have  no  person  or  thing  as  their  subject, 
and  are  only  used  in  the  Third  Person  Singular ;  as, 

it  is  growing  dark,  anochece  it  is  raining,  llueve 

it  does  not  appear,  no  parece  it  thunders,  truena 

130.  Impersonal  expressions  are  frequently  constructed   with 
liacer,  ser,  and  other  Verbs.'   Note  the  following  : 

it  is  hot,  hace  oalor ;  it  is  cold,  hace  frio  ;    it  is  windy,  hace  viento 
it  is  certain,  es  cierto;  it  is  true,  es  verdad  ;  it  is  necessary,  es  menester 

All  such  phrases  can  of  course  be  vised  in  any  Tense,  negatively  and  inter- 
rogatively, thus  :  will  it  be  windy  ?  i  hard  viento  ?  it  was  not  true,  no. 
era  verdad  ;  is  it  not  cold  ?  i  no  hace  frio  ? 


71 

13J.  THERE  is,  ARE,  WAS,  WERE,  WILL  BE,  WOULD  BE,  etc.,  are 
translated  by  the  Third  Person  Singular  of  haber  ;  but  in 
the  Present  Tense,  hay  is  used  instead  of  ha.  Examples  : 


there  is,  there  are,  hay 


there  is  not,  there  are  not,  no  hay 


is  there  not  ?  are  there  not  1  i  no  hay  ? 
there  was  or  were  not,  no  habia 


is  there  ?  are  there  1  i  hay  ? 

will  there  be  1  i  habra  ? 
there  would  be  a  great  many  men  there,  habria  alii  muchos  hombres 
there  is  no  ink  or  there  is  not  any  ink,  no  hay  tinta 
there  will  not  have  been  time,  no  habra  habido  tiempo 
NOTE. — hay  simply  expresses  EXISTENCE.    If  anything  has  to  be  POINTED 
OUT  alii  esta  (there  is),  or  alii  estan  (there  are)  is  employed. 

132.  If  SOME,  ANY  (not  followed  by  a  Noun),  or  NONE,  is 
preceded  by  THERE  is,  WAS,  WILL  BE,  etc.,  it  is  translated  like 
IT  or  THEM.  Examples  : 


We  shall  buy  some  cakes,  if  there  are 

any.  {none. 

I  looked  for  some  inkj  but  there  was 


Compraremos  algunos  paste- 

les,  si  los  hay. 
Busque  tinta,  pero  no  la  habia. 


133.    AGO  is  translated  hace  (or  h£*),  thus : 

a  month  ago,  hace  un  mes  ;     three  years  ago,  hace  tres  auos 
*  ha  can  only  be  used  at  the  end  of  the  sentence  ;  as, 

a  long  time  ago,  mucho  tiempo  ha 

EXERCISE  II. 

1.  twenty  years  ago  ;  2.  it  would  be  worth  more ;  3. 
there  is  no  difficulty  ;  4.  there  is  your  hat. ;  5.  was*  it  [the 
weather]  hot  ?  6.  there  was*  no  chair  ;  7.  was*  there  a 
train  ?  8.  will  it  not  be  worth  ?  9.  an  hour  ago  ;  10.  there 
are  our  cousins  ;  11.  is  it  not  certain  ?  12.  will  it  be  windy  ? 
13.  there  will  not  be  enough  bread  ;  14.  it  is  not  hot  to-day  ; 
15.  there  was*  no  mistake  ;  16.  is  it  [the  weather]  cold  ?  17. 
was*  it  not  worth  more  ?  18.  is  there  [any]  water  ?  19.  there 
is  the  station  ;  20.  six  months  ago  ;  21.  He  wanted*  [some] 
money,  but  he  had*  none. 


134.    mucho  (much)  is  used  with  VERBS  and  NOUNS. 

it  was  very  hot=it  made  much  heat      hacia  mucho  calor 
it  is  not  very  windy=it  does  not  make  much  wind,  no  hace  mucho  viento 
Jie  has  not  hurt  me  much  no  me  ha  lastimado  mucho 

*  Use  the  Imperfect  in  all  these  cases, — see  Note  on  page  44. 


136.    muy  (very)~is  used  with  ADVERBS  and  ADJECTIVES,  and 
with  Past  Participles  used  as  ADJECTIVES.!     Examples  : 

Are  you  much  hurt  7  i  i  Esta  Vd.  muy  lastimado  ? 

The  window  was  not  much  broken.     I  La  ventana  no  estaba  muy  rota. 
The  prince  is  much  beloved.  I  El  principe  es  muy  amado. 

fi.e.,  when  the  Past  Participle  is  preceded  by  part  of  ser  or  estar. 

m-ucho  is  used  instead  of  muy  when  the  Participle  or  Adjective  PRECEDES  : 
they  are  celebrated,  but  not  very,  son  celebrados,  pero  no  mucho 

136.  tan  (see  par.  49)  follows  the  same  Rules  as  muyyand 
tanto  the  same  Rules  as  mucho  ;  as, 

it  is  not  so  certain  no  63  tan  segUTO 

it  is  as  cold=it  makes  as  much  cold     hace  tanto  frio 

137.  Adjectives  qualified  by  muy  follow  the  Noun,  thqs : 

it  is  a. good  pen          es  una  buena  pluma 
BUT— it  is  a  very  good  pen  es  una  pluma  muy  buena 

EXERCISE  III. 

1.  they  are  much  esteemed  ;  2.  are  you  (FEM.)  fatigued1  ? 
not  very  ;  3.  a  bad  boy  ;  4.  a  very  bad  boy  ;  5.  is  it  as  windy 
as  [it  was]  yesterday  ?  6.  I  am  not  so  satisfied  as  you  ;  7.  a 
very  celebrated2  painter3 ;  8.  It  will  be  very  cold  ;  9.  Was 
it  not  very  hot  ?  10.  He  was  not  much  applauded4.  11.  Is 
the  queen  much  loved  ?  12.  I  have  not  so  much  money. 
13.  He  was  as  much  hated5  as  his  father. 

1  fatigar  ;    2  celebre  i     3  pintor  ;    4  aplaiidir ;    5  odiar. 

COLLECTIVE    EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  me  the  favor1  to  wait  a  little.  2.  Is  this  picture 
worth  as  much  as  the  other  ?  3.  There  were  several2  child- 
ren who  were  making  [a]  noise.  4.  Put  [some]  wine  on  the 
table.  5.  I  hope  it  will  not  be  so  windy.  6.  I  shall  do  it  to- 
morrow, if  I  have  time.  7.  This  beautiful3  f urnitureb  was 
made  a  hundred  years  ago.  8.  He  will  put  some  flowers  in 
the  window.  9.  The  king  is  not  so  much  esteemed  as  the 
queen.  10.  I  believe  it  will  be  very  hot  to-morrow.  11.  I 
put  them  in  the  box  a  week  ago.  12.  There  is  no  room3  to4 
put  our  hats,  13.  Have  you  put  it  here  ?  14.  There  is  ths 


78 

stick  ;  give  it  to  him.  15.  There  will  not  be  enough  time  to4 
do  it.  16.  I  never  do  it.  17.  There  was  one  picture  which 
was  very  much  admired5.  18.  Those  are  the  pictures  that 
were  so  much  admired.  19.  The  travellers6  were  (IMPERP.) 
tired,  but  not  very.  20.  I  have  not  put  anything  in  the 
boxes.  21.  What  is  he  putting  inside7  the  drawer  ?  22. 
Why  does  he  not  do  his  work  ?  23.  I  put  it  there  now. 

1  favor  ;  2  varies  ;  3  sitio  ;  4  para  ;  5  admirar  ;  6  viajero  ;  7  dentro  de. 


TWENTY-FIRST   LESSON. 

138.  to  be  willing  to,  to  like  or  wish  to,  to  like  to  have,  querer. 

PRES,  INDIC.      1  wish,  I  am  willing,  etc.,  quiero,  quieres,  quiere  ;   quere- 
mps,  quere*is,  quieren.  [mos,  quisisteis,  quisieron. 

PAST  DEF.         I  wished,  I  was  willing,  etc.,  quise,  quisiste,  quiso  ;  quisi- 
FUTURE  I  shall  wish,  I  shall  be  willing,  etc.,  querre*,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE     wish,  etc.,  quiere,  quiera  ;  queramos,  quered,  quieran. 

WILL  in  the  sense  of  TO  BE  WILLING  TO  is  translated  by  querer  ;  as. 
Will  you  lend  me  your  umbrella  1 1  Quiere  Vd.  prestarme  su  paraguas? 

139.  to  be  able  to,  poder. 

PRES.  PARTIC.  being  able,  pudiendo. 

PRES.  INDIC.     I  can,  I  am  able  to,  etc.,  puedo,  puedes,  puede  ;  podemos, 
pode*is,  pueden.  [pudisteis,  pudieron. 

PAST  DEP.         t  could,  I  was  able  to,  etc.,  pude,  pudiste,  pudo  ;  pudimos, 
FUTURE  I  shall  be  able  to,  etc.t  poctre*,  etc. 

140.  CAN  (and  sometimes  MAY)  is  translated  by  the  Present 
Tense  of  poder  ;  as, 

We  cannot  see  the  light.     I     No  podemos  ver  la  luz. 
May  I  speak  to  you  ?          J     i  Puedo  hablarle  a  Vd.  ? 

141.  COULD  is  translated  by  the  Past  of  poder  : 

Could  you  find  the  house  ?        |     i  Pudo  Vd.  fcallar  la  casa  ? 
They  could  not  come  yesterday,  f     No  pudieron  venir  ayer. 
COULD=SHOULD  or  WOULD  BE  ABLE  TO  is  rendered  by  the  Conditional 
of  poder :        they  could  come  to-morrow,  podriazf*  venir  manana. 

When  CAN,  COULD,  SHALL  BE  ABLE,  etc.,  referjJo  an  accomplishment 
that  has  to  be  ACQUIRED,  saber  is  usually  employed  instead  of  poder. 
Can  you  swim  ?  i  Sabe  Vd.  nadar  ?      I  cannot  paint,  No  se  pintar. 
They  could  not  (=s*lid  not  know  how  to)  write,  No  sabian  escribir. 


74 


EXERCISE  I. 

1.  liking ;  2.  I  do  not  want  to  ;  3.  was  he  able  to  ?  i.  we 
shall  not  be  willing  to  ;  5.  can  he  ?  6.  wilj  they  not  like.to.? 
7.  were  you  willing  to  ?  8.  we  could  (==  were  able  to)  ;  9.  we 
could  (=  should  be  able  to)  ;  10.  being  able  to ;  11.  do  you 
(PLUR.)  not  wish  to  ?  12.  I  used  to  be  able  to  ;  13.  we  do 
not  wish  to  ;  14.  he  will  not  be  able  to  ;  15.  would  she  like 
to  ?  16.  may  we  ?  17.  you  cannot ;  18.  they  used  to  like  to  ; 
19.  will  you  ?  20.  would  she  not  be  able  to  ?  21 ,  we  cannot  i 
22.  You  cannot  doubt  it.  23. 1  was  not  able  to  arrive  in  time* 
24.  He  could  not  speak  Spanish.  25.  Can't  the  child  read  ?;' 

TRANSLATION  OF  "TO"  BEFORE  AN  INFINITIVE. 

The  second  of  two  Verbs  coming  together  must  be  in  the 
Infinitive*  ;  as, 

I  am  beginning  to  understand  it.       I  Empiezo  a  comprenderlo. 
Do  not  forget  to  send  them  to  us.       [   No  olvide  Vd.  de  enviafnoslos, 
*  The  Auxiliaries  c  to  be '  and  '  to  have '  are  immediately  followed  by  a 
Participle  ;  but  this  Rule  is  otherwise  invariable. 

TO  before  an  Infinitive  is  generally  translated  de,  unless 
meaning  IN  ORDER  TO,  when  it  is  rendered  by  para. 


It  is  time  to- begin. 

I  shall  not  refuse  to  give  it  to  him. 

That    gentleman   was   waiting   (in 

order)  to  see  you. 
He  said  it  to  prove  I  had  made  a 

mistake. 
Did  he  bring  the  pictures  to  sell 

them  to  you  7 

143.    TO  is  translated   £  after  certain  Verbs,  of  which  the 
principal  are  the  following  : 


Es  tiempo  de  em^ezar. 

No  rehusare  de  darselo. 

Ese    caballero   estaba    espe- 

rando  para  verle. 
Lo    dijo  para  probar  que  me 

habia  equivocado. 
I  Ha  traido  los  cuadros  para. 

venderselos  a  Vd.  ? 


to  authorize,  autorizar 

to  begin,  empezar 

to  commence,  comenzar 


to  learn,  aprender 
to  persuade,  persuadir 
to  teacb,  ensenar 


to  continue,  contin li- 
ar        fconvidar 
to    invite,    invitar, 
Also  Verbs  of  MOTION,  such  as  : 

to  run,  correr  ;     to  go  out,  salir  (IEREG.)  ;    to  walk,  andar  (IRREQ.) 
to  come  back,  volver  (IRREG.)  ;      to  come,  venir  (IRREG.), 


The  ladies  began  to  sing. 
I  shall  teach  him  to  write. 
He  ran  to  see  who  was  there. 


Las  senoras  empezaron  dcantar. 
Le  ensenare  a  escribir. 
Corrio  a  ver  quien  estaba  alii. 


NOTE.— Paragraphs  121  and  122  apply  to  all  Verbs  of  MOTION  ,  as, 
He  is  coming  to  see  me  to-night.    Viene  a  verme  eeta  noche. 


75 

144.    TO  is  not  translated  at  all  after  certain  Verbs,  of  which  the 

principal  are  the  following  : 
to  be  able,  poder  to  make,  hacer 


to  allow,  to  let,  dejar 

to_aj)pear,  parecer 

"todesire,  to  want,  desear 

to  fear,  temer 

to  feel,  sentir 

to  hear,  oir 

to  hope,  esperar 

to  intend,  intentar 


to  know  (how  to),  saber 

EXAMPLES. 


to  order,  to  command,  mandar 
to  owe  (must,  ought),  deber 
to  permit,  permitir 
please  =  have  the  kindness  to>  ser- 

virse  (see  par.  160.) 
to  promise,  prometer 
to  see,  ver 
to  be  willing,  etc.,  querer 


Was  he  not  able  to  understand  you  ? 
They  want  to  speak  to  us. 
Please  walk  in. 
He  promised  to  bring  it  to  me. 


I  No  pudo  comprenderle  ? 
Desean  hablarnos. 
Sirvase  Vd.  entrar. 
Prometi6  traermelo. 


EXERCISE  II. 

1.  We  have  invited  them  to  dine  with  Us.     2.  It  began  to- 
rain.     3.  I  cannot  answer.   4.  Will  you  give -me  your  card1  ? 

5.  I  wrote  to  him  yesterday  to  tell  him  you  had  arrived. 

6.  We  went  to  see  your  uncle  yesterday.     7.  It  appears  to  be 
impossible.2     8.  He  did  not  intend  to  look  at  them.     £.  She 
has  brought  the  letter  home  to  read  it.  10. 1  used  to  teach  myb 
childrenb  toa  swim.3a*    11.  Do  me  the  favor  to  give  me  a  glass 
of  water.    12.  Leave  off  (PLUR.)  talking  (=cease4  to  speak). 

1  tarjeta  ;  2  imposible  \   3  nadar  ;   4=  cesar,  *" 


145.    Deber   used  before  another  Verb  expresses  DUTY,  or 
(a  certain  amount  of)  COMPULSION. 

Tener  que  (or  haber  de)  expresses  a  stronger  degree  of 
compulsion, — see  Hugo's  '  Spanish  Verbs  Simplified/  page  93. 

MUST  (or  HAVE  TO)  is  rendered  by  the  PRESENT  TENSE  of 
deber,  or  by  tener  que,  haber  do,  thus : 

I  must  speak  to  them.  Debo  hablarles. 

I  have  to  speafc  to  the..         {  g£  SStSff^ 
Must  you  (0?-  are  you  to)  copy  this  letter  ?    i  Debe  Vd.. copiar  esta  carta  ? 


76 

These  expressions  can  be  used  with  the  same  meaning  in  other 
Tenses,  tlius:^' 

El  criado  tendra  que  (or  habra  de) 
llenarlo.  [bajar? 


The  servant  will  have  to  fill  it. 
Would  they  not  have  to  work  ? 


I  No  tendrian  que  (or  habrian  de)  tra- 


Lb 
de 


1  shall  have  to  sell  them=the  right  thing  |  ,  ,  ,     . 

for  me  to  do  will  be  to  sell  them|debere  venderlos 

146.    OUGHT  is  rendered  by  the  CONDITIONAL  of  deber. 

In  such  cases,  the  Conditional  Subjunctive  is  generally  employed  in  pre- 
ference to  the  Conditional  Indicative  .  but  either  is7 correct. 
You  ought  to  sell  them  to  him.   I  Vd.  debiera  (better  than  deberia)  ven- 
The  children  ought  not  to  make  |     derselos.  [ruido. 

so  much  noise,  f  Lo$  nines' no  debieran  hacer  tanto 

EXERCISE  III. 

1.  We  must  go  home.  2.  You  ought  not  to  do  that.  3. 
You  will  have  to  wait  until  (the)  evening.  4.  How  much 
work  have  you  to  do  ?  5.  They  had  to  start  without  buying 
their  tickets.  6.  Must  you  copy  it  ?  7.  He  has  several 
things  to  do.  8.  We  should  not  have  to  pay  so  much  money 
as  you.  9.  They  ought  not  to  smoke  so  much. 


COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. 

1.  The  soldiers  ought  to  obey1  the  officer,  but  they  do  not 
always  do  it.  2.  Why  will  you  not  show  me  the  picture  ? 
3.  I  do  not  like  to  put  it  here.  4.  Will  you  tell  him  your 
name  ?  5.  I  cannot  lend  you  this  book  ;  it  is  not  mine.  & 
He  had  nothing  to  do.  7.  I  must  teach  him  to  speak  more 
correctly.2  8.  We  were  able  to  finish3  it  yesterday.  9.  We 
could  finish  it  to-morrow.  10.  They  have  not  been  able  to 
find  them  yet.  11.  We  (have)  said  it  to  persuade4  him. 
12.  They  wanted  to  learn  to  speak  Spanish.  13.  Run5  and  see 
who  is  at  the  door.  14.  We  could  not  wait  to  see  him  ;  we 
had  to  go  away.  15.  He  wanted  to  keep  all  the  money  for 
himself.  16.  He  will  not  like  to  come  back  without  receiving 
a  reply.6  17.  You  ought  to  give  me  more  time.  18.  Could 
the  lawyer  understand  ?  19.  We  expect  to  receive  a  reply6 
to-morrow.  20.  He  wrote  .to  me  to  say  he  had  made  a. 


77' 

mistake.  21.  Would  you  be  able  to  send  us  the  goods 
to-day  ?  22.  We  must  ask  our  master  now.  23. 1  am  going 
to  give  them  to  him,  to  show7  him  that  I  am  not  offended.8 
24.  You  must  not  sing9  so  loud.10  25.  Cannot  your  friend 
speak  German  ?  26.  Ought  you  not  to  invite  them  to  dine  ? 
27.  When  shall  I  be  able  to  draw11  as  well  as  you  ?  28.  I 
cannot  play12  the  piano.13 

1  obcdecer  ;  2  correctamente  ;  3  acabar  :  4  persnadir  ;  5  correr- 
6  resptiesta  ;  7  demostrar  (demonstrate)  ;  8  ofendido  ;  9  cantar  ;  10  alto 
(high)  ;  lldibujar  ;  \2=touch  (tocar)  ;  13  piano. 

TWENTY-SECOND   LESSON. 


147.  /to  come,  venir. 

FEES.  PARTIC.  coming,  viniendo. 

PRES.  INDIC.      I  come,  etc.,  vengo,  vienes,  viene  ;  venimos,  venis,  vienen. 

PAST  DEF.        'I  came,  etc.,  vine,  viniste,  vino  ;  vinimos,  vinisteis,  vinieron. 

FUTURE  I  shall  come,  etc.,  vendre",  etc. 

IMPERATIVE     come,  etc.,  ven,  venga  ;  vengamos,  venid,  vengan. 

148.  ;  to  go  out,  salir .  * 

PRES.  INDIC,      I  go  out,  etc.,  salgo,  sales,  sale  ;  salimos,  sails,  salen. 

FUTURE  I  shall  go  out,  etc.,  saldre",  etc. 

IMPERATIVE     go  out,  etc.,  sal,  saiga  ;  salgaraos,  salid,  salgan. 

149.  to  walk,  andar. 

PAST  DBF.         I  walked,  etc.,  anduve,  anduviste,  anduvo ;  anduvimos, 
auduvisteis,  anduvieron. 

150.  to  hear,  oir. 

PRES.  PARTIC.  hearing,  oyendo.'       PAST  PARTIC.  beard,  oido. 
PRES.  INDIC.     I  hear,  etc.,  oigo,  oycs,  oye  ;  olmos*  ois,  oyen. 
PAST  DEF.         I  beard,  etc.,  oi,  oiste,  oy6  ;  oiraos,  oisteis,  oyeron. 
IMPERATIVE     hear,  etc.,  oye,  oiga  ;  oigamos,  old,  oigan. 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  I  hear  ;  2.  do  not  come  ;  3.  did  they  walk  ?  4.  you 
will  not  go  out ;  5.  they  will  come  ;  6.  I  came  ;  7.  we  used 
to  walk  ;  8.  gone  out ;  9.  coming  ;  10.  did  we  hear  ?  11.  do 
not  let  us  go  out ;  12.  walking  ;  13.  I  do  not  come  ;  14.  do 
you  (PLUR.)  come  ?  15.  they  did  not  hear ;  16.  you  will 

"conjugated  like  valeh 


78 

"hear ;  17.  hearing  ;  18.  we  used  to  come  ;  19.  let  us  hear ; 
20.  does  she  not  go  out  ?  21.  do  we  come  ?  22.  I  should 
come  ;  23.  do  not  go  out  (PLUR.)  now.  24.  I  have  come  to 
see  you.  25.  He  has  heard  me  speak.  26.  He  walked  very 
quickly.1  27.  I  am  going  out  to  see  the  town.  28.  We  shall 
come  next2  week.2  29.  He  heard  me  perfectly,3  because  I 
spoke  slowJy.4  30.  I  am  coming  to  explain  it  to  you. 
31.  Try5  to  hear  what6  is  being  said.  32.  The  noise  is  not 
often  heard  from7  here. 

1  deprisa  ;  2=the  week  which  comes  ;  3  perfectamente  ;  4  despacio  ; 
5  tratar  ;  G  lo  que  (WHAT  is  translated  lo  que  when  Kelative)  ;  7  desde. 


151.  to  bring,  traer. 

PRES.  INDIC.      I  bring,  etc.,  traigo,  traes,  trae  ;    traemos,  trae*is,  traen. 
PAST  DEF.          I  brought,  etc.,  traje,  trajiste,  trajo  ;  trajimos,  trajisteis,  tra- 
IMPERATIVE     bring,  etc.,  trae,  traiga  ;  traigamos,  traed,  traigan.    [jeron. 

152.  to  fall,  caer. 

PRES.  INDIC.      I  fall,  etc.,  caigo,  caes.  cae  ;  caemos,  cadis,  caeD. 
IMPERATIVE     fall,  etc.,  cae,  caiga  ;  caigamos,  caed,  caigan. 

153.  to  be  able  to  be  contained,  caber.* 

PRES.  INDIC.  quepo,  cabes,  cabe  ;  cabemos,  cabe'is,  caben. 

PAST  DEF.  cupe,  cupiste,  cupo  ,   cupimos,  cupisteis,  cupieron. 

FUTURE  cabre,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE  cabe,  quepa  ;  quepamos,  cabed,  quepan. 

*The%following  examples  show  how  this  difficult  Verb  is  employed  : 
This  room  used  to  hold  all  his  fumiture=AH  his  furniture  was  able  to  be  con- 
tained in  this  room.  Todos  sus  muebles  cabian  en  este  cuarto. 
There  is  room  for  me  here=I  am  able  to  be  contained  here.   Quepo  aqui. 

154.  toplay,jug*ar. 

PRES.  iNDiq.     I  play,  etc.,  juego,  juegas,  juega  ;  jugamos,  jugais,  juegan. 
IMPERATIVE      play,  etc.,  juega,  juegue  ;  juguemos,  jugad,  jueguen. 

15fx,     The  following  Verbs  have  irregular  Past  Participles  : 
INFINITIVE.        PAST  PARTICIPLE.     INFINITIVE.      PAST  PARTICIPLE 


to  absolve,  absolver  absuelto 

to  cover,  cubrir  cubierto 

to  dissolve,  disolver  disuelto 

to  open,  abrir  abierto 


to  print,  imprimir         impreso 
to  resolve,  resolver        resuelto 
to  return,  come  back,  volver  vuelto 
to  write,  escribir          escrito 


REMARK. — These  eight  Verbs  are  otherwise  quite  Kegular,  except  those 
ending  in  OLVER,  which  are  conjugated  Jike  mover  (see  paragraph  108). 


79 

156.  Many  Spanish  Verbs  have  a  regular  and  an  irregular  form 
for  the  Past  Participle.     The  Irregular  Form,  however,  is 
generally  used  as  an  Adjective  only,  the  Regular  Form  being 
employed  in  the  Compound  Tenses.     For  complete  list,  see 
Hugo's  4  Spanish  Verbs  Simplified,'  pages  62  to  64. 

to  join,  juntar  .    we  have  joined  them,  los  hemos  juntado ; 
it  is  not  joined,  no  esta  junto  or  junta 

EXERCISE  II. 

1.  we  play  ;  2.  do  you  not  play  ?  3.  I  used  to  write  ; 
4.  have  they  opened  ?  5.  we  do  not  bring  ;  6.  do  not  bring 
(PLUR.)  ;  7.  it  is  able  to  be  contained  ;  8.  they  were  not  able 
to  be  contained  ;  9.  we  have  not  printed  ;  10.  do  not  fall  ; 
11.  you  have  not  brought ;  12.  it  is  covered  ;  13.  hasn't  he 
come  back  yet  ?  14.  let  us  print-  it ;  15.  I  do  not  open  them  ; 
16.  it  will  not  be  able  to  be  contained  ;  17.  I  have  brought; 
18.  I  do  not  bring  ;  19.  you  will  fall  ;  20.  do  not  play  ; 
21.  cover  them  ;  22.  I  fall ;  23.  There  is  room1  for  all  the 
money  in  this  box  24.  Bring  it  to  me  now.  25.  I  expect 
they  will  fall.  26.  Will  you  open  the  window  ?  It  is 
already  open(ed).  27.  There  is  not  room1  for  me  in  .this 
carriage.  28.  Every2  kind2  of  foreign  books  printed  here. 
29.  Bring  us  the  answer  as5  soon  as  possible.3  30.  Why  do 
you  not  put4  your  hat  on4  ? 

1  use  caber  ;   2=all  class  ;  3  lo  antes  posible  ,    4  cover  yourself. 

SUPERLATIVE  OF  ADJECTIVES  AND  ADVERBS. 

157.  MOST  (meaning  VERY,  EXTREMELY)  can  be  expressed  by 
affixing  islmo  (-ma,  -mos,  -mas)  to  the  Adjective, 
omitting  the  final  vowel.     Adverbs  can  be  formed  by  affixing 
mente  to  the  Feminine  Singular  of  the  Superlative. 

very  difficult    dificilisimo     I     very  easily     facilisimamente 
very  rare          rarisimo          j     very  rarely    rarisimamente 

The  termination  ble  is  changed  to  bil,  CO  to  qu,  go  to  gu, 
and  z  to  c,  thus  : 


noble  noble 

nobly  noblemente 

bitter  amargo 

richly  ricamente 


very  noble  nobilisimo 

very  nobly  nobilisimamente 

very  bitter  amarguisimo 

very  richly  riquisimamente 


80 
158.    The  most  important  Irregular  Superlatives  are  as  follow  : 

very  celebrated    celebemmo 
very  faithful       fidelisimo 
very  good  bonisimo 

very  new  novisimo 

very  strong         fortisimo 
very  wise  sapientisimo 


celebrated  celebre 

faithful  fiel 

good  bueno 

new  nuevo 

strong  fuerte 

wise  sabio 


Many  Adjectives,  such  as  those  of  more  than  three  syllables  ending  in 
ble,  cannot  take  the  isimo  termination,  which  is  given  here  for  Reference 
only.  The  Student  should  employ  muy,  except  in  the  following  Exercise. 

EXERCISE  III.  (on  the  isimo  Termination). 
1.  most  certainly  ;  2.  extremely  happy1  (MASC.  SING.)  ; 
3.  very  happily  ;  4.  most  rare1  (MASC.  PLUR.)  ;  5.  extremely 
good  (PEM.  PLUR.)  ;  6.  most  honorable2  (MASC.  PLUR.)  ; 
7.  with  very  much  pleasure3  ;  8.  My  dogs  are  most  faithful. 
9.  These  children  are  extremely  good.  10.  His  answer  is  ex- 
tremely useful.  11.  It  is  an  extremely  easy  [piece  of]  work. 

1  raro  ;  2  honorable  ;  3  gusto. 


COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. 

1.  Bring  them  to  me  as1  soon  as  possible1.  2.  He  never 
comes  very  early.  3.  We  ought  to  give  it  to  him.  4.  You 
ought  to  wait  a  little.  5.  He  will  not  come2  back2  before  six 
o'clock.  6.  They  came  back  last3  month.3  7.  We  shall 
come  back  to-morrow4  morning.4  8.  We  shall  have  to  open 
all  the  windows  at5  once.5  9.  Open  the  drawers.  10.  There 
will  be  room6  for  the  things  in  this  box.  11.  I  hope  they 
will  come  back  soon.  12.  He  will  have  to  bring  it  to  me  to- 
morrow4 morning.4  13.  At  what  time  will  the  carriage  come 
back  ?  14.  I  have  to  go  out  to  buy  several  things.  15.  Why 
do  you  walk  so  slowly  ?  16.  I  hope  they  will  come  to  see  us 
next7  week.7  17.  It  is  almost  impossible  to  hear  the  noise. 
18.  The  children  are  playing  downstairs.  19.  The  train 
always  leaves8  at  half  past  eight.  20.  He  never  brings  them 
earlyb  enough.* 

1  lo  antes  posible  :  2  volver  ;  3  el  mes  pasado  ;  4  manana  por  la  mana- 
na  ;   5  enseguida  ;  6  use  caber  ;  7  the  week  which  is~cominy  ;  8  goes  out. 


81 
TWENTY-THIRD    LESSON. 


(The  Verbs  in  this  Lesson  change  the  Vowel  of  the  Stem  whenever  it 
takes  the  Stress,  like  those  in  Lesson  18  ;  but  their  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE, 
PAST  DEFINITE  (3rd  Person),  and  PRESENT  SUBJUNCTIVE  and  IM- 
PERATIVE (1st  Person  Plural),  contain  a  further  irregularity  in  the  Vowel 
of  the~STEM.  For  complete  list,  see  Hugo's  *  Spanish  Verbs  Simplified.' 

159.  to  ask,  to  request,  pedir. 

PRES.  PARTIC,    asking,  pidiendo. 

PRES.  INDIC.       I  ask,  etc.,  pido,  pides,  pide  ;  pedimos,  pedis,  piden. 
PAST  DEF.  I  asked,  etc.,  pedi,  pediste,  pidid  ;   pedimos,  pedlsteis,  pi- 

IMPERATIVE       ask,  etc.,  pide,  pida  ;  pidamos,  pedid,  pidan.        [dieron. 
PRES.  SUBJUNC.  I  ask,  etc.,  pida,  pidas,  pida  ;  pidamos,  pidais,  pidan. 

160.  The  principal  Verbs  conjugated  like  pedir  are  as  follow  : 


to  choose,  elegir 
to  clothe,  vestir 
to  correct,  corregir 
to  dye,  tenir 


to  follow,  seguir 
to  laugh,  reir 
to  measure,  medir 
to  prevent,  impedir 


to  repeat,  repetir 
to  rule,  regir 
to  serve,  servir 
to  smile,  sonreir 


In  Verbs  conjugated  like  pedir,  the  UNACCENTED  i  of  the  termination 
is  omitted  after  i  or  n,  thus  :  laughing,  riendo  ;  he  laughed,  rio  ;  dyeing, 
tifiendo ;  they  dyed,  tineron  ;  BUT— he  used  to  laugh,  reia  ;  we  used 
to  dye,  teniamos,  etc. 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  you  asked  ;  2.  we  did  not  repeat  ;  3.  will  he  laugh  ? 
4.  do  not  choose  (PLUR.)  ;  5.  smiling ;  6.  you  used  to  laugh  ; 
7.  do  you  not  rule  ?  8.  we  follow  ;  9.  It  is  not  known 
whether  he  can  prevent  it.  10.  Why  are  you  laughing  ? 
11.  Do  not  laugh.  12.  Follow  us. 


161.  to  feel,  to  be  sorry,  sentir. 

PRES.  PARTIC.    feeling,  sintiendo. 

PRES.  INDIC.  I  feel,  etc.,  siento,  sientes,  siente  ;  sentimos,  sentis,  sienten. 
PAST  DEF.  I  felt,  etc.,  sentl,  sentiste,  sinti6  ;  sentiraos,  sentisteis,  sin- 
IMPERATIVE  feel,  etc.,  siente,  sienta  ;  sintamos,  sentid,  sientan.  [tieron. 
PRES.  SUBJUNC.  I  feel,  etc.,  sienta,  sientas,  sienta;  sintamos,  sintais,  sientan 

162.  The  principal  Verbs  conjugated  like  sentir  are  as  follow  : 


to  consent,  consentir 
to  defer,  diferir 
to  divert,  divertir 
H.S.S.  6. 


to  (tell  a)  lie,  mentir 

to  prefer,  preferir 

to  repent,  arrepentirse 


to  require,  requerir 
to  suggest,  sugerir 
to  wound,  herir 


82 

EXERCISE   II. 

1.  did  he  consent  ?  2.  I  did  not  suggest ;  3.  what  did  you 
suggest  ?  4.  we  did  not  wound  ;  5.  they  will  consent  also1 ;  6. 
Do  not  defer  it.  7.  Which  of  the  two  do  you  prefer  ? 
8.  Used  he  not  to  tell  lies  ?  9.  He  isb  now*  repenting.  10. 
Did  you  not  feel  the  blow2  ?  11.  Let  us  repent.  12.  We3  are 
very  sorry  for  it.3  13.  I  am  very  sorry  -[to]  disturb4  you. 

1  tambie'n ;  2  golpe  ;   3=wefeel  it  much  ;  4  molestar. 


163.  to  die,  morir. 

PRES.  PARTIC.    dying,  muriendo.         PAST  PARTIC.  died,  muerto. 
PRES.  INDIC.       1  die,  etc.,  muero,  mueres,  muere;  morimos,  moris,  mueren 
PAST  DEF.  I  died,  etc.,  morl,  moriste,  muri6  ;   morimos,  moristeis,  mu- 

IMPERATIVE       die,  etc.,  muere,  muera ;  muramos,  morid,  mueran.  [rieron. 
PRES.  SUBJUNC.  1  die,  etc.,  muera,  mueras,  muera ;  muramos,  murais, 
mueran. 

164.  dormir,  to  sleep,  is  conjugated  exactly  like  morir, 
except  that  its  PAST  PARTICIPLE  (slept,  dormido)  is  regu- 
lar ;  dormirse  means  to  fall  asleep,  go  to  sleep. 

165.  Irregular  Verbs  and  their  compounds  are  usually  conju- 
gated alike.     Examples : 

suponer  (to  suppose)  is  conjugated  like  poner 

convenir  (to  agree)  „  „        venir 

contrahacer  (to  counterfeit)         „  „       hacer* 

*  satisfacer  (to  satisfy)  is  also  conjugated  like  hacer  ;  but  the  Singular 
Familiar  Form  of  the  Imperative  is  sometimes  regular  (satisface). 

EXCEPTIONS. — All  the  Compounds  of  decir  (contradecir,  to  contra- 
dict ;  predecir,  to  predict,  etc.)  take  dice  instead  of  di  in  the  Singular 
Familiar  Form  of  the  Imperative,  thus  :  contradice.  The  Past  Participle 
and  the  Future  Stem  of  the  Compounds  of  decir  are  regular. 

EXERCISE  III. 

1.  he  will  contradict ;  2.  don't  go  to  sleep  ;  3.  we  sleep  ; 
4.  they  died  ;•  5.  they  did  not  agree  ;  6.  dying  ;  7.  I  slept ; 
8.  you  would  die  ;  9.  used  you  (PLUR.)  not  to  sleep  ?  10. 
had  he  supposed  ?  11.  do  not  let  us'counterfeit ;  12.  He  died 
rather1  young.2  13.  Do  you  ever3  sleep  in4  the  afternoon5  r 
14.  Are  the  children  not  sleeping  ?  15.  I  suppose  so.6 

1  algo  ;  2  joven  ;  3  alguna  vez  ;  4  por ;  5  tarde  (FEM.)  ;  6=that  yes. 


83 
THE  FAMILIAR  FORM. 

The  Second  Person  of  Verbs  and  Pronouns  is  used  by  Spaniards  in  ad- 
dressing near  relations,  intimate  friends,  children,  servants,  and  animals. 
A  knowledge  of  this  form  of  address  is  therefore  essential,  as  it  is  of  fre- 
quent occurrence  in  books  ;  but  FOREIGNERS  SHOULD  NOT  EMPLOY  THE 
FAMILIAR  FORM.  Its  formation  has  been  explained  in  previous  lessons. 

EXERCISE  IV.  (on  the  FAMILIAR  FORM) 
1.  buy  (SING.)  ;  2.  fear  (PLUR.)  ;  3.  thou  findest ;  4.  do 
you  owe  ?  5.  thou  dost  not  fear  ;  6.  you  used  to  send ; 
7.  thou  wilt  break  ;  8.  thou  wouldst  not  do ;  9.  you  have 
come  ;  10.  art  thou  (FEM.)  ready  ?  11.  hast  thou  not  put  ? 
12.  what  hast  thou  ?  13.  you  went ;  14.  write  (PLUR.)  ;  15. 
are  you  listening  ?  16.  are  you  willing  to  come  ?  17.  you 
will  not  have  ;  18.  thou  hadst  not ;  19.  had  you  waited  ?  20. 
show  (SING.)  it  to  me  ;  21.  do  (PLtJR.)  it ;  22.  art  thou  not 
English  ?  23.  you  are  not  workmen. 

166.  The  Familiar  Form  of  the  Imperative  cannot  be  used  in 
the  negative.    The  Present  Subjunctive*  (see  Paragraph  78) 
is  employed  instead,  thus  : 

speak  (SING.),  habla         I     do  not  speak  (SING.),  no  hables 
drink  (PLUR.),  bebed       |     do  not  drink  (PLUR.),  no  bebais 

167.  When  the  Reflective  Pronoun  OS  is  added  to  the  Plural 
Familiar  Form  of  the  Imperative,  the  final  d  is  omitted,t  thus : 

wash  yourselves,  lavaos  (not  lavados)  ;   rejoice,  alegraos  (not  alegrados) 

EXERCISE  V.  (on  the  FAMILIAR  FORM) 
1.  take  (PLUR.)  ;  2.  do  not  take  (PLUR.)  ;  3.  write  (SING.)  ; 
4.  do  not  write  (SING.)  ;  5.  go  away  (SING.)  ;  6.  go  away 
(PLUR.)  ;  7.  speak  to  me  (SING.)  ;  8.  do  not  speak  (SING.)  to 
us  ;  9.  do  not  tire  yourself ;  10.  do  not  tire  yourselves  ;  11. 
learn  (PLUR.)  ;  12.  do  not  learn  (PLUR.).  13.  Buy  (SING.)  this 
watch.  14.  Do  not  sell  (SING.)  this  watch.  15.  Lend  (PLUR.) 
me  your  umbrella.  16.  Do  not  read  the  letter.  17.  Read  it  (P.). 

*  The  Polite  Form  is  really  the  Subjunctive  used  as  an  Imperative, 
t  The  only  exception  is  irse  (to  go  away),  the  Plur,  Impera,  of  which  is  idos. 


S4 

COLLECTIVE   EXERCISE. 

1.  He  asked  me  [for]  five  shillings.  2.  I  shall  give  them 
to  him  this  evening.  3.  Show  me  what  you  have  chosen. 
4.  Please1  take  [a]  seat.2  •  5.  When  I  arrived,  the  children 
were  asleep.3  -6. 1  shall  ask  him  [for]  something.  7.  Repeat 
it.  8.  Will  you  follow  me  ?  9.  He  never  corrects  us 
when  we  make  a  mistake.  10.  Please1  (PLUR.)  wait  a  little. 
11.  One  of  the  two  has  been4  telling  lies,4  but  I  don't  know 
which.  12. 1  find5  it  extremely  difficult.  13.  He  is  very  sorry 
he  will  not  be  able  to  come  to-night.  14.  When  did  he  die  ? 
15.  Please  tell  me  the  exact6  time.  16. 1  cannot  tell  you  (it) ; 
my  watch  isn't  going.7  17.  I  am  very  sorry  for  (=1  feel  much) 
that  accident.  18.  Don't  make  any  noise ;  they  are  both8 
asleep.3  19. 1  suppose  they  will  arrive  soon.  20.  Repeat  what 
you  (have)  said.  21.  He  consented  at  once.  22.  They  laughed9 
when  we  told  them  that.  23.  He  prevented  us  f  rom10seeing  it. 

1  Imperative  o/servirse  ;   2  asiento  ;  3  dormido  (or  durmiendo)  ;  4  lied  ; 
6  encontrar ;  6  exacto  ;  7  andar  ;  8  ambos  ;  9  reirse  ;  10  de. 

TWENTY-FOURTH    LESSON. 

168.  Verbs  ending  in  acer,*  ecer,  OC6IS*  or  ucir,  change 
the  C  into  ZC  before  A  or  O. 

to  know  (to  be  acquainted  with),  conocer. 
PRES.  1NDIC.      I  know,  etc.,  conozco,  conoces,  conoce  ;  conocemos,  etc. 
IMPERATIVE     know,  etc.,  conoce,  conozca;  conozcamos,  conoced,  co- 
nozcan. 

169.  The  Verbs  ending  in  ducir  are  also  irregular  in  the  Stem 
of  the  Past  Definite. 

to  translate,  traduclr. 

PRES.  INDIC.    I  translate,  etc.,  traduzco,  traduces,  traduce  ;  traducimos,  etc. 
IMPERATIVE    translate,  etc.,  traduce,  traduzca  ;  traduzcamos,  traducid, 

traduzcan. 
PAST  DEF.        I  translated,  etc.,  traduje,  tradujiste,  tradujo  ;  tradujimos, 

tradujisteis,  tradujerou. 

*Except  hacer  and  its  Compounds,  and  cocer  (to  cook),  which  is  conju- 
gated like  mover  (cuezo,  cueces,  cuece  ;  cocemos,  coc&s,  cuecen). 


85 

EXERCISE  I. 

1. 1  grow1 ;  2.  does  he  not  grow1  ?  3.  it  did  not  shine1; 
4.  do  they  cook3  ?  5.  I  do  not  know4  ;  6.  do  not  recognize5 ; 
7.  they  were  born6 ;  8.  we  produced7 ;  9.  let  ns  translate8 ; 
10.  do  I  not  cook3  ?  11.  shine2 !  12.  they  deducted9  ;  13.  used 
you  to  cook3  ?  14.  When  were  you  born6  (PAST  DBF.)  ?  15. 
Do  I  appear10  to  be  tired  ?  16.  They  will  translate8  this  letter 
in  half  [an]  hour.  17.  I  do  not  know4  the  price.  18.  Do 
you  know4  this  gentleman  ?  19.  I  do  not  recognize5  him. 

1  crecer  ;   2  lucir  ;   3  cocer  ;    4  conocer  ;    5  reconocer  ;  6  to  be  born, 
nacer  ;  7  producir  ;   8  traducir  ;   9  ded'ucir  ;   10  parecer . 

170.  Verbs  ending  in  uir*  are  conjugated  like  the  following 
example  :  to  destroy,  destruir. 

PEES.  INDIC.    I  destroy,  etc.,  destruyo,  destruyes,  destniye ;  destruimos, 

destruls,  destruyen. 
IMPERATIVE    destroy,  etc.,  destruye,  destruya ;   destruyamos,  destruid, 

destruyan. 

EXERCISE  II. 

1.  do  you  distribute1  ?  /2.  they  fled2 ;  3.  following3 ;  4.  I 
do  not  attribute4  ;  5.  I  follow3 ;  6.  we  did  not  follow3 ; 
7.  you  will  destroy5  ;  8.  would  you  (PLIJR.)  not  distinguish6? 
9.  I  argue7 ;  10.  you  used  not  to  distribute1 ;  11.  Please8  fol- 
low3 them.  12.  Do  not  destroy5  these  documents. 

1  distribuir  ;   2  huir  ;    3  seguir  (see  Par.  160)  ;    4  atribuir  ;   5  destruir  ; 
6  distinguir  ;   7  argiiir  ;  8  servirse  (see  Pars.  144,  160). 


THE  INTERJECTIONS. 
171.    The  principal  Interjections  are : 


I  ah  !  i  oh  !  OHj  (denoting  grief) 

i  ay  !  l  oh  !  OH  !  (denoting  pain) 

I  chito  !  i  chiton  !  SILENCE  ! 

j  cuidado  !  TAKE  CARE  ! 

I  die  veras  !  INDEED  ! 

I  ea !  j  animo  !  WELL  !  COME  ON  f* 


i  ha  !  i  he  !  AH  !  (denoting  joy) 
i  ho  !  j  hola  »  HI  !  HULLO  I 
i  hombre  !  DEAR  ME  ! 
I  o  !  i  Oh  !     OH  !  (denoting  sur- 
prise) 
i  ojald !  WOULD  TO  GOD  ! 


*This  form  of  conjugation  only  applies  to  Verbs  where  the  u  is  pronounced  $ 
not  to  such  as  distinguir  (to  distioguigh). 


SI 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Write  out  the  four  Tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  Mood  of  the  following  Verbs 
(see  paragraphs  78,  79). 

EXERCISE   III. 

1.  tener,  to  have ;  2.  haber,  to  have ;  3.  ser,  to  be ;  4. 
estar,  to  be  ;  5.  tomar,  to  take  ;  6.  beber,  to  drink  ;  7. 
dar,  to  give  (paragraph  118)  ;  8.  escribir,  to  write  ; 
9.  ver,  to  see  (par.  124)  ;  10.  venir,  to  come  (par.  147)  ; 
11.  poder,  to  be  able  to  (par.  139)  ;  12.  ir,  to  go  (par.  120)  ; 
13.  decir,to  say  (par.  123) ;  14.  morir,  to  die  (par.  163). 


TWENTY-FIFTH    LESSON. 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS  ON  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

The  employment  of  this  mood  is  largely  a  matter  of  taste.  The 
Indicative  would  sometimes  be  equally  correct ;  and  even  when  the  Sub- 
junctive ought  to  be  employed,  the  omission  to  do  so  seldom  destroys  or 
alters  the  meaning  of  the  sentence.  The  proper  use  of  the  Subjunctive  is 
a  GRAMMATICAL  NICETY,  which  foreigners  need  not  study  too  deeply. 

The  second  of  two  Verbs  connected  by  que  must  be  put  in 
the  Subjunctive  under  certain  conditions,  explained  in  Paragraphs 

172  to  190,  NO  MATTER  WHAT  THE  ENGLISH  WORDING  JS  ;   and  if 

the  second  Verb  in  English  is  not  preceded  by  '  that,'  the  altera- 
tion in  construction  must  be  made  before  translating,  thus  : 

CHANGE  INTO 


We  deny  their  hav- 
ing said  that. 

It  is  impossible  for 
him  to  do  it. 

It  is  not  fair  for  us 
to  keep  them. 


We  deny  that  they 
have  said  that. 

It  is  impossible  that 
he  [should]  do  it. 

It  is  not  fair  that  we 

[should]  keep  them 


Negamos  que  hayan  diclio 


eso. 


Es  imposible  que  lo  haga. 


» 


No  es  justo  que  los  guar- 
demos. 


The  sentence  following  Hhat'  is  called  the  DEPENDENT  sentence. 
EXAMPLES  OP 

PRINCIPAL  SENTENCES          and          DEPENDENT   SENTENCES. 

it  is  necessary  (es  menester)  that  he  should  read  it  (que  lo  lea) 

I  am  sorry  (Siento)  that  they  are  aiot  here  (que  no  esten  aqui) 

<gT  If  the  Subject  of  the  Verb  in  the  dependent  sentence 
would  be  the  same  as '  in  the  principal  sentence,  the  Infinitive,  a 
(simpler  construction,  is  employed  in  preference,  thus : 


87 

}  Negamos  haber  dicho  eso. 

I  am  very  pleased  to  have  met  you.        )  Me  alegro  mucho  de  haberle 
I  am  very  pleased  that  I  have  met  you.  J     encontrado. 

EMPLOYMENT  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD, 

172.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  after  most  Verbs  expressing  a 

MENTAL  ACTION  OB  EMOTION.      Examples  i 
We  cannot  allow  you  to  keep  it        No  podemos  dejar  que  Vd. 

(=allow  that  you  keep  it).  lo  guarde. 

I  want  them  to  tell  me  (=  I  wish       Quiero  que  me  lo  digan. 
that  they  tell  it  to  me). 

EXERCISE  I. 

1.  Does  he  want  her  to  read  it*  ?  2.  They  want  you  to 
accept1  this.  3.  They  will  not  want  us  to  keep  it.  4.  She 
wants  us  to  stay2  there.  5.  We  do  not  want  them  to  hear 
us.  6.  Do  you  want  me  to  shut  the  door  ?  7.  What  does  he 
want  me  to  do  ?  8.  They  want  us  to  pay  the  bill  at3  once.3 
1  aceptar  ;  2  quedarse  (to  stay,  to  remain)  ;  3  enseguida. 

*  Translate  :  '  Does  he  want  that  she  read  it  ? '  and  use  the  same  con- 
struction (desear,  followed  by  que  and  the  Subjunctive)  throughout  the 
above  Exercise.  In  all  cases  where  the  Subjunctive  Mood  is  required  in 
this  Lesson,  the  PBESENT  Subjunctive  is  to  be  employed. 

173.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  after  most  IMPEKSONAL  VERBS  and 
expressions.    Examples : 

It  is  necessary  for  us  to  give  it  to  Es  menester  que  se  lo  demos. 

them  (=that  we  give  it  to  them). 

Is    it  right   that  the   prisoners  £  Esjusto  que  los  presos  sean 

[should]  be  punished  ?  castigados  ? 

It  is.  better  that  we  [should]  send  Es   mejor   que   enviemos  la 

the  answer  by  post.  respuesta  por  el  correo. 

EXERCISE  II 

1.  It  is  not  necessary1  for  him  to  pay  us  (=^  that  he  pay 
us)  much.  2.  It  is  necessary  that  he  [should]  start2  directly.3 
3.  It  is  possible  that  the  money  is  his.  4.  We  are4  sorry4  that 
he  has  not  found  us.  5.  She  is5  afraid5  he  will  come.  6.  Is  it 
necessary  for  us  to  write  to  them  ?  or,  that  we  [should]  write 
to  them  ?  7.  Do  you  wish6  me  to  open  the  windows  ?  8.  Does 
he  wish6  us  to  put  it  here  ? 

1  necesario  ;  2salir(seep«r.  H8) ;  Sal  instante ;  4  sentir ;  5  fears  ;  6 querer 


8S 

174.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  after  certain  CONJUNCTIONS,  of 
which  the  principal  are  : 

after,  despnes  que  ;  before,  antes  que ;  unless,  a  menos  quo  ; 
in  order  that,a  fin  de  que,  para  que  ;  until,  hasta  que ;  when,  cuando. 

EXAMPLES  : 

nntil  he  arrives  hasta  que  llegue 

jefore  he  telegraphs  antes  que  telegrafie 

when  they  send  (at  some  future  time)     cuando  envien 

Cuando  is  only  followed  by  the  Subjunctive  when  it  is  not 
Interrogative,  and  refers  to  the  future,  thus  : 
When  I  have  time,  I  shall  do  it.  Cuando  teng A  tiempo,  lo  har6.  BUT  : 
When  [ever]  I  have  time,  I  do  it.  Cuando  tengo  tiempo,  lo'hago. 
I  used  to  do  it  when  I  had  time.    Lo  haoia,  cuando  tenia  tiemp6. 
1  did  it  when  I  had  time.  Lo  hice  cuando  tuve  tiempo. 

EXERCISE  III. 

1.  after  he  comes  to  see  us  ;  2.  in  order  that  it  [may]  not 
cost  too  much  ;  3.  before  they  do  the  work.  4.  When  I 
receive  his  answer,  I  shall  show  it  to  you.  5.  I  shall  expect 
you,  unless  it  rains.  6.  When  he  arrives,  I  shall  speak  to 
him.  7.  We  shall  send  them  the  goods  when  we  have  time. 
8.  Let1  me  know1  when  you  are  disengaged.2  9.  Wait  until 
they  are  ready.  10.  We  shall  pay  them  before  they  have 
finished3  it.  11.  They  will  pay  his  bill4  when  they  have 
more  money.  12.  When  he  comes  to  s"ee  me,  he  never  stays5 
very6  long.6  13.  When  they  come  back,  I  shall  explain  it  to 
them.  14.  He  always  speaks  to  me  when  he  sees  me. 

1  to  let  know  =  advise,  inform,  avisar  ;  2  desocupado  ;  3  terminal ; 
4  cuenta  ;  5  permanecer  ;  G  much  time. 

175.  The  Subjunctive  is  generally  used  after  the  NEGATIVE 
FORM  of  Verbs. 

IMPORTANT   EXCEPTION  :  The  Negative  Forms  of  saber  and  decir 
are  not  followed  by  the  Subjunctive,  thus  : 
Don't  you  know  he  will  be  there  ?    i  No  sabe  Vd.  que  estara  alii  ? 

EXERCISE  IV. 

1. 1  do  not  believe  he  wants  to  go  out.  2.  He  did  not 
Bay  whether  he  would  be  able  to  do  it.  3.  We  do  not 
believe  he  will  receive  any  reward.1  4.  Is  it  not  probable2 


M 

that  they  will  be  able  to  see  it  ?  5.  Don't  you  expect  that 
his  cousin  will  come  the3  day  after  to-morrow3  ?  6.  We 
don't  expect  they  will  bring  it.  7.  It  is  not  necessary  for  us 
to  copy  the  addresses4  he  gave  us. 

1  premie  •  2  probable  ;  3  pasado  manana  ;  4  direcci6n. 

TWENTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE.. 

176.  If  the  first  Verb  is  PRESENT  or  FUTURE,  the  PRESENT 
Subjunctive  is  employed,  as  shown  in  the  previous  lesson. 

177.  If  the  first  Verb  is  PAST  or  CONDITIONAL,  the  IMPERFECT 
Subjunctive  is  employed. 

We  were  afraid  you  would  not  re-        Temimos  que  Vd.  no  lo  reci- 

ceive  it.  biese. 

Would  you  like  me  to  copy  it  (=would )    . 

it  please  you  that  I  copied  it)  t      (I  Le  Sustana  que  lo  copiase  ? 

REMARK  I. — The  Conditional  Subjunctive  can  often  be  used  in  place 
of  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive,  and  vice  versa  ;  but  the  Imperfect  is  prefer- 
able after  the  Conjunctions  mentioned  in  par.  174,  and  after  Relative 
Pronouns. 

REMARK  II. — The  Conditional  Subjunctive  is  frequently  substituted 
for  the  Conditional  Indicative  (see  par.  146). 

Who  would  have  guessed  that  ?  i  Quien  hubiera  adivinado  eso  ? 

You  ought  to  explain  it  to  them.         Vd.  debiera  explicarselo. 

EXERCISE  I. 

1. 1  didn't  think1  he  had  come.  2.  We  wish2  they  hadn't 
begun.  3.  I  wish2  she  were  not  here.  4.  Did  he  want3 
me  to  do  it  ?  5.  It  was  not  necessary  for  them  to  speak. 

6.  He    would    have    denied    that    his  brother  was  there. 

7.  I  should  like  to  have  more  money. 

1  use  '  creer ' ;  2  render  as  l  should  like '  (Conditional  of  *  desear ')  ;  3 
Imperfect  of  '  desear.' 

178.  The  Imperfect  Subjunctive  is  used  after  si  (if),  when  the 
other  clause  of  the  sentence  is  in  the  Conditional. 

We  should  give  them  a  prize,  if       Les  dariamos  un  premio,  Si 
they  were  more  industrious.  fuesen  mas  aplicados. 


do 

179.  When  si  (if)   means  '  whether,'  it  is  followed  by   the 
Conditional  of  the  INDICATIVE.    Examples  : 

I  did  not  know  if  they  would  'come.        No  sabia  si  vendrian. 
He  asked  me  if  I  could  lend  him       Me  pregunto  si  podria  pres- 
ten  pounds.  tarle  diez  libras. 

180.  The  FUTURE  Subjunctive  may  be  used,  if  it  refers  to  the 
future  ;  but  this  Tense  is  very  seldom  employed. 

I  will  do  it,  if  I  can.    Lo  hare  si  pudiere  (far  better,  si  puedo). 

EXERCISE  II. 

1. 1  should  help1  him,  if  I  were  less  busy.2  2.  He  would 
copy  it,  if  he  had  more  time.  3.  "We  should  pay  them  at 
once,  if  we  had  enough  money.  4.  If  he  were  here,  I 
should  give  them  to  him.  5.  I  should  work  better,  if  I  had. 
better  tools.3  6.  Ask  them  if  (= whether)  they  will  be  at4 the 
station  to-night.  7.  Do  you  know  if  he  lives  in  Madrid  now  ? 
1  ayudar ;  2  ocupado  ;  3  hcrramientaj  4  en. 


AUGMENTATIVE  AND  DIMINUTIVE  TERMINATIONS 

are  added  to  Nouns  (and  occasionally  to  Adjectives)  to  qualify  their  mean- 
ing ;  but  as  the  use  of  these  terminations  presents  great  difficulties,  foreigners 
should  always  employ  Adjectives  instead.  The  following  are  the  principal : 

181.  on,  azo,  acho,  ote  express  LARGENESS,  the  three"  latter 
also  implying  some  degree  of  DISPEOPORTION  and  AWKWARDNESS. 

hombron,  a  big  man ;          hombrazo,  a  tall,  badly  built  man  ; 
mujerona,*  a  big  woman. 

182.  ito,  iCO,  illo,  uelo  express  SMALLNESS,  ito  implying  in 
addition  NICENESS,  FONDNESS,  and  uelo  CONTEMPT.    Examples  : 

senorita,*  an  unmarried  lady  ;          Pedrillo,  little  Peter  ; 
perrillo,  a  little  dog ;  perruelo,  a  cur. 

*  All  these  terminations  have  a  Feminine  Form. 

THE  PLUEAL  OF  NOUNS  (see  also  par.  4). 

183.  '  Nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  which  end  in  s,  and  do 
not  take  the  stress  on  the  last  syllable,  are  alike  in  the 
Singular  and  Plural,  thus  : 

the  umbrella,  el  paraguas  ;  the  umbrellas,  los  paraguas. 

184.  Nouns  ending  in  i  (accented)  add  es,  thus  : 

the  ruby,  el  rubi ;  the  rubies,  los  rubies. . 


91 

FURTHER  RULES  ON  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

FOR  REFERENCE  ONLY. 

185*  The  Subjunctive  is  generally  used  after  quienquiera 
que  (whoever),  cualquiera  que  (whatever),  arid  donde 
quiera  que  (wherever). 

I  shall  not  believe  it,  whoever  says  so.      No  lo  creere,  quienquiera  que 

lo  4iga. 

186.  The  Subjunctive  is  also  used  in  a  wish  or  imprecation. 
Long  live  the  King  !  j  Viva  el  rey  ! 

Thy  Kingdom  come  !  j  Venga  Tu  reinp  ! 

May  he  arrive  in  time  !  j  Que  llegue  a  tiempo  ! 

A  preceding  Verb  is  understood  in  such  sentences,  thus  : 

Quiero  que  viva  el  rey,  Deseo  que  llegue  a  tiempo. 

187.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  after  a  Superlative,  and  words" 
equivalent  to  Superlatives,  such  as  primero  (first)  and 
ultimo  (last). 

Give  it  to  the  first  man  that        Deselo  Vd  al  primer  hombre  que 
comes.  venga. 

188.  The  Verb  is  put  in  the  Indicative  if  it  expresses  a  CERTAIN 
FACT  instead  of  a  doubtful  contingency.    Compare  the  following  : 
although  (=  even  if)  he  writes  to  me    aunque  me  escriba 

although  it  is  late,  I  shall  not  go  away  aunque  es  tarde,  no  me  ire 

189.  The  following   are   the  'principal    Verbs   expressing  a 
MENTAL  EMOTION  which  are  followed  by  the  Subjunctive 
(unless  the  Infinitive  can  be  substituted, — see  page  86). 

aconsejar,  to  advise  esperar,  to  hope  prohibir,  to  prohibit 

alegrarse,  to  be  glad  evitar,  to  prevent  querer,  to  wish 

avisar,  to  advise  impedir,  to  prevent  regocij arse,  to  rejoice 

consentir,  to  consent  insistir,  to  insist  rogar,  to  entreat 

decir,  to  tell  (only  when  intentar,  to  intend  sentir,  to  regret 

meaning  *  to  order ')  negar,  to  deny  sorprenderse,.  to  be 

dejar,  to  allow  pedir,  to  request  surprised 

desear,  to  want  permitir,  to  permit  suplicar,  to  entreat 

dudar,  to  doubt  preferir,  to  prefer  temer,  to  fear 

190.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  after  the  following  Conjunctions, 
in  addition  to  those  given  on  page  88. 

although,  aunque  in  case,  en  caso  que 

except,  salvo  que,  excepto  que  notwithstanding-,  no  obstante  que 

for  fear  that,  por  miedo  que  provided  that,  con  tal  que 

however,  por  mas  que  supposing  that,  (su)puesto  que 

in  such  a  way  that,  de  modo  que,  whether,  sea  que 

de  manera  que  without^  sin  que 


VOCABULARY. 


The  Numbers  indicate  the  Paragraphs  in  which  the  Conju- 
gations  of  IRREGULAR  VERBS,  and  the  various  ways  of 
translating  PRONOUNS,  etc.,  are  given. 

.The  Cardinal  and  Ordinal  NUMBERS,  and  the  names  of  the 
DAYS  and  MONTHS,  will  be  found  in  Lessons  14  and  15. 

The  Gender  of  Nouns  is  only  given  when  it  is  not  in  accor- 
dance with  the  Rule  in  Paragraph  5. 

A,  AN,  un,  una,  6 
to  be  able  to,  139 
accident,  accidente 
to  address,  dirigir 
to  admire,  admirar 
after,  despue's  de 
afternoon,  tarde,  FEM. 
against,  contra 
ago,  133 
to  agree,  1  65 
to  alight,  apearse,  1  02 
all,  todo,  92 
to  allow,  dejar 
almost,  casi 
already,  ya 
afso,  tarnbie*n 
altar,  altar 
always,  siempre 
among,  entre 
amusing,  dpertido 
anchor,  ancla 
and,  y,  113 
answer,  contestaci6n 
to  answer,  contestar 
any,  6,  92,  97  to  99,  132 
anybody,  anyone,  93,  99 
to  appear,  parecer,  168 
to  applaud,  aplaudir 
apple,  manzana 
to  approve,  1  10 
are  there  ?  hay  ? 
to  arrive,  llegar 
as,  49,  136 

as  many,  as  much,  49 
as  soon  as,  luego  que 
to  ask  (enquire),  pre- 

guntar 
to  ask  (request),  159 


asleep,  dormido,  durmi- 

to  break,  romper 

at,  a  ;  at  the,  8     [endo 

breakfast,  almuerzo 

at  home,  en  casa 

to  bring,  151 

at  once,  ahora 

broken,  roto 

to  attain,  alcanzar 

brother,  hermano 

attentive,  atento 

brought,  traido 

aunt,  tla 

but,  pero,  115 

author,  escritor 

to  buy,  comprar 

by,  por,  104 

BAD,  malo,  19,  94 

badly,  mal 

CAB,  coche 

bank,  banco 

to  call,  llamar 

banker,  banquero 

can,  140,  141 

battle,  batalla 

capacious,  capaz 

to  be,  17 

captain,  capitan 

beautiful,  herinoso 

careful,  cuidadoso 

because,  porque 

careless,  descuidado 

been,  estado 

carpenter,  carpintero 

beer,  certeza 

carriage,  coche 

before,  antes  de 

to  carry,  llevar 

to  begin,  109    [portarse 

cat,  gato 

to  behave  one's  self,  corn- 

cause,  causa 

to  believe,  creer 

celebrated,  celebre 

better,  best,  mejor 

certain,  seguro1 

bill,  cuenta 

chair,  silla 

bird,  pajaro 

to  change,  cambiar 

black,  negro 

chapter,  capitulo 

blue,  azul 

cheap,  barato 

boat,  buque,  bote 

cheese,  queso 

book,  libro 

child,  nino 

to  be  born,  nacer,  168 

child=son,  hijo 

both,  ambos,  ambas 

to  choose,  160 

bottle,  botella 

church,  iglesia 

bought,  comprado 

cigar,  cigarro 

box,  caja 

city,  ciudad 

boy,  muchacho 

class,  clase,  FEM. 

brave,  valiente 

clear,  ciaro 

bread,  pan 

clerk,  dependieate 

clever,  habif 

directly,  al  instante 

-father,  padre 

to  close,  cerrar,  108 

to  discover,   descubrir, 

to  fatigue,  fatigar 

coffee,  cafe 

distinct,  distinto      [155 

fault,  culpa,  falta 

.cold,  frio,  130 

to-  divert,  162 

favor,  favor 

collection,  colecci6n 

to  divide,  dividir 

to  fear,  temer 

to  come,  147 

to  do,  126 

to  feel,  161 

to  come  back,  110 

docfor,  me'dico 

to  fight,  pelear 

to  commence,  109 

document,  docurnento 

to  fill,  llenar 

to  complain,  quejarse 

dog,  perro 

to  find,  hallar 

concert,  concierto 

dollar,  duro,  peso 

to  finish,  acabar,  termi- 

to  congratulate,  felicitar 

done,  hecho 

fire,  fuego                [nar 

to  conquer,  veneer 

door,  puerta 

firm,  firme 

to  consent,  162         [cia 

double,  doble 

floor,  suelo 

consequence,  consecuen- 

doubt,  duda 

flower,  flor,  FEM. 

to  be  able  to  be  con- 

to doubt,  dudar 

fog,  niebla 

tained,  153 

downstairs,  abajo 

to  follow,  160 

to  continue,  continual 

dozen,  docena 

for,  para,  112 

to  contradict,  165 

drawer,  caj6n 

foreign,  extranjero 

on  the  contrary,  al  con- 

to  dream,  110 

to  forget,  olvidar 

trario 

dress,  vestido 

fork,  tenedor 

convenient,  conveniente 

to  drink,  beber 

France,  Fran  cia 

to  cook,  cocer,  108 

dry,  seco 

to  freeze,  109 

to  copy,  copiar 

French^  trance's 

corner,  rinc6n 

EACH,  cada 

friend,  amigo 

to  correct,  160 

ear,  oreja 

from,de;      from  the,  8 

to  cost,  108 

early,  teraprano 

fruit,  fruta 

could,  141 

easily,  facilmente 

full,  lleno 

to  count,  contar,  110 

easy,  facil 

furniture,  muebles,  PLU. 

country,  campo 

to  eat,  comer 

future,  futuro 

cousin,  primo 

English,  ingle's 

to  cover,  155 

to  enjoy,  gozar 

GARDEN,  jardin 

cup,  taza 

enough,  bastante 

general,  general 

customer,  parroquiano 

envelope,  sobre 

gentleman,  senor,  caba- 

to  escape,  escaparse 

German,  aleman    [Hero 

DARK,  obscuro 

to  esteem,  estimar 

to  get  up,  levantarse 

daughter,  hija 

evening,    tarde,   FEM.  . 

girl,  muchacha 

-day,  dia,  MASC. 

noche  (night),  FEM. 

to  give,  118 

the  day  after  to-morrow 

every,  cada 

given,  dado 

pasado  manana 

everyday,  todoslosdias 

glass,  vaso 

dear,  caro 

everything,  todo 

glove,  guante 

to  defer,  162 

to  examine,  examinar 

to  go,  go  away,  120 

delicious,  delicioso 

exercise,  tema,  MASC. 

to  go  out,  148 

to  deny,  109 

to  expect,  esperar 

gold,  oro 

to  destroy,  170 

experience,  experiencia 

good,  bueno,  19,  94 

to  die,  163 

to  explain,  explicar 

goods,  g£neros,  PLUR. 

difficult,  dificil 

explanation,  explicacioa 

grammar,  gramatica 

^difficulty,  dificultad 

eye,  ojo 

great,  grande,  95 

diligent,  diligente 

greater,  46 

to  dine,  comer 

FACT,  hecho 

to  grow,  crecer,  168 

dinner,  coraida 

faithful,  fiel 

growing,  creciendo 

to  direct;  dirigir 

to  fall,  152 

to  guess,  adivinar 

94 

HALF,  medio 

itself,  65,  100 

band,  mano,  FEM. 

happy,  feliz 

JOURNEY,  viaje 

hardly,  apenas 

jug,  jarro 

hat,  sombrero 

to  have,  2,  1  1 

*o  KEEP,  guardar 

to  have  to,  145 

key,  Have,  FEM. 

he,  a 

kindness,  bondad 

head,  cabeza 

king,  rey 

to  hear,  150 

knife,  cuchillo 

heavy,  pesado 

to  know,  119,  168 

her,  to  her,  14,  15,66 

here,  aqui 

LADY,  senora 

hers,  38  to  42 

lamp,  Jampara 

herself,  65,  100 

large,  grange,  95 

high,  alto 

last,  ultimo 

him,  to  him,  66 

late,  tarde 

himself,  65,  100 

to  laugh,  160 

his,  14,  15,38  to  42 

lawyer,  abogado 

home,  a  casa 

lazy,,  holgazan 

at  home,  en  casa 

to  learn,  aprender 

to  hope,  esperar 

to  leave=start,salir,  148 

horse,  caballo 

on  the  left,  a  >a  izquierda 

hot,  calido,  130 

to  lend,  prestar 

hotel,  hotel 

less,  menos 

hour,  hora 

lesson,  leccidn 

house,  casa 

to  let,  dejar,  59 

how  ?  como  ? 

letter,  carta 

how  much  ?  cuanto  ? 

to  (tell  a)  lie,  162 

how  many,  92 

to  he  down,  acostarse, 

to  hurt,  lastimar 

light  (NOUN),  luz    [110 

husband,  esposo 

light  (ADJECT.),  claro 

to  light,  109 

i»  yo 

to  like,  138 

idle,  holgazan 

list,  lista 

if,  si 

to  listen,  escuchar 

ill,  enfermo      [tarn  en  te 

listening,  escuchando 

immediately,    inmedia- 

little,  pequeno 

important,  importante 

a  little,  un  poco 

impossible,  imposible 

to  live,  vivir 

in,  en               [aplicado 

London,  Londres 

industrious,     laborioso, 

to  look  at,  mirar 

inhabitant,  habitante 

to  look  for,  buscar 

ink,  tinta 

looking-for,  buscando 

inkstand,  tintero 

to  lose,  1  08 

to  intend,  intentar 

to  love,  amar 

to  interfere,  meterse 

low,  ba;r 

to  invite,  convidar 

luggage,  equipajes 

is  there  ?  hay  ? 

Italian,  italiano 

MADE,  hecho 

it,  66;    its,  14,  15 

to  make,  126 

to  make  a  mistake,  equi- 

man,  bombre     [vocarse 

many,  92 

to  get  married,  casaise 

master,  amo 

may,  140 

me,  65,  66 

meat,  carne,  FEM. 

to  meet,  eucontrar,  110 

merchant,  comerciante 

message,  parte 

met,  encontrado 

milk,  leche,  FEM. 

mine,  38  to  40 

minute,  minuto 

mistake,  error,  102 

money,  dinero 

month,  mes 

more,  mas 

morning,  mafiana 

most,  47,  48,  157 

mother,  mad  re 

to  move,  108 

much,  92,  134,  135 

music,  musica 

must,  145 

mustard,  mostaza 

ray,  14,  15  ;  myself,  me 

NAME,  nombre 
near,  cerca  de 
nearly,  casi 
necessary,  n^cesario 
neighbour,  veclno 
neither,  ui 
nephew,  sobrino 
never,  jamas,  nunca,  77 
new,  nuevo 
newspaper,  periodico 
niece,  sobrina 
night,  noche,  FEM. 
no,  no 

no,  none,  92,  132 
nobody,  nadie 
noise,  ruido 
nor,,ni 
not,  no 

nothing,  nada 
now,  ahora 
number,  nuuiero 
nut,  nuea 


95 


roOBEY,obedecer,168 

to  possess,  poseer 

o'clock,  83 

possible,  posible 

of,  de 

postman,  cartero 

of  the,  8 

pound,  libra 

officer,  oficial 

to  prefer,  162 

often,  amenudo 

present,  regalo 

<>n,  sobre 

to  prevent,  160 

at  once,  enseguida 

price,  precio 

one's  self,  se,  100 

prince,  principe 

only,  solamente 

principal,  principal 

open,  abierto 

to  print,  155 

to  open,  abrir,  155 

professor,  profesor 

opinion,  opini6n 

to  promise,  prometer 

or,  6,  114 

proof,  prueba 

orange,  naranja 

to  prove,  110 

order,  pedido 

pupili  disclpulo 

to  order,  mandar 

to  put,  127 

Dther,  otro 

ought,  146 

QUARTER,  cuarto 

our,  14,  15 

queen,  reina 

ours,  38  to  40 

question,  pregunta 

ourselves,  nos 

quickly,  deprisa 

to  overtake,  alcanzar 

to  owe,  deber 

RAIL,  barandilla 

rail(way),  ferrocarri) 

PAGE,  pagina 

to  rain,  Hover 

painter,  pintor 

rare,  raro 

'paper,  papel 

to  read,  leer 

parcel,  paquete 

ready,  listo 

part,  parte,  FEM. 

feq  receive,  recibir 

partner,  socio 

to  recommend,  109 

patience,  paciencia 

red,  rojo 

to  pay,  pagar 

to  refuse,  rehusar 

pear,  pera 

regiment,  regimiento 

pen,  pluma 

to  rejoice,  alegrarse 

pencil,  lapiz,  MASC. 

to  relate,  110 

penny,  nenique 

to  repeat,  160 

pepper,  pimienta 

to  repent,  162 

perhaps,  tal  vez 

reply,  respuesta 

to  permit,  permitir 

to  reply,  contestar 

person,  persona 

to  resolve,  155 

to  pick  up,  recoger 

to  respect,  respetar 

picture,  cuadro 

to  return,  110 

pin,  alfiler 

rich,  rico 

pipe,  p'ipa 

on  the  right,  a  la  derecha 

pity,  lastima 

ring,  sortija 

plate,  plato 

ripe,  maduro 

to  play,  154 

room,  cuarto,  habitaci6n 

please,    sirva(n)se,    see 

room  (space),  sitio,  153 

pleasure,  gusto  [page  84 

to  rule,  regir,  160 

pocket,  bolsillo 

to  run,  correr 

SAFE,  seguro 

said,  dicho 

sailor,  mafinero 

saint,  96 

salt,  sal,  FEM. 

same,  misrao,  92    ' 

sample,  muestra 

to  satisfy,  165 

to  say,  123 

scarcely,  apenas 

school,  escuela 

to  sefe,  124 

to  seek,  buscar 

to  seem,  parecer,  168 

seen,  visto 

to  sell,  vender 

to  send,  enviar,  mandar 

serious,  grave 

servant,  criado 

to  serve,  160 

several,  varies 

she,  ella 

shilling,  chelin 

ship,  buque 

shoe,  zapato 

shop,  tienda 

shopkeeperr  tendero 

short,  bajo 

to  show,  ensenar,  110 

to  shut,  108 

silver,  plata 

to  sing,  cantar 

sir,  senor,  caballero 

sister,  hermana 

to  sit  down,  109 

to  sleep,  164 

slowly,  despacio 

small,  pequeflo,  46 

to  smile,  160 

to  smoke,  fumar 

smoking,  fumando 

to  snow,  109 

so,  49,  136 

soldier,  soldado 

some,  6,  92,  97,  98,  132 

something,  algo 

sometimes,  a  veces 

son,  hijo 

soon,  pronto 

as  soon  as,  luego  que 

to  be  sorry,  161 


Spain,  Espafia 
Spanish,  espanol 
to  speak,  hablar 
speaking,  hablando 
to  spend,  gastar 
spoken,  hablado 
spoon,  cuchara 
to  start,  salir,  148 
station,  estaci6n 
stick,  bast6n 
still,  aiin 
stone,  piedra 
street,  calle,  FEM. 
strong,  fuerte 
to  study,  estudiar 
studying,  estudiando 
sugar,  azucar 
to  suggest,  162 
to  supply,  surtir 
to  suppose,  165 
sure,  segurb 

TABLE,  mesa 

to  take,  tomar 

taken,  tornado 

tall,  alto 

tea,  te" 

to  teach,  ensefiar 

to  tell,  123 

than,  que 

thank  you,  gracias 

that  (CONJ.  &  EEL.)  que 

that  (DEMONST.),  29,  30 

the,  6,  7 

theatre,  teatro 

thee,  65,  66 

their,  14,  15 

theirs,  38  to  42 

them,  to  them,  66,  69 

themselves,  65,  100 

then,  entonces 

there,  alliv  131 

there  is,  are,  etc.,  131 

these,  29 

they,  ellos,  ellas 

thing,  cosa 

think,  creer,  109 

this,  29,  30  ;  those,  29 

thou,  tti 

to  throw,  tirar 

to  thunder,  110 


96 

thy,  14,  16 

thyself,  te 

ticket,  billete 

time,  tiempo 

time  =  occasion,  vez 

time  (of  day),  hora 

to  tire,  cansar 

tired,  cansado 

to  get  tired,  cansarse 

to,  a  (and  page  74) 

to  the,  8 

to-day,  hoy 

to-morrow,  maiiana 

to-night,  esta  noche 

tobacco,  tabaco 

told,  dicho 

too,  demasiado 

too  much,  too  many,  92 

tool,  herramieuta 

to  touch,  tocar 

towards,  hacia 

town,  ciudad 

train,  tren 

to  travel,  via  jar 

traveller,  viajero 

truth,  verdad 

UGLY,  feo 

umbrella,  i  paraguas 

uncle,  tlo 

to     understand,     com- 

prender 
until,  hasta 
upstairs,  arriba 
us,  to  us,  66 
useful,  util 

VERY,  muy,  134,  137 
vessel,  buque 
village,  aldea 
voyage,  viaje 

to  WAIT  (for),  aguar- 

dar,  esperar 
waiter,  mozo,  criado 
waiting,       aguardando, 

esperando 
to  walk,  149 
to  want,  desear,  138 
to  warm,  109 
to  wash,  lavar 


watch,  reloj 

water,  agua 

way,  camino 

we,  nosotros 

week,  semana 

well,  bien 

what?  jque*? 

what  (RELATIVE)  lo  que 

when,  cuando 

where,  donde 

whether,  si 

which,  34,  53,  55 

white,  bianco 

\vho,  33,  53,  54,  55 

\vhole,  todo 

whom  ?  33,  54 

whose,  33 

why  ?  i  por  que*  ? 

wife,  esposa,  senora 

to  be  willing  to,  138 

to  win,  ganar 

wind,  viento 

window,  veutana 

windy,  130 

wine,  vino 

wing,  ala 

wish,  deseo 

to  wish,  138 

with,  con 

without,  sin 

woman,  mujer 

word,  palabra 

work,  trabajo 
j  to  work,  trabajar 
j  workman,  obrero 

worse,  peor,  46 

to  be  worth,  128 

to  wound,  162 

to  write,  escribir,  155 

writing,  escribiendo 

written,  escrito 

YEAR,  auo 
last  year,  el  afio  pasado 
yes,  si 

yesterday,  ayer 
yet,  todavia 
you,  to  you,  1,  66 
youjr,  14,  15, 16 
yours,  41,  42 
yourself,  -ves,  65, 100 


SPANISH 
READING 

SIMPLIFIED 


A  COLLECTION  OF 

AMUSING  ANECDOTES,  Etc. 

with 

COPIOUS  FOOT-NOTES  ON  EVERY  PAGE 

rendering  a 

DICTIONARY   UNNECESSARY 

THE  ONLY  FULLY  ANNOTATED  READER  IN  EXISTENCE 


PHILADELPHIA 

DAVID    McKAY,    Publisher 

604-8  S.  Washington  Square 


INSTRUCTIONS    TO    STUDENTS. 


The  Student  is  assumed  to  know  the  ARTICLES  and 
NOMINATIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS  (Lesson  1  in  "  Spanish 
Simplified  ")» the  POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES  (Lesson  3)  and 
PRONOUNS  (Lesson  8),  the  DEMONSTRATIVE  ADJECTIVES- 
and  PRONOUNS  (Lesson  6),  the  INTERROGATIVE  ADJEC- 
TIVES and  PRONOUNS  (Lesson  7),  the  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS 
(Lesson  10),  the  NUMBERS  (Lessons  14  and  15),  the  PRESENT 
TENSES  of  *  tener,  haber,  ser,  estar,1  and  of  the  REGULAR 
VERBS  (Lessons  1  to  5),  and  a  few  words  of  very  frequent 
occurrence.  He  should  also  know  the  ordinary  way  of 
forming  the  FEMININE  and  PLURAL  ;  and  it  would  be  advi- 
sable to  read  carefully  through  Lesson  12  in  our  Grammar, 
before  beginning  this  Reader. 

A  number  after  a  word  refers  to  the  English  translation 
at  the  foot,  which  bears  the  same  number.  If  several  words 
are  translated  together,  the  number  is  given  after  the  first 
word  and  the  last.  The  literal  translations  are  followed  by 
a  translation  in  good  English,  preceded  by  the  sign  = 

Nouns  are  translated  in  the  SINGULAR,  and  Regular 
Verbs  in  the  INFINITIVE, 


PREFACE. 


In  the  study  of  Languages,  the  importance  of  READING 
the  Foreign  Idiom  as  soon  as  possible  is  universally  admitted. 

Unfortunately,  every  year  thousands  of  students  give  up 
the  attempt  in  despair.  Very  few  have  the  time  and  perse- 
verance required  to  search  for  every  word  in  a  Dictionary. 
A  beginner  takes  three  or  four  hours  to  go  through  an 
ordinary  page  under  these  circumstances ;  and  even  then  it 
is  doubtful  whether  he  has  translated  correctly. 

"HUGO'S  SIMPLIFIED  READER "  has  been  compiled  to 
prevent  this  great  waste  of  time.  By  its  aid  a  beginner 
— after  a  few  weeks'  study  of  our  Grammar — can  easily 
translate  a  page  in  less  than  half  an  hour,  WITH  THE  CER- 
TAINTY THAT  HE  HAS  NOT  MISTAKEN  ME  MEANING  OP  A 
SINGLE  PHRASE.  This  is  ensured  by  the  copious  foot-notes, 
every  word  being  translated  until  it  has  occurred'  several  times. 
An  extensive  Vocabulary  is  thus  acquired  without  effort. 

The  contents  consist  of  interesting  Anecdotes,  etc.,  which 
amuse  the  student,  as  well  as  instructing  him.  In  selecting, 
dry  extracts  from  classical  authors  have  been  carefully 
avoided,  it  being  of  far  more  practical  use  to  acquire  the 
language  as  spoken  and  written  at  the  present  time. 

Compilers  of  Reading  Books  usually  explain  the  absence 
of  notes  by  the  statement  that  looking  out  words  in  a  Dic- 
tionary impresses  them  better- on  the  memory.  This  is  a  very 
poor  excuse.  The  real  reason  is  that  ONE  PAGE  WITH  CARE- 
FULLY PREPARED  NOTES  INVOLVES  AS  MUCH  LABOR  AS 
A  DOZEN  UN  ANNOTATED  PAGES,  and  therefore  cannot  be 
produced  without  much  trouble  ami  expense. 

Most  Reading  Books  are  of  no  more  tise  to  the  average 
student  than  a  newspaper  or  an  ordinary  book,  as  it  is  nearly 
as  much  trouble  to  refer  to  a  Dictionary  as  to  a  Vocabulary 
on  a  different  page;  whereas  the  copious  notes  in  Hugo's 
Reader,  being  always  at  hand  for  instantaneous  reference, 
make  this  book  invaluable  to  the  learner. 


LIST  of  WORDS 
not  translated  in  the  Foot- Notes. 


&  to,  at 

dijo,  (he)  said  or 

mismo,  same 

Segwido,  second 

ahord,  now 

tqld 

muchacho,  boy 

sees,  six 

al,  to  the,  at  the 

dinero,  money 

mucho,  much 

senor,  gentleman, 

alii,  there 

Z>ios,  God 

machos,  many 

sir,  Mr. 

amigo,  friend. 

doce,  twelve 

mujer,  woman 

senora,  lady, 

aqueL  that 

donde,  where 

TTM^,  very 

madam,  Mrs. 

aquellos,  those 

dos,  two 

sesenta,  sixty 

aqui,  here 

Nz^o,  child 

sesto,  sixth 

aycr,  yesterday 

EJ,  the 

no,  no,  not 

setenta,  seventy 

e7,  he,  him,  it 

noche,  night 

setimo,  seventh 

"Bieu,  well 

ella,  she,  her,  it 

?zowo,  ninth 

si,  if,  whether 

buen(o)>  good 

ellos,  they,  them 

nosotros,  we,  us 

si,  yes 

07z,  in,  on 

noventa,  ninety 

sa'ete,  seven 

Caballero,  sir, 

entre,  between, 

nuestro,  our(s) 

sew,  without 

gentleman 

among 

nueve,  nine 

sobre,  on,  upon 

caballo,  horse 

ese,  that 

?mevo,  new 

soldado,  soldier 

ca/Ze,  street 

esos,  those 

sombrero,  hat 

carta,  letter 
casa,  house 

espanol,  Spanish 
este,  this 

o,  w,  or 
ochenta,  eighty 

sw,  his,"  her,   its, 
your,  their 

catorce,  fourteen 

estos,  these 

oc^o,  eight 

suyo,  his,  her(s), 

c^ew  (to)  ,  hundred 

octavo,  eighth 

your(s),  their(s) 

ciwco,  five 
cincuenta,  fifty 

Orran(de),  great, 
large 

once,  eleven 
otro,  other 

Mercer  (o),  third 

ciudadt  town, 
city 
COAHO,  as,  how, 
like,  what 

•Hablar,  (to) 
speak 
hermano,  brother 

Padre,  father 
pa,pel,  paper 
para,  for,  (in  or- 

tiempo,  time 
^'//to,  ink 
todo,  all 
trabajar,  to  work 

con,  with 
cosa,  thing 

&yo,  son 
hombre,  man 

der)  to 
pequeno,  small, 

trabojo,  work 
irece,  thirteen- 

criado,  servant 

Aora,  hour,  time 

little 

treinta,  thirty 

cualt  which 
cuando,  when 

Aoy,  to-day 

pero,  but 
pluma,  pen 

/res,  three 
to,  thy 

cuarenta,  forty 

La,  Zas,  the 

JDOCO,  little,  a  few 

<w,  thou,  thee 

cuartOi  room, 

lection,  lesson 

por,  by,  for 

ta#o,  thine 

fourth 

porque,  because 

cuatro,  four 
cuchillo,  knife 
CM^o,  whose 

/o,  /os,  the 
MaaVe,  mother 

por  tfwe,  why 
primer  (o),  first 
puerta,  door 

Un(o),  a,  an,  one 
w?2os,  some,  any 
usted,  Fa*.,  you 

De,  of,  from,  to, 

mal(o),  bad,  ill 
manana,    morn- 

Qwe, which,  what, 
who,  that,  than 

Veinte,  twenty 

with 

ing,  to-morrow 

quien,  who,  whom 

vez,  time 

cfeoer,  (to)  owe 

mas,  more,  most 

quince,  fifteen 

rm'r,  (to)  liv.e 

decimo,  tenth 

menos,  less,  least 

quinto,  fifth 

vosotros,  you 

c^,  of  the,  from 

wzi,  my 

vuestro,  your(s) 

the 

iwi,  me 

"Reloj,  watch, 

dia,  day 

mi7,  thousand 

clock 

Y,  e,  and 

cfre?,  ten 

mio,  mine 

rey,  king 

y°)  i 

'La  Hospitalidad.* 

Un  soldado  pregunto2  a°  uno  de  sus  camaradas,3  que  volvia* 
de  una  campafia,5  si  habia6  hallado7  mucha1  hospitalidad1  en 
Holanda.1 — j  Oh  !  si,  mucha,1  respondio1 ;  todo  el  tiempo  que 
he  estado8  alii  lo°  he  pasado9  en  el  hospital. 

0  not  to  be  translated  ,  1  the  same,  or  nearly  the  same,  as  in  English. 
2  asked  ;  3  comrade  ;  4  was  returning  ;  5  campaign  ;  6  (he)  had  ;  7  found  ; 
8  been ;  9  passed. 


La  Cuna.2 

Una  pobre3  mujer  pidio4  un  dia  limosna5  a  un  caballero 
muy  alto6  con  unos  pies7  desmesurados,8  y  le9  dijo,  viendo1.0 
que  no  la13  queria11  socorrer,12  que  por  el  amor14  de  Dios  le16 
diese15  al  menos17  uno  de  sus  zapatos.18 

I  Como19 !  £  uno  de  mis  zapatos18  ?  £  Y  que  quiere20  Vd. 
hacer21  con  el  ? 

Hare22  una  cuna2  para  mi  nino. 

2  cradle  ;  3  poor  ;  4  asked  ;'  5  alms  ;  6  tall  ;  7  foot  ;  8  huge ;  9  (to)  him  ; 
10  seeing  ;  11  (he)  would  ;  12  succour  ;  13  her  ;  14  Jove  ;  15  he  should  give  ; 
16  her  ;  17  least ;  18  shoe  ,  19  what ;  20  will ;  21  do  ;  22  (1)  shall  make. 


El  Charlatan. 

Un  charlatan1  de  los2  que  venden3  especificos1  universales,1 
mando4  a  buscar5a°un  medico6  porque7  estaba8  malo.9  Llego10 
el  medico,6  y  luego11  que11  le13  vio12  le13  dijo14  que  no15  tenia 
nadar15  y  que  podia16  haberse  excusado16  de  llamarle17  por  una 
cosa  tan18  frivola.1 

i  Como19  frivola1  ?  respondio1  el  charlatan,1  <;  sabe20  Vd.20 
que  por  descuido21  he  tornado22  una  de  mis  pildoras23  ? 

„  2  those  ;  3  sell ;  4  sent ;  5  seek  ,  6  physician  ;  7  because  ;  8  (he)  was  , 
9  ill  ;  10  arrived  ;  11  as  soon  as  ;  12  (he)  saw  ;  13  (to)  him  ;  14  (he)  said ; 
15  (he)  had  nothing=nothing  was  the  matter  with  him  ;  16  (he)  might 
have  excused  himself  (=avoided)  ;  17  call(ing)  him  ;  18  so  ;  19  how  ;  20  do 
you  know  ;  21  carelessness  ;  22  taken  ;  23  pill. 

*  English  words  ending  in  ^usually  end  in  dad  in  Spanish. 


El  Valor. 

Un  hombre,  que  se2  habia  vanagloriado2de  su  valor,1  huy63 
en  eierta4  ocasion1  de  su  contrario,5  y  uno  de  los  testfgos6 
de  sus  fanfarronadas,7  que  le8  vio8  correr,9  le11  grit610 : 
t  Donde  esta  ese  valor1  ?•  y  el,  sin  dejar12  de  correr,9  le11 
replieo13 :  En  las  piernas.1* 

0  not  to  be  translated  ;  1  the  same,  or  nearly  the  same,  as  in  English. 
2  had  bragged  ;  3  fled  ;  4  (a)  certain  ;  5  opponent ;  6  witness  ;  7  boast ;  8 
saw  him  ;  9  run  ;  10  called  out ;  1 1  to  him  ;  12  =ceasing  ;  13  replied  ;  14  leg. 


El  Aldeano2  y  los  Monos.3 

Un  aldeano2  que  llevaba4  de5  parte5  de  su  amo6  al  seiior7  del 
pueblo8  de9  regalo1^  un  canasto11  de  peras,13  encontr613  en  la 
escalera14  dos  grandes  monos3  con  vestidos16  azules15  bordados17 
de  oro18  y  espada19  ceiiida,20  que  se21  arrojaron21  a  la  fruta1 
en22  cuanto22  la24  vieron.23  Como25  el  aldeano2  no0  habia26visto28 
nunca27  esta  especie1  de  animates,1  se29  quito  la  montera29  con 
mucha1  cortesia,1  y  les31  dejo30  hacer32  lo38  que  quisieron.33 

Apenas34  agarraron35los  monos3  algunas36  peras12  cuando  se87 
marcharon37  a  comerlas,38y  tomando39  en  ton  ces40su  canasto,11 
se41  presento41  al  senor.7  Este42  noto43  la  falta44  y  preguntole45 
-^n  que  consistia,46  a  lo°  que  contesto48  el  labriego47 : 

44  Senor,  lleno50  venia,49  pero  los  senoritos,51  vuestros  hijos, 
han  tornado52  las53  que  f  altan,54  y  quedan55  comiendolas56  en  la 
escalera.14 — Algunos36  criados  que  habian26  sido57  testigos58  del 
Jance,59  descubrieron60  la  sencillez61  del  aldeano,2  que  fue62 
muy  celebrada1  en  la  casa,  y  todo  el  pueblo8  se63  rio63  de  ella. 

2^  villager  ,  3  monkey  ;  4  was  taking  ,  5=on  the  part ;  6  master  ;  7  squire  ; 
8  village  ;  9=as-a  ;  10  present ,  11  basket ,  12  pear  ,  13  encountered  ,  14  stair- 
case ;  15  blue  ;  16  dress  ;  17  embroidered  ,  18  gold  ,  19  sword  ,  20  girded  ; 
21  flung  themselves=darted  ,  22  immediately  ,  23  they  saw  ;  24  it ;  25  as  ; 
26  had  ,  27  never  ,  28  seen  ,  29  he  took  off  his  cap  ,  30  let ;  31  them  ; 
32  do  ;  33  what  they  liked  \  34  hardly  ,  35  seized  ;  36  some  ;  37  they 
marched  off  ;  38  eat  them  ;  39  taking  ;  40  then  ,  41  he  presented  him- 
self  ;  42  =the  latter  ;  43  noticed  ,  44  deficiency  ;  45  asked  him  ;  46  it  con- 
sisted ;  47  peasant ;  48  answered  ;  49  it  came  ;  50  full ;  51  young  gentlemen  ; 
r>2  taken  ,  53  those  ;  54  are  missing  ;  55  remain=are  now  ;  56  eating  them  ; 
f>7  been  ;  58  witness  ;  59  incident ;  60  discovered=made  known  ;  61  sim- 
plicity ;  62  was  ;  63  made  merry. 


From  this  point  the  Student  is  assumed  to  understand  the  formation 
of  the  Participles  and  the  Future  Tense  (see  Lessons  6  and  8  in 
"SPANISH  SIMPLIFIED.") 


Dispute1  de  dos  Reos.2 

Un  salteador3de  caminos3  y  un  deshollinador,4  convencidos6 
de  un  robo6  domestico,1  fueron7  condenados1  a  muerte8  a  un 
mismo  tiempo.  El  salteador,3  ricamente9  vestido,10  subio11  al 
patibulo12  con  mucha1  arrogancia1  y  descaro,13  pero  parecio14 
que  ponia15  la  mayor16  atencion1  en  las  exhortaciones1  del  re- 
ligioso,17  y  el  deshollinador4  se18  acerco18  a  el  para  escuchar19 
sus  palabras21  edificantes.20  —  Retirate,22  le24  dice28  el  salteador8 
de  camirios,3  y  trata25  de  resignarte.26  —  No  quiero,27le24respon- 
de,1  pues28  yo  tengo  tanto29  derecho30  como31  tii  a  estar  aqui. 

2  criminal  ;  3  highwayman  ;  4  chimney-sweep  ;  6  convicted  ;  6  robbery  ; 
7  w«re  ;  8  death  ;  9  richly*  ;  10  dressed  ;  11  mounted  ;  12  gallows  ;  13  im- 
pudence  ;  14  it  appeared  ;  15  was  placing  ;  16  greatest  ;  17  clergyman  ; 
18  approached  ;  19  listen  to  ;  20  edifying  ;  21  word  ;  22  go  back  ;  23  says  ; 
24  (to),  him  ;  25  try  ;  26  resign  thyself  j  27  I  will  ;  28  since  ;  29  as  much  ; 
30  right  j  31  as.  _  _ 

Un  Hijo  obediente. 

Un  padre  anciano2  y  rico3  pkro  bastante4  avaro,5  envid6  a° 
su  hijo  a  estudiar1  a  Salamanca,  encargandole7  sobre8  tpdo  que 
viviese9  con  la  mas  estricta1  economia.1  El  joven,10  a11  f  uer  de11 
hijo  obediente,  se12  informo12  del  precio13  de  los  principales1 
articulos1  de  consu'mo1  luego14  que14  llego15  a  la  ciudad. 

Pregunto16  cuanto17  costaba19  una  vaca18  y  le  dijeron20  queQ 
de  trescientos  a  cuatrocientos  francos1  ;  informose12  luego21 
del  precio13  de  las  perdices22  y  le  respondieron1  que°  de  dos  a 
tres  francos1  cada23  una. 

Entonces,24  dijo  para  si25  el  mozuelo,26  sera  bueno  comer27 
perdices22  todos  los  dias  para  obedecer28  y  dar29  gusto30  a  mi 
padre. 

2  old  ;  3  rich  ;  4  enough  —  rather;  5  stingy  ;  6  sent  ;  7  charging  him  ;  8 
above  ;  9  he  should  live  ;  10  youth  ;  11  like  ;  12  informed  himself=en- 
quired  ;  13  price  ;  14  as  soon  as  ;  15  he  arrived  ;  16  he  asked  ;  17  how  much  ; 
18  cow  ;  19  cost  ;  20  they  told  ;  21  afterwards,  next  ;  22  partridge  ;  23  each  ; 
24  then  ;  25  himself  ;  26  youth  ;  27  to  eat  ;  28  obey  ;  29  give  ;  30  pleasure, 

*  English  Adverbs  ending  in  ly  usually  end  in  mente  in  Spanish* 


8 

Estratagema  singular  de  Cristobal  Col6n. 

Cristobal2  Colon2  hizo3  un  desembarco4  en  Jamaica  en 
1504,  y  trat65  de  formar1  un  establecimiento.6  Los  insulares* 
se8  apartaron8  de  la  costa9  dejando10  a°  los  Espanoles11  sin 
viveres.12  Una  estratagema1  singular1  se13  puso13  en  ejecucidn1 
en  vista14  de  tal16  apuro.16 

Debia17  haber  muy  en  breve17  un  eclipse1  de  luna.18  Col6n 
mand619llamar20a°  los  jefes21  de  los  pueblos23  vecinos,22  y  les24 
dijo  con  tono1  firme1 :  Muy  pronto25  sereis26  castigados26 ;  el 
dios  todopoderoso27  de  los  Espanoles,11  que  yo  adoro,1  va28  a 
daros28  sus  mas  terribles1  golpes,29  y  en  prueba30  de  lo°  que 
os32  digo,31  vereis,33  desde^esta34  noche,  encenderse35  la  luna,18 
despues36  oscurecerse,37  y  negaros58  su  luz.39  Este  seri40  el 
preludio1  de  vuestras  desgracias,41  si  no  os42  aprovechais43  de 
mi  aviso.43 

Comienza44  en^efecto1  a45pocas45  horas  el  eclipse.1  La  deso- 
lacidn1  entre46  los  salvajes47  es  tan48  grande  que  van49  todos  4 
postrarse50^  los  pies51  de  Colon,  jurando52  que  nada53le55falta- 
ria.54  Este  hombre  habil56  aparenta57  dejarse  conmover67 ;  se58 
encierra58  como59  para  desarmar1  la  colera60  celeste,1  y  mues- 
trase61  pocb  despues,36  anunciando1  que  Dios  se62haapiadado62 
y  que  la  luna18  volveria63a  aparecer.63  Los  Indios,1  que  qneda- 
ron64persuadidos1de°que  este  estranjero1disponia65de  la°natura- 
leza06  a  su  arbitrio,67  no  le69  dejaron68carecer70de  cosa  alguna.71 

2  Christopher  Columbus  ;  3  made  ;  4  landing  ;  5  tried ;  6  settlement ;  7  is- 
lander ;  8  withdrew  ;  9  coast ;  10  leaving  ;  11  Spaniard  ;  12  provisions  ;  13 
=was  put ;  14  y^ew  ;  15  such  ;  16  want ;  17  =there  was  very  soon  tp  take 
place  ;  18  moon  j_  19  ordered  ;  20  to  call  ;  21  chief ;  22  neighbouring  ;  23 
village ;  24  to  them  ;  25  soon  ;  26  you  will  be  punished  :  27  almighty  ;  28  ia 
going  to  give  you ;  29  blow  ;  30  proof  ;  31  I  say  ;  32  to  you  ;  33  you  will  see  ; 
34  from  this=this  very  ;  35  =show  its  light ;  36  afterwards  ;  37  disap- 
pear ;  38  deny  you  ;  39  light ;  40  will  be  ;  41  misfortune  ;  42  you  avail 
yourselves  ;  43  warning ;  44  begins ;  45  =in  a  few  ;  46  among  ;  47  savages  ; 
48  so  ;  49  they  go  ;  50  prostrate  themselves ;  51  foot ;  52  swearing ;  53 
nothing ;  54  should  be  wanting ;  55  to  him  ;  56  clever  ;  67  pretends  to  allow 
himself  to  be  affected  ;  58~withdraws  ;  59  as  if  ;  60  anger ;  61  shows  him- 
self ;  62  lias  been  appeased  ;  63  would  appear  again  ;  64  remained  ;  65  dis- 
posed ;  66  nature;  67  will  j  68  let ;  69  him  ;  70  be  in  want ;  71  any 


Ifrom  this  point  the  Student  is  assumed  to  understand  the  formation 
of  the  Imperative  and  Past  Definite  (see  Lweow  9  and  10  in 
"  SPANISH  SIMPLIFIED  "). 


tin  nino  positivo. 

Un  nino  lloraba2  mucho  porque  habia3  perdido4  dos  fran- 
cos1  que  tenia.8  Un  tio5  suyo6  le  rega!67  igual8  cantidad9  para 
con'solarle,10  pero  el  nino  Iloraba11aun12  mas  y  decia13:  "Si  no 
hubiese14  perdido4  mis  dos  francos,1  ahora  tendria15  cuatro." 

2  wept  ;  3  he  had  ;  4  lost ;  5  uncle  ;  6  (of)  his  ;  7  regalar,  to  present  ;  8 
equal ;  9  quantity  ;  10  console  him  ;  11  wept ;  12  still ;  13  said  ;  14 1  had ; 
161  should  have. 


La  Forma  de  la  Tierra. 

Un  maestro2  de  escuela,3  querlendo4  un  dia  explicar5  a  sus 
discipulos6  la  forma1  de  la  Tierra,7  la9  compar68  con  su  taba- 
quera,10  la°  cual  era11  redonda.12  Pocos  dias  despues,13  presen- 
t6se14  en  la  escuela3  un  inspector,1  y  segiin15  costumbre,16 
dirigio17  algunas18  preguntas19  a  los  escolares.1  Despues20  de 
examinarlos20  de  gramatica1  y  aritmetica,1  paso21  a  geograf  ia,1 
y  les23  pregunto22  cual  era11  la  forma1  de  la  Tierra.7 

Todos  permanecieron24  callados.25  El  maestro,2  a26  fin  de26 
ref  rescar27  la  memoria1  de  los  muchachos,  saco28  la  tabaquera10 
del  bolsillo29 ;  pero  desgraciadamente,30  para  hacer31  honor1  al 
inspector,1  habia32  aquel  dia  traido33  una  tabaquera10  de  plata34 
que  no35  usaba  mas  que35Ios36  domingos,36y  que  era  cuadrada.37 

Inmediatamente,1  un  discipulo6  levanto38  la  mano39  para 
indicar1  que  el  sabia40  la  respuesta,41  y  dijo  : 

"  Senor,  la  Tierra7  es  cuadrada37  los36  domingos,36  y  redon- 
da12 los  demas42  dias  de  la  semana.43 " 

2  master ;  3  school ;  4  wishing  ;  5  to  explain  ;  6  pupil  ;  7  earth  ;  8  com- 
parar,  to  compare ;  9  it ;  10  snuff-box  ;  11  was  ;  12  round  ;  13  after ,  14 
presented  himself  ;  15  according  to  ;  16  custom  ;  17  dirigir,  to  address ;  18 
Borne  ;  19  question  ;  20  after  examining  them  ;  21  pasar,  to  pass ;  22  pre- 
guntar,  to  ask  ;  23  them  ;  24=remained  ;  25  silent ;  26  in  order  to.;  27  re- 
fresh ;  28  sacar,  to  draw  out ;  29  pocket ;  30  unfortunately  ;  31  do  ;  32  had  ; 
33  brought ;  34  silver  ;  35  he  only  used  ;  36  on  Sundays;  37  square  ;  38  le« 
yantar,  to  raise  ;  39  hand ;  40  knew  ;  41  answer ;  42  other  ;  43  week. 


10 

Los  ciuco  Toros. 

El  Marques1  de  Villa  Hermosa2  tenia3  intenci6nx  de  pasar* 
£  un  lugar5  vecino6  4  sus  estados7  donde  se10  celebraba10  una 
corrida8  de  toros.9  Sabiendo12  los  alcaldes11  la  intencion1  del 
marques,1  f  ueron13  a  Cuenca,  donde  estaba,2  y  con  expresivas1 
suplicas14le16rogaron15  se17  dignase17  ir18  a  tiempo  que  pudiese19 
ver20  la  f  uncion.1  Alegrose21  el  marques  del  convite,22  y  con 
grande  alborozo23  les25  pregunto24 :  <r  y  que  toros9  teneis26  ? 

Uno  de  los  alcaldes11  respondio1 :  Cuatro,  excelentisimo1 
seiior ;  y  si  vuestra  Excelencia1  viene,27  seran  cinco. 

0  not  to  be  translated  ;  1  the  same,  or  nearly  the  same,  as  in  English. 

2  beautiful ;  3  tad  ;  4  pass  ;  5  place  ;  6=near ;  7  state ;  8=fight ;  9  bull ; 
10  was  taking  place  ;  11  magistrates,  authorities  ;  12  knowing  ;  13  went ; 
14  request ;  16  rogar,  to  entreat ;  16  him  ;  17=to  condescend  ;  18  to  go  ; 
19  he  could  ;  20  see  ,  21  was  pleased  j  22  invitation  ;  23  joy  ;  24  preguntar, 
to  ask  ;  25  them  ;  26  have  you  ;  27  comes. 


La  Habladora. 

Para  vengarse2  de  una  habladora3  in  sufrible4y  per  judicial,1 
la5  presentaron1  un  dia  un  sujeto6  que  la8  dijeron7  era9  un 
literato10  de  una  conversacion1  interesante.11  Como12  su  flaco13 
era9  el14  de  hablar  mucho  y  de  creerse15  con  talento,1  le16  re- 
cibio16  con  mucho  placer17;  pero  ansiosa18  por  lucir19  su  pico20 
se21  puso21  a  hablar  al  momento1  haciendole22  mil  preguntas23 
diferentes1  sin  lograr24  la  men  or25  respuesta.26 

Hecha27  la  visita,1 1  esta  Vd.  contenta1  de  su28presentado28  ? 
la8  preguntaron. 
\  Oh  !  si29  estoy  encantada29:  es  hombre  de  gran  talento.1 

A  esta  exclamacion1  todos  se30  echaron  a  reir,30  pues31  este 
gran  talento  era9  un  mudo.32 

2  avenge  themselves  ;  3  chatterbox  ;  4  insufferable  ;  5  to  her  ;  6  subject 
=person  ;  7  they  told  ;  8  her  ;  9  was  ;  10  literary  man  ;  11  interesting  ;  12 
as  ;  13  weakness  ;  14=that ;  15  belie v(ing)  herself  ;  16  she  received  him  ; 
17  pleasure  ;  18  anxious  ;  19  to  show  off ;  20  loquacity  ,  21  she  put  herself 
=she  began  ;  22  making  to  him=putting  to  him  ;  23  question  ;  24  obtain- 
(ing)  ;  25  least ;  26  reply  ;  27  done=over  ;  28=the  person  presented  to  you  -, 
29=1  am  indeed  encBTanted  ;  30  burst  out  laughing ,  31  for ;  32  dumb, 


11 

From  this  point  the  Student  is  assumed  to  understand  the  formation 
of  the  Imperfect  Indicative  and  Conditional  Indicative  (see  Lweon 
11  in" SPANISH  SIMPLIFIED1'). 


El  Cura  y  sus  Visitas. 

Cuando  los  curas3  parrocos2  visitan1  sus  feligreses,4  algu- 
nas5  veces6  hallanse7  en  varies1  incidentes,1  unos5  agradableg8 
y  otros  tristes.9  Hallose10  en  uno  de  los  primeros  casos11  el 
cura3  de  una  parroquia12  no  lejos13  de  Londres. 

Habia  visitado1  algunos5  de  sus  feligreses4  cuando  llego14 
a  la  casa  de  uno  que  se15  hallaba15  en  las  delicias16  del 
dia17  de  lavado.17  La  buena  mujer  no  queriendo18  presen- 
tarse19  delante20  del  senor0  cura3^  con  el  vestido21  de  lavar,21 
escondiose22  detras23  del  enjugador,24  y  dijo  a  su  muchacho25 
que  cuando  abriera26  la  ,puerta  al  cura,  le28  dijera27  que  habia 
salido29  de  casa. 

Entro30  el  cura,  y  el  muchacho  cumpliendo*1  su  encargo32 
empezo33  a  decirle34  que  su  madre  habia  salido29  a  dar56  un 
paseo.36  Pero  la  mujer,  sin  advertirlo,37  dejaba38  ver38  la 
punta39  del  pie40  por°  debajo41  del  enjugador.24 

El  cura  apercibiendolo42  dijo  al  muchacho  :  Cuando  tu 
madre  vuelva43  le45  diras44  que  la  proxima46  vez*5  que  saiga47 
a  paseo,48  no49  olvide49de  Ilevarse50los  pies,50  porque  son  cosas51 
muy  utiles62  para  las  peisonas1  aficionadas53  a  andar.53 

0  not  to  be  translated  ;  1  the  same,  or  nearly  the  game,  as  in  English. 

2  parochial ;  3  parson  ;  4  parishioner  ;  5  some  ;  6  time  ;  7  they  find 
themselves;  8  agreeable;  9  sad;  10  found  himself  j  11  case;  12 
parish  ;  13  far  ;  14  llegar,  to  arrive  ;  15  found  herself =was  ;  16  delight ; 
17  washing-day  ;  18  wishing ;  19  to  present  herself  ;  20  before  ;  21 
washing-ciress  ;  22  hid  herself  ;  23  behind  ;  24  clothes-horse  ;  25  boy=son  ; 
26  he  should  open ;  27  he  should  tell ;  28  him  ;  29  gone  out ;  30  entrap  to 
enter  ;  31  cumplir,  to  fulfil ;  32  instruction  ;  33  began  ;  34  tell  him  ; 
35  give=take  ;  36  walk  ;  37  noticing  it ;  38=allowed  to  be  seen  ;  89 
point ;  40  foot ;  41  underneath  ;  42  perceiving  it  ;  43  cornea  back  ; 
44  thou  wilt  tell ;  45  her ;  46  next  ;  47  she  goes  out ;  48  walk ;  49= 
she  is  not  to  forget ;  50  t^ke  he.r  feet  with  her ;  51  thiag  j  53  uge.ful ; 
53=fond  of  .walking. 


El  Laoftyo  inocente. 

XJn  caballero  mando3  a°  su  lacayo8  que  viese4  la  hora  q«t 
era  en  el  reloj5de  so!5qne  habia6  sobre  una  piedra7  en  el  jardin6; 
y  despues9  de  haber9  tardado10  mas  de11  una  hora,  le18 13ev612 
el  reloj5  de  sol5  y  le13  dijo :  Ahi14  esta,  busque15  Vd.  la 
hora,15  pues16  yo  no  he  podido17'  hallarla.18 

2  mandar,  to  send  ;  3  footman  ;  4  he  might  see  ;  5  sun-dial  ;  6=(there) 
was  ;  7  stone  ;  8  garden  ;  9  after  having ;  10  tardar,  to  delay  ;  ll=than  ; 
12  llevar,  to  carry  ;  13  to  him ;  14  here ;  15  look  for  the  time  yourself  ; 
16  for  ;  17  been  able  ;  18  to  find  it. 


La  Tetera. 

Un  marinero1  a2  bordo2  de  una  fragata3  mercante,1  tuvo 
la  desgracia4  de  dejar5  caer6  al  mar7  una  tetera8  de  plata,9  y 
lleno10  de  temor11  se12  fue12  al  camarote13  del  comandante,1  y 
le15  dijo14 :  Mi°  capitan,1  «;  se16  puede  decir16  de  una  cosa" 
que  se18  sabe18  donde  esta,  que  esta  perdida19  ? 

No,  puesto20  que  se18  sabe18  su  paradero.21 

En  ese  caso,1  nada22  teneis  que  temer22  por  vuestra  tetera,8 
porque  yo  se23  que  esta  en  el  fondo24  del  mar.7 

2  on  board  ;  3  frigate  ;  4  misfortune  ,  5  let  f  6  fall ;  7  sea  ;  8  tea-pot ; 
9  silver  ;  10  full ;  11  fear  ;  12  he  went ;  13  cabin  ;  14  said  ;  15  to  him  ; 

16  can  it  be  said  ;     17  thing  ;     18  (it)  is  known  ;    19  lost ;    20  supposing  ; 
21  position  ;  22  you  have  nothing  to  fear  ;  23  know  ;  24  bottom. 

Una  Orden. 

El  ilustre1  caballero  Taylor  ref eria8  un  dia  los  honored 
que  habia  recibido3  de  las  diferentes1  cortes1  de  Enropa,1  y 
las  6rdenes4  con  que  habia  sido  condecorado1  por  un  gran 
niimero1  de  soberanos.5 

Un  caballero  que  se6  hallaba6  cerca7  de7  el  le  dijo  que  no 
habia  nombrado8  al  rey  de  Prusia1 :  Presumo1  (anadio9)  que 
este10  no0  os12  dio11  ninguna13  orden. 

Perdone14  Vd.,14  repuso15  Taylor,  pues16  me  ha  dado17  la 
orden4  perentoria1  de  salir18  de18  sus  Estados.19 

2  was  relating  ;  3  received  ;  4  order  ;  5  sovereign  ;  6  found  himself= 
was  ;  7  near  ;  8  nombrar,  to  name  ;  9  anadir,  to  add  ;  10=tnis  one  5 
11  gave  ;  12  you  ^  13  no ;  14  (I  beg  your)  pardon  ;  15  replied  j  16  since; 

17  given  ;  18  go  out  of=quit ;  19  states. 


13 

From  this  poinTthe  Student  is  assumed  toMsnow  the  Conjunctive 
Personal  Pronouns,  and  the  Rules  on  their  po&ition  (see  Lesson  12  in 
« SPANISH  SIMPLIFIED"). 

El  Condenado. 

Un  hombre  condenado2  a  las  llamas3  se°  escapo1  de  las 
manos4  de  la°  justicia.1  No  pudiendo5  hacer6  otra  cosa,7  le 
quemaron8  en  efigie.1  Aquel  mismo  dia  atraveso10  cabal- 
mente11  el  reo9  una  de  las  mas  altas12  montafias13  de  los  Piri- 
neos,1  ir  deciau  despues15 :  Nunca16  he  tenido17  mas  f rio18 
que  el  dia  que  me  quemaron.8 

2  condenar,  to  condemn  ;  3  flame  ;  4  hand  ;  5  being  able ;  6  to  do  ;  7  thing; 
8  quemar,  to  burn  ;  9  criminal ;  10  passed  over  ;  1 1  exactly  ;  12  high  ;  13 
mountain  ;  14  he  used  to  say  ;  15  afterwards  ;  16  never  ;  17=been  :  18  cold. 

El  Juez,  el  Abogado  y  el  Burro. 

En  un  distrito1  judicial1  de  Luisiana,1  estaba  el  tribunal1 
ocupado1  con  la  vista2  de  una  causa,3  cuyo  abogado4  no 
gozaba5  de°  gran  favor1  con  el  juez.6  Resumia7  el  magistrado1 
los  hechos8  de  la*  causa,3  cuando  rebuzn610  descompasada- 
mente11  un  burro,5  alii12  cerca.12 

<?  Que  es  eso  ?  pregunto13  el  juez6  con  enojo.14 

Nada,15  seiior,  contesto16  el  abogado,4  es  el  eco1  de  la  voz17 
de  vuestra  senoria.18 

Callose19  el  juez,6  aunque20  hubiera21  podido  mandar21  a  la 
carcel28  al  insolente,22  pero  la  casualidad24  vino25  en  su  ayuda.2* 

Cuando  el  abogado4  ref  utaba1  con  gran  calor27  ciertas28  ob- 
servaciones1  del  juez,6  volvio29  el  burro  a  rebuznar20  con 
tanta80  f  uerza,31  que  no  se32  oia32  la  voz17  del  abogado.  En- 
tonces33  el  juez  dijo  con  mucha  gravedad1 : 

"Calle34  uno  de  Vds.  si  quieren35  ser  oidos,36  porque 
hablanda  los  dos  a  un  tiempo  es  imposible.1 " 

2  =lrial ;  3  lawsuit ;  4  lawyer  ;  5  gozar,  to  enjoy  ,  6  judge  ;  7  was 
summing  up  ;  8  fact ;  9  donkey  ;  10  rebuznar,  to  bray  ;  11  excessively  ;  12 
there  near=close  by  ;  13  preguntar,  to  ask  ;  14  anger  ,  15  nothing ;  16  con- 
testar,  to  reply  ;  17  voice  ;  18  lordship  ;  19  kept  silent ;  20  although  ;  21  he 
could  have  sent ;  22  insolent  (fellow*)  ;  23  prison  ;  24  chance  ;  25  came  ; 
2-5  aid  ;  27  heat ;  28  certain  ;  29  the  donkey  brayed  again  ;  30  so  much  ; 
31  force  ;  32  was  heard  ;  33  then  ;  34  be  silent ;  35  you  wish  ;  36  heard* 

*  Adjective*  are  very  frequently  used  as  Nouns  in  Spanish. 


14 

Dispute  entre  un  Viajero  Espaflol  y  un  Indiano. 

TJn  viajero2  espanol  encontro*  a°  un  indiano1  en  cierto4 
bosque.5  Ambos6  iban7  a8  caballo.8  El  espanol,  que  temia9 
que  el°  suyo  no  pudiese10  hacer11  el  viaje,12  porque  era  muy 
malo,  quiso13  cambiar14  con  el15  del  indiano,1  que  era  3  oven18 
y  vigoroso.1  El  indiano  se17  nego  a  ello,17  y  el  espanol  en- 
tonces18  le19  movio19  una  disputa.1  Vinieron20  a  las  manos,21 
y  el  espanol,  que  estaba  bien  armado,1  se22  apoder622  del 
caballo  del  indiano,  en23  el  que23  siguio24  su  camino.25 

El  infeliz26  indiano  le  siguio24  a27  lo  lejos,27  y  fue28  a  dar29 
queja^al  juez31del  primer  pueblo32;  obligado1el  espanol  a  com- 
parecer33  con  el  caballo,  sostuvo34  que  este  era  suyo,  y  muy 
suyo  como  que°  lo  habia  criado35  el  mismo36  desde37  chico.38 

No  habiendo  pruebas39  de  lo  contrario,1  el  juez31  iba40  a 
declarar1  absuelto41  de  la  demanda1  al  espanol,  cuando  qui- 
tandose42  su  capa43  el  indiano  y  cubriendo44  con  ella  repentina- 
mente45  la  cabeza46  del  caballo,  dijo  al  mismo  tiempo  al  juez31: 

Yo  probare47  de  un  modo48  incontestable1  mi  asercion1; 
que49  diga49  ahora  mi  contrario,50  £  de  que  ojo51  es  tuerto52  el 
caballo  ? 

Del  derecho,53  contesto54  el  espanol  sin  detenerse.55 

Pues56  no57  lo  es  de  mnguno,57  repuso68  el  americano,1  des- 
tapando59  la  cabeza46  del  animal.1 

Oonvencido60  el  juez31  con  una  prueba39  tan  higeniosa1 
y  fuerte,61adjudic61  el  caballo  al  indiano,  y  se  termino1  la 
disputa.1 

2  traveller  ;  3  encoritrar,  to  meet ;  4  certain ;  5  wood  ;  6  both  ;  7  were 
going  ;  8  on  horseback  ;  9  temer,  to  fear ;  10  could  ;  11  do  ;  12  journey  ; 
13  wanted;  14  to  change ;  15  the  (one)  ;  16  young ;  17  refused  i£  ;  18  then  ; 
19  moved  him  to  ;  20  they  came ;  21  hands=blows ;  22  took  possession  ; 
23  upon  which  ;  24  followed ;  25  way ;  26  unhappy  ;  27  at  a  distance  ; 
28  went ;  29  give±=make  ;  30  complaint ;  31  judge  ;  32  village  ;  33  to 
appear ;  34  he  maintained ;  35  brought  up  ;  36  himself  ;  37  from  ;  38  (its) 
youth  ;  39  proof ;  40  was  going  ;  41  absolved  ;  42  taking  off  ;  43  cloak  ; 
44  covering ;  45  suddenly  ;  46  head  ;  47  probar,  to  prove  ;  48  manner ; 
49  let . . .say  ;  60 opponent ;  51  eye  ,  52  one-eyed ;  53  right  j  54  contestar, 
to  answer  ;  65=he8itating  ;  56  then  ;  57  not  it  is  of  none=he  is  not  so  in 
either ;  58  replied ;  59 -uncovering  ,•  60  convinced ;  61  strong. 


15 

El  Suftalterno  E3ooc&3._ 

Se2  refiere2  una  anecdota1  de  un  Eseoces3  qiie  era  oficia!4 
del  Ejercito5  Britanico6  y  fue  mandado7  con  su  regimiento1 
a  Gibraltar.  En  aquel  entonces8  era  subalterno1  y  hallabase9 
un  dia  de10  guardia10  con  otro  companero11  oficial4  que  tuvo 
la  desgracia12  de  caer13  en  un  .preeipicio1  de  cuatrocientos 
pies14  de  profundidad1-5  y  quedo16  muerto.16 

Era  deber17  del  subalterno1  dar18  cuenta19  de  lo20  ocurrido20 
en10  la  guardia10  y  habiendolo21  hecho  asi,21  anadio22  la 
formula1  de  costumbre23 ;  "  nada24  de°  particular1  ha  ocurrido1 
en  la  guardia." 

El  fatal1  accidente1  de  la  caida25  en  el  precipicio1  del  otro 
oficial4  vino26  a,  oidos27  del  comandante,1  y  naturalmente1  la 
frase28de  "nada24de  particula^ocurrido,1"  le  caus61extrafiez^.29 

";  Como30  ! "  exclamo1  el  Mayor31  de  la  Brigada,1  u<;Yd. 
llama32  a°  esto  nada24  de  particular,  cuando  su  companero11 
oficial4  ha16  muerto16  cayendo33  de  una  altura34  de  cuatro- 
cientos  pies14  ?" 

"  Bien,  Senor,"  replico1  el  joven35  oficial,  "  no0  he  creido38 
que  hubiera37  en  ello  nada  de  extraordinario1 ;  si  el  pobre3* 
amigo  hubiese39  caido40  en  un  precipicio1  de  cuatrocientos  pies 
y  no  hubiera39  muerto,41  lo  hubiera42  hallado43  muy  extra- 
ordinario1 en44  efecto,44  y  lo  hubiera42  puesto45  en  el  parte.46  " 

2  is  related  ;  3  Scotchman  ;  4  officer  ;  5  army  ;  6  British  ;  7 
mandar,  to  send  ;  8  then  ;  9  found  himself =was  ;  10  on  guard ;  11  com- 
panjon=fellow  ,  12  misfortune  ;  13  (to)  fall ;  14  foot ;  15  depth  ; 
lt)==was  killed  ;  17  duty  ;  18  to  give  ;  19  account ;  20  what  occurred ; 
21  having  done  so  ;  22  anadir,  to  add  ;  23  custom  ;  24  nothing  ;  25  fall ; 
26  came  ;  27=ears  ;  28  phrase  ;  29  astonishment ;  30  what ;  31  major.; 
32  llamar,  to  call ;  33  falling ;  34  height ;  35^  young  ;  36  creer,  to 
believe  ;  37  there  was  ;  38  poor  ;  39  had  ;  40  fallen  ;  41  died  ;  42 
I  should  have  ;  43  hallar^-to  find  ;  44  indeed  ;  45  put ;  46. report. 

Un  predicador2  dijo  en  un  sermon1  que  san3  Francisco1 
Xavier  habia  convertido1   en  un  dia  diez  mil4  hombres  en 
isla1  desierta.1 

2  preacher  ;    3  saint ;    4  thousand. 


El  Enfermo  invisible. 

Un  filosofo,1  poco2  arnigo  de  los  medicos,  tuvo  una3  vez3 
que4  guardar  cama4  por  una  grave1  enfermedad,1  y  un 
amigo  envio5  al6  momento6  a7  buscar7  un  facultative.8  Luegoa 
que  llego9  se°  lo  anunciaron1  al  enfermo,10  quien  respondio1 : 
Decidle11  que  estoy  malo,  y  que  no0  recibo1  a°  nadie.12 

0  not  to  be  translated  ;  1  the  same,  or  nearly  the  same,  as  in  English. 
2  little  ;  3=once  ;  4  to  keep  [his  bed]  ;  5  sent ;  6  at  once.;  7  to  seefc=for  J 
8  physician  j  9  as  soon  as  he  arrived  ;  10  invalid  ;  11  tell  him  ;  12  nobody. 


El  Negro. 

Carlos2  y  dos  amigos  suyos  Ilegaron3a  un  hotel1  de  Nueva4 
York,  donde  debian5  pasar1  la  noche.6  No  habia7vacia8  msts  que 
una  habitacion9  con  una  cama,10  en  la°  cual  se11  acomodaronu 
sus  dos  amigos,  y  Carlos2  se°  resolvio1  a  dormir12  en  un  sofa.1 

Un  negro1  que  estaba  parando13  en  el  mismo  hotel,  ofrecio1* 
dividir1  su  cama10  con  el,  cuya  oferta1  fue  inmediatamente1 
aceptada.1  Carlos  fue15  a  acostarse,16  encargando18  antes17  al 
mozo19  que20  le  despertase20  a  las  cinco  de  la  manana ;  pero 
apenas21  cayo22  dormido,22  cuando  sus  amigos  deseando23  di~ 
vertirse24  a  su  costa,1  vinieron25  a  la  habitacion,9  y  le20 
ennegrecieron  la  cara26  con  hollin,27  de28  tal28  manera1  que 
parecia29  que  en  la  cama10  habia80  dos  negros.1 

El  mozo19  le  desperto31  a  la  hora  que  habia  indicado1;  pero, 
j  cual  no0  seria  su  sorpresa1  cuando  al32  mirarse32  al  espejo33con 
objeto1  de  peinarse,34  vio35  una  cara37  negra36  en38  vez38  devuna 
blanca39 !— -"  i  Oh  ! "  exclamo1 ;  "  este  imbecil1  de  mozo19  ha 
despertado31  al  negro1  en38  vez38  de  despertarme31  a°  mi°";  y 
diciendo40  esto,  volvio41  a  acostarse41  tranquilamente.1 

2  Charles  ;  3  llegar,  to  anrive ;  4  new  ;  5  they  had  to;  6  night ;  7  there  was  ; 
8  empty  ;  9  room ;  10  bed  ;  11  accommodated  themselves ;  12  sleep  ; 
13  parar,  to  stop  ;  14  offered  ;  15  went ;  16  lie  down  ;  \1  before=first ; 
18  instructing  ;  19  waiter  ;  20  that  he  should  wake  him  ;  21  hardly  ; 
22  he  fell  asleep  ;  23  desear,  to  wish  ;  24  to  divert  themselves  ;  25  came  ,' 
26  .blacked  his  face  ;  27  soot ;  28  in  such ;  29  it  seemed ;  30  there  were  ; 
31  despertar,  to' wake  ;  32  on  looking  at  himself ;  33  mirror  ;  34  comb(ing) 
hte  hair ;  35  he  saw ;  36  black  ;  .37  face  ;  38  instead ;  3D  white ; 
^0  saying';  41  he  wenitback  to  bed* 


IT 

From  tm'8~  point  the  Student  is  assumed  to  be  acquainted  with  the 
Rules  in  "  SPANISH  SIMPLIFIED,"  as  far  as  the  commencement  of  the 
Irregular  Verbs  (Lesson  19) . 

El  Sermon. 

En  el  ultimo2  sermon1  de  una  mision,1  que  se3  predioaba3 
en  cierta4  parroquia,5  lloraron6  todos  los  oyentes7  menos  uno, 
a°  quien  pregunto9  su  vecino8  :  <;  For  que  no  lloras6  ?  y  el 
respondio1 :  Porque  no  soy  de  esta  parroquia.5 

2  last ;  3  was  preached  ;  4  certain  ;  5  parish  ;  6  llorar,  to  weep  ; 
7  hearer  ;  8  neighbour  ;  9  asked. 

Los  Hijos  de  Noe. 

Se3  presento3  un  tonto2  al  obispo4  para5  que  le  ordenase,5  y 
el  padre  habia  ya6  suplicado1  que  no  se8  le  pusiesen8  cuestio- 
nes1  dificiles1  en9  atencion  a9  su  escaso10  talento.1  El  obispo4 
para  servirle11  le  hizo12-solo13  esta  pregunta14:  Sem,1  Cham1  y 
Japhet,1  hijos  de  Noe,1  £  quien  fue  su  padre  ? 

No  supo15  responder,1  y  no  fue  aprobado.16 

Fuese17  a  su  casa  y  dijo  a  su  padre  lo18  que18  se19  le  habia 
preguntado,19y  que  no  habia  podido20  responder,1  porque  esas 
cosas  tan  dificiles1  eran  solo13  para  hombres  muy  §abios.21 

Su  padre  se22  echo  a  reir,2-2  y  le  dijo  que  no  habia23  cosa 
mas  facil.24 — S'i  el  obispo4  te  hubiera25preguntado26:  <j  el  hijo 
del  gobernador27  de  quien  es  hijo  ?  hubieras28  respondidoi 
"  del  gobernador27":  <z  no  es  verdad29  ? 

En30ef  ecto,30dijo  el  necio2a  su  padre,  no  hay31cosa  mas  facil.24 

En32  seguida32  se17  fue17  al  obispo,4  y  le  dijo  que  ya6  sabia33 
la  respuesta34  que  debia35  darse35  a  su  pregunta.14 

Volvio36  a  hacersela36  el  obispo  con  su  santa37  paciencia1 : 
Sem,  Cham  y  Japhet,  hijos  de  Noe,  <;  quien  fue  su  padre  ? 

Y  respondio1  muy  satisfecho38  :  El  gobernador.27 

2  fool ;  3  presentarse,  to  present  one's  self  ;  4  bishop  ;  5  in  order  that  he 
might  ordain  him  ;  6  already  ;  7  suplicar,  to  request  ;  8=should  be  put  to 
him  ;  9  in  view  of  ;  10  scanty  ;  11  serve  him  ;  12  made=put ;  13  only ; 
14  question  ;  15  he  knew==could  ;  16  aprobar,  to  approve  ;  17  he  went ; 
18  what ;  19=he  had  been  asked  ;  20  been  able  to  ;  21  learned  ;  22  burst 
out  laughing  ;  23  there  was  ;  24  easy  ;  25  had  ;  26  pregwitar,  to  ask  ; 
27  governor  ;  28  thou  wouldst  have  ;  29  truth  ;  30  in  effect=indeed  ; 
31  there  is  ;  32=then  ;  33  he  knew  ;  34  answer  ;  35=ought  to  be  given  ; 
36=put  it  to  him  again  ;  37  holy  ;  38  satisfied, 

3—8  R  8 


IS 

La  Venganza  heroic*. 

Tuvieron*  un  altercado1  bastante4  acalorado*  en  un  caf &  dos 
particulares,2  y  uno  de  ellos,  para  vengarse,6  tuvo3  la  bafeza? 
de  escribir8  al  amanecer9  en  la  puerta  del  otro,  INFAME.10 

JSste  Ultimo11  f  ue12  a  buscarle12;  pero  un  criado  le  dijo  que 
no  estaba  en  su  casa,  y  le  suplico13  dejase14  per15  escrlto15  lo16 
que16  tuviese3  qtie  comunicarle.1 

No,  respondio,1  puede17  Vd.17  solamente18  decirle1*  que  he 
yenido20  a  volverle21  su  visita,1  porque  esta  maiiana  me0  ha 
dejado22  escritfe23  su  nombre24  en  mi  puerta. 

2  certain  persons  ;  3  i*ad  ;  4  enough=rather  ;  5  heated  ;  6  revenge  him- 
self ;  7  meanness  ;  '8  -write  ;  9  dawn  ;  10  rascal ;  11  latter  ;  12  went  to 
seek  him'=called  on  him  ;  13  suplicar,  to  request ;  14  (that)  he  should  leave; 
15==in  writing  ;  16  what ;  17  you  may  ;  18  only  ;  19  tell  him ;  20  dome  ; 
2.1  return  him  ;  22  dejar,  to  leave  ;  23  written  ;  24  name. 

Los  cuatro  Caballeros  de  Industria. 

Cuatro  caballeros2  de  industria2  habiendo  comido8  en  una 
taberna,1  hicieron4  subir  al  criado4  y  acordaron5  el  escote6  por 
el  gasto7  liecho.8  El  primero  hizo9como  que  ponia9  la  mano10 
en  el  bolsillo.11  El  otro  se12la  cogi612deteniendola,13diciendo14 
que  queria15  pagar.16  El  tercero  hizo17  la  misma  riibrica,18  y  el 
cuartomand619al  criado  que  no  tomase20dinero21alguno21de  ellos. 

Como  ninguno22  queria15  ceder,23  uno  de  ellos  dijo  :  vende* 
mos24  los  ojos25  al  criado,  como  en  el  juego26  de  la  gallina27 
ciega,27  y  aquel28  que  coja29  pagara..16 

Ponen30en  obra31  su  proyecto1 :  y  mientras32que  el  muchacho 
iba33  palpando^en  el  cuarto,  ellos  descamparon  lindamente.35 

Sube37  el  amo36  y  nuestro  muchacho  le  coge,29  y  teniendolo38 
firine1  le  decia39:  Vd.  sera  el  que  pagara  la  cuenta.40 

2  swindler  ;  3  comer,  to  dine  ;  4  they  made  the  servant  mount=called 
the  servant  upstairs  ;  5  acordar,  to  agree  on  ;  6=settlement ;  7  expense  ; 
8  made  ;  9  did  as  though  he  put=pretended  to  put ;  10  hand  ;  11  pocket ; 
12  took  hold  of  it ;  13  detaining  it ;  14  saying  ;  15  would  ;  16  pagar,  to 
pay  ;  17  did  ;  18=performance  ;  19  mandar,  to  order  ;  20  he  should  take  ; 
21  any  money  ;  22  no  one  ;  23  give  way  ;  24  veiidar,  to  blindfold  ;  25  eye  ; 
26  game  ;  27  blind  hen=blind  man's  buff ;  28=the  one  ;  29  (he)  catches 
hold  of  ;  30  they  put ;  31  work=execution  ;  32  while  ;  33  was  going  ; 
34  palvar,  to  grope  about ;  35  neatly=softly  ;  36  master ;  37  subirt  to  go 
up  ;  3$  holding  him  ;  39  said  ;  40  bill. 


19 

Lnifl  XIV.  y  el  Cortesano. 

Luis1  catorce  pregunto  un  dia  a°  uno'  de  SUB  cortesanos2 : 
<?  Sabe3  Vd.  el  castellano4  ? 

No,  Senor,  respondio1  el  cortesano,2  pero  lo  aprendere.6 

Se6  aplico6  mucho  para  aprender5  aquel  idioma,7  y  despue"s8 
de  haber8  tornado  muchisimo  trabajo,9  porque  le  parecia10 
que  el  rey  tenia  intencion1  de  nombrarle11  embajador1  en  la 
corte1  de  Espana,12  dijo  un  dia  a  Luis  catorce 

Senor,  ahora  ya13  se14  el°  castellano.4 

Muy  bien,  respondio1  el  rey,  en  ese  caso1  puede15  Vd. 

leer15  el°  Don  Quijote  en  su  original.1 

.  -    i  .    i    •     i  i 

2  courtier ;  3 'know;  4  Castilian=Spani8h  ;  5  aprender,  to  learn  ;  Qapli- 
carse,  to  apply  one's  self  ;  7  language  ;  8  after  having  ;  9  work  ;  10  it  ap- 
peared ;  11  appoint  him  ;  12  Spain  ;  13  already  ;  14 1  know  ;  15  you  can  read. 


;E1  Estudiante  sagaz.2 

Estando  en  la  clase1  un  escolar1  travieso3  y  chistoso,4  pidi66 
licencia6  a  su  maestro  para  salir,7  pero  este8  se9  la  nego9  con 
enfado.10  Finjio11  el  estudiante1  que  no  le  habia  oido,12 
repitio1  la  suplica,13  y  se14  le  volvio  a  decir14  que°  no  ;  pero 
entonces15  salio,16  y  el  maestro  no  le  detuvo.17 

Entro1  una  liora  despues*18  y  el  maestro  encolerizado19  le 
dijo  :  i  Como  te  has  atrevido20  a  salir7  sin  mi  licencia6  ? 

Respondiole1  muy  humildemente21  el  discipulo1  : 

Le°  pedi5  a°  Vd.  licencia6  dos  veces  y  ambas22  me  dijo  que° 
no';  como  dos  negaciones1  afirman,1  crei23  que  consentia1  Vtl. 
Y  ?ali16  sin  aguardar24  mas  respuesta.25 

Quedo26  desenojado27  el  maestro,  y  se28  ri628de  la  agudeza.29 

2  sagacious  ;  3  turbulent ;  4  humorous  ;  5  asked  ;  6  permission  ;  7  go(ing) 
out ;  8=the  latter  ;  9  denied  it  to  him  ;  10  vexation  ;  11  finjir^  to  pretend  ; 
12  heard  ;  13  request ;  14=was  again  told  ;  16  then  ;  16  went  out ; 
17  detained  ;  18  afterwards  ;  19  angry  ;  20  atreverse,  to  dare  ;  21  humbly  ; 
22  both  ;  23  I  thought  ;  24  wait(ing)  ;  25  reply  ;  2G  qtiedar,  to  remain  ; 
27  appeased  ;  28  he  laughed  ;  29  acuteness. 

i  Ha  visto  Vd.  "  el  Barbero1  de  Sevilla1  ? 
No,  senor,  me2  afeito2  solo.3 

2  I  shave  myself  ;  3  aloae. 


El  Barfcero  de  'JoatTTt. 

Tin  dia,  habiendo  llegado  el  emperador1  Jose1  a  una  ciudad 
antes2  que3  su  acompanamiento,3  le  pregunto  el  ama4  df  la 
posada,5  si  pertenecia6  al  sequito8  del  emperador.1 

No,  respondio1  el  prineipe.7 

Sin8  embargo,8,  con  tan  laconica1  respuesta9  no  quedo10  satis- 
f echa1  la  curiosidad1  de  la  buena  mujer.  Busco11  un  pretesto1 
para  entrar1  en  su  cuarto,  y  viendole12  ocupado1  en  af  eitarse,13 
le  pregunto  si  tenia  algiin14  cargo15  cerca16  del  emperador.1 

Si,  respondio1  el  monarca1;  algunas14  veces  le  afeito.13 

2  before  ;  3  suite  ;  4  mistress ;  5  inn  ;•  6  he  belonged  ;  7  prince  ;  8  never- 
theless ;  9  reply  ;  10  quedar,  to  remain ;  11  buscar,  to  seek  ;12  seeing  him  ; 
13  ofeitar}  to  shave  ;  14  any,  some  ;  15  office  ;  16  near. 

.Los  dos  Marineros. 

Dos  marineros,2  el  uno  ingles8  y  el  otro  irlandes,4  convinie- 
ron5  en6  socorrerse6  mutuamente1  en  el  caso1  de  sucederles7 
algun  accidente1  en  el  combate.1  Tuvo  el  ingles  la  des- 
gracia8  de  perder9  tma  pierna,10  y  su  companero11  le  cargo12  al 
momento  sobre  sus  espaldas13  para  llevarle^  a  curar.1 

En  el  camino15  vino16  otra  bala1  de  can6n,1  y  le17  llevo17  la 
cabeza18  al  herido,19  pero  el  irlandes4  no  lo  advirtio20  y 
sigui621  con  el  cuerpo22  sin  deteners^.23 

Un  oficial24  que  le  vi625pasar1  con  el  tronco26  de  un  hombre 
eobre  las  espaldas,13  le  pregunto  a  donde  iba.27 

A28  buscar28al  cirujano^responde.1 — Pero,majadero,30  ^  no 
ves3*  que  llevas14  uri  cuerpo22  sin  cabeza18  ? 

A  estas  palabraB32  puso33  en  tierra34  su  carga,35  y  exclamo1 
mirando86  atentamente1  el  cadaver37 : 

4  Si  el  mismo38  me  hardicho39  que  era  una  pierna10  la°  que 
habia  perdido9 !  !  ! 

2  sailor  ;  3  Englishman)  ;  4  Irish(man)  ;  5  agreed  ;  6  to  help  each  other ; 
7  happening)  to  them  ;  8  misfortune  ;  9  perder,  to  lose  ;  10  leg  ;  11  com- 
panion ;  12  loaded=took ;  13  shoulder  ;  J14  llevar,  to  carry  ;  15  way  ; 
IScame;  17==took  off  ;  18  head  ;  19  wounded  (man)  ;  20  noticed  ; 
21  £ollowed=went  on  ;  22  body  J  23  stop(pmg)  ;  24  officer ;  25  saw  j 
26  trunk  ;  27  he  was  going ;  28  to  seek=for  ;  29  surgeon  ;  30  blockhead  ; 
31  seest  thou  ;  32  word  ;  33  he  put ;  34  ground ;  35  burden  ;  36  looking  at ; 
37  corpse ;  38  himself  ;  39  told. 


21 

El  nuevo  Hercules. 

Tin  artesano1  que  pasaba2  en  el  pais3  por  muy  diestro4  en 
los  ejercicios5  de  fuerzas,6  y  al  mismo  tiempo  muy  robusto>1 
se7  veia7  frecuentemente1  obligado1  a  medirlas8  con  algunos.9 
Vino10uno*de  muy  lejosna  Iuchar12con  nuestro  campeon,13y 
le  dijeron14  que  estaba  en  el  cercado15  de  la  casa  trabajando.lti 
Echa17  pie18  a  tierra19  y  va20  a  buscarle  al  memento,  con  el 
caballo  de  la  brida,21  que  ato22  a  una  estaca23  del  cercado.15 

Camarada,1  le  dice,24  he  oido25  hablar  mucho  de  vuestras 
fuerzas,6  y  vengo26  de  cuarenta  millas27  a  veros28  y  ensayar29 
cual  de  los  dos  puede30  tumbar31  al  otro. 

No  habia  hecho32  mas  que  concluir1  estas  palabras,33  cuando 
nuestro  hercules  solt634al  momento  el  azadon,35le  cogi636por 
las  piernas,37  le  arrojo38  al  prado40  inmediato39  por41  encima 
de41  la  tapia,42  y  volviendo43  a  tomar43  con  mucha  serenidad1 
el  azadon,35  continue  su  trabajo.44 

Luego45  que45  el  pobre46  diablo48  se47  levant 647  como  pudo48 
despues49  de49  tan  fuerte50  porrazo51 :  Y°  J?ien,  le  dice24  -el 
otro,  &  tiene'Vd.  alguna  cosa  mds  que52  mandarme52  ? 

No,  senor,  gracias,53  le  responde1  espantado54  del  vuelo55 ; 
echeme56  Vd.°  aca57  por  el  mismo  camino58  mi  caballo,  pues88 
he  concluido1  mi  comision,1  y  me  quiero60  marchar.61 

2  pasar,  to  pass  ;  3  country  ;  4  dexterous  ;  5  exercise  ;  6  strength(s)  ; 
7  saw(=found)  himself  ;  8  medir,  to  measure  ;9=others  ;  10  came  ;  11  far  ; 
12  to  wrestle  ;  13  champion  ;  14  they  told  ;  15  enclosure  ;  16  trabajar,  to 
work;  17  he  throws=puts  ;  18  foot;  19  ground  ;  20  goes  ;  21  bridle  ; 
22  atar,  to  tie  ;  23  stake  ;  24  (he)  says  ;  25  heard  ;  26  I  come  ;  27  mile  ; 
28  (lo)  see  you  ;  29=to  try  ;  30  can  ;  31  overthrow  ;  32  done  ;  33  word  ; 
34  loosened=ttirew  down  ;  35  pick-axe  ;  36  took  hold  of  ;  37  legs  ; 
38  arrojar,  to  fling  ;  39  adjoining  ;  40  meadow  ;  41  over  ;  42  mud-wall ; 
43  again  taking  ;  44  work  ;  45  as  soon  as  ;  46  poor  devil=fellow  ;  47  got 
up  ;  48  (best)  he  could  ;  49  after  ;  50  strong  ;  51  blow  ;  52  to  command 
me  ;  53  thanks  ;  54  espantar,  to  frighten  ;  55  flight ;  56  echar,  to  throw  ; 
57  (over)  here  ;  58  way  ;  59  since  ;  60  I  want ;  61  marchar 'se,  to.  go  away. 


I  En  qne  mes3  hablan  menos3  las0  mujeres  ? 

En  Febrero,1  porque  s<5lo4  tiene  veinte  y  ocho  dias. 

2  month ;  3  least ;   4  only. 


22 

Dos  Borraohos. 

Un  borracho2  de  setenta  anos3  iba4  una  vez  buscando  por5 
todas  paries5  un  cuervo7  joven.6 

1  Para  que  lo  quiere8  Vd.  ?  pregunto  un  campesino.9 

He  pido10  decir,11  respondio  el  beodo,2  que  estas  aves12  viven 
trescientos  anos,3  y  quiero8saber13por  mi14mismousi  es  cierto.15 

Otro  borracho2  se16  hallaba16  una  noche  a  deshora17  sen- 
tado18  en  la  esquina19  de  una  calle,  cuando  acerto20  a  psisar1 
por21  alii21  una  patrulla.1 

<<  Que  haceis22  ahi23  ?  le  pregunta  el  sargento.1 

Veo24  que  la  tierra25  anda,2<>  y  estoy  esperando27  que28  pase 
mi  casa28  por29  aqui29  para  meterme30  en  ella. 

*  2  drunkard  ;  3  year  ;  4  went ;  6=e  very  where  ;  6  young  ;  7  raven  ;  8  want ; 
9  countryman-;  10  heard  ;  11  say  ;  12  bird  ;  13  (to)  know  ;  14  myself  ; 
15  certain=true  ;  16==was ;  17=an  untimely  hour  ;  18  seated ;  19  corner  ; 
20=happened  ;  21=that  way  ;  22  are  you  doing  ;  23  here  ;  24  I  see  ; 
25  earth  ;  26  goes  round  ;  27  esperar,  to  wait ;  28=£or  my  house  to  pass ; 
29=this  way  ;  30  put  myself=go. 

El  Quitamanchas. 

Un  brib6n2  se  introdujo1  en  casa  de  un  caballero,  entr6l 
hasta3  la  antesala4  del  primer  piso,5  y  no  viendo6  cosa  de°  que 
pudiese7  sacar8  partido8  sino9  es°  de°  dos  libreas10  de  los 
criados,  se°  decidi61  a  apropiarselas11  por  no  salirse12  con  las 
jnanos14  vacias.13 

Al16  bajar15  la  escalera16  hallo  al  amo,17  quien  le  pregunt6 
de  qui6n  eran  aquellos  vestidos,18  y  adonde  los  llevaba.19 

^  Pues20  que,20  senor,  responde1  con  mucha  serenidad,1  no 
me  conoc^is21  ?  Yo  trabajo22  para  vuestros  criados  ;  soy  el 
quitamanchas,2Sy  limpio24  los  vestidos18  de  vuestros  lacayos.1 

En  ese  caso,1  dijo  el  dueiio25  de  la  casa,  voy26  a  darte27  mi 
fcata,28  pues29  la  he  llenado30  de  aceite.31 

Y  al  mismo  tiempo  se  la  dio.32 

2  rascal  ;V3  as  far  as  ;  4  ante-chamber ;  5  floor  :  6  seeing  ;  7  he  could  ;  8= 
make  off  with  ;  9  except ;  10  livery  ;  11  appropriate  them  to  himself  ;  12  go 
away;   13  empty  ;   14  hand  ;   15  on  descending  ;  16  staircase;   17  master; 
18  suits  ;  19  llevar,  to  carry  ;  20=why  ;  21  do  you  know  ;  22  tralajar^  to 
work  ;  23  scourer  ;  24  limpiar,  to  clean  ;  25  owner  ;  26  I  am  going  ;  27  give 
thee ;  28  dressing-gown ;  29  since ;  30  llenar,  to  fill ;  31  oil ;  32  he  gave. 


23 

El  Representante  del  Pueblo.2 

Un  candidate1  de  un  arrabal3  de  una  eiudad  dijo  d  BUS  con- 
stituyentes  que  si  querian4  nombrarle5  diputado^  les  haria7 
gozar8  en  todas  estaciones9  del0  tiempo10  que  quisiesen.11  Este 
ofrecimiento12fue  tan  seductor,13  que  no  pudieron14menos  de15 
nombrar5  a°  este  hombre  que  parecia16  tener  un  don17  celestial.1 

Algiin  tiempo  despues18  de18  la  eleccion,1  fue19  a  buscarle 
uno  de  sus  constituyentes,1  y  le  pidio20  un  poco  de°  lluvia.21  , 

Bueno,  amigo  mio,  le  dijo  el  diputado6 :  pero  £  por  que 
pides22  la°  lluvia21  ?  <j  no  hara23  daiio24  a  vuestros  prados25  ? 

Yo  la  necesito26  para  mis  trigos,27  pues  la  yerba28  6  el 
heno29  ya30  esta  en  casa. 

t  Pero  vuestro  vecino31  ha  encerrado32  el°  suyo  ?  Yo  estoy 
persuadido1  de°que  ahora  la  lluvia21  le  perjudicaria33  mucho. 

Eso°  si,  es  verdad,34  no  le  vendria35  muy  bien. 

Pues36  en  ese  caso,1  amigo  mio,  ya30  sabeis37  lo38  que38os  he 
dicho.39  Yo  os  he  prometido40  proporcionaros41  el  tiempo10 
que  querais42  ;  pero  si  yo  os  cloy43  la  lluvia,21  perjudicare33 
a°  vuestro  vecino31 :  asi44  pues,44  el  partido45  mas  prudente1 
sera  el°  de  oiros46  juntos,47  y  que  os48  concerteis48  sobre 
la  especie49  de  tiempo10  que  os  convenga50  a°  todos,  y 
entonces51  os  prometo40  complaceros52 ;  porque  mi  intencion1 
no  es  de  suscitar53  querellas1  entre  mis  conciudadanos54 
dando55  la  preferencia1  a  los  unos  sobre  los  otros. 

2  village  ;  3  suburb  ;  4  they  would  ;  5  nombrar,  to  appoint ;  6  deputy  ; 
7  he-  would  make=cause  ;  8  (to)  enjoy  ;  9  season  ;  10  weather  ;  1 1  they 
wanted  ;  12  offer  ;  13  attractive  ;  14  they  could  (do)  ;  15=than  ;  16  ap- 
peared ;  17  gift ;  18  after  ;  19  went ;  20  requested  ;  21  rain  ;  22  dost  thou 
ask  ;  23  will  it  do  ;  24  damage  ;  25  meadow  ;  26  want ;  27  wheat ;  28  herb 
=grass  ;  29  hay  ;  30  already  ;  31  neighbour  ;  32  shut  up=housed  ;  33  per- 
judicar,  to  injure  ;  34  truth=true  ;  35  it  would  come ;  36  then  ;  37  you 
know  ;  38  what ;  39  told  ;  40  promoter,  to  promise ;  41  to  portion  to  you  ; 
42  you  want ;  43  give  ;  44  therefore  ;  45  course  ;  46  hear  you  ;  47  together  ; 
48  you  agree  ;  49  kind  ;  50  suits  ;  51  then  ;  52  (to)  please  you  ;  53  to  stir  ' 
up  ;  54  fellow-citizens  ;  55  (by)  giving. 

Mas2  vale*  acostarse3  sin  cenar4  que  levantarse5  con  deudas.6 

2  it  is  worth  more=it  is  better  ;  3  to  go  to  bed  ;  4  sup  [ping]  ;  5  to  get 
up;  6  debt. 


M 

El  Corregidor  y  el  Mayorazgo. 

TTn  caballerito2  mayorazgo3  muy  loco4  y  muy  gastador* 
estaba  disgustado6  con  el  corregidor7  del  pueblo,8  que  era 
hi  jo  de  un  carnicero.9  El  mayorazgo3  vendio10  unas  tierras11 
para  sostener12  su  lujo13  y  siis  caprichos,1  sin  pensar14  en  sus 
acreedores15 ;  y  un^dia  que  se  presento1  muy  elegante1  en 
un  onyite16  se17  pusol7*  a  referir18  las  modas19  y  los  trajes20 
que  se21  habia  hecho,21  cuando^  repenlinamente,22  por 
abochornarle23  le  dijo  el  corregidor7  : 

Mejor25  hiciera24  si  tratase26  Vd.26  de  pagar27  sus  deudas.28 
En29  ef ecto,29  tiene30  Vd.  razon,30  y  maiiana  voy31  a  satis- 
facerlas32  ;  hagame33  su  recibo34  por  una  cabeza35  de  ternera36 
y  unas  lenguas37  que  debo  a  su  padre  de  Vd. 

2  young  gentleman  ;  3  first-born=heir ;  4  silly ;  5  spendthrift ;  6  dis- 
pleased ;  7  magistrate ;  8  village ;  9  butcher ;  10  vender,  to  sell ;  11  land  ; 
12  support ;  13  luxury ;  14  think(ing) ;  15  creditor;  16  feast ;  1'7  he  put 
feimself=he  began ;  18  relate  ;  19  fashion ;  20  costume ;  21=hehadhadmade; 
22  suddenly ;  23  (to)  irritate  him  ;  24  you  would  do ;  25  better  ;  26  you 
•  tried ;  27  pay  ;  28  debt ;  29  indeed ;  30  you  are  right ;  31 1  am  going ;  32 
satisfy  them  ;  33  make  me  (out) ;  34  receipt ;  35  head  ;  36  calf ;  37  tongue. 

Padre  e  Hyo. 

El  mar^cal2  Lefevue  era  hijo  de  un  pobre  molinero8  de  la° 
Alsacia.  Siendo  aiin4  joven6  entro  en  las  Guardias1  Fran- 
cesas,1  y  era  sargento1  cuando  estallo6  la^Revolucion,1  que 
hizo7  sucesivamente1  de  el  un  oficial,  un  general,  y  por8 
ultimo,8  bajo9  el  Imperia,10  un  mariscal*  de  Francia.1 

Estaba  muy  descontento1  de  su  hijo,  cuya  conducta1 
dejaba11  mucho  que12  desear.12  Un  dia  estando  dirigiendole13 
amargos14  reproches,1  le  dijo  entre  otras  cosas : 

Tii  no  haces15  caso15  de  mis  consejos16  ni  reconvenciones,17 
mal  sujeto18 :  diriase19  que  te  crees20  superior1  a  tu  padre. 

Es  muy  posible,1  respondio  desdenosamente21  su  hijo  ; 
porque  despues22  de22  todo,  mi  padre  era  hijo  de  un  pobre 
molinero,3  y  yo  soy  hijo  de  un  rico23  mariscal  de  Francia. 

2  marshal ;  3  miller  ;  4  still ;  5  young ;  6  estallar>  to  break  out ;  7  made  ; 
8  finally  ;  9  under ;  10  empire ;  11  dejar,  to  leave ;  12  to  desire  ;  13  ad- 
dressing to  him  ;  14  bitter ;  155=payest  attention  ;  16  advice ;  17  recrimi- 
nation j  l&rsfellow ;  'l9=one  would  say ;  20  creer,  to  believe ;  21  disdain- 
fo%;  22 alter; 


El  Juramento. 

Tin  escribano2  tom6  un  coche1  de8  alquiler3  para  ir4  a  un  pue- 
blo5 cerca6  de8  Sevilla,1  y  el  cochero7  le  pidi68  catorce  pesetas. 

1  Afirmaras1  tii  bajo9  juramento10  que  ?se  es  el  precio11  que 
se12  paga12  por  este  viaje13  ? — Si,  senor. 

El  escribano2  saco14  entonces15  y  puso16  sobre  lar  mesa  un 
crucifijo,1  le  hizo17  jurar18  y  le  dio19  seis  pesetas,  dici6ndele2d 
que  retenia21  lo  restante2*  por  el  acta1  de*la  prestacion23  del 
juramento.10 

2  notary  ;        3  on  hire  ;        4  go ;        5  village  ;       6  near  ;       7  driver  ; 
8  asked  ;   9  under  ;   10  oath  ;   11  price  ;  12  is  paid  ;  13  journey  ;  14  sacar, 
to  draw  out ;    15  then  ;   16  put ;   17  made  ;  18  swear ;  19  gave  ;  20  teliing 
him  ;  21  retained  ;  22  remainder  ;  23  administration. 

El  Caballo  y  las  Ostras. 

Un  viajero2  llego  a  una  posada3  en  una4  noche  de  las  mis 
frlas4  de  Diciembre,1  y  al5  pasar5  por6  la  cocina7  vi68  gue 
todos  los  asientos9*estaban  ocupados1  por  la  mucha  gente10  que 
habia11  alrededor12  del  f  uego,13  causandole1  la  mayor14  penal& 
el  no  poder16  acercarse17  a  calentarse18  las  manos.18 

Mozo,19  dijo  en  alta20  voz21  al  criado,  lleva22  dos  docenas1  de 
ostras23  a  mi  caballo. 

El  mozo19  obedeci6,24  y  las  personas1  que  estaban  calentan- 
dose25  alrededor12  de  la  lumbre,13  no  pudiendo1*  resistiri  al 
deseo26  de  ver27  un  animal1  tan<  extraordinario,1  se28  lefran- 
taron28  y  marcharon1  en  tropel29  a  la  caballeriza.30 

Entretanto,31  el  viajero2  tomo  el  mejor32asiento9enfrente33 
del  fuego,13  y  pocos  momentos1  despues34^olvio35  el  aozow  a 
decirle,86  seguido37  de  los  curiosos,1  que  el  caballo  no  queria38 
comer39  las  ostras.23 

j  Como  !  ^  no  las  quiere40  ?  pregunta  muy  serio1  el  viajero2 ; 
pues41  entonces,41  ,ponme42  aqui  la  mesa,  y  yo  me0  las  co- 
mere  a  su  salud.43 

2  traveller  ;  3  inn  ;  4  one  of  the  coldest  nights  ;  5  in  passing  ;  6  through  ; 
7  kitchen  ;  8  he  saw  ;  9  seat  ;  10  people  ;  11  there  were  ;  12  round  ;  13  fire  ; 
14  greatest ;  15  pain  ;  16  be(ing)able  ;  1 7  (to)  draw  near  ;  18  warm  his 
hands  ;  19  waiter  ;  20  high  ;  21  voice  ;  22  take  ;  23  oyster  ;  24  obeyed  ; 
25  calentar,  to  warm  ;  26  desire  ;  27  see  ;  28  got  up  ;  29  crowd  ;  30  stable ; 
31  meanwhile  ;  32  best ;  33  front ;  34  after  ;  35  came  back;  36  tell  him^  37 
followed  ;  38  would  ;  39  eat ;  40  he  likes ;  41  well  then  ;  42  put  me ;  43  healthu 


26 

Otra,  otra. 

Un  capitdn  de  buque2  que  no0  habia  estado  nuncas  en  el 
teatro,1  ni  tenia  voto4  ni  aiin5  oido6  para  la  miisica,1  fue7  una 
noche  a  la  opera  en  compania1  de  un  amigo.  Cuando  se9 
acabo9  la  f  uncion,8  se7  fue7  a  su  posada,10  donde  le  preguntaron 
como  habian  desempeiiado11  las  actrices1  sus  papeles.12 

No  me  ban  gustado,13  respondio  ;  alii  habia14  una  mujer 
que  lo  ha  becbo15  tan  mal,  que  la  ban  becbo16  volver17  a 
empezar17  dos  6  tres  veces  gritando18  :  "  etra,19  otra." 

2  ship  ;  3  never  ;  4=authority  ;  5  yet ;  6  ear  ;  7  went ;  8  performance  ; 
9  finished  itself =:was  over  ;  10  inn  ;  11  desempenar,  to  fulfil ;  12=parts ; 
13  gustar^  to  please ;  14  there  was ;  15  done ;  16  made ;  17  return  to  begin 
=begin  again  ;  18  gritar>  to  call  out ;  19=encore. 

Las  Estatuas. 

Un  tendero2  quo  en  poco  tiempo  se3  hizo3  rice,4  compr65 
las  haciendas6  de  un  caballero,  y  un  dia  quiso7  hacer8  ver8  i° 
uno  de  sus  amigos  su  nueva  adquisicion.1 

Llegaron  al  jardin9  y  le  mostro10  diferentes1  estatuas11  de 
bronce1  qu^  adornaban1  las  avenidas.12 

^  Que  figura1  es  esta  ?  le  dice13  su  amigo,  mostrandole14  un 
busto,1 

<j  Esa  figura  ?  ...  espere15  Vd. ...  no  me16  acuerdo16  ...ah, si, 
esa  debe17  ser  la  de  Venus  6  Vulcano,  pero  no  se18  positiva- 
mente1  cual  de  las  dos;  lo°  preguntaremos  al  jardinero19; 
como  son  del  mismo  metal,1  es  muy  dif icil1  distinguirlas.1 

2  shopkeeper  ;  3  made  himself ;  4  rich  ;  5  comprar,  to  buy  ;  6  estate  ; 
7  wished  ;  8  to  make  see=to  show  ;  9  garden  ;  10  mosfrar,  to  show  ; 
11  statue  ;  12  avenue  ;  13  says  ;  14  showing  him  ;  15  $sperary  to  wait ; 
16  I  remember  ;  17  must ;  18  I  know ;  19  gardener. 


Un  caballero  qxte  tenia  una  grancle  antipatia1  por  la  miisica1 
fue  preguntado  <;  por  que  no  se°  suscribia1  a  una  serie  de 
conciertos1  ?  y  para  decidirle1  a  ello  le  dijeron2  que  su 
hermano  se°  habia  suscrito.1 — ^Bien,  dijo  el,  si  yo  fuera8  tan 
eordo4  como  mi  hermano,  entonces  me0  suscribiria. 

2  they  told ;  3  were ;  4  deaf . 


27 

La  Apuesta. 

Cierto*  caballero  tenia,8  oomo  a  punto4  de  honra,6  no5  ser- 
virse  jamds*  de  afirmativa.1  Otro,  a  quien  contaron7  eata 
rareza,8'apost69  que  le  haria10  responder1  SI,*  6  NO,  la  primera 
vez  que  le  encontrase.11 

Verificada1  la  apuesta,12  sucedi618  que  un  dia  vio15  el 
apostador14  al  caballero  que  se16  dirigia16  derechamente17  a 
entrar1  en  una  iglesik18  Saliole19  al  encuentro,19  saludole,20 
y  le  pregunt6  :  Con21  que21  <;  va22  Vd.  a  la  iglesia18  ? 

Este  es  el  camino,23  respondio  el  caballero. 

2  certain  ;  3  held  ;  4  point ;  5  honor  ;  6=never  to  make  use  ;  7  cantor,  to 
relate  ;  8  originality  ;  9  apoetar,  to  bet ;  10  he  would  make  ;  11  he  met ; 
12  bet ;  13  suceder,  to  happen  ;  14  wagerer  ;  15  saw  ;  16  was  directing 
himself  ;  17  straight ;  18  church  ;  19=he  went  to  meet  him  ;  20  aaludar,  to 
bow  ;  21  well ;  22  go  ;  23  way. 

Las  dos  Orejas. 

Un  ratero2  a  quien  ya3  habian  cortado4  una  oreja5  en  Bristol 
por  castigo,6  entr6*  en  una  tienda,7  y  dijo  queria8  una  pieza9 
del  mejor10  encaje11  que  hubiese.12  Mostraronle13  varias,1  y 
despues14  de  haber14  elejido16  la  que  le  agrado,16  pregunto  aj 
comerciante17  cuanto18  le  llevaria19  por  medirle20  ei  largo21 
igual1  al  espacio1  que  separaba1  sus  ore j as.5 

El  comerciante17  dijo  que°  dos  reales.1 

Bueno,  dijo  el  ratero3  pag&ndole22 ;  pero  como  yo  tengo  una 
oreja6  aqui,  y  la  otra  esti  clavada23en  la  picota24  de  Bristol,  creo 
no  tendri  Vd.  hoy  bastante25encajenpara  medirme20lo  concer- 
tado,26  y  voy27  a  tomar  la  pieza9  a28buena  cuenta,28sin29perjuicio 
de  que  procure29  completarme1el  resto1  lo  mas  pronto30  posible. 

2  rogue  ;  3  already  ;  4  cortar,  to  cut  (off)  ;  5  ear  ;  6  punishment ;  7  shop  j 
8  he  wanted  ;  9  piece  ;  10  best ;  11  lace  ;  12  there  was  ;  13  they  showed  him  ; 
14  after  having  ;  15  chosen  ;  16  agradar,  to  please  ;  17  merchant  j  18  how 
much  ;  19=he  would  charge  ;  20  medir,  to  measure  ;  21  length  ;  22pagarf  to 
pay  ;  23  clavar,  to  nail ;  24  gibbet ;  25  enough  ;  26  agreed  on  (quantity)  ; 

27  I  am  going;  28  on  account;  29=without  prejudice  to  your  try  ing;  30  soon. 

^ 

£  Que  es  lo2  que2se3  nos  aparece3  una  vez  en  un  minuto,1  dos 

veces4  en  un  momento,1'  y  nunca6  en  un  siglo6  ? — La  letra1  M, 

>•  i    . • j 

2  what ;   3  appears  to  us  ;  4  time  ;  6  never  ;  6  century. 


28 

El  gran  Rey. 

Uno  de  los  liltimos2  reyes  de  Espana,8  a°  quien  la  suerte* 
de  las  armas1  habia  privado5  de  varias1  plazas6  considerables,1 
recibia7  sin8  embargo8  de  la  mayor9  parte1  de  sus  cortesanos10 
et  titulo1  de  Grande. 

Su  Grandeza,11  dijo  un  espanol,  se12  parece12  a°  la  de  los 
fosos,13  que  se14  hacen14  mayores9  en  proporcion  a  la  tierra15 
que  les16  quitan.16 

2  last  ;  3  Spain  ;  4  chance=fortune  ;  5  privar,  to  deprive  ,  6  place ; 
7  recibir,  to  receive  ;  8  nevertheless  ;  9  greater ;  10  courtier  ,  11  great- 
ness ;  12  resembles  ;  13  ditch  ;  14  make  themselves=become  ;  16  land, 
earth  ;  16  they  take  away  from  them. 

El  Aldeano  y  el  Mercader. 

Pasando  un  aldeano2  por  una  tiei\da3  que  tenia  la  anaque- 
leria4  casi5  vacia6  de  generos,7  entro  en  ella,  y  con  ironia1 
pregunto  al  mercader8  que  era  lo°  que  alii  se  vendia.9  Este 
quiso10  tambien11  burlarse12  y  le  contesto18  con  enfado14  : 
Aqui  se  venden9  cabezas15  de/asnos.16 

Grande  es  Iaventa17de  estacasa,segun18veo,19ledice20riendo21 
a  carca'jadas21  el  aldeano,2  pues  no  queda22  mas*  que  la  tuya. 

2  villager ;  3  shop  ;  4=shelves  ;  5  almost ;  6  empty  ;  7  goods ;  8 
dealer;  9  vender  se,  to  be  sold  j  10  wanted  5  11  also;  12  to  jest;  13con- 
testar,  to  answer  ;  14  vexation  ;  15  head  ;  16  ass  ;  17  sale  ;  18  according 
as  ;  19  I  see  ;  20  says  ;  21  laughing  boisterously  ;  22  quedar,  to  remain. 

El  Vice-C6nsul  flemdtico. 

Un  soberano2  mando3  suspender1  un  dia  su  arenga4  a  un 
orador1  diciendole5:  &  Quien  es  Vd.  ? — Seiior,  le  respondio,1 
soy  el  segundo  consul  de  mi  pueblo.6 — ,;  Y  por  que  no  ha  ve- 
nido7  el  primero  ? — Tened,8  seiior,  la  bondad9  de  perdonarle,10 
pues  tiene  una  razon13  bastante11  poderosa.12 — Yo  no  veo, 
repone14  el  principe15  irritado,1  que  es  lo  que  piiede16  alegar.17 
— Sefior,  contesta  el  orador1  con  su  natural1  flema,18  es  que 
murio19  ayer. — Entonces  el  rey  le  mando3  continuar.1 

2  sovereign ;  3  mcmdar,  to  order  ;  4  harangue  ;  5  saying  to  him  ; 
6  town  ;  7  come  ;  8  have  ;  9  kindness  ;  10  perdonar,  to  pardon  ;  11 
sufficiently  ;  12  powerful ;  13  reason  ;  14  replies  ;  15  prince ;  16  he 
can;  17  allege  ;  18  phlegm;  19  he  died. 


29 

La  Pronunciaeion  Inglesa: 

Para  leer2  el°  ingles  no  basta3  saber4  pronunciar1  el  alf  abeto,1 
pues  no  hay5  acaso6  ninguna  lengua7  en  Europa,1  que  pre- 
sente1  sonidos8  tan  varios1  y  excepciones1  tan  iiumerosas1  a  la 
regla9  general1 ;  de10  modo  que10  s61ou  por  medio12  de  una 
lectura13  asidua1  y  constante,1  bajo14  la  direccion1  de  un  pro- 
fesor1  6  practicando1  con  ingleses,  se15  puede15  conseguir16 
tener  una  pronunciacion1  jnas17  6  inenos17  perfecta.1 

Hay5  tambien18  otra  irr.egularidad1  en  la  ortografia1  del 
ingles,  f ranees19  y  otras  lenguas,7  a20  saber20:  una  misma  lefra1 
se  pronuncia1  de  varias1  maneras,1  6  por21  mejor  deeir,21  re- 
presenta  sonidos8  enteramente1  distintos,1  en  diferentes 
palabras22;  y  esta  irregularidad1  es  muy  extensa.1  En  Espanol 
sucede23  lo  mismo  con  la  "  Y,"  la  cual  se  pronuncia  a  veces 
como  "  I "  vocal,24  y  a  veces  como  consonante.1 

Consideradas1  todas  estas  irregularidades1  que  ocurren1  tan 
f  recuentemente,1  de  una  man  era1  u  otra,  en  la  mayor  parte1  de 
las  palabras,22  casi25  se26  puede  decir,26  que  las  letras1  inglesas 
de  ninguna  manera1  representan1  los  sonidos8  del  lenguaje,1 
y  por27  consiguiente27  es  en  cierto  modo28  iinposible1  hallar  la 
pronunciacion  de  las  palabras22  por  la  mera1  vista29  de  las  letras 
inanuscritas1  6  impresas30  del  modo28  ordinario.1  Una  cosa 
es  aprender31  a  escribir32  una  palabra,22  y  otra  enteramente1 
diferente1  el  saber33  pronunciarla  despues34  de34  escrita.35 
(se  conthiuard  en  la  paginal1  siguiente.^) 

0  not  to  be  translated  ;  1  the  same,  or  nearly  the  same,  as  in  English. 

2  read  ;  3  bastar,  to  suffice  ;  4  to  know  (how)  ;  5  there  is  ;  6=perhaps  ? 
7  tongue  ;  8  sound  ;  9  rule  ;  10  so  that ;  11  only  ;  12  means  ;  13  reading  ; 
14  under  ;  15=it  is  possible  ;  16  to  attain  ;  1 7=approaching  ;  18  also  ; 
19  French  ;  2Q=viz.  ;  21=it  should  rather  be  said  ;  22  word  ;  23  suceder^ 
to  happen  ;  24  vowel ;  25  almost ;  26  it  may  be  said  ;  27  consequently  ; 
28  way  ;  29  sight ;  30  printed  ;  31  to  learn  ;  32  (to)  write  ;  33  know(ing 
how  to)  ;  34  after;  35  written  ;  36  following  ;  37  page. 


El  gato2  escaldado3  del  agua6  fria5  huye.4 

2  cat ;  3  escaldar,  to  scald  ;  4  flees ;  5  cold  ;  6  water. 


30 

La  Pronuhciacidn  Inglesa  (continuation). 
La  Pronunciation  Inglesa  es  tan  dificil,1  que  tanto2  los 
Americanos  como2  los  Ingleses  estan  obligates1  a  tener  para 
su  uso1  "  Diccionarios1  de  Pronunciation,"  con  su  clave3 
correspondiente1 ;  esto  es,  diccionarios  en  que  las  palabras4 
estan  impresas,5  tal6  cual6  deben7  escribirse,8  y  a  continuation 
las  mismas  palabras4'  con  ciertos  signos,1  que  'muestran9 
como  deben7  pronunciarse  ;  el  metodo1  6  sistema1  con  que 
esto  se10  hace10  se11  denomina11  "  clave,3 "  la  cual  no  es 
siempre12  la  misma.  Estos  son  los  que  se  llaman13  u  Diccio- 
narios de  Pronunciaci6n.'**No  los  hay  en  castellano,14  porque 
no  se15  necesitan.15 

La  diferencia1  entre  la  manera1  de  escribir16  y  la  de  pro- 
nuhciar  las  palabras4  *en  ingles,  trae17  su  ori^en1'  parte18  de 
que  la  lengua19  inglesa^e  ha  formado1  de  la  mezcla20  de  un 
gran  niimero1  de  diferentes1  idiomas,19  parte18  de  los  grandes 
cambios21  que  han  ocurrido1  en  el  metodo^-de  pronunciar 
muchas  palabras4  durance22  muchos  siglos,23  mientras24  que° 
el  metodo  de  escribirlas  no  ha  cambiado25  a  proportion1 ;  pero 
principalmente1  a26  causa  de26  haber  ^adoptado1  el  alfabeto1 
romano1  para  representar1  el  ingles,  que  tiene  muchos  mas 
sonidos27  que  el  latino,1  y  aiin28  mas  que  el  castellano,14  y  que 
por29  tanto29  no  puede80  representarlos1  por  el  alfabeto  romano. 

2  tanto  ...  <&mo,  both  ...  and  ;  3  key  ;  4  word  ;  5  printed  ;  6  like ;  7  they 
must ;  8  be  written  ;  9  moslrar,  to  show  ,-  10  does  itself=is  done  :  lL=is 
entitled  ;  12  always  ;  13  llamar,  to  call ;  14  Castihan=Spanish  ,  15=are 
r  wanted  ;  16  writing  ;  17  draws=owes  ;  18  part(ly)  ;  19  language. 
20  mixture  ;  21  change  ;  22  during  ;  23  century  ;  24  while  ;  25  cambiar,  10 
change  ;  26  on  account  of ;  27  sound  ;  28  yet ;  29  therefore  ;  30  can. 

El  Libro  prestado. 

Preguntando  un  amigo  a  otro  ;  por  que  causa1  no  solian2  vol- 
verse2  a  BUS  dueiios3  los  libros  prestados4  ?  respondio  :  Porque 
es  mas  facil5  retener6  los  libros  que  lo7  que7  contienen.8 

2  were  usually  returned  ;  3  owner  ;  4  prestar,  to  lend  ;  5  easy ;  6  (to) 
retain  ;  7  what ;  8  they  contain. 


31 

Se2  cuenta2  una  buena  y  autentica1  historia1  de  la  mujer* 
de  un  manufacturero1  de  encajes4  de  Nottingham,  que  hal- 
l&ndose  con  su  marido5  en  Paris  y  ocupada1  en  mirar6  los 
mostradores7  como  sucede8  a  los  que  visitan1  Paris,  se* 
enamor69  de  un  panuelo10  de  encaje4  de  una  finura11  y 
delicadeza1  extrema,1  por  el  cual  el  tendercf  le  pidio12  la 
moderada1  suma1  de  cuatro  cientos  cuarenta  francos.1 

Ella  inmediatamente1  lo  hubiese13  comprado14  a15  no  impe- 
dirselo15  los  dif  erentes1  signos1  de  disuasion1  que  le  hizo16  su 
marido,5  los  cuales  le  sorprendieron17  no  poco,  tanto18  mas, 
cuanto19  sabia20  que  su  marido*  era  un  buen  juez  en  la 
materia1 ;  no  podia21  por22  consiguiente22  explicarse23  esta 
falta24  de  apreciacion1  sobre  tan  hermoso25  trabajo.26 

Ella  examino1  el  panuelo10  otra  vez  medio27  dudando,28  pero 
el  panuelo  era  suave^en  te;jido30y  de  hermoso25dibujo31;  lanzo32 
otra  mirada33  a  su  esposo5  y  no  le  hallaba  otro  def ecto1  que  el 
ser^caro35;  de36  suerte  que86  con  cierta  pena37  se38  fue38  dealli. 

Apenas39  habia40  salido41  de  la  tienda,42  cuando  interpe- 
lando43  a  sb  marido6  le  dijo :  Juan,44  <;  por  que  no  has  querido45 
comprar14  una  cosa  tan  hermosa25  como  esa  ? 

Tienes46razon,46querida47mia,47  fue  la  respuesta48  de  Juan. 
I}fectivamente49es  unarticulo1hermoso25:  pero  no  he  querido46 
compr&rtelo,14  pues  viene50  de  mi  fabrica,51  y  puedo62  dartew 
otro  igual54  por  veinte  francos  ! 

2  is  related  ;  3  wife  ;  4  lace ;  5  husband  ;  6  look(ing)  at  ;  7  shop-counters; 
8  suceder,  to  happen  ;  9  enamorarse,  to  fall  in  love  ;  10  handkerchief ;  11 
fineness  ;  12  asked  ;  13  would  have  ;  14  comprar,  to  buy  ;  15=but  was  pre- 
vented by  ;  16  made  ;  17  sorprender,  to  surprise  ;  18=all  the  ;  19  as ;  20  she 
knew  ;  21  she  could  ;  22  therefore  ;  23  explicar,  to  explain  ;  24  want  ; 
25  beautiful ;  26  work  ;  27  half  ;  28  dudar,  to  doubt ;  29  soft ;  30  texture ; 
31  design  ;  32  lanzar,  to  dart ;  33  glance  ;  34  be(ing)  ;  35  dear  ;  36  so 
that ;  37  pain=regret ;  38  she  went  away  ;  39  hardly  ;  40  she  had  ;  41  gone 
out ;  42  shop  ;  43  interpelar,  to  appeal ;  44  John  ;  45  been  willing ;  46  hast 
reason=art  right ;  47  my  dear  ;  48  reply  ,  49  certainly,  indeed  ;  60  it 
comes  ;  51  manufactory  ;  52  I  can  ;  53  give  thee  ;  54  equal=like  it. 

I  En  qu6  se2parece2  un  esqueleto3a  una  comfda4  de  viernes6? 
En  qne  le6  falta6  la  came.7 
2  resembles  ;  3  skeleton  ;  4  dinner ;  5  Friday ;  6  it  lacks ;  7  flesh. 


82 

El  Hisisipi. 

Paseabase2  un  europeo1  por  las  orillas3  del  Misisipf,1  rio4  de> 
curso5  muy  veloz,6  y  pregunto  £°  un  labriego7  :  <;  Como  se^ 
llama8  este  rio4  ? — No  hay  necesidad1  de  llamarle,  senor, 
porque  el  se°  viene9  espontaneamente10  solo.n 

2  was  passing  ;  3  bank  ;  |  river ;  6  current ;  6  rapid  ;  7  peasant ; 
co  be  called  ;  9  comes ;  10  voluntarily  ;  11  alone— of  its<own  accord. 


La  Genero&idad. 

Presentaron1  a  un  caballero  la  cuenta2  de  gastos3  del  eti» 
tierro4  de  su  mujer,5  y  al6  ver6  a  lo7  que7  ascendia,  \  como, 
seiiores  !  exclaino,1  \  tanto8  dinero  por  un  convoy9  f  linebre9  ! 

Pues10  que10  <j  cree  Vd.  que  unos°  f  unerales  'tan  magnificos1 
se11  hacen11  por  nada12  ?  no  podemos13  rebajar14  un  cuarto.15 

Vamos,10  vamos,10  les  contesta,  hacedme16  el  recibo,17.pue& 
ahora  ya°  me18  hago  cargo18  de°  que°  mi  pobre  mujer5 
hubiera19  pagado20  muy  gustosa21  el  doble1  por  -mi  entierro,* 
y  no  tfuiero22  cederla23  en  generosidad.1 

2  account ;  3  expense  ;  4  burial ;  5  wife  ;  6  on  seeing ;  7  what ;  8  so  much i; 
9  funeral ;  10  well ;  ll=are  done  ;  12  nothing  ;  13  we  can  ;  14  to  bate  ;  15  (a 
small  copper  coin)  ;  16  make  me  (out);  17  receipt ;  18  I  think  of  it ;  19  would 
have  j  20  paid ;  21  cheerfully  ;  22  I  am  willing  ;  23  (to)  give  way  .to  fcer. 

>  Nueva  Aritmetica. 

Un  abogado2  hizo3  la  defensa1  de  un  litigante1  ante*  ua 
tribunal1  compuesto5  de  tres  jueces,6  el  uno  muy  sabio,7  y  los 
otros  dos  bastante8  ignorantes.1 

Perdio^  el  pleito,10  y  queriendo1^  uno  de  sus  companeros11 
burlarse13  de  el,  con  este  motivo1  dijo  :  <;  Pero,  esperaban14 
Yds.14  otra  coaa  ?      Era  preciso16  sucediese16  asi17  con  un 
,,  tribunal1  de  cien  jueces.6 

1  Cien  jueces  !  repuso18  uno  de  ellos ;  i  pues19no  eran  tres  ? 
tFno  y  dos  ceros20  i  cuanto21hacen22segiin23  vuestra  cuenta24? 

respondio  el  abogado.2 

2  lawyer  ;  3  made  ;  4  before  ;  5  composed  ;  6  judge  ;  7  learned  ;  8==rather; 
9  he  lost ;  10  law-suit ;  11  colleague  ;  12  wishing  ;  13  to  make  fun  ;  14  did 
you  expect ;  15  necessary  ;  16  it  should  happen  ;  17  thus  ;  18  replied  ;  19  then 
arbut ;  20  zero ;  21  iow  many  ;  22  do  they  make  ;  23  according  to  ;  24  couat. 


From  this  point  the  Student  is  assumed  to  be  acquainted  with  all  the 
Bules  in  "SPANISH  SIMPLIFIED,"  including  the  principal  Irregular 
Verbs  (see  Lessons  19  to  24). 

£1  Campanario. 

Una  senora  vio2  entrar1  en  su  cuarto  a°  un  hombre  de  una 
estatura1  gigantesca,1  y  pregunto  quien  era.  Es  un  hombre 
que  viene3  destinado1  para  la  iglesia,4  respondio  el  criado. 

Mejor8  diria  Vd.,6  repnso6  la  senora,  para  el  campanario.7 

2  saw  ;  3  oomes=is  ;  4  church  ;  5  you  would  better  say  ;  6  replied }  7  steeple. 

El  Criado  fiel. 

Un  sefior,  necesitando2  madrugar,8  dice  a  su  criado  :  Juan, 
manana  debes4  despertarme6  a  las  cuatro  en6  puntoJ* 

Sera7  Vd.  servido.7 

Mira8  que°  no  te°  olvides.9 — No  tenga  Vd.  cuidado.10 

Y  Juan,  fiel11  a  su  promesa,1  resuelve1  no  echarse1*  en  la 
cama12  aquella  noche  ;  enciende13  una  vela,14  y  se  sienta16  en 
una  silla. 

Pero  el  sueno,16  que  no  hace  diferencia1  entre  el  desnudo1* 
y  el  vestido,18  acaba19  por  rendir20  a  Juan,  que  empieza21  a 
dormir22  como  un  bendito.23  De24  siibito24  se  despierta,5 
consulta  azorado25  el  reloj,  que  niarca1  las  dos,  y  siu  darse26 
cuenta26  de  lo  que  hace,  corre27  a  la  camara28  de  su  amo,  y 
empieza21  a  gritar29  desaforadamente30  : 

\  Senor,  senor !  —  <;  Que31  hay31  ?  <|  son  ya  las  cuatro  ?  res- 
ponde1  el  amo  sobresaltado.32 

No,  senor,  replica1  Juan,  no  son  mas  que  las  dos  :  vengo  a 
decirle  que  aun33  le  quedan34  dos  hbras  mas  para  dormir^; 
aprovechelas35  Vd. 

2  wanting  ;  3  to  rise  early  ;  4  you  must  ;  5  despertar,  to  wake  ;  6  pre- 
cisely ;  7=it  shall  be  done  ;  8  look  ;  9  olvidat,  to  forget ;  10  care= 
anxiety;  11  faithful;  12=to  go  to  bed  ;  1 3  encetider^  to  light ;  14  candle. ; 
15  sentarse,  to  seat. one's  self  ;  16  sleep  ;  17  undressed ;  18  dressed ;  Waca- 
fawyto  finish  ;  20  to  overcome  ;  21  empezar,  to  begin  ;  22  to  sleep  ;  23 
blessed  ;  24  suddenly  ;  25  terrified  ;  26;=thinkiug  ;  27  correr,  to  run  ;  28 
chamber  ;  29  to  call  out ;  30  excessively,;  31  what  is  the  matter ;  32  startled- 
33  still ;  34  quedary  to  remain  ;  35  aprovechar,  to  take  advantage  of. 

3-SRS 


34 

La  Base  fundamental  de 1£  Jnsticla. 

tfn  abogado2  que  iba  a  establecer1aasu  escribiente*  le  dijo  t 
Mire4  Vd.4 ;  antes6  de6  ausentarme6  voy  a  comunicarle1  una 
cosa  muy  importante.1  Ya  sabe  Vd.  los  favores1  que  me 
debe,  pues  yo  le  he  ensenado7  el  oficio,8  y  gracias9  a  mis 
cuidados10  no  puede  dejar11  de  hacer  fortuna1  en  este  mundo12; 
pero  he  reservado1  para  el  ultimo13  un  servicio1  interesante.1 

I  Y  cual  es  ? 

Es  el  de  inclicarle1  la  base1  fundamental1  de  la  justicia.1 

<»  Y  cual  es  esa  base  ? — No  puedo  decirla  mientras14  no  me> 
pague15  tin  buen  almuerzo.16 

ti/onsiento1  en  ,ello,  ordene17  Vd.  .lo  que  quiera.18 

£l  abogado2  pidi619  dos  docenab20  de  ostras,21  jamon,2*  un 
pave,-23  langostas,24  en26  fin25  un  almuerzo16  suculento,1  y  des* 
pues26  le  dijo : 

Sepa27  Vd.,  pues,  que  la  base  de  toda-la  justicia  es  la 
prueba,28  la  prueba,  amigp  mio,  la  prueba. 

Comen,29  beben,30se  divierten31 ;  pero  todo  placer32  tiene  su 
fin33 ;  viene  la  cuenta,34  y  el  abogado  man  da35  se°  la  'den36  al 
<escribiente,3  que  es  quien  ha  hecho  aquel  obsequio.37 

I  Yo  ?  no,  sefior. — <;  C6mo  que°no  ?  amiguito,38  ya  sabe  Vd. 
Jo  que  hemos  convenido.39 

I  Pues  que  convenio40  he  hecho  yo  ? 

Que  se  ha  comprometido41  Vd.  a  pagarlo16  to<i<K 

1  Y  d6nde  esta  la  prueba28  ? 

El  abogado2  f  ue42  quien  pago15  por  no  poder  darla,45  siendo 
eomo  el  mismo44  le  habia  dicho,  la  base1  fundamental1 
de  la  justicia.1 

2  lawyer.;  3  clerk  ;  4  look  (here)  ;  5  before  ;  6  aiteentarse>  to  absent  one's- 
self  ;  7'ensenar,  to  teach  ;  8  business  ;  9  thanks  ;  10  care  ;   11  leave==fail ;: 
12  world  ;      13  last  \f  14  as  loug  as  ;      15  pagar,  to  pay  ;      16  breakfast ; 
17  ordenar,  to  order  ;    18  you  like  ;    19  requested  ;    20  dozen  ;    21  oyster  j 
22  ham ;   23  turkey  ;    24  lobster  ;    25  in  fact  ;    26  afterwards  ;    27  know  ; 
28  proof';     29  comer,  to  eat ;     30  beber,  to  drink  ;    31  divertirse,  to  enjoy, 
one's  self ;  32  pleasure  ;   33  end  ;  34  bfll ;  35  mandar,  to  order  ;  36  (that) 
they  give  ;   37  civility  ;  38  young  friend  ;  3d  convetur,  to  agree  ;  40  agree- 
{pent ;  41  comprometerse,  to  undertake ;  42  GO  was  '•  *&  gi^e  it ;  44  iumseli. 


HP 

La  Puerta  cerrada.* 

Un  caballero  de  una  conversacion  f astidiosa8  y  eterna,1  dio4 
en  la  costumbre5  de  ir  f  recuentemente1  a  una  casa  donde  no 
gustaban6  mucho  BUS  visitas1 ;  fingia7  no  hacer8  caso8  de  las 
respuestas9  de  la  criada,  que  le  decia  siempre10  que  los  amos 
no  estaban  en11  casa,11  y  se  introducia1  sin  cumplimiento12 
todos  los  dias  con  estos  pretefctos1  :  Bien,  bien  ;  mientras13 
vuelvenuvoy  ahablar  con  los  niiios... Hare15 rabiar15un  rato17 
al  loro16....  Aprovechare18  esta  ocasi6n1  para  arreglar19  mi 
reloj  por  el  del  salon,  etc. 

Una  manana  que  la  criada  tenia  ya  su  contestacion9  pen- 
sada,20  le  vio  venir  de  lejps21  desde22  una  ventana,23  fue  cor- 
riendo24  a  la  puerta,  y  sin  abrirla25  le  dijo  desde22  la  rejilla2^  : 
Seiior  don  Ramon, mi  amo  y  mi  ama  ban  salido,  los  ninos  estan 
en  la  escuela,27  el  loro16  ha  muerto,28  y  el  reloj  esta,  parado.29 

Cerro  la  rejilla26  y  no  le  dio  lugar30  a  mas  conversaci6n.1 

0  not  to  be  translated  ;  1  the  same,  or  nearly  the  same,  as  in  English. 
2  cerrar,  to  shut ;  3  tedious  ;  4=was  ;  5  habit ;  6  gustar,  to  please  ;  7fingirt 
to  pretend  ;  8=to  take  notice  ;  9  answer  ;  10  always  ;  11  at  home  ; 
\2=ceremony  ;  13  while=until  ;  14  volver,  to  return  ;  151  will  tease  ; 
16  parrot ;  17  short  time;  18  aprovechar,  to  take  advantage  of  ;  19  (to) 
regulate ;  20  pensar,  to  consider  ;  21  afar  ;  22  from  ;  23  window  ;  24  correct 
to  run  ;-  25  abrir,  to  open  ;  26  lattice  ;  27  school ;  28  died ;  29  parar,  to 
stop  ;  30  place=opportunity,- 


Un  particular2que  ajustaba3un  borrico,4dijo  al  molinero5que 
lo  tomaria,  con  la  garantia1  de  que  no  tuviese  ningiin  def  ecto.1 

Convengo6  en  ello,  respondio  el  duenoJ 

Pasados8  algunos  dias  el  comprador9  advirtio10  que  el 
borrico4  era  tuerto,11  y  quiso  devolverselo13  diciendole  : 

Amigo  mio,  su  borrico4  de  Vd.  no  ve  mas  que  de  un  lado,13 
porque  solo14  abre14  una  ventana. 

Toma,15  responde,  eso  no  es  un  def  ecto,1  sino  una  desgracia.16 

2  certain  man  ;  3  was  bargaining  ;  4  donkey  ;  5  miller  ;  6  convenir,  to  agree; 
7  owner  ;  8  passed=after  ;  9  buyer  ;   10  advertir,  to  notice^ ;  11  one-eyed 
.12  to  return  it  to  him  ;  13  side ;  14  only  opens  j  15... well ;  16  misfortune. 


88 

Cddiz. 

Pocos  panoramas1  hay  mas  bellos2  en  el  mundo,*  y  casi4 
ningun  cuadro5  en  la  naturaleza6  que  cautive7  mas  los  ojos8 
del  espectador9  por  su  diafanidad10  y  hermosura,11  que  el  que 
of rece13  la  vista12  de  la  ciudad  de  Cadiz,  desde14  uno  de  los 
vapores15  que  hacen  la  travesia16  de  Sevilla1  a  este  puerto,17 
cuando  tpca18  al  ternimo19  de  su  espedicion,1  a  los  viajeros20 
que  contemplan1  la  linda21  ciudad  que  se  levanta22  sobre  el 
mar,23  a24  la  mahera1  de24  un  palacio1  de  pJata25  primorosa- 
mente26  afiligranado.27  La  blancura28  de  sus  torres2?  y  de  las 
azoteas30  de  sus  casas,  las  ciipulas1  y  los  torreones31  de  sus 
templos,  y  la  belleza11  armonica32  de  su  conjunto,33  ceuido34 
por  la  ancha35  faja36  de  piedra37  que  la  circuye,88  le  dan  por 
otro  lado39  el  aspecto1  de  un  gran  buque40  de  alabastro,1 
flotante1  en  medio41  de  los  mares,23 

A42  medida  que42  el  vapor15  va  adelantando43  rapido1 
hacia44  el  muelle,46  el  viajero20  menos  reflexivo1  se  convence1 
de°  que  se46  aproxima46  a  una  poblacion1  iniportante1  por  su 
movimiento1  mercantil1 ;  y  los  numerosos1  buques40  de  todos 
portes47  y  con  banderas48  de  todas  las  naciones1  de  Europa, 
que  estan  anclados49  en  su  bahia,50  y  por51  entre51  los  cuales 
cruza52  el  vapor,15  le  indican1  claramente53  que  la  bella2 
ciudad  aun54  conserva1  restos56  honrosos55  de  su  antiguo57 
poderio58  y  de  su  pristina  grandeza.59 

2  beautiful ;  3  world  ;  4  almost ;  5  picture  ;  6  nature  ;  7  cautivar,  to 
captivate  ;  8  eye  ;  9  spectator  ;  10  transparency  ;  11  beauty  ;  12  view  ; 
13  offers  ;  14  from  ;  15  steamer  ;  16  passage  across  ;  17  port ;  18  tocar,  to 
touch  ;  19  end  ;  20  traveller  ;  21  pretty  ;  22  levantar,  to  raise  ;  23  sea  i 
24=like  ;  25  silver  ;  26  elegantly  ;  27  filigreed  ;  28  whiteness ;  29  tower  ; 
30  flat  roof  ;  31  turret ;  32  harmonious  ;  33=grouping";  34  cen/r,  to  gird  ; 
35  broad ;  36  band  ;  37  stone  ;  38  circuir,  to  surround  ;  39  side  ;  40  ship  ; 
41  middle  ;  42  in  proportion  as  ;  43  moving  forward  ;  44  towards  ;  45  quay  ; 
46  he  is  approaching  ;  47  tonnage  ;  48  flag  ;  49  anclar,  to  anchor  j  50 
bay  ;  51  through  ;  52  cvuzar,  to  cruise  ;  53  clearly ;  54  still ;  55  honorable  ; 
66  remains  ;  57  ancient ;  58  power  ;  59  greatness. 

I  Quien  es  el  que  sin  ceremonia1  y  con  sombrero  puestp,2 
se3  sienta3  delante4  del  rey,  del  papa,5  6  del  emperador1  ? 

El  cochero.6 

2  put=on  ;  3  sits  down  ;  4  before ;  6  pope  ;  6  coachman. 


87 

La  Disputa  de  Cocina. 

Tramaron2  una  disputa1  la  criada  y  el  cochero3  de  un  ban- 
quero1  de  Murcia,  sobre  quien~~de  los  dos  habia  de  ir  al 
desayuno4  del  amo  ;  y  este,  oyendo5  los  gritos,6  les  llamo7  para 
resolver8  sobre  esta  diferencia.1  La  cocinera9  se  quejaba10  de° 
que  el  cochero3  pasaba  toda  la  manana  rodando11  por11  la  co- 
cina12  corno  un  zangano,13  y  que  ella  tenia  tanto14  que  hacer 
que  no  podia  separarse1  del  fogon15  un  solo16  instante.1 

El  cochero3  dijo  que  la  crema17  no  era  de°  su  obligacion.1 

Veamos,18  pues,  <;  cual  es  tu  obligacion  ?  le  pregunto  el  amo. 

Mi  oficio,19  seiior,  es  el°;de  cuidar20  los  caballos,  limpiar21 
el  coche22  y  llevarlo23  a  donde  su  merced24  me  mande.25 

Es  verdad)26  tienes27  razon,27  y  no  exijo28  mas  de  ti,  pues 
solo29  para  eso  te  tengo ;  y  en  este  supuesto30  todas  las 
mananas  te  levantaras31  al  amanecer,32  limpiaras21  inuy  bien  el 
coche22  y  los  caballos,  y  antes33  de33  almorzar4  £ngancharas34 
y  llevaras23  en  el  a°  la  cociiiera9  al  mercado35  para36  que 
eompre36  la  cremai17 

El  cochero  se37  rasco  las  orejas,37  y  se°  retiro.1 

2  weaved=had  ;  3  coachman ;  4  breakfast ;  5  hearing  ;  6  cry  ;  7  Hainan 
to  call;  8=decide;  9  cook  ;  10  quejarse,  to  complain  ;  11  wandering 
about ;  12  kitchen  ;  13  idler  ;  14  so  much  ;  15  hearth  ;  16  single  ; 
17  cream  ;  18  let  us  see  ;  19  business  ;  20  to  look  after  ;  21  to  clean  ; 
22  coach  ;  23  llevai'^to  take  ;  24  honor  ,  25  orders  ;  2G  truth  ;  27  thou 
art  right ;  28  exigir,  to  require  ;  29  only  ;  30  supposition  ;  31  levantarse, 
to  get  up  ;  32  dawn  ;  33  before  ;  34  enganchar,  to  harness  ;  35  market ; 
36  that  she  (may)  buy  ;  37  scratched  his  ears. 

Entre  un  hombre  pobre  y  un  hombre  rico  hay  todo  un 
hombre  de  diferencia.1 


Un  bufon1  pregunto  a°  uno  que  tenia  las  piernas*  torcidas3 
y  la  cadera5  derecha4  derrengada,6  <r  que  camino  habia  tornado 
para  ir  a  Cadiz  ? 

He  venido  todo7  derecho,8  respondio. 

Pues,  senor,  en  ese  caso,1  repuso9  el  buf 6n,  se  ha.  'trans- 
formado1  Vd.  enteramente10  en  el  camino. 

2  leg  ;   3  distorted  ;  4  right ;   5  hip  ;  6  crooked  ;   7=cquite  ;    8  straight 
9  replied  ;   10  entirely. 


Esopo  y  el  Viajero. 

Esopo,1  el  celebre1  fabulista,1  era  muy  pobre,  y  mnchas 
veces  tenia  que2  ir  a3  pie^  de  una  ciudad  a  otra. '  En  una  de 
BUS  excursiones1  encontro4  en  el  camino  a°un  viajero,  el  cual 
deteniendose5  le  pregunto  : 

I  Puede6  Vd.  decirme  a  que  hora  llegare  a  aquel  pueblo 
que  esta  sobre  la  colina7  ? 

En  llegando  lo  sabra8  Vd,,8  contesto9  Esopo.1 

Ya  lo  se,  dijo  el  viajero ;  pero  lo  que  "deseo10  saber,  es 
cuanto11  tiempo  tar  dare.12 

Esopo  parecio^ofenderse^y  repitio^a  misma  contestation,** 

El  viajero  continue1  su  camino  diciendp  para15  si15 :  Es 
hombre  me  parece13  un  ignorante1  y  no  me  dira16  lo 
necesito17  saber. 

Algunos  minutos  despues18  oyo19  que  le  llamaban,20  y  vol» 
viendo21  la  vista,21  vi6  a°  Esopo  que  le  seguiaf?2 

i  Que  quiere  Vd.  ?'  le  pregunto. 

Dentro23  de  hora  y  media24  llegara  Vd.  al  pueblo,  respon* 
di6  Esopo. 

1  Y  por  qu6  no  me  lo  dijo  Vd.  cuando  se25  lo  pregunte25  ? 
Antes26  necesitaba17  ver  lo27  ligero27  que  Vd.  andaba.28 

2=to  ;  3  .on  foot  ->  4  enconlrar,  to  meet ;  5  detenerse,  to  stop  ;  6  can  ; 
7  hill ;  8  you  will  know  ;  9  contesiar,  to  answer  ;  10  desear,  to  desire  ;  11 
how  much  ;  12  tardar,  to  delay  ;  13  parecer,  to  seem  j^^H  answer  ;  15  to 
himself  ;  16  will  tell ;  17  mcesitar,  to  want ;  18  after  ;  19  o/r,  to  hear  j 
20  llamarrio  call  ;  21=turning  round  ;  22  seguir,  to  follow  ;  23  within  ;  24 
^alf  ;  25  I  asked  you  ;  26  before=first ;  27=the  rate  ;  28  cindar,.  to^walk. 

Un  pobre  zapatero2  remend6n2  se  vio  un  dia  apurado3  para 
.encender4  la  lumbre,5  y  envi6  a°  un  chiquillo,6  hijo  suyo,  a7 
buscar  un  f  uelle  prestado,7  por  un  momento,  d  casa  de  un. 
avaro8  que  vivia  en  la  vecindad9 ;  pero  este  dijo  al  nifio  : 
Mira,10  dile11  a  tu  padre,  que  yo  no  dejo12  salir  'el  fyielle13  de 
mi  casa;  pero  fque  puede  venir  cuando  quiera^d  sOplar15 
todo  el  dia  en  mi  cocina.16 

2  cobbler  ;    3=unable  ;    4  (to)  light :    5  fire ;    6  little  boy  ;    7  to  seek  a 
pair  of  bellows  lent=to  borrow  a  pair  of  bellows  ;    8  miser  ;     9  neighbour- 
hood ;  10  look  (here)  ;  llteU;  12  ^ar,  to  let  >  13  beUoTOl  H  be  Ifces; 
15(tp)blow; 


89 

Foote  y  el  Alcalde. 

Viajando*  una  vez  el  actor  Foote  por  el  oeste3  de  Inglaterra4 
se  detuvo5  en  una  posada6  para  comer.7  Al  arreglar8  las 
cuentas9  el  posadero10  le  pregunto  si  estaba  satisfecho.1 

Perfectamente,1  dijo  Foote,  he  comido7  mejor11  que  nadie13 
en  Inglaterra.4 

Excepto1  el  alcalde,13  replico  el  posadero.10 

Yo  no  hago  excepcion1  alguna. 

Pero  debe14  Vd.  exceptuar1^!  alcalde.13 

Y  Foote,  encolerizado,15  volvio16  a  replicar16  recalcando17  la 
voz]8en  cada  silaba1que  ni  aun19exceptuabaa  al  mismo20alcalde. 

Y  tomo  tales21  proporciones1  la  pendencia,22  que  el  posade- 
ro10 condujo23  a°  Foote  en  presencia1  del  alcalde13  del  lugar.24 

Sr.  Foote,  le  dijo  este  venerable1  magistrado,1  ha  de  saber 
Vd.  que  desde25  tiempo  inmemorial1  se26  conserva26  aqui  la 
costumbre1  de  hacer  siempre27  una  excepcion1  para  el  alcalde,13 
y  con  objeto1  de°  que  lo  tenga  Vd.  presente1  le  condeno1 
a  cinco  reales1  de  multa,28  6  a  cinco  horas  de  arresto1  si  asi29 
lo  prefiere.1 

Foote  se  vio  precisado30a  pagar  la  multa.28  A  su  salida31dijo : 

En  toda  la  cristiandad32  no  conozco33  un  hombre  mas- 
tonto34  que  ese  posadero,10  ...  excepto1  el  senor35  Alcalde —  e 
hizo  una  solemne1  reverencia1  a  Su  Senoria.36 

0  not  to  be  translated  ;  1  the  same,  or  nearly  the  same,  as  in  English. 

2  viqjar,  to  travel ;  3  west ;  4  England  ;  5  detenerse,  to  stop  ;  6  inn  ; 
7  to  dine  ;  8  settling  ;  9  account ;  10  innkeeper  ;  11  better  ;  12  nobody= 
anybody  ;  13  mayor  ;  14  must ;  15  angered  ;  16  returned  to  reply=replicd 
again  ;  17=empbasizing  ;  18  voice  ;  19  even  ;  20  himself  ;  21  such  ;  22  dis- 
pute ;  23  conducir,  to  conduct ;  24  place  ;  25  from  ;  26  is  preserved  ; 
27  always  ;  28  fine  ;  29  thus,  so ;  30  precisar,  to  compel ;  31  going  out ;  32 
Christendom  ;  33  conocer,  to  know  ;  34  foolish  ;  35  Lord  ;  36  lordship. 


La  mayor  parte  de  los  hombres  pasan  la  mitad2  de  su 
vida3  estropeando4  su  salud,5  y  la  otra  mitad6  haciendo  en- 
sayos7  para  remendarla.8 

2  half  ;  3  life  ;  4  estropear,  to  cripple,  injure  ;  5  health  ;  6  half ;    7  eft- 
cleavour ;    8  rementfari  to  mend. 


40 

Habiendo  una  bala*  enemiga1  dejado3  srn  brazos4  a°  un  sol- 
dado  frances  en  la  batalla  de  Hastembeck,  su  coronel1  le 
rega!65  un  escudo.6~Mi  coronel,  dijo  el  soldado,  tal7  vez7 
V.8  S,8  cree  que  he  perdido9  un  par10  de  guantes.11 

2  ball ;  3  dejar,  to  leave  ;  4  arm  ;  5  regalar,  to  present ;  6  crown  ;  7  per- 
baps ;  8  vttestra  serlor/a==your  honor  ;  9  perder,  to  lose  ;  10  pair ;  11  glove. 

Mosiraba*  un  rico  sus  joyas3  a  un  fi^sofo,1  y  este  le  dijo  : 
Gracias,  senor,  por**^$as  brillantes1  joyas3  de  que  tan  ca- 
'rinosamente4  me  hace  Yd.  participe,1 —  <;  Como5  se  entiende 
Vd.  participe5  ? —  Si,  senor,  Vd.  permite1  que  yo  las  con- 
temple1  ;  y  i  hace  Vd.  con  ellas  otra  cosa  dif erente1  ? 

2  mostrar,  to  show  ;  3  jewel ;  4  kindly  ;  5=how  do  you  mean  share  ? 


Como  en  los  antiguos1  teatros1  londonenses2  no  represen- 
taban1  las  mujeres,  tenian  que  desempenar3  el  papel4  de  estas 
hombres  disfrazados.5  Impacientado1  una  yez  Carlos  II. 
esperando6  el  comienzo7  de  la  f  uncion,8  el  director  compare- 
cio9  ante  el  rey  y  le  dijo  : 

S.10  M.10dispense,upero  la  reina12no  se  ha  af  eitado13todavia.14 

2  London  ;  3  fulfil ;  4  part ;  5  disfrazar,  to  disguise  ;  6  esperar,  to  expect; 
7  commencement ;  8  performance  ;  9  comparecer,  to  appear;  10  Su  Majestad^. 
Your  Majesty  ;  11  dispensar,  to  excuse  ;  12  queen  ;  13  to  shave  ;  14  yet. 

Cay6se2  en  un  rio8  una  senorita  romantica1  y  poco4  le  f  alto 
para  ahogarse.4  Pasaba  por  casualidad5  un  nadador,6  y  lan- 
zandose7  al  rio5  la  saco8  desmayada,9  en  cuyo  estado10  fue 
llevada  a  su  casa.— Cuandp  volvio21  en  si,21  declaro1  a  sus 
padres12  que  queria  casarse|?  con  el  que  le  habia  salvado14  la 
vida.15—Es  imposibl^,  dice,  su  padre. —  ^  Es  que  esta  ya 
casado13  ? — No. — Pues  diga  Vd.  ,;  no  es  aquel  joven16  vecino17' 
nuestro  ? — Oh,  no  :  es  un  perro18  de  Terra-Nova.19 

2  fell ;  3  river  ;  4  little  was  wanting  to  her  to  drown  herself=was  nearly 
drowned  ;  5  chance  ;  6  swimmer  \r  1  lansar,  to  fling  ;  8  sacar,  to  draw 
dut ;  9  insensible  ;  10  state  ;  l'i=came  to  herself  again  ;  12  parents  ; 
13  casar,  to  marry  ;  14  salvar,  to  save  ;  15  life  j  16  young  (man)  ;  17 
neighbour  ;  18  dog  ;  19  Newfoundland, 


41 

Un  caballerito  que  iba  a  casarse*  despues  de  haber  confe- 
Bado,1  entro1  ea  nn  escrtipulo,1  y  se  volvio3  al  confesor. 

Padre,  le  dice,  no  s6  si  me  he  confesado  bien,  pues  veo  que 
no  me  habeis  impuesto4  ninguna  peniteftcia.1 

El  confesor,  que  era  entendido,5  le  respondi6  :  £  Pues  no 
me  ha  dicho  Vd.,  hijo,  que  iba  a  casarse2  ? 

2  casarse,  to  get  married  ;  3  volverse,  to  go  back  ;  4  imponer>  to  impose  ; 
6  knowing. 

En  la  representacion1  de  una  nueva  comedia1  casera2 
hubo3  tanta  demanda1  de4  billetes6  de  entrada,6  que  no  fueron 
suficienies1  los  que  habia3  segiin7  la  capacidad1  del  saldn,1  y 
-algunos  de  los  aficionados8  que  hacian  la  comedia,  introduje- 
ron1  por  vel  escenario,9  que  tenia  una  puerta  falsa,1  mnchas 
personas  antes  de  abrir10  la  entrada6  principal.  Al11  ver11  esto 
el  director  dijo  muy  enojado12:  Es  una  vergiienza13  dejar 
llenar14  el  salon  antes  de  entrar1  la  gente.15 

2  domestic  ;  3  there  was  or  were  ;  4=for  ;  5  ticket ;  6  entrance  ;  7  ac- 
cording to  ;  8  amateur  ;  9  scene  ;  10  open(ing)  ;  11  on  seeing  ;  12  an- 
noyed ;  13  shame  ;  14  (to)  fill ;  15  people. 

El  gracioso2  de  un  teatro1  de  Paris,1  se3  metio3  una  maiiana 
en  una  fonda,4  la  primera  que  hallo  a  mano,  y  pidiendo5  de 
almorzar,6  suplico7  al  fondista8  le  hiciese9  cbmpaiiia1  a  la 
meza.  Este,  para  mostrarle10  sin  duda11  su  aprecio,12  empezo,13 
sin  hablar  palabra,14  a  tirar15  debajo16  de16  la  mesa  las  cosas 
que  veia  sucias.17 

El  gracioso,2  que  vio  arrojar18  las  servilletas,19  los  cubiertos20 
y  los  cuchillos,21no  queriendo  contrariarle,22  le  imito  tirando15 
precipitadamente1  las  f  uentes,23  los  platos24  y  los  vasos,25 

El  fondista,8  sorprendido26  al  ver  esto,  le  pregunto  la  causa,1 
y  el  con  mucha  serenidad1  le  dijo  :  Hombre,27  pensaba28  que 
queria  Vd.  que  almorzasemos29  debajo16  de16  la  mesa. 

2  comic  actor  ;  3  put  bimself=went ;  4  inn  ;  5  asking  ;  6  breakfast ;  7 
suplicar,  to  entreat ;  8  innkeeper ;  9  that  he  should  make=keep  ;  10  mos- 
trar,  to  show  ;  11  doubt ;  12  esteem  ;  13  empezar,  to  begin  ;  14  word  ; 
15  ^'rar,  to  throw  ;  16  under;  17  dirty;  18  fling;  19  napkin;  20  cover  ; 
21  knife  ;  22  to  oppose  ;  23  dish  ;  24  plate  ;  25  glass ;  26  sorprender,  to 
surprise  ;  27=well ;  28  pensar,  to  think  ;  29  we  should  breakfast. 


42 

El  Barometro. 

.Un  medico  andaluz1  tenia  un  dia  algunos  amigos  a  comer2 
en  su  casa.  Uno  de  ellos  le  dijo  que-deseaba  ver  su  hermoso 
barometro1  que  decian  ~  le  habia  costado1  mil  francos,1  y 
mando  a°  nn  criado  que  f  uese3  a  buscarlo3 ;  pero  este,  al4 
traerlo,4  lo  dejo  caer5  y  se6  hizo  pedazos.6 

Todos  los  convidados7demostraron  al  doctor  su  sentimiento8 
por  tan  desagradable1  accidente.1: — No  os  aflijais,9  les  dijo  el 
medico  :  este  suceso10  es  de  buen  agtiero,11  pues  hace12  mucho 
tiempo  que  no  llueye,12y  como  nunca13  he  visto  el  barometro 
tan  bajo,14  es  de  presumir1  que  vamos  a  tener  agua.15 

2  dine  ;  3=he  should  go  and  fetch  it ;  4  on  bringing  it ;  5  fall ;  6  made 
itself  pieces=broke"  in  pieces  ;:  7  guest ;  8  regret ;  9  afligirse,  to  lament  j, 
10  event ;  11  omen  ;  12=it  has  not  rained  for  a  long  time  ;  J3  never  i 
14  low ;  15  water=rain. 

Un  principe,2  queriendo  divertirse1  a  costa1  de  uno  de  sus 
cortesanos3  a°  quien  habia  empleado4  en  diferentes1  embaja- 
das,&  le  dijo  que  se  parecias  a°  un  buho.7 

Yo,  senor,  no  se  a°  quien  me  parezco,6  respondi6  :  lo  que 
se  es  que  he  tenido  el  honor1  de  repregentar1  muohas  voces* 
a°  Vuestra  Majestad.1 

2  prince  •,  3  courtier ;  4  emplear,  to  employ  ;  5  embassy  ;  6  parecerse,) 
to  resemble  ;  •  7  owl. 

Un  hombre  naturalmente1  gracioso2  fue  citado3  para.de-j 
poner4ante  el  tribunaPcriminal1  sobre  una  disputa1  muy  seria1! 
que  habian  tenido  dos  comerciantes.5  Un  abogado,6que  teniaj 
la  reputacion1  de  procurar7  siempre  desconcertar1  a°  los  testi* 
gos,8  le  pregunto  a  que  distancia  estaba  del  sitio9  de  la  escena.* 

A  un  metro,1  cinco  centimetros1  y  BOJS  milimetros,1 .  le 
respondio. 

<;  Como  puede  Yd.  ser  tan  exacto  ?  repusp1^  el  abogado.^ 

Porque  suponia11  que  algiiu  curioso^  me  lo  preguntaria,  y 
he  medido13  el  terreno.14 

2  witty?T  3  citar,  to  summon  j  4  depose  ;  5  merchant ;  6  lawyer  ; 
7.try(ing)  ;'  -8  witness  \  9  place  ;  10  replied  ;  .  11  suponert  to  suppose^ 
i# inquisitive  (person) ;  1 3  medir}  to  measure j  II  ground. 


43 

El  Cirujano. 

Un  cirnjano2  muy  gracioso3  f  ue  llamado  para  curar1  a°  un 
caballero  caprichoso1  que  se  habia  hecho  una  pequena  llaga4 
en  una  pierna.8 

El  criado  habia  ido  volando6  a  buscarle  y  el  pobre  llego  casi7 
sin  aliento8suponiendo9que  eracosa  de  la  mayor  importancia. 

Reconocio10  al  her  ido,11  y  no0  hallando  sino12  un  rasgimo13 
que  se  podia  curar1  con  tafetan,14  por  burlarse15  de  el  mando 
a°  un  criado  que  f  uese16  sin  parar17  a  su  casa  por  un  balsamo1 
que  indico,1  y  que  volviese18  al  momento. 

Pues19  que,19  dice  el  herido,11  palido1  y  tremblando1  de 
aprension,1  <;  tanto20  es  el  peligro21  ? 

No,  seiior,  dice  el  cirujano2 ;  sino12  que  si  tarda,22  temo28  que 
no  llegue  a  tiempo,  p*orque  la  llaga4  se  va  a  curar!por  si24  sola.25 

2  surgeon  ;  3  witty  ;  4  wound  ;  5  leg  ;  6  volar4  to  fly  ;  7  almost ;  8  breath  ; 
9  suponer,  to  suppose  ;  10  reconocer,  to  examine  ;  11  wounded  (man)  ;  12 
only  ;  13  scratch  ;  14  sticking-plaster  ;  15  make  game  ;  16  he  (should)  go  ; 
17  stop(ping)  ;  18  he  (should)  come  back  ;  19=why  then  ;  20  so  much  ; 
21  danger ;  22  tardar,  to  delay  ;  23  temer,  to  fear  ;  24  itself  ;  25  alone. 


La  hija  de  un  alcalde2  estaba  cuidando3  ttn  canario1  que 
tenia,  y  habiendo  dejado  abierta4  la  ventanilla5  de  la  jaula,6 
se°  escapo1  el  pajarillo.7 

La  primera  precaucion1  que  tomo  su  padre,  luego8  que8  lo 
supo,9  fue  mandar  cerrar10  las  puertas  de  la  ciudad. 

2  mayor ;  3  cuidart  to  take  care  of  ;  4  open  ;  5  little  window  ;  6  cage  ; 
7  little  bird  ;  8  as  soon  as  ;  9  he  knew  ;  10  to  (be)  shut. 


Un  pobre  artesano1  que  estaba  enfermo2  y  sin  un  cuarto>3 
dijo  a  un  amigo  que  pensaba  consultar1  su  mal4  con  el  medico 
N — ,  pero  que  recelaba5  hacerlo  por  no  poder  pagarle,  y  el 
amigo  le  contesto  :  Creo  que  haras6  muy  mal  en  llamarle  si 
no  tienes  dinero,  porque  cuando  ^1  esta  enfermo,2  y  se 
consulta  d°  si°  mismo0  sobre  lo  que  debe7  tomar,  se°  saca8  un 
duro9  de  un  bolsillo10  y  se°  lo  mete11  en  otro. 

2  ill ;  3  a  small  Spanish  coin  ;  4  complaint ;  5  recelar,  to  mistrust ;  6  thou 
Wilt  do  ;  7  he  must ;  8  sacar,  to  draw  ;  9  dollar ;  10  pocket ;  1 1  mefcr,  to  put. 


44 

El  Hombre  sin  Sesos. 

Dos  suizos2estaban  rifiendo3con  el  mayor  encarnizamiento4 
en  inedio5  de  una  plaza6  publica,1  y  an  aldeano,7  que  casual- 
men  tel  pasaba  por8  alii,8  quiso9  separarlos1  por  compasion1  ; 
pero  ellos,  que  estaban  ciegos10  de  furor,  le  echaron11  a  tierra 
de  un  sablazo,12y  le  hicieron13.una  heridauen  la  cabeza,15por 
lo  que  fue  preciso16  le  reeonocieW8  un  clr,ujano.17 

Procediendo1  este19  con  tientp20  para  saber  si  tenia  las- 
timados21  los  sesos22 :  No  se  canse23  Vd.  en'  buscarlos,  le 
dijo  el  aldeano,7  pues  cuando  me  meti24  en  la  contienda,25 
ya  no  los  tenia. 

2  Swiss  ;  3  renir,  .to  quarrel ;  4  fury  ;  5  middle  ;  6  place  ;  7  villager  ; 
8=rthat  way  ;  9  wanted  ;  10  blind  ;  1 1  echar,  to  throw  ;  12  cut  from  a  sabre  : 
13  made=gave  ;  14  wound  ;  15  head  ;  16  necessary  ;  17  surgeon  ;  18  should 
examine  ;  19=the  latter  ;  20=care  ;  21  lastimar,  to  hurt  ;  22  brains  ;  23 
cansar,  to  tire  ;  24  meterse^  to  put  one's  self=to  interfere  ;  25  quarrel. 


£  Que  hace  Vd.  ?  dijo  a  un  gotoso,3  que  estaba  coimendo* 
jamon,4  un  amigo  suyo  :  £  no  ve  Vd.  que  el  jamon4  es  malo 
para  la  gota5  ? 

Asi6  es,  respondio  el  doliente7;  pero  es  bueno  para  el  gotoso.* 

2  gouty  (person)  ;  3  comer,  to  eat ;  4  ham  ;  5  gout ;  6  so  ;  7  invalid. 


Habiendo  dicho  nn2  sugeto2  a  una  senora  que  un  boti- 
cario3  amigo  suyo  habia  quebrado4  y.se  habia  visto  obligado1 
a  cerrar5  la  botica,6  le  pregun.t6  la  causa.1  Respondiola  que 
era  un  hombre  honrado,7  que  en8  vez8  de  cargar9  de  remedios1 
a°  sus  enfermos,10  les  aconsejaba11  respirar1  aire1  puro,1  por 
cuyo  consejo12  perdia13  todo  el  -beneficio1  que  debia16  <iejarle 
la  venta14  de  sus  drogas.15 

j  Pobre  hombre  !  replico  la  sefiora,  es  lastima17  que  no 
pueda18  vivir  de  aire1  como  sus  enfermos.10 

2  a  person=some  one  ;  3  apothecary  ;  4  quebrar,  to  become  bankrupt ; 
6  shut ;  6  apothecary's  shop  ;  7  honorable  ;  8  instead*;  9  load(ing)  ;  10 
patient ;  11  aconsejar,  to  advise  ;  12  advice  ;  13  perder>  to  lose ;  H  sale;. 
15  drug  ;  16  ought ;  17  pity  ;  13  can. 


45 

El  Poeta  y  el  Pastelero. 

Un  poeta1  hizo  en  unos  versos1  el  elogio2  de  un  pastelero,3 
y  este  creyo  debia4  demostrarle5  su  reconocimiento6  regalan- 
dole7  un  pastel,8  lo  que  ejecuto1  inmediatamente1 ;  pero  ha- 
biendo  advertido9  el  poeta1  que  el  papel  que  cubria10  el 
fondo11  del  pastel8  era  parte1  de  su  produccion,1  reconvino12 
amargamente13  a°  su  protegido14  por  tal  desprecio,15  y  este 
le  respondio  : 

<j  Pero  que  motivo1  tiene  Vd.  para  quejarse16  ?  Ahora  es 
cuando  estamos  juego17  a  juego,17  pues  Vd.  ha  hecho  versos1 
sobre  mi  pasta,18  y  yo  he  hecho  pastas  sobre  sus  versos.1 

2  eulogy  ;  3  pastry-cook  ;  4  he  ought ;  5  demostrar,  to  demonstrate  J 
6  gratitude  ;  7  regalar,  to  present ;  8  pie  ;  9  advertir,  to  notice  ;  10 
cubrir,  to  cover  ;  11  bottom  ;  12  reconvenir,  to  reproach  ;  13  bitterly  ; 
14  protected=pro%e  ;  15  contempt ;  16  complain(ing)  ;  17  game  to 
game=quite  ;  IB  pastry. 


Mas  vale2  un  "  toma,"  que  dos  "  te  dare.'1 

1  Me  haria  Vd.  el  favor1  de  prestarme  diez  pesetas1  ? 
Pero,  senor,  no  tengo  el  honor1  de  conocerle.3 
Precisamente1  acudo4  a  Vd.  por  esta  misma5  razon5 ;  pues 

los  que  me  conocen3  nunca6  quier^n  prestarme  un  centime.1 

2  is  worth  ;    3  conocer,  to  know  ;  4  acudir^  to  appeal ;    5=?ery  reason  ; 

6  never. 

El  jardinero  del  Jardin  Botanico1  confio2  a  un  criado  algo3 
tonto4  dos  hermosos  higos5  para  Buffon.  Por  el  camino6  el 
mensajero,7  vencido8  de  la  tentacion,1  se°  trago9  uno  y  al 
presentar10  el  otro  al  Naturalista,1  este,  que  esperaba11  recibir 
dos,  dijo  al  criado  :  ^  Que  has  hecho  con  el  otro  higo5  ? 

He  hecho  asi,12  le  respondio,  y  tragose9  el  otro  con  la 
mayor  tranquilidad1  del  mundo.13 

2  cow/far,  to  entrust ;    3  somewhat ;    4  foolish,  simple  ;     5  fig  ;    6  way  ; 

7  messenger  ;  8  v e?«cer,  to  conquer  ;  9  tragar>  to  swallow  ;  10  presenting) : 
11  esperart  to  expect ;    12  thus ;    13  world. 


46 

El  Eclipse  suspendido. 

El  eclipse1  de  sol2  que  fue  pronosticado1  para  el  aiio  de  .1724* 
asusto3  tan  to  a°  los  aldeanos4  de  algunos  paises,&  que  el  cura6 
de  un  pueblo,  no  pudiendo  confesar1  a°  tantos  parroquianos7 
como  acudian,8  creyendo  llegado  el  dia  del  juicio,9  les  dijo  en 
el  piilpito1 :  Hijos  mios,  no10  hay  que  daros  prisa,10  pues  el 
eclipse1  ha  sido  trasladado11  por  orden1  del  senor  alcalde12 
para  el13  mes  que  viene.13 

2  sun  ;  3  terrified  ;  4  villager  ;  5  country  ;  6  clergyman  ;  7  parishioner ; 
8=rwent  (to  him)  ;  9  judgment ;  10  there  is  no  occasion  to  give  yourselves 
hurry ==hurry  yourselves  ;  11  postponed  ;  12  mayor  ;  13  next  month. 


Un  caballero  que  comia  en  un  hotel  pldi62  a°  uno  a  su  lado* 
si  le  haria  el  favor1  de  pasarle  la  mostaza.4 

1  Cree5  Yd.  que  soy  un  criado  ?  le  respondio. 

Ah,  no,  senor,  le  dijo  el  otro,  creia5  que  era  Vd.  un  caballero. 
2  pedir,  to  ask  ;  3  side  ;   4  mustard  ;   5  creer,  to  believe, 

Estaba  una  compania1  de  quintos2  haciendo  el  ejercicio3 
cuando  uno  de  ellos,  en4  vez4  de  Ievantar5lapierna7  derecha,6 
levanto5  la  izquierda.8 

El  oficial,  que  estaba  al  extremo1  de  la  fila,1  habiendo  ob- 
.servadp1  dos  piernas?  muy  proximas9  grito10  :  <;  Quien  es  ese 
bruto1  que  levanta5  las  dos  piernas7  a  la  vez  ?  _____ 

2  conscript  ;  3  exercise=drilL  ;  4  in  place  ;  5  levantar,  to  raise  ;  6  right  ; 
7  leg  ;  $  leit  ;  9  close  together  ;  10  shouted  out. 

Un  sujeto2  muy  inocenton1  aseguraba3  que  no  tenia  con- 
fianza1  alguna;  en  la/vacuna,4  y  f  undaba5  su  aserto6  en  la 
experiencia1  :  Habia7  en  una  f  amilia,1  decia,  un  nino  sano8  y 
robusto1  que  dos  meses  despuea  de  estar  vacunado  cayose9 
de  unarbol10  y  se  estrello11  contra12  las  piedras.13  —  <;  Y  aiin 
se  quiere  prueba14  mas^convincente1  de°  que  la  vacuna4  no 
sirve1^  para  nada1^?. 


2  person  ;  3  tisegurar,  to  assert  ;  4=vaccination  ;  5/wwc?ar,to  base  ; 
eertion  ;  7  there  was  ;  8  healthy  ;  9  fell  ;  10;  tree  ;  11  was  dashed  to  pieces  ; 
12  against  ;  13  stone  ;  14  proof  •';'.;!  5  serves  for  (==^s  worth)  nothing. 


451 

El  Pordiosero3  holgazan.2 

Tin  muchacho  de  once  a  doce  aiios4  se  llego5  un  dia  a  una 
senora  que  iba  a6  pie6  con  una  doncella,7  y  la  pidio  un  duro8 
de  limosna.9 

1  Como  !  <?  un  duro8  ?  responde  admirada10  :  <;  Que  modo1 
e8  ese  de  pedir  la  caridad11  ? 

Senora,  responde1  el  muchacho,  pues  que  Vd.  me  lo  niega,12 
ya  no  importunare1  a°  ninguna  otra  persona :  esta  corta13 
cantidad14  me  hubiera15  hecho  desistir1  del  partido16  que  iba 
a  tomar. — Y  al17  decir17  esto  dio  un  profundo1  suspiro18  y 
se  marcho19  llorando.20 

\  Como  !  dice  la '  senora  a  su  doncella7 :  <;  tendra  este 
desgraciado21  algiin  designio1  que  le  induzca22  a  ejecutar1  un 
disparate23  ?  No  quiero  que  por  un  duro  se25  pierda25  ese 
infeliz.24  Toma,  dice  llamandole,  ahi26  tienes  tu  duro  :  pero 
dime,27  <:  por  que  te  afligistes28  tanto  -cuando  te  lo  ne£ue12  ? 

Senora,  es  porque  me  veia  en  la  precision29  de  trabajar. 

2  idle  ;  3  beggar  ;  4  year  ;   5  llegarse,  to  approach  ;   6  on  foot ;  7  maid  ; 
8  dollar  ;  9  alms  ;  10  astonished  ;  11  charity  ;  12  negar,  to  deny  ;  13  short 
=small  ;  14  quantity  ;  15  would  have  ;  16  course  ;  17  on  saying  ;  18  sigh  ; 
19  marcharse,  to  walk  away  ;    20  llorar,  to  weep  ;    21  unfortunate  (one)  ; 
22  (may)  induce ;    23  silly  action  ;   24  unhappy  ;    25  (should)  be  lost ;  26 
here  ;  27  tell  me ;   28  qfligirse,  to  lament ;  29  necessity. 


Un,  hombre  muy  gloton2  decia  :  mi  padre  comia  mucho, 
mi  madre  muy  aprisa,3  y  yo  he  heredado4  ambas5  cualidades.1 

2  gluttonous ;    3  quickly  ;    4  heredar,  to  inherit ;    5  both. 


Un  ladron2  que  marchaba3  al  patibulo,4  suplico5  que 
detuyiesen6  la  comitiva7  delante8  de8  una  taberna,1  y  pidio 
un  vaso9  de  aguardiente.10  Se  lo  dieron,  -y  despues  de 
haberlo  bebido11 :  No  tengo  suelto12  en  este  momento,  le  dijo 
al  tabernero,13  pero  te  lo  pagare  a  la  vuelta.14 

2  thief  ;  ^3  marchar,  to  go  ;  4  gallows  ;  5  suplicar,  to  request ;  6  they 
(should)  stop  ;  7  retinue==procession  ;  8  before  ;  9  glass  ;  10  brandy ; 
11  beber,  to  drink  ;  12  change  ;  13  tavern-keeper ;  14  return* 


48 

La  Interpretacidn. 

Un  hombre  f  ue  conducido1  ante2  el  niagistrado1  por  la  sos- 
pecha3de  haber  robado4un  hermoso5carnero^a7un  pastor8liama- 
do  Bonifacio  Conde  Sanz  Diaz,  y  le  pregunto  si  sabia9  leer.10 

Un  poco,  senor,  respondio.1 

Pues°  entonces  no  podia9  Yd.  ignorar11  de  (Juien  era  el 
carnero6  que  confiesa1  haber  hallado,  y  que  sin12  embargo13 
dice  ser  suyo,  pues  ya  ve  que  tiene  la  inarca1  de  estas  cuatro 
iniciales,1  B.C.S.D. 

Es  verdad13  que  las  tiene,  pero  yo  crei  que  decian  :  "  Buen 
Carnero  Sin  Dueno.14  " 

2  before  ;  3  suspicion  ;  4  robar,  to  steal ;  5  fine  ;  6  sheep  ;  7=from  ; 
8  shepherd  ;  9  (he)  could  ;  10  read  ;  11  be  ignorant ;  12  neverthelecs  ; 
13  truth=true  ;  14  owner. 


Viajaban2  en  un  coche1  varios1  amigos,  uno  de  los  cuales 
empezo3  a  dormir.  Al4  poco  rato4  le  desperto5  uno  de  sus 
companeros  diciendole  :  Hemos  corrido6  ya  una  gran  dis- 
tancia1  desde7  que  se8  durmio  Vd.8 

<j  Mucha  ?  .  pregunto  el  que  dormia. 

Si,  muchisima,  le  dijo  el  otro,  es  tamos  a°  mas  de9  diez 
leguas1  lejos10  de  aqui. 


2  viajar,  to  travel  ;    3  empezar,  to  begin  ;    4  after  a  short  time  ; 
pertar,  to  wake  ;    6  correr,  to  run  ;  7  since  :  8  you  fell  asleep  ;  9=sthan  ; 
10  far=distance. 

Viajando  un  caballero^  llego  a^un  sitio2  donde  era  preciso3 
pasar1  nn  rio  en  una  barca.4  Entro1  en  ella,  y  viendo  que  el 
agua5  ^staba  agitada1  :  Digame  Yd.,  amigo,  dijo  al  ba?*quero,6 
^  le  ha  sucedido7  a  Yd.  alguna  vez  el  perder8  a°  los  pasajeros1 
estando  las  aguas5  enfurecidas9  ? 

Nunca,10  sefior,  le  respondio,1  porque  los  que  se  han 
ahogado11  siempre  se12  han  vuelto  a  hallar12  al  dia  siguiente.13 

2  place  ;  3  necessary  ;  4  boat  ;  5  water  ;  6  boatman  ;  7  suceder,  to 
happen  ;  -8  losing  ;  9  furious=rough  ;  10  never  ;  11  ahogarse,  to  bo 
drowned  ;  12=have  been  found  again  ;  J3  follpwing. 


49 

La  Calabaza  y  la  Bellota. 

Tin  campesino,2  al'regresar3  a  su  casa  un  dia  de  verano*  ee 
iendi66para  reposar1  un  ratito,6  a  la  sombra7  de  una  corpulenta1 
encina,8  a  la  contemplaci6n  de  la  cual  nuestro  campesino2  se 
puso9  a  menear10  la  cabeza11  y  A  decirse12  a  si  mismo12 :  ; 

Si  hubiera13  yo  sido  el  Criador,14  hubiera15  dispuesto16  las 
cosas  de  otra  manera1 ;  hubiera15  hecho  que  las  calabazas17 
creciesen18  de  este  arbol,*9  y  a°  las  bellotas20  las  hubiera16  hecho 
el  f ruto1  de  tallos21  delicados.1 — Y  en  esto  empezo23  &  dormir. 

Apenas  habia  cerrado23  los  ojos,24  cuando  habiendose  des- 
prendido25  una  bellota20  y  dandole26en  la  nariz,27  le  desperto.28 

j  Iinbecil29  de  mi29 !  exclamo1  entonces  ;  suerte^he  tenido 
que  la  fruta1  de  este  arbol19  es  la  bellota20 ;  pues  si  hubiese13 
sido  una  calabaza,17  me  hubiera15  dejado  aqui  tendido5  con  la 
cabeza11  aplastada.31 

2  countryman  ;  3  return  ;  4  summer  ;  5  tender,  to  stretch  out ;  6  short 
time  j  7  shade  ;  8  oak  ;  9  ponerse=to  begin  ,  10  shake  ;  11  head  ;  12  say  to 
himself ;  13  had ;  14  Creator  ;  15  1  should  have  ;  16  disposed  ;  17  pumpkin  ; 
18  (should)- grow  ;  19  tree ,  20  acorn  ;  21.  stalk  ;  22  empezar,  to  begin  ; 
23  cerirar,  to  shut ;  24  eye  ;  25  desprender,  to  loosen  ;  26=strikjng  him  ;  27 
nose  ;  28^-despertar,  to  wake  ;.29=fool  that  I  am ;  30  luck ;  31  crushed. 

1  Por  que  en  invierno2  sale3  tarde4  el  sol5  ? 
Porque  como  hace6  frio,7  no8  le  gusta  madrugar.8 

2  winter  ;  '3  goes  out=rises  ;    4  late  ,  5  sun ;  6  it  makes=it  is ;  7  cold ; 
•8  early  rising  pleases  him  not=he  does  not  like  getting  up  early. 

Estaba  un  estudfante1  acompanando1  4°  algunas  senoras 
por  el  museo1  de  Oxford  y  parandose2  delante3de3  una  espada4 
muy  enmohecida5  les  dijo  :  Ahi6  tienen  Yds.  la  espada4  con 
que  Balaam  amenazo7  de  muerte8  a  su  burra.* 

Jamas  he  oido,  observo  una  de  la  concurrencia,10  que 
Balaam  tuviese11  una  espada,4  sino  que  ese  prof  eta1  deseaba 
una,  como  cuenta12  su  historia.1 

Tiene13  Vd.  razon,13  replico  el  estudiante,  y  esta  es  precisa- 
mente1  la  que  el  prof  eta1  deseaba. 

2  stopping  ;  3  before  ;  4  sword  ;  5  rusty  ;  6  here  ;  7  amenazar,  to 
threaten;  8  death;  9  ass  ;  10  company  ;  11  had  j  12  contar,  to  relate; 
13  you^have  reason=you  are  right. 

«— 8*8 


50 

Los  Cometas. 

Los  cometas1  son  unos  astros*  que  por  su  irregular1  y  8or» 
prendente^paricion1  ban  despertado4  el  temor5  de  los  pueblos,6 
siendo  mirados7  como  signos1  de  la  c6lera8  celeste1  y  prof  etas1 
de  calamidades1  y  desastres.1  Pero  la  eiencia9  ha  conseguido10 
demostrar1  que  son,  valiendonos11  de  una  celebre  expresion,1 
"astros2  inocentes,1"  que  se  mueven12  como  los  planetas1  al- 
rededor13  del  sol14  en  unas  orbitas1  elipticas,1  es  decir,  de 
forma1  ovalada,1  muy  largas16  y  muy  estrechas*16 

Se  presentan1  acompanados1  de  una  raf  aga17  tuminosa1  que 
los  rodea18  completamente1  6  se  extiende1  bacia19  un  sdlo 
lado.20  .Esta  raf  aga17  recibe  el  nombre  de  cola,21  barba22*  6 
cabellera.23  Los  cometas,  al24  recorrer24  su  orbita,1  se25  en- 
cuentran25  unas  veces  muy  lejanos26  y  otras  muy  proximos27 
al  sol.14  Cuando  estan  muy  lejos,26  se  congelan1  por  falta28 
de  calor,29  y  cuando  se  aproximan30  al  sol,  el  calor29  gasifica31 
parte1  de  los  liquidos1  que  pueden  contener1  en  su  superficie,82 
y  extiende1  su  atmosf  era1  en  el  espacio.1  El  sol  ilumina1  esta 
tenue33  mater ia1  asi  extendida,1  y  forma  esa  rdfaga17  luminosa,1 
causa1  de  tanto  temor.5 

El  numerolvde  cometas  es  inmenso.1  Keplero  decia  :  Mis 
cometas  bay  en  el  cielo34  que  peces38  en  el  mar.36 

Sin87  embargo,37  son  pocos38  los  que  se39  conocen,39  de40  tal 
modo40que  pueda41anunciarse41con  exactitud1  su  reaparici6n. 

Mucbos  se  alejan42  a  distantoias1  inconcebibles1  de  nuestro 
Bistema1  planetario,1  y  es  probable  que  atraidos43  por  astros2 
perteneciehtes44  a  otro  sistema,1  dejen45  de  pertenecer44  al 
nuestro,  convirtiendose1  en  planetas  de  otro  sol.14 

2  star  ;  3  surprising  ;  4  awaked  ;  5  fear  ;  6  people=nations  ;  7  mirar,  to 
look  on  ;  8  anger  ;  9  science  ;  10  succeeded  ;  11  availing  ourselves  ;  12  mover, 
to"  move ;  13  round  ;  14  sun  ;  15  long ;  16  narrow  ;  17  cloud  ;  18  rodear,  to 
encircle  ;  19  towards  ;  20  side ;  21  tail ;  22  beard  ;  23  hair  ;  24=in  traversing ; 
26=are  ;  26  distant ;  27  near  ;  28  want ;  29  heat ;  30  they  approacB" ;  31  turns 
to  gas  ;  32  surface ;  33  thin  ;  34  sky  ;  36  fish  ;  36  sea  ;  37  nevertheless  ; 
38  few  ;  39  are  known  ;  40  in  such  a  way  ;  41  may  be  foretold  ;  42  alejar, 
to  move  away ;  43  attracted ;  44  pertenecer,  to  belong  j  46  dejar}  to  cease. 


51 

Los  cometas  son  los  linicos46  cuerpos47  celestes1  que  la 
mayoria48  de  los  astronomos1  no  creen  que  esten  habitados,1 
porque  no  se49  concibe49  que  existan1  habitantes1  en  astros2 
que  pasan1  por  tan  bruscas1  transiciones1  de  calor29  y  f  rio,50 
y  que  estan  sujetos1  a  una  variacion1  completa  de  todos  sue 
elementos.1 

46  only  ;   47  body  ;  48  majority  ;  49  it  is  imagined  ;  50  cold. 


El  Marinero  y  su  Amigo. 

Un  marinero  iba  a  einbarcarse1  en  un  navio2proximo3a  darse 
a  la  vela3  para  las  Indias,1  y  un  amigo  suyo  que  trataba4  de  di- 
suadirle1  de  un  viaje  tan  largo5  y  tan  peligroso,6  le  pregunto  : 

Dime,7  <j  donde  murio  tu  padre  ? 

En  un  nauf ragio,8  respondio  el  marinero. 

i  Y  tu  abuelo9  ? 

Un  dia  yendo  a  la  pesca10  se  levanto11  una  tempestad1  tan 
furiosa,1  que  la  barca1  se12  fue  a  pique,12  y  el  se  ahogo.13 

1  Y  tu  bisabuelo14  ?— En  un  viaje  que  hizo  a  America,  el 
navio*  choco15  contra  unas  penas,16  y  se  hundio.17 

Y  i  como  eres  tan  temerario18  que  te  atreves19  a  embarcarte,1 
eabiendo  que  tu  padre,  tu  abuelo9  y  tu  bisabuelo14  han 
muerto  en  el  mar20  ? 

Es  posible,  respondi6  el  marinero ;  pero  dime,7  $  donde 
murio  tu  padre  ?v 

Muy  tranquilamente1  en  su  cama.21 

;  Y  tu  abuelo9  ?  d  y  tu  bisabuelo14  ? 

De  la  misma  manera1 ;  muy  dulcemente22  en  sus  lechos.23 

(?  Y  como  pues,  repuso  el  marinero,  eres  tan  temerario,18  que 
te  atreves19  a  meterte24  en  la  cama21  todos  los  dias,  sabiendo  que 
tu  padre,  tu  abuelo  y  tu  bisabuelo  han  muerto  todos  en  ella  ? 

2  ship  ;      3  near  to  give  itself  to  the  sail=about  to  set  sail ;    4  tratar,  to 
try  ;  5  long ;  6  perilous  ;  7  tell  me  ;  8  shipWreck  ;  9  grandfather  ;  10  fishing  ; 
11  levantar,  to  raise  ;     12  irse  d  pique,  to  founder  ;     13  ahogar,  to  drown  ; 
14  great  grandfather  ;     15  chocar,  to  strike  ;   16  rock  ;   17  hundir,  to  sink  ; 
18  rash  ;  19  atreverse,  to  dare  j  20  sea ;    21  bed  j    22  quietly ;   23  couch  ; 
24  put  thy  self =go. 


52 

Fontenelle  y  los  Esp&rragos. 

Fontenelle  gustaba2  mucho  de  los  esparragog,1  sobre  todo 
arreglados3  con  aceite;4 

El  abate5  Terrasson,  a6  quien  tamFie'n  le  gugtaban,6  -pero 
con  nianteca,7  vino  un  dia  a  pedirle8  de  comer,8  y  le  suplico1 
que  le  hicie'ra9  un  gran  favor  dandole  la  mitad10  de  los 
esparragos  que  tenia  en  su  plato,1  y  mando  que  se11  pusiese11 
esta  mitad10  con  manteca.7 

Poco  antes  de  sentarse12  a  la  mesa13  el  abate5  empezo14  a 
ponerse15  mal,  y  al16  fin16  le  dio  una  fuerte17  apoplejia.1 

Fontenelle,  que  tal18  vio>  se  levanta19  de20  subito20  y  corre21 
precipitadamente1  a  la  cocina22  gritando23 :  \  Todos  con  aceite,4 
todos  con  aceite ! 

2=was  fond  ;  3=prepared  ;  4  oil ;  5  a bb6  j  6=who  also  liked  them  *, 
7  Gutter  ; .7$  ask  him  to  dine ;  9  would  do ;  10  half  ;  ll=should  be  put ; 

12  sentarse,  to  sit  down  ;  13  table  ;  14  began  ;   15=become  ;  16  at  length  ; 
17  strong  ;  18  as  much  ;   19  levantarse,  to  get  up  ;  20  suddenly  ;  21  runs  ; 

22  kitchen  ;  23  calling  out. 

El  amigo  que  no  presta,2  y  el  cuchlllo3  que  no  corta,4 
Cuando  se5  pierden5  poco  importa.6 

2  prestar,  to  lend  ;  3  knife  ;  4  cor/ar,  to  cut ;  5  they  are  lost ;  6  it  matters. 

Una  caravana1  de  cuatrocientos  gallegos2  pasaba  de  Madrid 
a  Galicia  para  la  celebracion  de  las  fiestas3  de  Santiago,4  y  a5 
pesar5  de  ser  tantosse6  dejaron  robar6  por  media7  docena8  de 
gitanos.9  Al10  Ilegar10  a  la  villa11  inmediata1  se12  dirigieron12 
los  gallegos2  a  ver  al  alcalde,18  que  se  extran614  de  lo  ocurrido.15 

<;  C6mo  puede  explicarse  que  cuatrocientos  hombres  per- 
jnitan1  a  seis  pilletes16  que  les  roben1  hasta17  el  ultimo 
centimo1  ?  Vergiienza20  me  daria  el  ser18  tan  cobarde.19 

A  Id  cual  respondi6  uno  de  ellos,  el  mas  cuerdo,21  por22 
supuesto22 :  i  Pero  no  ve  Y.23  S.23  que  ibamos  solos24  ? 

2  Galician  ;  3  festival ;  4  St.  James  ;  6  in  spite  ;  6  let  themselves  be 
robbed  ;  7  half  ;  8  dozen  ;  9  gipsy  ;  10  on  arriving  ;  11  town  ;  12=weiit ; 

13  mayor  ;  14  extranarse,  to  be  astonished  ;  15  occurrence  ;  16  scoundrel ; 
17  up  to  ;  18  "be(ing)  ;  19  cowardly  ;  20  shame ;  21  discreet ;  22s=doubtless ; 

23  your  worship  (senoria)  ;  24  alone. 


53 

La  falsa  Alerta^ 

Durante  el  sitio3  de  Gibraltar,1  en  el  momento  en  que  los 
ingleses  esperaban4  de  un  instante1  a  otro  un  ataque1  general, 
un  centinela1  que  habian  colocado5  de  noche  a  la  entrada6  de 
frente7  de  la  torre8  del  Diablo,9  estaba  al  extreme10  de  la 
inuralla,11  silbando12  y  fijando13sus  miradas14  sobre  las  lineas1 
espanolas,  no  sonando15  mas  que  fuego,16  bombas,1  minas,1 
brecha1  y  fuego  de  fila.17  Al  lado18  de  su  garita19  tenia  un 
puchero20  donde  habia  ocultado21  su  comida,22  que  consistia 
en  un  potaje1  de  habichuelas.23 

Una  mona24  muy  grande,  (sabido  es  que  la  cima25  de  esta 
roca1  esta  siempre  cubierta26  de  estos  animales)  alentada27  por 
el  silencio1  del  centinela,1  y  llevada28  del  olfato,29  se  acerco30 
al  puchero20  y  inetio31  su  cabeza  para  regalarse1  con  lo  que 
contenia1 ;  pero  despues  que  satisfizo1  su  necesidad,*  cuando 
quiso  escaparse,1  no  pudo  sacar32  la  cabeza,  y  se33  llevo83  el 
puchero20  por  gorro,34  marchando  con  las  patas36  traseras.33 

Esta  terrible1  aparicion1  apenas37  se  presento  a  los  ojos  del 
centinela,  tropezando38  con  cuanto39  encontraba,40  convirtio1 
al  pobre  mono24  en  un  granadero1  espanol1  ensangrentado,41 
y  herido42  mortalmente.1  Ya  exaltada1  su  imaginacion1  con 
esta  idea,  y  lleno  de  miedo,43  disparo44  su  fusil45  gritando46  con 
todas.sus  fuerzas47  que  el  enemigo1  habia  escalado48  la  muralla. 

La  gran  guardia1  tom6  al  momento  las  armas1  con  este 
aviso,49  el  tambor50  resono51  por52  todas  partes,52  y  en  diez 
minutos  estuvo  toda  la  guarnicion53  f ormada  para  la  batalla.1 

0  not  to  be  translated ;  1  the  same,  or  nearly  the  same,  as  in  English. 

2  alarm  ;  3  siege  ;'  4  esperar,  to  expect ;  5  placed  ;  6  entrance  ;  7  front ; 
8  tower  ;  9  devil ;  10  end  ;  11  rampart ;  12  silbar,  to  whistle  ;  ISfijar,  to 
fix ;  14  glance  ;  15  sonar,  to  dream  ;  16  fire  ;  17  file  ;  18  side  ;  19  sentry- 
box  ;  20  pot  ;  21  hidden  ;  22  meal  ;  23  bean  ;  24  monkey  ;  25  summit ; 
26.  covered  ;  27  encouraged  ;  28  attracted  ;  29  smell ;  30  acercarse,  to  ap- 
proach ;  31  meter,  to  put ;  32  draw  out ;  33  carried  away  ;  34  night-cap  ;  35 
hind  ;  36  paws,  legs  ;  37  hardly  ;  38*"stumbling  ;  39=whatever  ;  40  it  met ; 
41  bloodstained  ;  42-wounded  ;  43  fear  ;  44  disparar,  to  discharge  ;  45  gun  ; 
46  calling  out ;  47  force(s)  ;  48  scaled  ;  49  information  ;  50  drum  ;  51  resonart 
to  resound  ;  52=everywhere  ;  53  garrison. 


64 

El  supuesto54  granadero,1  a  quien  incomodaba1  nmcho  el 
sombrero,  y  que  estaba  casi  ciego55  con  el  peso56  del  piichero, 
no  estuvo  niucho  tiempo  sin  ser  descubierto,  y  su  prision57 
restablecip1  la  tranquilidad1  en  el  campo1  que  se  habia  creido 
sorprendido.58 

54  supposed  ;  55  blind  ;  56  weight ;   57  capture  ;  58  surprised. 


Destapa2  un  anio  de  casa  un  cantaro3  de  vino  delicado,* 
cuya4  vasija4  conservaba5  cuidadosamente  lacrada6  y  sellada7 
hacia8  tiempo.8  Como  encontr69  que  faltaba11  la  mitad10  del 
vino,  empezo  a  investigar1  las  causas1  de  aquel  fenomeno,1 
hallando  en  la  parte  inferior12  del  cantaro3  un  pequeno 
agujero13  tapado14  con  cera.1^ 

En  vista16  de  esto  llama  a  la  criada,  y  le  dice  :  i  Quien  te 
ha  mandado17  beber  el  vino  que  aqui  falta11  ? 

£  Por  donde  quiere18  Vd.  que  lo  haya19  sacado19  ? 

Por  este  agujero13  que  has  hecho. 

1  Yo  !  &  Pero,  seiior,  aunque20  hubiera21  hecho  el  agujero,15 
no  ve  Yd.  que  por  donde  falta11  el  vino  es  por22  encima22  y  el 
agujero13  esta  por23  debajo23  ? 

2  destdpar,  to  uncx>ver=open  ;  3  pitcher  ;    4  which  vessel ;  5  conservar, 
to  preserve  ;  6  waxed  ;  7  Sealed ;  8=for  a  long  time  ;  9  he  found  ;  10  half  ; 
11  f altar,  to  be  wanting  or  missing  ;    12=lower ;      13  hole  ;    14  tapar,  to 
stop  up  ;  15  wax  ;  16  view  ;  17  ordered ;  18=suppose  ;  19  have  drawn  out ; 
20  although,  even  if  ;  21  I  (should)  have  ;  22  at  the  top  ;  23  at  the  bottom. 


Una  mujer  rica  calzada2  por  un  zapatero4  a3  la  moda^nota1 
que  el  mismo  dia  que  estrenaba5  unos  zapatos  estaban  rotos8 
a7  las7  cuatro  horas.^  Hace8  llamar  al  zapatero,8  y  le  inani- 
ties ta1  su  estraneza9  por  aquel  resultado.1 

El  industrial  coje10  el  zapato  roto,6  lo  examina  atentamente,1 
y  despues  de  reflexionar1  sobre  las  causas  de  aquel  accidente,1 
exclama1  de11  pronto11 :  j  Ya12  caigo12 !  ^  Ha  salido  Vd.  a15 
pie13  con  ellos  ? 

2  shod  j  3  fashionable  ;  4  shoemaker  ;  5  eslrenar,  to  use  for  the  first  time  ; 
6  broken  ;  7=in  ;  8=she  has  the  shoemaker  sent  for  ;  9  surprise  ;  JO  eager* 
to  pick  up  ;  U  suddenly ;  12=1  have  it ;  13  on  foot- 


55 

£1  Ciego  y  su  Iiinero. 

Sabidas  son  las  precauciones1  que  toman  los  ciegos2  para 
ocultar8  el  dinero.  Uno  que  poseia4  quinientos  francos,  no 
considerandolos  seguros  en  el  miserable  cuarto  que  habitaba,i 
bajo5  una  noche  al  corral6  de  la  casa  y  los  enterro1  al  pie  de 
un  arbol.7  Un  vecino  de  la  misma  casa  que  por  casual idad8 
habia  bajado5  al  patio,9  noto1  la  accion1  del  ciego,  y  al10 
retirarse  este,10  desenterro1  el  dinero  y  se  lo  apropio.1 

Cuando,el  ciego  fue  a  visitar  su  tesoro,11  no  lo  hallo,  como 
era  natural ;  pero  lejos12  de  quejarse13  y  desesperarse,13  disi- 
inulq1  su  dolor14  y  se15  puso15  a  reflexionar.1  Informose  de  la 
gente16  que  vivia  en  la  casa  y  supo  que  habia  en  e.lla  un  vecino 
desocupado,17  chismoso18  y  malgastador.19  No  necesito  saber 
mas  el  ciego  para  sospechar20  que  el  tal21  vecino  era  el  Iadr6n,22 
y  con  aire1  risueno23  fue  £  buscarle  y  le  dijo  : 

Vecino,  se  que  sois  hombre  discreto1  y  amigo  de  hacer  un 
favor  ;  vengo  a  consultaros  sobre  un  punto24  muy  importante 
para  mi.  Poseo4  mil  francos,  de  los  cuales  tengo  escondidos36 
quinientos  en  paraje26  seguro.  Tengo  intencion  de  esconder25 
tambien  la  otra  mitad27  y  desearia  que  me  dijeseis28  si  debo 
ocultarlos3  en  el  inismo  sitio26  6  en  otro  diferente,  para  no 
perderlo  todo  en  caso  de  hurto.29 

Alegrdse30  el  vecino  con  la  culpable1  esperanza31  de  pillar32 
toda  la  eantidad,33  e  insto34  al  ciego  a°  que  los  depositara1  en 
el  mismo  escondrijo.35 

Prometiolo36  asi  el  robado,37  y  el  ladron22  se3?  apresuro38  a 
volver39  a  poner39  los  quinientos  francos  al  pie  del  arbol,7 
para  coger40  luego41  los  mil.  Pero  aquella  misma  noche  fue 

2  blind  ;  3  ocultar^  to  conceal ;  4  poseer,  to  possess  ;  5  bajar,  to  descend  ;  6 
yard  ;  7  tree  ;  8  chance  ;  9  courtyard  ;  10  on  the  latter's  retiring  ;  11  treasure  ; 
12  far  ;  13  complaining) and despair(iDg)  ;  14 grief ;  15=began ;  16  people; 
17  unoccupied  ;  18  slander  repeating  ;  19  extravagant ;  20  suspect ;  21= 
said  ;  22  thief  ;  23  smiling  ;  24  point ;  25  esconder,  to  hide  ;  26  place  ; 
27  half  ;  28  you  (should)  tell ;  29  theft ;  30  alegrarse,  to  rejoice  ;  31  hope  ; 
32  plundering)  ;  33  quantity  ;  34  urged  ;  35  hiding-place  ;  36  prometer,  to 
promise  ;  37  robbed  ;  38  hastened ;  39  put  again  ;  40=get  j  41  afterwards. 


56 

el  ciego  al  paraje2?  donde  enterro  sn  dineroy  y  babiendo 
hallado  sus  quinientos  francos,  se  los  metio42  en  el  bolsillo43 
y  puso42  en  su  lugar44  un  papel  con  estas  palabras  : 

Bien  decia  yo  que  era  Vd.  hombre  amigo  de  bacer  un  favor  ; 
mil  gracias  por  baberm6  ayudado45  a  recobrar46  mi  dinero. 

42  put ;  43  pocket ;  44  place,  stead  ;  45  helped  ;  46  recover 


Vendiase  en  publica1  subasta2  la  coleccion1  de  cuadros.  de 
un  aficionado3  inteligente.1  Al4  presentar  el  subastador4  un 
cuadrito5  que  representaba  un  burro,6  y  que  tenia  un 
merito1  real,  empezaron  a  pujarlo7  dos  pintores,8  pero  un 
ricacho9  que  se10  la  daba  de10  inteligente1  lo  subio11  en  un 
momento  a  cuatro  mil  reales. 

Uno  de  los  pintores8  se  dirije12  al  rico,  y  le  dice  cortes- 
mente18 :  Cuando  tanto  interes1  demuestrk14  Vd.,  presumo1 
que  sera  un  fetrato*5  de  familia,1  y  me0  retiro  para  'no 
perjudicar1  a  Vd. 

2  auction  ;  3  amateur  ;  4  on  the  auctioneer's  presenting  ;  5  small  picture  ; 
6  donkey ;  7  outbid  (for)  it ;  8  painter  ;  9  very  rich  man  ;*  10=boasted  of 
being  ;  11  subir,  to  raise  ;  12  addresses  -t  13  politely  ;  14  manifest ;  15  portrait. 

Para  dar  Maboma1  mas  credito1  a  sus  imposturas1  hizo 
ocultar3  en  un  pozo5  seco4  a°  uno  de  sus  compaiieros,2  con 
orden1  de  gritar6  cuando  el  pasara1 :  Mahoma  es  el  enviado7 
de  Dios. 

Hizolo  asi8  el  escondido,9  quedaudo11  todo10  el  mundo10 
admirado12  de  aquella  maravilla13 ;  pero  el  falso  apostol,1 
temiendp  que  se14  descubriera14  su  artificio,1  ordeno15  inme- 
diatamente1  a  los  fanaticos1  que  le  seguian16  que  cegaran17  el 
pozo5  para  evitar18  que  f uera19  profanado  en  el  porvenir,20 

2  companion  ;  3  hide  ;  4  dry  ;  5  well  ;  6  call  out  ;  7=messenger  ; 
8  .thus  ;  9  hidden  (person)  ;  10  all  the  world=everybody  ;  11  remaining  ; 
12  astonished  ;  13  marvel  ;  14  would  be  discovered  ;  15  ordered  ;  16  se- 
guir,  to  follow  ;  17  they  should  blind=stop  up  ;  18  avoid  ;  19  it  should 
be ;  20  future. 


57 

El  Perro  h&bil. 

Es  corriente2  entre  los  cazadores3  hablar  de  los  extraordi- 
narios  sucesos^curridos1  en  su  diversion1  f  avorita1  y  ponderar5 
las  excelencias1  de  sus  perros.  En  el  descanso6  de  una  partida7 
de  caza,7  a  la  que  asistia8  Alejandro  Dumas,  se  hablaba  de  lo9 
de  siempre9  :  de  perros.  Dumas  oyo  referir10  maravillas11  de 
inteligencia1  realizadas1  por  estos  animalitos.1  Cuando  le 
llego  su  turno,1  pondero5  tambien  la  inteligencia  de  su  perro. 

1  Oh  !  decia,  mi  perro  tiene  una  inteligencia1  superior.1  "On 
dia  que  yo  almorzaba12  en  el  jardin  con  un  amigo,  Fanor — 
que°  asi  se13  llamaba13  mi  perro— esperaba14  sumiso15  que, 
como  de  costumbre,9  le  arrojara16  los  restos17  de  mi  almuerzo.18 

Mas19viendo  que  no  me  acordaba20deel,  se21  f  ue21  al  f  ondo22 
del  jardin  y  vino  hacia23  mi,  trayendo  en  la  boca24  una  rama25 
de  NO26  ME  OLVIDES.26 

2=usual ;  3  hunter  ;  4  incident ;  5  exaggerate  ;  6  halting  ;  7  hunting  expe- 
dition ;  8  was  present ;  9=as  usual ;  10  related  ;  11  marvel ;  J2  was  break- 
fasting ;  13  llamarse,  to  be  called  ;  14  was  waiting  ;  15  submissively ;  16 
I(should)  fling  ;  1 7  remains  ;  1 8  breakfast ;  1 9  but ;  20  acordarse  de}  to  re- 
member ;  21  irse,  to  go  away  ;  22  bottom  ;  23  towards  ;  24  mouth  ;  25  sprig  ; 
26  forget  me  not. 

Enrique  VIII.,  rey  de  Inglaterra,  y  Carlos  V.,  rey  de  Espaiia, 
eran  dos  principes  de  un  caracter1  muy  vivo2 :  el  primero  re- 
solvi6  enviar  un  mensajero3  al  segundo,  y  nombr64al5  efecto5 
a  sir  Tomas  More,  su  canciller.6  Este  al  recibir  sus  instruc- 
ciones1hizo7presente7a  Enrique  el  temor8que  tenia  de  encar- 
garse9  de  semejante10  mensage  que  podia  costarle  la  vida11:  a 
lo  cual  respondio  el  rey,  que  si  Carlos  atentaba12  a  sus  dias,12 
haria13  degollar18  a  todos  los  espanoles  que  hubiese24  en  sus 
estados.15 — Agradezco16  mucho  a  vuestra  majestad,1  dijo  el 
canciller,6  el  honor  que  hace  a  mi  persona,,  pero  dudo,17 
seiior,  que  ninguna  de  las  cabezas  de  esos  caballeros  pueda1* 
colocarse19  sobre  mis  hombros.20 

2  hasty  ;  3  messenger  ;  4  appointed  ;  5=for  the  purpose  ;  6  chancellor  ;  7 
represented  ;  8  fear  ;  9  taking  charge  ;  10  (a)like  ;  11  life  ;  12  attempted  his 
days=life  ;  13=he  would  have... beheaded  ;  14  were ;  15 dominions  ;  IGagra- 
decer,  to  be  grateful ;  17  dudar}  to  doubt ;  18  can  ;  19  be  put ;  20  shoulders. 


58 

El  Asedio  de  Amteres. 

Mientras2  los  Espaiioles  mantenian1  en  1580  el  tenaz*asedio* 
de  Amber es,5  sucedio6  una  cosa  de  poca  importancia1  que 
acarreo7  un  grande  acontecimiento.8  Estaba  enferma  una 
senora  de  la  ciudad,  y  necesitaba  para  su  cura1  tomar  leche9 
de  burras.10  Como  no  era  posible  hallarlas  en  la  plaza,11  un 
joven12  se  of recio  a  ir  por  una  a  los  arrabales,18  no14  obstante14 
hallarse  en  poder15  del  enemigo1  ;  en  efecto  ya  traia16  una, 
cuando  f  ue  apresado,17  y  conducido  al  duque1  de  Parma* 

Este  general  trato18  con  bondad19  al  joven12;  alabo20  su 
honradez,21  e  hizo22  cargar23  la  burra10  de  perdices,24  capones1 
y  de  cuanto26  pudiese26  ser  util27  a  un  enfermo,  ordenando 
que  todo  se28  lo  llevase28  a  la  senora,  y  dieiendo  al  ayunta- 
miento29  y  pueblo  de  Amberes5  que  el  les  deseaba  toda 
suerte30  de  prosperidades.1 

Esta  generosidad1  inesperada31  del  duque  produjo1  una 
revolucion  general  en  su  favor,  sugeriendose32  enviarle  a35 
nombre33  del  publico1  dulces34  y  vinos  de  la  ciudad.  Los 
espiritus1  se  calmaron1  con  estas  mutuas1  atenciones,1  y 
empezando  a  pensar  que  los  Espaiioles  no  eran  tan  fieros35 
como  se  creia,  esta  opinion  evito36  muchos  males,37  e  hizo22 
que  se  rindiese38  la  plaza.11 

Este  suceso39  causo  tanta  alegria40  a  Felipe1  II.,  que  habien- 
dole  llegado  la  noticia41  a  media42  noche,42  a43  pesar43  de  lo 
misterioso1  y  austero1  que  era,  fue  al  cuarto  de  su  hija 
Isabel,  dando  golpes44  a  la  puerta,y  gritando45 :  i  Amberes5  es 
nuestro,  Amberes  es  nuestro  ! 

Quien  nacio46  para  ahorcado47  no  morira48  ahogado.49 

2  while  ;  3  tenacious  ;  4  siege  ;  5  Antwerp  ;  6  suceder,  to  happen  ;  7  car- 
ried=led  to  ;  8  event ;  9  milk  ;  10  ass  ;  11  place  ;  12  youth  ;  13  suburb ; 
14  notwithstanding  ;  15  power  ;  16  he  was  bringing  ;  17  captured  ;  18 
tratar,  to  treat;  19  kindness;  20  alabar,  to  praise  ;  21  gallantry  ;  22= 
caused  ;  23  to  (be)  load(ed)  ;  24  partridge  ;  25=whatever  ;  26  might ; 
27  useful  ;,28  should  be  taken  ;  29  coloration  ;  30  kind  ;  31  unexpected  ; 
32==it  being  suggested  ;  33=in  the  name ;  34  sweetmeats  ;  35  cruel ; 
36  avoided==prevented  ;  37  evil ;  38  surrendered  (rendir)  ;  39  event  ;  40 
joy  ;  41  news  ;  42  midnight  ;  43  in  spite ;  44  blow  ;  45  calling  out  j 
46  was  born ;  47=hangiDg ;  48  morir,  to  die ;,  49  ahogar^  to  drown. 


59 

El  Negro  fingido.2 

Dos  jovenes  hermanos,  cerrajeros3  de  oficio,4  se°  embarca- 
ron1  hace5  sesenta  anos  para  la  Jamaica.  Luego  que  llegaron 
buscaron  alguna  ocupacion,1  pero  no  la  hallaron  en  su  oficio,4 
porque  necesitaban  algiin  dinero  para  establecerse.1  Viendose 
sin  auxilio?  alguno,  apelaron7  a  un  recurso*  bastante9  extra- 
ordinario,  y  fue  el  siguiente.10 

Uno  de  ellos,  que  tenia  los  cabellos11  nmy  crespos,13  se 
disfrazo13  de  negro,1  se  tiiio14  el  rostro15  y  todo  el  cuerpo,16  y 
fue  conducido1  por  su  hermano  a  la  casa  de  un  banquero,*  a° 
quien  suplico17  le  prestase18  cincuenta  doblones1  sobre  la 
venta19  de  aquel  negro.  Como  este  era  f  uerte20  y  vigoroso,1 
Iogr621  el  hermano  el  prestamo22  que  deseaba.  Recibido  el 
dinero,  se°  escapo1  el  fingido2  negro  de  casa  del  prestamista,23 
volvi6  a  casa  de  su  hermano,  y  se  lavo24  de  pies  a  cabeza. 
En  vano1  ofrecieron  los  periodicos  recompensas  al25  que  le 
presentase,26  pues  era  imposible  hallarle. 

Los  dos  hermanos  f  ormaron1  su  establecimiento1  de  cerra-\ 
jeros3  con  los  cincuenta  doblones,  ganaron27  mucho  dinero  y 
volvieron  a  su  pais28  ricos  ;  pero  es  de  advertir,29  que  antes 
de  ausentarse30  de  la  Jamaica,  restituyeron1  el  prestamo22  con 
los  intereses1  al  banquero,  y  le  dieron  las  gracias  recordan- 
dole31  la  anecdofa  del  negro. 

2.fingir,  to  pretend';  3  locksmith  ;  4  trade  ;  5=ago  ;  6  help  ;  7  they  had 
recourse  ;  8=expedient ;  9=rather  ;  10  following  ;  11  hair  ;  12  curly  ;  13 
disguised  ;  14  tefur,  to  dye  ;.  15  face  ;  16  body  ;  17  he  requested  ;  18  he 
(would)  lend  ;  19  sale  ;  20  strong ;  21  obtained  ;  22  loan  ;  23  lender ;  24 
washed  ;  25  to  the  (one)  ;  26  (might)  present ;  27  gained  ;  28  country ;  29  to 
(be)  observe(d)  ;  30  absent(ing)  themselves  ;  31=reminding  him  of. 


Deciaun  andaluz2:  Conoci  a  un  hombre  tan  alto,  tan  grueso,3 
y  que  pesaba4  tanto,  que  cuando  se°  murio  tuvieron  los  sepul- 
tureros5  que  hacer  dos  viajes  para  llevarlo  al  cementerio.1 

UN  KICO.—  Es  tarde  y  voy  a  dejar6  a  Vd. 
UN  POBRE.—^  Cuanto  ? 


2  Andalusiau  ;  3  corpulent  ;  4  weighed  ;  5  grave-diggers  ;  6  leave. 


60 

El  Eoo  singular, 

Hablando  tin  dia  un  gracioso2  con  un  caballero  muy  men- 
tiroso8  que  regresaba4  de  un  largo5  viaje,  este  le  referia6  los 
ecos1  maravillosos7  que  habia  oido  en  .varios  paises,  particular- 
mente1  ,en  las  ruinas1  de  un  templo*  antiguo1  que  repetia1  ia 
misma  palabra  siete  veces. 

1  Ba  !  ba !  eso  no  tiene  nadade  admirable,8  responde  nuestro 
bufon1 :  acjui  en  este  pais,  sin  ir  mas  lejos,9  hay  un  eco... 
i  pero  que  eco  !  ! !  un  eco  en  el  castillo*0  de  un  sefior  cerca  del 
lago11  Killarney,  donde  me  ha^sucedido12  muy  f  recuentemerite1 
gritar :  Buenos  dias,  senor  eco  ;  y  nunca  ha  dejado13  de 
responderme  :  Buenos  dias,  caballerito,  £  como  esta  Vd,  ? 

2  witty  man  ;  3  mendacious  ;  4  was  returning  ;  5  long  ;   6  was  relating  j 
7  wonderful ;    8  extraordinary  ;   9  far  ;  10  castle  ;  11  lake  ;   12  happened  ; 
13  left=omitted.          . 

La  Nuez. 

Dos  muchachos  que  jugaban2  al  pie  de  un  nogal,8  hallaron 
en  el  suelo4  una  nuez5  que  se°  habia  caido  del  arbol.6 

Es  mia,  dijo  uno  de  ellos,  pues  yo  he  sido  el  xjue  la  he  visto 
el  primero. 

No,  respondio  el  otro  ;  es  mia^  porque  yo  he  sido  el  que  la 
he  recogido7  del  suelo.4 

No  pudiendo  ponerse8  de  acuerdo8  respecto1  al  legitimo1 
dueno9  de  la  nuez,5  ya  estaban  dispuestos10  a  disputarsela1  a 
golpes,11  cuando  un  joven12  que  pasaba,1  habiendose  enterado13 
del  motivo1  de  la  querella,1  cogio14  la  nuez,  la  partio,15  y 
poniendose  en  medio16  de  los  muchachos,  les  dijo  : 

Yo  voy  a  poneros  de17  acuerdo.17  La  mitad18  de  la  cascara19 
pertenece20al21  que  la  vio  el  primero,  y  la  otra  mitad18  al21  que 
la  recogi67  del  suelo.4  Respecto  a  la  pepita,22  yo  me  la  guardo23 
en  pago24  de  la  decisi6n1  que  he  dado.  Este  es,  anadio25 
riendo,26  el  resultado1  usual  de  todos  los  pleitos.27 

2  jugar,  to  play  ;  3  walnut-tree  ;  4  ground  ;  5  nut  j  6  tree  ;  7  recoger,  to  pick 
up  ;  8==to  agree  ;  9  owner  ;  10  disposed  ;  11  blow  ;  12  young  (man)  ;  13  ac- 
quainted ;  14  took  hold  of ;  15  divided=oracked  ;  16  middle  ;  17  in  accord  ; 
18  haii  j  19.ghell ;  20  pertenecer,  to  belong :  21  to  the  (one)  ;  22  kernel ; 
23  guardar,  to  keep  ;  24  payment  j  25  be  added ;  26  laughing ;  27  lawsuit 


61 

El  Retrato  mal  pagado. 

Mand'6se2  retratar2  un  caballero,  y  contrat61  con  el  pintor8 
que  le  pagaria^generosamente,1  si  le  sacaba5  el  retrato6  pare*- 
cido.7  El  pintor3  lo  hizo  muy  semejante8  al  original1 ;  pero 
el  retratado9  cometio1  la  indignidad1  de  no  querer  pagarle, 
imaginando1  con  esta  malicia1  sacar10  baratisimo11  el  retrato,6 
que  el  pintor3  para  nada  podia  aprovechar.1* 

Mas  diestro13  el  artista,1  le  dijo  que,  supuesto14  no  queria 
pagarle,  se15  quedaria15  con  el  hasta16  que  tuviese16  por  con- 
veniente  cumplir17  lo18  contratado.18 

El  pintor  hizo19  poner  un  marco19  al  ret-rato,6  y  lo  expuso1 
al  publico1  sobre  la  puerta  de  su  casa  con  esta  inscripcifa1 : 
*  Aqui  estoy  por  no  pagar  mis  deudas.20 ' 

El  original  del  retrato,  -'que  fue  conocido  de  todo21  el 
mundo,21  supo  al  instante  la  burla22  que  le  habia  hecho  el  pin- 
tor,  y  como  todos  le  vituperaban,1  se  vi'6  precisado23  a  pagar 
al  artista  cuanto24  quiso  para  sacar10  el  retrato  de  sus  manos. 

2=ordered  his  portrait  to  be  painted  ;  3  painter  ;  4  pagar,  to  pay ;  5 
turned  out ;  6  portrait ;  7=like  (him)  ;  8  resembling ;  9  (person)  painted  ; 
10  to  draw  out=get ;  11  very  cheap  ;  12=make  use  of  ;  13  skilful  ;•  14  sup- 
posing ;  15  it  should  remain  ;  16=until  he  found  it ;  17  to  fulfil ;  18  what 
was  contracted ;  19=had  a  frame  put ;  20  debt ;  2J=everybody  ;  22  jest, 
trick  ;  23  compelled  ;  24  as  much  as. 


Uno  que  estaba  preso2  en  JParls  por  deudas,  envio  a  buscar 
a  su  acreedor,3  diciendo  que  tenia  algo4  que  comunicarle. 

Presentose  al  acreedor,3  y  le  dice  i  Pues,  senor,  pensando  en° 
la  vida5  que  paso1  aqui  tan  triste6-yf astidiosa,7  he  creido  con- 
veniente  decirle  a  Vd.  que  estoy  con  pena8por  el  gasto9  que  le 
estoy  ocasionando1  diariamente,10y  no  se  cuando  se11  acabara.11 
Escuche  Vd.  Hagame12  salir12  de  esta  prision,1  y  en  lugar13  de 
los  dos  francos1  que  le  cuesto  en  ella,  m'e  dara,  estando  libre,14 
la  mitad,15  y  ^  resto1  lo  iremos16  descontando16  de  la  deuda. 

2  imprisoned  ;  3  creditor ;  4  something ;  5  life ;  6  dull ;  7  tedious ; 
8  trouble  ;  9  expense  ;  10  daily  ;  11  it  will  end  ;  12=release  me ;  13 
place  i  14  £r«e  ;  15  half  ;  16«cwe  will  gradually  deduct. 


62 

Las  tres  Freguntas. 

Federico1  el  Grande  tenia  costumbre,1  siempre  ,<p€f  obser* 
vaba1  en  su  guardia1  un  nuevo  soldado,  de  preguntarle  estas 
tres  cosas  :  <?  Que  edad2  tienes  ?  {.  Desde3  cuando*  sirves4  ? 
I  Recibes  con  regular! dad  tu  sueldo5  y  tus  raciones1  ? 

Un  joven  Frances,  que  no  podia  hablar  siquiera6  una  pala- 
bra  en  aleman,7  f  ue  admitido1  en  este  cuerpo8  de  guardia.1  El 
rey  debia9  pasar  revista10  tres  dias  despues,  y  le  Mcieron 
aprender  tres  respuestas  correspondientes1  a  las  preguntas 
que  el  rey  solia11  hacer  y  en  el  mismo  orden. 

Llegado  el  dia  de  la  revista,10  Federico  observ6  estesoldado, 
y  no  dejo12  de  hacerle  dichas13  preguntas,  pero  empezo  por  la 
segunda. 

<i  Desde3  cuando3  sirves4  ? — Veinte  y  un  anos,  senor. 

i  Como  !  <j  veinte  y  un  anos  ?  <j  que  edad2  tienes,  pues  ? 

Tres  dias,  seiior. 

Ah,  dijo  el  rey^  uno  de  los  dos  habra  perdido  el  entendi- 
miento.14 — Precisamente1  los  dos,  dijo  el  joven,  que  tomaba 
estas  palabras  por  la  tercera  pregunta. 

1  Como !  dijo  el  rey,  esta  es  la  primera  vez  que  se1B  me 
trata  de15  loco.16 

El  Frances,  que  ya  habia  apurado17  todo  lo  que  sabia  de  ale- 
man,7guardaba  un  silencio  absoluto.  Pero  el  capitan^e  apresu- 
ro18  a  explicar  el  en igma  al  rey,  que  celebro19  mucho  la  chanza.20 

2  age  ;     3  since  when=how  long  ;    4  dost  thou  serve  ;     5  pay  ;   6  even  ; 
7  German  ;   8  body  ;   9  had  to  ;   10  review  ;   11  was  in  the  habit  of  ;     12= 
omitted;   13  said  ;   14  understanding  ;    15=1  have  been  called  ;    16  mad  ; 
17  exhausted  ;   18  made  haste  ;   19=was  amused  with  ;  20  joke. 


Se  habia  dado  orden  terminante2  a  un  suizo3  de°  que  no 
dejara4  entrar1  a  nadie  en  el  jardin  de  las  Tullerias.  Se  le 
presenta1  un  ciudadano.5 — No  se  permite1  la  entrada,6  dijo  el 
suizo.3 — Pero  yo  no  quiero  entrar,  dijo  el  otro,  solo7  quiero 
salir8  de  Pont-Royal. — Ah,  replied  el  suizo,  eso  ya°  es  otra 
cosa ;  si  se9  trata9  de  salir8  ya°  puede  Yd.  pasar.1 

2= definite,  strict ;  8  Swiss  ;  4  he  (should)  allow  ;  5  citizen  ;  6  entry ; 
7  only  ;  8  (to)  go  put ;  9  it  i&a.  question. 


63 

El  Gird2  del  Sol. 

Hallabase  un  caballero,  muy  rudo,3  en  cierta  tertulia4  donde 
se  hablaba  del  sol  y  del  modo1  como  gira5  alrededor6  de  la  tierra, 
que  tiene  la  figura1  de  una  bola.7  Quiso  mezclarse8  en  la  con- 
versacion1  para  sostener1  que  aquello  era  imposible,1  supuesto9 
que9  los  mismos10  ojos  convencian1  de  que  la  tierra  era  liana.11 

Dieronle  diversas  razones  para  desenganarle12  de  aquel 
error,  y  entre  otras  cosas  le  dijeron  : 

Ya  ve  Vd.  como  el  sol  sale13  diariamente14  en  un  mismo 
paraje,15  y  se16  pone16  al  opuesto.17  £  Como  es  pues  posible, 
que  vuelva  del  Occidente,18  donde  se16  pone,16  al  Oriente,19 
donde  sale,13  si  no  pasa  por20  debajo20  ? 

1  Bonita21  pregunta  !  replied  el  porfiado22  ignorante1 :  viene 
de23  noche. 

2  turning  round=revolution  ;   3=stupid  ;    4  assembly  ;  6  it  rerolves  ;  6 
round  ;  7  ball ;  8  (to)  mix ;  9=because  ;  10=very,  even  ;  11  flat ;  12  disabuse 
him  ;  13=rises  ;  14  daily  ;  15  place  ;  16=sets  ;  17  opposite  ;  18  west ;  19  east ; 
20  underneath  ;  21  pretty  (ironically  used)=silly  ;  22  obstinate  ;  23=at. 

En  materia1  de  testamentos,2  no  heinos  visto  otro  mas 
notable1  que  el  que  otorg63  en  1793  un  caballero4  de  in- 
dustria4  de  Paris.  Helo5aqui5: 

Nada  tengo,  debo  mucho,  dejo  lo  demas6  a  los  pobres. 
2  will ;  3  executed=left ;   4  swindler  ;  5  here  it  is  ;  6  rest. 

Un  miisico,2  diestro3  en  su  arte,1  pero  muy  envanecido4  de 
su  merito,1  tuvo  un  dia  la  honra6  de  hablar  con  cierto 
soberano,6  el  cual  reparando7  que  llevaba8  unaa  malisimas 
medias,9  le  pregunt6  :  <|  si  era  el  miisico2  de  quien  le  habian 
hablado  con  tanto  elogio10? — No  lo  se,  senor,  respondi6, 
pero  puedo  vanagloriarme11  de  tener  una  voz  que  hago12  de 
ella  cuanto13  quiero. — Pues  si  asi  es,  dijo  el  rey,  te  aconsejo14 
que  te  hagas  un  par15de  medias,9  porque  las  necesitas  mucho. 

De  esta  manera1  se16  burlo16  el  soberano6  de  la  ridicula1 
vanidad1  del  musico.2 

2  musician  ;  3  skilful ;  4= vain  ;  6  honor  ;  6  sovereign  ;  7  noticing ; 
8  llevar,  to  w»r ;  9  stocking  ;  10  eulogy,  praise  ,  11  boast ;  12  I  make ; 
13  whatever  ;  14  aconsejar,  to  advise  ;  15  pair  ;  16  made  fun. 


El  Cochero  aturdidp,* 

Un  caballero  de  buen  humor1  tomo  una  noche  con  algunos 
amigos  de  su  mismo  humor  un  coche1  de3  alquiler,3  y  mando 
al  cochero4  les  condujese5  detras6  de6  una  casa  donde  habian 
de  llamar  a7  otro8  sujeto.8 

Llegaron,  fingieron9  subir10  todos,  y  despues,  dando11 
vuelta11  al  coche,1  empezaron  a  entrar  por  una  portezuela12 
y  salir  por  la.  otra,  sin  que  lo  notase13  el  cochero,4  por14 
manera14  que  veia  entrar  mucha  gente15  y  no  alcarizaba16 
como  podian  ya  caber17  tantas  personas  alia18  dentro,19  hasta20 
que20  el  pobre  diablo,21  lleno  de  admiracion,22  abandbno1  el 
coche  y  se  fue  a  la  taberna1  inmediata,23  donde  declaro1  que 
conducia24  una  legion1  de  demonios,J  pues  habia  contado25  ya 
diez  y  ocho,  y  no  sabia  donde  se  metian.26 

2  confused  ;  3  on  hire  ;  4  coachman  ;  5  to  drive  ;  6  behind  ;  7=for  ; 
8=some  one  else  ;  9  pretended  ;  'lO  to  ascend;  11  going  round  ;  12  little 
door  ;  13  noticed  ;  14=so ;  15  people  ;  16=understood  ;  17  be  contained  ; 
18  there  ;  19  within  ;,  20  until ;  21=fellow  ;  22  astonishment ;  23  adjoining  ; 
24  he  was  driving  ;  25  counted  ;  26  meter,  to  put. 

Decia  un  mal  pin  tor2  que  iba  a  blanquear3  su  casa  para 
pintarla4  despues.5 — Pintala  primero,  le  dijo  otro  pintor,  y 
que6  la  blanqueen6  enseguida.7 

1  Portero1 !  —  <?  Que  manda8  Vd.  ?  —  <j  No  vive  aqui  un 
caballero  que  hace9  pocos  dias  se°  ha  muerto  ? 

No,  senor,  en  la  casa  de10  al  lado.10 — Gracias. 

2  painter  ;  3  whitewash  ;  4  paint  it ;  5  afterwards  ;  6  let  them  whitewash 
it ;  7  directly  after  ;  8  order=want ;  9  ago  ;  10=next  door  (lado,  side). 

Un  particular2  solicito1  una  importante  plaza.3 — PeroVd.  es 
bibliotecario,4  le  dijo  su  protector,  «;  desea  Vd.  pues  rennn- 
ciar5  este  empleo6  ? — Oh,  no,  de7  ninguna  manera.7 — Entonces, 
<:  como  podra  Vd.  cumplir8  con0  su  obligacion  en  el  otro  des- 
tino,9  que  reclamara10  todo  su  tiempo  ? — Con  la  mayor  facili- 
dad1  del  mundo,  puesto11  que11  nunca  voy  a  mi  biblioteca.1^ 

2  certain  person  ;  3  place  ;  4  librarian  ;  5  give  up  ;  6  employment ;  7  not 
at  all  j  Siulfil ;  9  situation  ;  10  will  demand;  ll=because  ;  12  library. 


SPANISH 

CONVERSATION 

SIMPLIFIED 


A  collection  of  frequently  occurring 
CONVERSATIONAL      PHRASES 

INTRODUCING  ALL   THE 

IMPORTANT    IDIOMS 


PHILADELPHIA 

DAVID    McKAY,    Publisher 

604-8  S.  Washington  Square 


/USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL"  SENTENCES.  8 

CONVERSATIONAL   EXERCISES, 

fcased  chiefly  on  the  Rules  in  u  SPANISH  SIMPLIFIED,"  and 
gradually  introducing  the  most  IMPORTANT  IDIOMS 


Good  day  (or  Good  morning), 

sir. 
Good    afternoon    (or     Good 

evening),  miss. 
Good  night  (or  Good  evening)? 

madam. 
!How  are  you? 
Very  well,  thank  you  ;  and 

you  ? 
I  am  very  well  now,  but  I 

have  been  ill. 
What  was  the  matter  with 

you  ? 

What  is  the  matter  with  her  ? 
Nothing  is  the  matter  with  me. 
What  do  you  say  ? 
What  do  you  mean  ? 
What     is     this     called     in 

Spanish  ? 

;How  is  that  said  in  English  ? 
I  have  heard    that  he  will 

not  do  it. 
Can  you  speak  Spanish  or, 

Italian  ? 

1 1  am  very  sorry  for  it. 
iThey  were  not  very  sorry, 
•  Are  you  not  sorry  for  it  ? 
|  What  do  you  want  ? 
I  am  glad  to  see  you. 
Good-bye  (till  to-morrow). 
Good-bye  (till  Wednesday). 
Good-bye(till  I  see  you  again). 
Good-bye  (farewell,  adieu). 


Buenos  dias,  sefior  (or  caba* 

Hero). 
Buenas  tardes,  senorita. 

Buenas  noches,  senora. 

i  Como  esta  Vd.  ? 

Muy  bien,  gracias ;  i  y  Vd.  ? 

Estoy  muy  bien  khora,  pero 

he  estado  enfermo. 
i  Que  tenia  Vd.  ? 

i  Que  tiene  ella  ? 

No  tengo  nada. 

i  Que  dice  Vd.  ? 

i  Que  quiere  Vd.  decir  ? 

i  C6mo  se  llama  esto  en  es- 

panol  ? 

<;  C6mo  se  dice  eso  en  ingles  ? 
He  oido  decir  que  no  quiere 

hacerlo. 
i  Sabe  Vd.  hablar  espanol  6 

italiano  ? 
Lo  siento  mucho. 
No  lo  sintieron  mucho. 
^NolosienteVd.  ?         [Vd. 
I  Que  quiere  Vd.  ?  <f  Que  desea 
Me  alegro  de  verle. 
Haste  manana. 
Hasfeyel  Miercoles. 
Hasta  la  vista. 
Adios. 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


I  beg  your  pardon. 

They  were  not  very  glad  to 

hear  that. ; 
We  are  very  glad  to  find  you 

at  home. 
Please  give  me  your  hat  and 

your  gloves. 
Here  they  are. 
Many  thanks. 

Do  you  think  it  will  rain  be- 
fore the  evening  ? 
It  is  certain  that  they  have 

not  jnade  a  mistake. 
We  cannot  do    anything  in 

this  matter. 
I  am  hungry. 
Are  you  not  thirsty  ? 
They  were  very  hungry. 
Will  not  the  child  be  hungry? 
He  would  be  very  thirsty. 
What  will  you  do  with  this 

letter  ? 

I  shall  send  it  by  post. 
Although  I  have  not  done  my 

work,  I  will  go  with  you  now.  t 
With  the  greatest  pleasure. 
When  did  the  carriage  come 

back  ? 
It  is  better  to  arrive  too  soon 

than  too  late. 

There  are  several  mistakes  in 
*    this  exercise. 
Why  will  you  not  come  to 

the  theatre  to-morrow  ? 
Who  told  you  so  ? 
That  girl  is    very  fond    of 

her  brother. 
Speak  louder. 


Dispenseme  Vd. 

No  se  alegraron   mucho    de 

oir  eso. 
Nos  alegramos  mucho  de  en- 

contrarle  (a  Vd.)  en  casa. 
Sirvase  darme  su  sombrero  y 

sus  guantes. 
Aqui  los  tiene  Vd. 
Muchas  gracias. 
I  Cree  Vd.  que  llovera  antes 

que  anochezca  ? 
Es    cierto    que    no    se    nan 

equivocado. 
No  podemos  hacej  nada  sobre 

este  asunto. 
Ten  go  hambre. 
i  No  tiene  Vd.  sed  ? 
Tenian  mucha  hambre. 
<;  No  tendra  hambre  el  nino  ? 
Tendria  mucha  sed. 
I  Que  hara  Vd.  con  esta  carta  ? 

La  enviare  por  el  correo. 
Aunque  no  he  hecho  mi  tra- 

bajo,  ire  ahora  con  Vd. 
Con  muchisiniQ  gusto. 
,;  Cuando  volvio  el  coche  ? 

Vale  mas  llegar  un  poco  tern- 

prano,  que  demasiadotarde. 

Hay  varias  f  altas  en  este  tema. 

^  Por  que  no  quiere  Vd.  venir 

manana  al  teatro  ? 
I  Quien  se  lo  dijo  a  Vd.  ? 
Esa  muchacha  quiere  mucha 

a  su  hermano. 
Hable  Vd.  mas  alto. 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


The  post  has  not  come  in  yet. 

Do  not  speak  (jplur.)  so  low. 

Wait  a  little  ;  I  have  several 
things  to  tell  you. 

I  cannot  do  it  now. 

Do  us  the  favor  to  direct  us  to 
the  railway  station, 

I  must  do  something  else. 

•Listen  to  me  a  moment. 

Please  take  a  seat. 

1  believe  not. 

We  say  it  is  so. 

He  was  afraid  not. 

I  hope -so. 

Don't  you  think  so  ? 

I  say  it  is  not. 

I  expect  not. 

Certainly  not. 

What  are  you  looking  for  ? 

Whom  are  you  looking  for  ? 

Do  you  know  where  Seiior 
Martinez  lives  ? 

Will  you  take  anything  ? 

Many  thanks  ;  I  am  not 
hungry,  but  I  should  very 
much  like  a  glass  of  wine. 

I  am  rather  tired^. 

.When  did  your  mother  re- 
turn home  ? 

I  do  not  know  why  he  has 
not  sent  the  answer. 

How  old  is  your  uncle  ? 

I  am  twenty-eight  years  old. 

He  is  more  than  thirty. 

I  do  not  know  what  to  do 
about  this  matter. 

You  cannot  make  9,  mistake. 


El  corr eo  no  ha  llegado  todavia. 
No  hablen  Vds.  tan  bajo, 
Aguarde,  Vd.  un  poco  ;  tengo 

varias  cosas  que  clecirle. 
No  puedo  hacerlo  ahora. 
Haganos  el  favor  de  dirigirnos 

a  la  estacion  del  f  errocarril. 
Debo  hacer  otra  cosa. 
Escucheme  un  momento. 
Sirvase  tomar  asiento. 
Creo  que  no. 
Decimos  que  si. 
TemiaTque  no.— 
Espero  que  si. 
I  No  cree  Vdrque  si  ? 
Digo  que  no. 
Espero  que  no. 
Ciertamente  que  no. 
i  Que  busca  Vd.  ? 
I A  quien  busca  Vd.  ? 
I  Sabe  Vd.  donde  vive  el  seiior 

Martinez  ? 

<j  Quiere  Vd.  tomar  algo  ? 
Mil  gracias ;  no  tengo  hambre, 

pero  de  buenagana  beberia 

un  vaso  de  vino.* 
Estoy  algo  cansado, 
I  Cuando  volvio  a  casa  su 

madre  (de  Vd.)  ? 
No  se  por  que  no  ha  enviado 

la  respues,ta. 

<;  Cuantos  anos  tiene  su  tio  ? 
Tengo  veintiocho  anos. 
Tiene  mas  de  treinta  anos. 
No   se    que    hacer   en    este 

asunto. 
Vd.  no  puede  equivocarse., 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


You  must  do  it  some  other  way. 

I  want  to  consult  you  about 
this  letter. 

They  will  doubtless  come 
next  week. 

Could  you  not  hear  him  ? 

Yes ;  but  we  could  not  un- 
derstand what  he  meant. 

Do  you  know  what  time  it  is  ? 

I  don't  know  the  exact  time ; 
my  watch  does  not  go  well. 

His  watch  always  goes  badly. 

It  is  a  little  fast. 

It  is  generally  very  slow. 

[to  ten. 

It  is  exactly  twenty  minutes 

It  is  about  one  o'clock. 

It  is  not  late  yet. 

My  watch  is  not  going. 

I  cannot  wind  it  up  ;  I  have 
left  the  key  at  home. 

This  is  of  no  importance. 

It  does  not  matter. 

What  does  it  matter  ? 

Where  were  you  going  when 
we  met  you  yesterday  ? 

I  am  going  to  read  this  news- 
paper. 

What  is  the  news  ? 

Nothing  is  more  certain. 
Be  quiet  directly ! 
These  children  will  not  be 
silent.  [first. 

Please  tell  me   who  saw  it 
Come  in  ! 


Vd.  debe  hacerlo  de  otro  modo* 
Deseo  consultarle  sobre  esta 

carta. 
Sin  duda  vendran  la  semana 

que  viene. 

.<?  No  podian.  Yds.  oirle  ? 
Si ;  pero  no  podiamos  com- 

prender  lo  que  queria  decir. 
,;  Sabe  Vd.  que  hora  es  ? 
No  se  la  hora  exacta  ;    mi 

reloj  no  va  bien. 
Su  reloj  va  siempre  mal. 
Esta  un  poco  adelantado. 
Va  generalmente  muy  atra- 

sado.  [punto. 

Son  las  diez  menos  veinte  en 
Es  cerca  de  la  una. 
No  es  tarde.  todavia. 
Mi  reloj  no  anda. 
No  puedo  darle  cuerda  ;  he 

dejado  la  Have  en  casa. 
Esto  no  es  de  ninguna  im- 

portancia. 
No  importa. 
I  Que  importa  ? 
;  Adonde  iba  Vd.  cuando  le 

encontramos  ayer  ? 
Voy  a  leer  este  peri<5dico. 

i  Que  hay  de  nuevo  ?  or  £  Que 

se  dice  de  tfuevo  ? 
Nada  es  mas  seguro. 
I  Callese  Vd.  al  instante  ! 
Estos  nifios  no  quieren  ca- 

llarse.  [visto  primero. 

Sirvase  decirme  quien  lo  ha 
i  Entre  Vd. ! 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


Can   you     change  me    this 

foreign  money  ? 
Walk  this  way. 
Is  your  master  at  home  ? 
No,  madam  ;  he  is  out,  and 

will  not  return  before  the 

evening. 
What  a  pity  !    I  should  like 

to  see  him. 

Will  you  give  me  your  name  ? 
You  are  right.. 
I  am  not  right. 
» We  are  right  this  time. 
I  am  sure  they  are  wrong. 

His  friend  was^  wrong. 
Who  is  this  gentleman  who 

is  coming  towards  us  ? 
He  is  a  friend  of  my  cousin's, 

but  I  do  not  know  his  name. 
Can  you    direct    me    to 

Street  ? 

With  much  pleasure. 
You  must  take  this  road. 
Go  straight  on. 
Take  the  second  street  on  the 

right. 
The  street  you  want  is  the 

first  on  the  left 
Ask  again,  when  you  get  to 

the  market. 
You  Tvill  see  the  station  in 

front  of  you. 

Whom  ar,e  you  writing  to  ? 
I  am  writing  to  my  brother ; 

I  have  several  things  to  say 

to  him. 
LA11  that  they  told  you  is  true. 


<?  Puede  Vd.  cambiarme  este 

dinero  extranjero  ? 
Pase  Vd.  adelante. 
i  Esta  su  amo  en  casa  ? 
No,  senora  :  esta  f  uera,  y  no 

volvera  antes  de  la  noche. 

I  Que  lastima !  desearia  verle. 

<i  QuiereVd.darmesunombre? 
Vd.  tiene  razon. 
No  tengo  razon. 
Tenemos  razon  esta  vez.x 
Estoy  seguro  de  que  no  tienen 

razon. 

Su  amigo  no  tenia  razon. 
<?  Quien  es    este   senor    que 

viene  hacia  nosotros  ? 
Es  un  amigo  de  mi  primo, 
"    pero  no  se  su  nombre. 
I  Puede  Vd.   dirigirme  a  la 

calle  de  —  ? 
Con  mucho  gusto. 
Vd.  debe  tomar  este  camino.' 
Vaya.Vd.  derecho. 
Tome  Vd.  la  segunda  calle  a 

laderecha. 
La  calle  que  Vd.  quiere  es  la 

primera*  a  la  izquierda. 
Pregunte  de  nuevo,  cuando 

llegue  al  mercado. 
Vd.    vera    la    estacion    en 

frente. 

I A  quien  escribe  Vd.  ? 
Escribo  a  mi  hermano ;  tengo 

varias  cosas  que  decirle. 

[verdad. 
Todo  lo  que  le  han  dicho^es 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


The  windows  ai;e  not  shut. 

Shall  I  shut  the  door  ? 
Please  give  me  some  bread 

and  cheese. 
What  will  you  drink  ? 
I  should  like  a  glass  of  beer, 

if  there  is  any. 
You  cannot  do  better. 
Where  are  you  going  ? 
I  am  going  home  ;  will  you 

come  with  me  ? 
No,  thank  you  ;    I  must  stay 

here,    because    I    have    a 

great  deal  to  do. 
I  am  very  sorry,  but  I  cannot 

do  it. 

Is 'any body  at  home  ? 
What  hour  is  that  striking  ? 
It  is  just  striking  eleven. 
Thehourisjustabouttostrike. 
Hasitstruck  half  past  five  yet? 
Not  yet  ;    but  I  think  it  will 

strike  soon. 
It  has  just  struck  one. 
It  had  just  struck  eight. 
It  is  a  beautiful  day. 
It  is  fine  (weather). 
It  is  very  bad  weather. 
It  was  not  fine. 
Do  you  think  it  will  be  fine 

to-morrow  ? 
It  is  not  snowing. 
I  believe  it  will  rain  soon. 
I  expect  a  letter  from   my 

sister  in  Paris. 
These  letters  are  not  dated. 


Las  veritanas    no  es&n  ce- 

rradaa.  [puerta  ? 

i  Quiere  Vd.  que  (yo)  cierre  la 
Hagame  el  favor  de  darme 

un  poco  de  pan  y  queso. 
<;  Que  quiere  Vd.  beber  ? 
Quisiera.  un  vaso  de  cerveza, 

si  la  hay. 

Vd.  no  puede  hacer  cosa  mejor 
i  Adonde  va  Vd.  ? 
Voy  a  casa  ;  <;  quiere  Vd.  venir 

conmigo  ? 
No,  gracias  ;  debo  quedarme 

aqui,  porque  tengo  mucho 

que  hacer. 
Lo  siento  mucho,  pero    no 

puedo  hacerlo. 
I  Hay  alguien  en  casa  ? 
I  Que  hora  esta  dando  ? 
Estan  dando  las  once. 
La  hora  va  a  dar«       [media  ? 
<;  Han  dado  ya  las  cinco  y 
Todavia  no  ;    pero  creo  que 

daran  pronto. 
La  una  acaba  de  dar. 
Las  ocho  acababan  de  dar. 
Hace  un  dia  hermoso. 
Haxje  buen  tiempo. 
Hace  muy  mal  tiempo. 
No  hacia  buen  tiempo. 
<;  Cree  Vd.    que  hara  buen 

tiempo  maiiana  ? 
No  esta  nevarido. 
Creo  que  llovera  pronto. 
Espero  una  carta  de  mi  her- 

rnana  que  esta  en  Paris. 
Esta«  cartas  no  tienen  f echa. 


trSEFXTL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


What  is  the  date  ? 

The  first,  second,  third,  etc. 

Will  you  take  this  letter  to 

the  post  ? 
We  are  going  to  send  them 

the  answer  to-morrow. 
How  much  do  you  ask  for  this  ? 
How  do  you  sell  these  ? 
At  the  price  which  you  see 

marked. 

Is  this  the  lowest  price  ? 
Yes  ;  we  mark  our  prices  as 

low    as    possible,  and  we 

cannot  reduce  them. 
These  goods  are  sold  at  three 

shillings  each.; 
This  is  a  very  cheap  article. 
It  appears  to  me  too  much. 
How  much  will  you  take  ? 
Do  you  think   it    will    be 

enough  ? 
I  was  not  satisfied  with  the 

material  I  bought  here  the 

other  day. 
I  was  inclined  to  send  it  back 

to  you. 
We  are  very  sorry  that  you 

did  not  do  so. 
We  always  do  all  we  possibly 

can    to    satisfy    our    cus- 
tomers. 
Can  I   show  you    anything 

else  ? 
I  will   take    those  ;    please 

send  them  to  my  house. 
Where  do  you  wish  them  to 

be  sent  ? 
To  No.  17,  Prince's  Street, 


<;  A  cuantos  estamos  hoy  ? 
A  primero,  a  dos,  a  tres,  etc. 
i  Quiere  Vd.  llevar  esta  carta 

al  correo  ? 
Vamos  a  enviarles  la  respues- 

ta  manana. 

d  Cuanto  pide  Vd.  por  esto  ? 
<;  A  como  vende  Vd.  estos  ? 
Al  precio  que  ve  Vd.  marcado, 

d  Es  este  el  precio  mas  bajo  ? 

Si  ;  marcamos  nuestros  pre- 
cios  lo  mas  bajo  posible,  y 
no  podemos  reducirlos. 

Estos  generos  pe  venden  a 
tres  chelines  cada  uno. 

Este  es  un  articulomuy  barato. 

Me  parece  dernasiado. 

I  Cuanto  tomara  Vd.  ? 

I  Cree  Vd.  que  sera  bastante  ? 

No  estaba  satisfecho  con  el 

material  que  compre  aqui 

el  otro  dia. 
Estaba  dispuesto  a  devolver- 

selo  (a  Vd.). 
Sentimos  mucho  que  Vd.  no 

lo  haya  hecho. 
Hacemos  siempre  todo  lo  que 

podemos  para  satisfacer  a 

nuestros  parroquianos. 
I  Puedo  mostrarle  a  Vd.  al- 

guna  otra  cosa  ? 
Tomare  esos ;    sirvase  man- 

darlos  a  mi  casa. 
<jAd6nde  quiere  Vd.  que  se 

inanden  ? 
A  la  calle  del  Principe,  No.  17. 


10 


tJSEFTTL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


Is  there  a  letter  for  me  ? 
They  were  obliged  to  go  away. 
We  shall  go  out  to-night,  if  it 

is  not  too  cold. 
He  asked   us   why    we  had 

come,    but    we    did     not 

answer  him. 
Open  the  door,  and  shut  all 

the  windows. 
Is  the  door  locked  ? 

Do  not  come  too  late. 
I  beg  your  pardon. 
There  is  no  occasion  for  it- 
There  was  no  occasion  for  it. 
There  would    not    be     an}- 

need  for  it/ 
It  is  better  not  to  say  anything, 

than  to  speak  too  much. 
It  would  be  better  not  to  say 

anything  more. ' 
When  we  have  finished  our 

work,  we  shall  go  out. 
Where  are  you  going  ? 
We  are  going  to  hear  a  very 

celebrated  speaker. 
Did  you  enjoy  yourselves  at 

the  theatre  yesterday  ? 
Thank  you  ;  we  enjoyed  our- 
selves very  much. 
Follow  me ;  I  have  something 

for  you.  [me  ? 

Have  you  anything  to  show 
Can  you  stay  here  for  a  little 

while  ? 

I  must  go  away  at  once. 
I  shall  be  here  at  a  quarter  to 

eight  exactly. 


i  Hay  carta  para  mi  ? 
Tuvieron  que  irse. 
Saldremos  esta  noche,  si  no 

hace  demasiado  frio. 
Nos  pregunto   por    que    ha- 

biamos  venido,  pero  no  le 

contestants. 
Abra  Vd.  la  puerta,  y  cierre 

todas  las  ventanas/ 
•<?  Esta    cerrada  con  Have    la 

puerta  ? 

No  venga  Vd.  demasiado  tarde. 
Dispenseme  Vd  ,0rPerdone  Vd. 
No  hay  de  que. 
No  habia  de  que. 
No  habria  de  que. 

Vale  mas  no  decir  nada,  que 

hablar  demasiado. 
Mas  valdria  no,  decir  nada 

mas. 
Cuando     hayamos     acabado 

nuestro  trabajo,  saldremos. 
I  Adonde  Iran  Vds.  ? 
Vamos    a-    oir    a    un  orador 

may  celebre. 
<?  Se  divlrtieron  Vds.  ayer  en 

el  teatro  ? 
Gracias    ;     nos      divertimos 

mucho.  f 
Sigame  ;  tengo  algo  para  Vd. 

[me? 

<;  TieneVd.algo  que  mostrar- 
l  Puede  Vd.  quedarse  aqui  un 

poco? 

Debo  irme  al  instante. 
Estare  aqui  4  las  ocho  meaos 

cuarto  en  punto. 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


11 


We  are  very  glad    that  oiir 

father    has     come    home 

again. 
Do  you  want  an  umbrella  or 

a  stick  ? 

I  do  not  want  either. 
Do  you  want  anything  else  ? 
You  must  tell  him  as  soon  as 

he  arrives. 
As  you  please. 
When    you   go    downstairs, 

take  this  with  you. 
A  week  ago  he  was  in  the 

country,  but  he  came  back 

last  night. 
How  many  days  have   you 

been  here  ? 

Have  you  been  here  long  ? 
We    have     been    here    ten 

minutes. 
I  have  been  learning  Spanish 

for  a  year. 
Let  us  talk  a  little. 
What  have  you  to  tell  me  ? 
We  must  not  catch  cold. 
The  children  will  catch  cold. 
I  have  a  cold. 
She  has  not  got  a  cold. 
They  all  had  colds. 
I  am  afraid  he  will  catch  cold. 
This  bread  is  new  (=f resh)  ; 

it  is  not  cold  yet.  [hot. 
The  coffee  and  the  tea  are  not 
The  iron  was  too  hot. 

At  what  time  do  you  dine  ? 
It  is  already  five  o'clock. 


Nos    alegramos    mucho    de 

que    nuestro    padre  haya 

vuelto  a  casa. 
<?  Quiere  Vd.  un  paraguas  6 

unbaston  ? 

No  quiero  ni  uno  ni  otro. 
<j  Quiere  Vd.  otra  cosa  ? 
Vd.  debe  decirselo  en  cuanto 

llegue. 

Como  Vd.  guste. 
Cuando   Vd.    baje,     llevese 

esto. 
Hace    una    semana     estaba 

en  el  campo,  peroxvolvi6 

anocho. 
i  Cuantos  dias  hace  que  esta 

Vd.  aqui?  [aqui? 

I  Hace  mucho  que  esta  Vd. 
Hace  diez  minutos  que  esta- 

mos  aqui. 
Hace  un  ano  que    aprendo 

espanol. 

Conversemos  un  poco. 
i  Que  tiene  Vd.  que  decirme  ? 
No  debemos  resfriarnos. 
Los  nifios  se  resf riaran. 
Estoy  resf  riado. 
No  esta  resfriada. 
Estaban  todos  resfriados. 
Temo  que  se  resfrie. 
Este  pan  esta  fresco  ;  no  esta 

frio  todavia.  [lientes. 

El  cafe  y  el  te  no  estan  ca- 
El  hierro  estaba   demasiado 

caliente. 

I A  que  hora  comen  Vds.  ? 
Ya  son  las  cinco. 


12 


USEFUL 


Ws  snail  dine  at  half  past  six. 
I  saw  the  people  coming  out 

of  church. 
I  thought  I  should  receive 

more  money  for  my  horses. 
With  your  permission,  I  will 

read  this  letter. 
You  are  greatly  mistaken. 
I  have  come  by  coach,  not 

by  train. 
Send.him  the  answer  by  post. 

The    town    consists  of  five 

hundred  houses. 
This  lady  appears  to  be  taller 

than  her  mother. 
Do  you  know  that  lady  ? 
We  have  known  her  for  some 

time. 
J  have  seen  her,  but  I  do  not 

know  her. 

I  know  her  by  sight. 
We  know  her  by  name. 
What  is  this  called  ? 
I  do  not  remember  what  it  is 

called. 

What  are  these  things  called  ? 
We  do  not  know  what  they  are 

called. 

What  is  your  friend's  name  ? 
My  name  is  George. 
We  shall  come  back  at  the 

end  of  the  month. 
Knock  at  that  door. 
•Somebody  is  knocking  at -the 

door. 
It  is  a  gentleman,  but  I  do  not 

know  his  name. 


Comeremos  a  las  seis  y  media. 
Vi   a   la  gente    salir    de    la 

iglesia. 
Crei  que  recibiria  mas  dinero 

por  mis  caballos. 
Con  permiso   de    Vd.,  leere 

esta  carta. 

Esta  Vd.  muy  equivocado. 
He  venido  en  coche,  no  en  el 

tren. 
Enviele  Vd.  la  respuesta  por 

correo. 
La    ciudad    se    compone  de 

quinientas  casas. 
Esta  senorita  parcce  ser  mas 

alta  que  su  madre. 
I  Conoce  Vd.  a  esa  senora  ? 
Hace  algiin   tiempo   que    la 

conocemos. 
La    he    visto,    pero     no     la 

conozco. 

La  conozco  de  vista. 
La  conocemos  de  n ombre. 
i  Como  se  llama  esto  ? 
No    me    acuerdo    como "  se 

llama. 

<i  Como  se  llaman  estas  cosas  ? 
No  sabemos  como  se  llaman. 

i  Como  se  llama  su  amigo  ? 
Me  llamo  Jorge. 
Volveremos  ta  fines  del  mes. 

Llame  Vd.  a  esa  puerta. 
Alguien  llama  a  la  puerta. 

Es  un  caballero,  pero  no  se 
su  nombre. 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


13 


Go  and  see  who  it  is. 

Whom  did  he  ask  for  ? 

I  am  ashamed. 

Are  you  not  ashamed  ? 

He  ought  to  be  ashamed  to 

say  that. 
I  am  afraid  he :  cannot  wait 

any  longer. 
Were  you   not    very    much 

afraid? 
He  will  be  afraid  to  go  out 

this  evening. 

I  did  not  hear  the  question. 
Ask     whether     they     have 

printed  the  books  yet. 
They  brought  a  message  to 

>say    she    had    died    last 

week. 
I  do  not  always  hear  all  the 

words. 

I  am  very  .hot. 
Are  you  not  warm  ? 
We  shall  be  too  hot  here. 
We  are  not  cold. 
Are  you  -cold  ? 
She  was  very  cold. 
You  would  be  too  cold  in  this 

room. 

These  rooms  are  very  cold. 
The  water  was  not  cold. 
We  have  not  found  what  we 

were  looking  for. 
I  shall  not  go  out  to-day,  or 

to-morrow  either. 
They  arrived  in  time,  but  un- 
f  ortunatelyiie  was  not  there. 
Those  who  are  idle  are  seldom 

happy. 


Vd.  a/ver  quien  es. 
<;  For  quien  ha  preguntado  ? 
Tengo  vergiienza. 
<?  No  tienen  Vds.  vergiienza  ? 
Debia    tener    vergiienza    de 

decir  eso. 
Temp  que  no  pueda  aguardar 

mas. 
<;  No  tenia  Vd.  mucho  miedo? 

Tendra  miedo  de  salir  esta 

noche. 

No  oi  la  pregunta. 
Pregunte  Vd.  si  han  impreso 

los  libros  ya. 
Trajeron  un  parte  diciendo 

que  habia  muerto  la  sema- 

na  pasada. 
No    oigo   sLempre   todas  las 

palabras. 

Tengo  mucho  calor. 
<?  No^iene  Vd.  calor  ?    [calor. 
Tendremos   aqui    demasiado 
No  tenemos  frio. 
i  Tienen  Vds.  frio  ? 
Ella  tenia  tfiucho  frio. 
Vd.  tendria  deinasiado  frio  en 

este  cuarto. 

Estos  cuartos  son  muy  frios. 
El  agua  no  estaba  fria. 
No  hemos  halladoloque  bus- 

cabamos. 
No    saldre    hoy,  ni  manana 

tampoco. 
Llegaron  a  tiempo,  pero  por 

desgracia  el  no  estaba  alii. 
Los  que  son  holgazanes  sou 

raramente  felices. 


14 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


Is  this  house  for  sale  ? 
No,  madam  ;  it  is  to  be  let. 
Have  you  any  rooms  to  let  ? 

I  want  to  take  lodgings  near 

my  friend's  house. . 
How  many  rooms  do  you  wan  t  ? 
I  should  like  three  rooms  on 

the  second  or  third  floor. 
For  how  long  do  you  want 

them? 

For  three  or  four  months. 
How  much  have  I  to  pay  a 

week  ? 
The  price  is  eight  dollars  a 

mojith. 

I  think  it  is  too  much. 
These  boots  do  not  suit  me. 
They  are  too  narrow. 
They  are  not  broad  enough. 
Did  not  the  gloves  fit  him 

well? 

Your  hat  does  not  suit  you. 
It  is  too  tight. 
This  ring  fits  me  better. 
His  coats  suit  him  very  well. 
This    coat   is    very    uncom- 
fortable. 
He  called  me  by  my  name,  but 

I  don't  know  who  he  was. 
They  appear  to  be  a  long  way 

from  here,  but  they  are  not. 

I  shall  finish  the  list  this  very 

day. 
It  is  not  necessary  that  we 

should  keep  them  waiting. 
I  shall  see  him  next  Sunday. 


i  Se  vende  esta  casa  ? 
No,  senora  ;  se  alquila. 
<;Tiene  Vd.  cuartos  para  al- 

quilar  ? 
Deseo  alquilar  un  alojamiento 

junto  a  la  casa  de  mi  ainigo. 
I  Cuantos  cuartos  desea  Vd.  ? 
Quisiera  tres  cuartos  en  el 

segundo  6  tercer  piso. 
<;  Por  cuanto  tiempo  los  quiere 

Vd.? 

Por  tres  6  cuatro  rneses. 
<;  Cuanto  tengo  que  pagar  por 

sernana  ? 
El  precio  es   ocho   duros  al 

mes  (or  por  mes). 
Creo  que  es  demasiado. 
Estas  botas  no  me  vienenbien. 
Son  demasiado  estrechas. 
No  son  bastante  anchas. 
I  No    le    vinieron    bien    los 

guantes  ? 

Su  sombrero  no  le  viene  bien. 
Es  demasiado  estrecho. 
Esta  sortija  me  ajusta  mejor. 
Sus  levitas  le  vienen  inu  y  bien. 
Esta     levita    me    incomoda 

mucho. 
Me    llamo  por  mi  nombre, 

pero  no  se  quien  era. 
Parecen  estar   muy  lejos  de 

aqui,  pero  no  lo  estan. 

Acabare  la  lista  hoy  mismo. 

No  es  preciso  que  les  hagamos 

esperar. 
Le  vere  el  Domingo  que  viene. 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


15 


Do  not  keep  us  waiting  any 

longer. 

Send  for  a  cab. 
I   have  merely  come  to  ask 

when  you  <jan  finish  it. 

Who  has  taken  away  my  cup  ? 
Take  this  umbrella  with  you. 

Will  you  take  the  children 

home  ? 

Are  you  wearing  boots  or  shoes  ? 
In  summer  I  generally  wear 

shoes,  and  in  winter  boots. 

Do  you    generally   wear   a 

jacket  or  a  morning  coat  ? 
My  friend  used  to  wear  his 

clothes  too  tight. 
This  phrase  is  not  correct  ; 

it  is  better  to  write  it  in 

this  way. 
They   went    away    without 

speaking  to  anybody. 
He  always  forgets   the  pro- 
mises he  makes. 
This  wine  is  all  that  we  could 

wish. 
The  provisions  were  not  all 

that  we  could  have  wished. 
I  try  as  much  as  I  can. 
We  are  doing  what  we  can. 
We  will  do  all  we  can. 
It  is  the  least  they  can  do 

for  her. 

Will  you  do  it  for  me  ? 
There  are  many  men    who 

can  neither  read  nor  write. 


No  nos  haga  Vd.  esperar  mas. 

Mande  Vd.  por  un  coche. 
Solo  he  venido  para  pregun- 

tarle    cuando    puede    aca- 

barlo  Vd. 

<:  Quien  se  ha  llevado  mi  taza  ? 
Lleve  Vd.  este  paraguas  con- 

.sigo. 
,;  Quiere  Vd.  llevar  los  niiios 

a  casa  ? 

<i  Lleva  Vd.  botas  6  zapatos  ? 
En  verano    uso    (or     llevo) 

generalmente    zapatos,     y 

botas  en  invierno. 
<?  Usa.  Vd.  generalmente  casaca 

6  levita  ? 
Mi  amigo  usaba(0r  llevaba)su 

vestido  demasiado  estrecho. 
Esta    f rase  no  es    correcta ; 

vale  mas  escribirla  de  este 

modo. 
Se  fueron  sin  hablar  a  nadie. 

Olvida  siempre  las  promesas 

que  hace. 
Este  vino  es  tal  cual  lo  po- 

diamos  desear. 
Los    viveres    no    eran  tales 

cuales  los  podiamos  desear. 
Procuro  cuanto  puedo. 
Hacemos  cuanto  podemos. 
Haremos  cuanto  podamos. 
Es    lo    menos   que    pueden 

hacer  por  ella. 

<;  Quiere  Vd.  hacerlo  por  mi  ? 
Hay  muchos  hombres  que  no 

saben  ni  leer  ni  escribir. 


TJSEFtfL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


Sit  down. 

Thank  you  ;  I  cannot  stay. 

I  took  advantage  of  his  silence 

to  explain  what  you  had 

told  me. 
We  shall  take  advantage  of 

their  absence. 
He   has  gone  away  without 

waiting  for  the  answer. 
Both  these  books  are  ours. 
Both    the     shops     are    that 

merchant's. 
Which  of  the  two   do  you 

prefer  ? 
They  detained  me  nearly  two 

hours. 
He  slept  for  more  than  ten 

hours. 
There  are  more    than    fifty 

ships  in  the  harbour. 
I  receive  more  than  twenty 

letters  a  day  by  post. 
I  cannot  approve  of  his  con- 
duct. 

Nobody  likes  to  be  deceived. 
I    thought    you    wanted    to 

mislead  me. 
We  have  hardly  had  time  to 

read  the  answer. 
I  went  to  see  his  school  yes- 
terday. 
Have  you  been  to  see  your 

bed-room  ? 
Yes  ;    it  is  convenient,  but  it 

is  not  very  big, 
It  is  on  the  ground  floor. 
Mine  is  on  the  third  fioor. 
I  prefer  the  first  floor. 


Sientese  Vd. 

Gracias  ;  no  puedo  quedarme. 

Me  aproveche  de  su  silencio 

para  explicar  lo  que  Vd.  me 

habia  dicho. 
Nos    aprovecharemos   de  su 

ausencia. 
Se    ha  ido  sin  aguardar 

respuesta. 

Ambos  libros  son  nuestros. 
Ambas  tiendas  son  de.  aquel 

comerciante. 
t  Cual  de  los  dos  prefiere  Vd.  ? 

Me    han    detenido    casi  dos 

horas. 
Ha    dormido   mas   de    diez 

horas. 
Hay  mas  de  cincuenta  buques 

*en  el  puerto. 
Recibo  mas  de  veinte  cartas 

por  correo  cada  dia. 
No    puedo  aprobar  su  con- 

ducta. 

Nadie  quiere  ser  enganado. 
Crei    que    Vd.    deseaba  en- 

ganarme. 
Apenas  hemos  tenido  tiempo 

para  leer  la  contestation. 
Ayer  fui  a'ver  su  escuela. 

I  Ha  ido  Vd.  a  ver  su  alcoba  ? 

Si ;  es   comoda,  pero  no  es 

muy  grande. 
Esta  en  el  cuarto  bajo. 
La  mia  esta  en  el  tercer  piso. 
Prefiero  el  primer  piso. 


/  USEFUL  COZTVERSATIOlf  AL  SENTENCES. 


17 


When  you  take  the  letters 

to  the  post,  do  not  forget  to 

pay  the  postage. 
Have  you  aated  them  ? 
Yes,  but  I  have  not  signed 

them. 
I   am  very  fond    of    music 

(=music  pleases  me). 
We  do  not  likexdancing. 
Does  she  like  this  picture  ? 
Do  you  like  the  pictures  in 

the  exhibition  ? 
I  do  not  like*  them  much. 
I  do  not  like  this. 
They  all  like  country^life; 

Used  they  to  like  this  wine  ? 
We  like  the  other  better'. 
Which  of  the  three  do  you 

like  best  ? 

I  am  very  fond  of  apples. 
I  prefer  pears. 
"We  like  oranges  best. 
So  do  I.     So  do  we. 
Everybody  knows  it. 
It  is  not  yet  known  where 
;     they  have  gone. 
I  assure  you  that  I  did  not  do  it. 
While    he   was    speaking,  I 

wrote  the  letter, 
While  they  were  waiting,  he 

went  out. 
Indeed ! 

When  wa£  that  done  ? 
Is  this  frifat  good  to  eat  ? 

We  do  not  think  it"  is  ripe 

yeV 


Cuando  lleve  Vd.  las  cartas 
al  correo,  no  olvide  de 
pagar  el  porte. 

<;  Les  ha  puesto  Vd.  la  fecha? 

Si,  pero  no  las  he  firmado. 

Me  gusta  la  musica. 

No  nos  gusta  bailar. 

<;  Le  gusta  este  cuadro  ? 

<;  Le  gustan  a  Vd.  los  cuadros, 

de  la  exposicion  ? 
No  me  gustan  mucho. 
Esto  no  me  gusta. 
A  todos  ellos  les  gusta  la  vida 

campestre. 

i  Les  gustaba  este  vino  ? 
Nos  gusta  mas  el  otro. 
I  Cual  de  los  tres  les  gusta  i 

Vds.  mas  ? 

Me  gustan  muchb  las  manzanas. 
Prefiero  las  peras. . 
Nos^  gustan  mas  las  naranjas. 
Yotambien.  Nosotrostambien. 
Todo  el  mundo  lo  sabe. 
Aiin  no  se  sabe  adonde  han 

ido. 

Le  aseguro  que  yo  no  lo  hice. 
Mientras  el  hablaba,  yo  es- 

cribia  la  carta. 
Mientras  aguardaban,  salio. 

\  De  veras ! 

I  Cuando  se  hizo  eso  ? 

<jEs  esta  iruta   buena  para 

comer  ? 
No  creemos  que  est6  madura 

todavia. 


18 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


They  bought  it  the  day  before 

yesterday. 
I  will  send  it  to  them  the  day 

after  to-morrow. 
He  does  not  generally  come 

before  seven  o'clock. 
They  will  come  back  at  the 

end  of  a  month. 
It  is  not  true. 
No  such  thing. 
Not  at  all. 
How  long    have    you  been 

living  here  ? 
Since  last  month. 
If  I  pay  you  now,  will  you 

give  me  a  receipt  ? 
He  would  not  pay  the  account 

without  getting  a  receipt. 
How  far  is  it  from  here  to 

London  ? 

About  two  hundred  miles. 
How  many  miles  is  it  from 

Madrid  to  Paris  ? 
I  did  not  think  it  was  so  far. 
He  was  not   showing  much 

dexterity. 
I  live  in  the  west    of  the 

town,  but  formerly  I  lived 

in  the  east. 
We  shall  live  in  the  south, 

and  our  relatives    in  f-  the 

north. 
They  used  to  live  opposite 

the  market. 

Can  you  walk  more  quickly  ? 
Do  not  walk  so  quickly. 
He  always  used  to  walk  too 

quickly. 


Lo  compraron  anteayer. 

Se  lo  enviare  pasado  manana, 

Generalmente  no  viene  antes 

de  las  siete. 
Volveran  al  cabo  de  un  mes. 

No  es  verdad. 

No  hay  tal  cosa. 

De  ningun  modo. 

c  Cuanto  tiempo  hace  que  vive 

Vd.  aqui  ? 

Desde  el  mes  pasado. 
Si  le  pago  ahora,  <;  me  dara 

Vd.  recibo  ? 
No  queria  pagar  la    cuenta 

sin  tomar  recibo 
<;  Que  distancia  hay  de  aqui 

a  Londres  ? 

Cerca  de  doscientas  millas. 
t  Cuantas  millas  Jiay    desde 

Madrid  a  Paris  ? 
No  creia  que  fuese  tan  lejos. 
No  mostraba  mucha  destreza. 

Vivo  en  el  oeste  de  la  ciudad, 
pero  antes  vivia  en  el  este. 

Nosotros  vivir6mos  en  el  sud, 
y  nuestros  parientes  en  el 
norte. 

Vivian  f rente  al  mSrcado. 

<;  Puede  Vd.  andar  mas  aprisa  ? 
No  anden  Vds.  tan  aprisa. 
Andaba   siempre   demasiado 
aprisa. 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


19 


Let  me  copy  it  for  you. 

He  began  to  run,  but  I  easily 

caught  him. 
It  is  not  so  late  as  I  thought. 

It  is  much  later  than  they 
thought. 

They  are  stronger  than  we 
expected. 

You  are  walking  more  slowly 
than  I  like. 

Is  the  station  far  from  here  ? 

Take  the  second  street  on  the 
right. 

Can  you  tell  me  where  the... 
Hotel  is  ? 

You  must  take  the  third  turn- 
ing on  the  left. 

The  house  you  passed  by  this 
morning  is  my  grandfather 's. 

I  want  you   to   repair  this 

lock. 
You   ought  to  have  a  new 

key. 

At  what  time  do  you  breakfast  ? 
They    breakfasted   with  me 

yesterday  morning. 
I  often  breakfast  with  him. 
We  shall  breakfast  with  them 
to-morrow  at  half  past  seven. 
It  is  rather  early  for  us. 

They  were  informed  of  it. 
I  shall  not  be  informed  of 

that. 
Where  does  this  letter  come 

from? 


D£jeme  copjarlo  por  Yd, 
Empez6  a  correr,  pero  le  al- 

cance  facilmente. 
No  es  tan  tarde    como    yo 

creia. 
Es  mucho   mas  tarde  de  lo 

que  creian. 
Son  mas  fuert.es  de  lo  que 

esperabamos. 
Vd.  anda  mas  despacio  de  lo 

que  quiero. 

<?  Esta  Iejosdeaquilaestaci6n  ? 
Tome  Vd.  la  segunda  calle  a 

la  derecha. 
<;  Puede  Vd.  decirme  doixde 

esta  el  hotel... ? 
Vd.  debe  tomar    la   tercera 

calle  a  la  izquierda. 
La  casa  por  la  cual  Vd..  ha 

pasado  esta  manana  es  de< 

mi  abuelo. 
Deseo  que  Vd.  repare    esta: 

cerradura. 
Vd.  debiera  tener  una  Have 

nueva. 

<?  A  que  hora  almuerza  Vd.  ? 
Alinorzaron  conmigo  ayer  (por 

la)  manana. 

Almuerzo  arnenudo  con  el. 
Almorzaremos  con  ellos  ma- 

jaana  a  las  siete  y  media. 
Es  algo  temprano  para  noso- 

tros. 

Tenian  noticia  de  ello. 
No  tendre  noticia  de  eso. 

i  De  d6nde  viene  esta  carta  ? 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


She  owes  her  life  to  him. 
We  shall  soon  know  whether 

it  can  be  done.. 
Why  do  you  not  get  up  ? 
I  am  going  to  get  jip  now, 

but  I  went  to  bed  rather 

late  last  night. 
X  I  shall  go  to  see  them  tb-day, 

even  if  the  weather  is  bad. 
Breakfast  is  ready. 
Supper  is  not  ready. 
Will  you  stop  to  supper  ? 
We  are  going  to  take  tea. 
Why  do  you  not  begin  ? 
You  have  not  told  us  what  we 

ought  to  do. 
We  remember\his  street  very 

well. 
Don't    you  \  remember  that 

gong  ? 
I  remember  this  song,   but 

not  that  one. 
Bo  not  be  angry  ;    it  is  not 

my  fault. 
He  often  gets  angry  without ' 

cause. 
Will  you  come  for  a  walk 

with  me  ? 
I  will  come  for  a  walk  with 

you  with  much  pleasure. 
It  cannot  go  any  farther;  I 

am  very  tired. 
At  what  time  do  your  chil-, 

dren  get  up  ? 

Generally  about  seven  o'clock. 
Mine  does  not  get  up  before 

eight. 
They  never  take  enoueh  care. 


Le  debe  la  vida. 

Pronto    sabremos    si  puede 

hacerse. 

i  For  que  no  se  levanta  Vd.  ? 
Voy  a  levantarme'ahora,  pero 

anoche  me  acoste  un  poco 

tarde. 
Ire  a  verlos  hoy,  aunque  baga 

mal  tiempo. 

El  almuerzo  esta  servido. 
La  cena  no  esta  servida. 
t  Quieren  Vds.  quedarse  a  cenar  ? 
Vamos  a  tomar  el  te. 
I  Por  que  no  empieza  Vd.  ? 
Yd.  no  nos  ha  dicho  lo  que 

debiamos  hacer. 
Nos  acordamos  de  esta  calle 

muy  bien. 
i  No  se  acuerda  Vd.  de  aquella 

cancion  ? 
Me  acuerdo  de  esta  cancion, 

pero  no  de  esa. 
No  se  enoje  Vd.  ;  no  es  culpa 

mia. 
Se  enoja  amenudo  sin  causa. 

<;  Quiere  Vd.  dar  un    paseo 

conmigo  ? 
Con   mucho    gusto  dare  un 

paseo  con  Vd. 
No  puedo  andar  mas  ;    estoy 

muy  cansado. 
i  A  qu6  hora  se  levantan  sus 

hijos  (de  Vd.)  ? 
Generalmente  cerca  de  las  siete. 
El  mio  no  se  levanta  antes  de 

las  ocho. 
Nunca  tienen  bastante  cu  idado. 


TTSEFTTL 


I   have  just  written  him  a 

letter, 
I  have  not  sent  it  to  the  post 

yet. 

My  sister  had  just  gone  out. 
They  had  just  told  him  when 

you  arrived. 

Do  you  not  remember  it  ? 
There  is  nothing  better  than 

a  good  memory. 
'What  is  your  opinion  ? 
Ouropinion  is  that  it  is  not  true. 
Whom  is  that  child  like  ? 
I'm  sure  I  don't  know. 
I  do  not  know  whom  he  is  like. 
I  am  very  like  my  mother. 
It  seems  to  me  that  we  have 

enough. 
Did  you  not  tell  us  that  nothing 

was  the  matter  with  her  ? 
On  the  contrary,  she  has  got 

a  very  bad  cold. 
-His  answer  made  me  laugh. 
If    you    say    that,   you  will 

make  your  teacher  laugh. 
While  he  is  out,  I  .will  read 

the  newspaper. 
I  am  going  to  Paris  this  year, 

to  see  the  exhibition. 
So  am  I.    So  is  my  brother. 

It  is  necessary  that  you  should 

go  with  him. 

So  must  you.     So  must  she. 
He  has  never  been  in  France, 
I  cannot  believe  him. 
Neither  can  we. 
Neither  can  his  master. 


Acabo     de      escribirle     una 

carta. 
No  la  he  mandado  al  correo 

todavia. 

Mi  hermana  acababa  de  salir. 
Acababan  de  decirselo  cuando 

Vd.  llego. 

<;  No  lo  recuerda  Vd.  ? 
No  hay  nada  mejor  que  un-a 

buena  memoria. 
<;  Cual  es  su  parecer  ? 
Nos  parece  que  no  es  verdad. 
t  A  quiense  parece  aquelnino  ? 
Estoy  seguro-de  que  no  lo  se. 
No  se  a  quien  se  parece. 
Meparezcomuchoami  madre. 
Me  parece  que  tenemos  bas- 

tante. 
<;  No  nos  dijeron  Yds.    que 

(ella)  no  tenia  nada  ? 
Al  contrario,  esta  muy  res- 

friada. 

Su  respuesta  me  hizo  reir. 
Si  dice  Vd.  eso,  hara  reir  a  su 

profesor. 
Mientras  esta  ffcera,  leere  el 

diario. 
Yoy  a  Paris  este  ano,  para 

ver  la  exposici6n. 
Yo  ^tambien.     Mi    hermano 

tambien. 
Es  menester  que   Vd.  vaya 

con  el. 

Vd.  tambien.    Ella  tambien. 
Nunca  ha  estado  en  Francia. 
No  puedo  creerle. 
Nosotros  tampoco. 
Su  aino  tampoco. 


22 


USEFUL   CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


Have  you  seen  the  key  of  my 

grammar  ? 
It  is  better  always  to  work 

without  a  key. 
Do  you  remember  the  name 

of  this  flower  ? 
I  should  very  much  like  a 

watch  like  yours.  [left. 
We  shall  have  enough  meat 
I  have  only  one  shilling  left. 
They  only  had  ten  shillings 

left. 

What  is  your  income  ? 
My  income  is  two  hundred 

pounds. 
He  asked   your    permission 

before  taking  the  knife. 
I  cannot   promise    to   bring 

the  things  to-night. 
I  will  try  to  persuade  him  to 

come. 

Is  there  anything  on  this  page 

which  you  cannot  understand? 

What  is  the    name    of    the 

bridge  we  are  going  over  ? 
It  is  dangerous  to  cross  the 

street. 
What  are  you  going  to  do  this 

afternoon  ? 
I  must  first  finish  my  work, 

and  then    I  shall  see  how 

much  time  I  have  left. 
I  do  not  agree  with  you. 
When  is  this  newspaper  pub- 
lished ? 

It  coaxes  out  twice  a  week. 
They  are .  publifthed_pnce  a 

month. 


I  Ha  visto  Vd.  la  clave  de  mi 

gramatica  ? 
Es  mejor  trabajar  siempre  sin 

clave. 
<j  Se  acuerda  Vd.  del  nombre 

de  esta  flor  ? 
De  buena  gana  quisiera  un 

reloj  como  el  de  Vd. 
Nos  quedara  bastante  carne. 
Solo  me  queda  un  chelin. 
Solo    les      quedaban      diez 

chelines. 

<;  Cuanto  tiene  Vd.  de  renta  ? 
Tengo    doscientas    libraa  de 

renta. 
Le  pidi6  permiso  antes    de 

tomar  el  cuchillo. 
No  puedo  prometer  que  traere 

las  cosas  esta  noche. 
Procurare  persuadirle  de  que 

venga. 
I  Hay  algo  en  esta  pagina  que 

Vd.  no  pueda  comprender  ? 
<:  Como  se  llama  el  puente  que 

cruzamos  ? 
Es  peligroso  cruzar  la  calle. 

;  Que  va  .Vd.  a  hacer    esta 

tarde? 
Debo  acabar  mi  trabajo  pri- 

mero,    y      entonces    vere 

cuanto  tiempo  me  queda. 
No  convengo  con  Vd. 
^Cuando     se     publica    este 

peri6dico  ? 

Sale  dos  veces  por  semana. 
Salen  una  vez  por  mes. 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


What  did  you  do  during  your 

holidays  ? 
Everyone      denies       having 

broken  it. 
Have  you  .any  change  about 

you  ? 

The  man  who  served  me  for- 
got to  give  me  the  change. 
You  should    not  have  come 

away  without  it. 
Bo  you  like  Madrid  ? 
He  is  now   employed  in  a 

foreign  firm. 
Please  answer  me  when  I  ask 

you. 
At  what  time  <lo  you  leave 

your  office  ? 
How    long     ago    did     that 

happen  ? 
Do  you  find  Spanish  difficult? 

No,  I  think  it  is  a  very  easy 
language,  but  it  wants 
practice,  like  everything 
else. 

He  cannot  prove  what  he 
said  just  now. 

Will  you  translate  this  sen- 
tence for  me  ? 

I  do  not  know  how  this  word 
is  pronounced. 

We  are  going  to  begin  ;  are 
you  ready  ? 

I  shall  be  ready  in  half  an  hour. 

Do  you  know  the  number  of 
his  house  ? 

What  is  the  news  ? 

I  do  not  know  any  news. 


<;Que    hizo  Vd.  durante  BUS 

vacaciones  ? 
Todo  el  mundo  niega  haberlo 

roto. 
<j  Tiene  Vd.  cambio  encima  ? 

El  tendero  que  me  ha  servido 

haolvidado  darme  el  cambio. 

Vd.  no  debia  (or  debiera)  fiaber 

salido  sin  el  (or  sin  recibirlo). 
I  Le  gusta  a  Vd.  Madrid1^ 
Esta  ahora  colocado  en  una 

casa  extranjera. 
SIrvase  contestarme  cuandd 

le  pregunto. 
;  A  que  hora  sale  Vd.  de  su 

oficina  ? 
<;  Cuanto    tiempo    hace    que^ 

sucedio  eso  ? 
<;  Encuentra    Vd.     dif  icil   el 

espaiiol  ? 
No,  creo  que  es  mr  idioma 

muy  facil,  pero  se  necesita 

practica,  como  en  todo  lo 

demas. 
No  puede  probar  lo  que  acaba 

de  decir 
<;Quiere    Vd.    tradueir    esta 

f  rase  por  mi  ? 
No  se  como  se  pronuncia  esta 

palabra. 
Vamos   &  empezar  ;    £  estan 

Vds.  listos  ? 

Estare  listo  en  media  hora. 
I  Sabe  Vd.  el  niimero  de  WL 

casa  ? 

,;  Que  hay  de  nuevo  ? 
No  se  nada  de  nuevo. 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


I  cannot  agree  with  you. 
We  shall  come  back  sgpn. 
I  do  not  want  tjiem  to  accom- 
pany me  this  tkne. 
They  were    talking    among 

themselves. 
Do  it  again. 
He  does  notfwant  to  eopy  the 

letters  again. 
Look  for  it  carefully. 
I  tried  to  find  it,  but  I  could 

not  see  it  anywhere. 
He  has  gone  to  dress  himself. 
They  cannot  be  long  in  arriving. 
Do  not  be  long  before  coming 

back. 

Do  not  believe  it. 
T  have  let  him  keep  all  the 

documents. 
Will  you  allow  me  to  read 

his  answer  ? 
-This  house  is  the  one  I  like 

best. 
Tell  me  what  they  are  going 

to  do. 
We  shall  not  be  abl§  to  take 

all  these  parcels  with  us. 
Which    paragraph    do     you 

mean  f 

How  difficult,  thisvis  ! 
How  carefully  he  is  doing 

the  svork ! 

How  lovely  these,  flowers  are  ! 
They  are  a  present  from  my 

cousin. 

We  shall  have  a  fine  day  to-day. 
The     country     need*     fine 

weather. 


No  puedo  convenir  con  Vd. 

Volveremos  pronto. 

No  quiero  que  me  acompanen 

esta  vez. 
Hablaban  entre  si. 

Vuelva  Vd.  a  hacerlo. 

No  quiere  volver  a  copiar  las 

cartas. 

Biisquelo  cuidadosamente. 
Procure  hallarlo,  pero  no  pude. 

verlo  en  ninguna  parte. 
Ha  ido  a  vestirse. 
No  pueden  tardar  en  llegar. 
No  tarde  Vd.  en  volver. 

No  lo  crea  Vd. 

Le  he  dejado  guardar  todos 

los  documentos.     . 
<?  Quiere  Vd.  dejarme  leer  su 

respuesta  ? 
Esta  casa  es  la  que  me  gusta 

mas. 
Digame  lo  que  van  a  hacer. 

No  podremos  llevar  todos 
estos  paquetes  con  nosotros. 

<;  Cual  parraf  o  quiere  Vd. 
decir  ? 

I  Que  dif  icil  es  esto  ! 

I  Que  cuidadosamente  estar 
haciendo  el  trabajo ! 

I  Que  hermosas  son  estas  flores  j 

Son  regalo  de  mi  primo. 

Tendremos  hoy  un  buen  dia. 
El     campo     necesita    buen 
tiempo. 


USEFUL  COtfVfiBSATIOHAL 


Is  it  going  to  rain  ?. 

I  think  not. 

We  are  sure  it  is. 

They  are  never  punctual. 

Be  as  punctual  as  you  pos- 
sibly can. 

Such  a  beautiful  thing  is  not 
made  for  nothing. 

He  would  n  ot  dare  to  deny  that. 

How  do  you  dare  to  speak 
so? 

He  asked  my  permission  be- 
fore going  out. 

They  arrived  an  hour  later. 

Why  did  you  call  us  for  such 
a  trifling  thing  ? 

We  have  never  seen  this  kind 
of  machine. 

He  let  us  do  what  we  liked. 

Why  do  you  not   take    off 

your  hat  ? 
When*  I  saw  the  others  had 

gone  away,  I  went  too. 

We  shall  be  there  within  half 

an.  hour. 
At  first  sight,  it  seemed  to  be 

impossible. 
We  must  not  show  it  to  them 

yet. 
Is    it   true    that    you    have 

bought  another  bicycle  ? 
They  wanted  more  money  to 

buy  the  jewels. 
He  spoke  in  a  whisper,  but  I 

heard  all  that  he  said. 
Sit  down  by  my  side.. 


I  Esta  para  Hover  ? 

Creo  que  no. 

Estamos  leguros  de  que  si. 

Nunca  son  puntuales. 

Sea  Vd.  tan  puntual  como  le 

sea  posible. 
Una  cosa  tan  hermosa  no  se 

hace  de  balde  (or  por  nada). 
No  se  atreveria  a  negar  eeo. 
<;  Como  se  atreve  Vd.  a  hablar 

asi? 
Me  pidio  permiso  antes  de 

salir. 

Llegaron  una  hora*  despues. 
i  Por  que  nos  llamo  Vd.  para 

una  cosa  tan  frivola  ? 
No  hemos  visto  nunca  esta 

clase  de  maquina. 
Nos  dejo  hacerlo  que  qui- 

simos. 
I  Por  que  no  se  quita  Vd.  el 

sombrero  ? 
Cuando  vi  que  los  otros  se 

habian    ido,    yo    me    fui 

tambien. 

Estaremos  alii  dentro  de  me- 
dia hora. 
A  primera  vista,  parecia  ser 

imposible. 
No  debemos  mostrarselo  to- 

davia. 
I  Es  verdad  que  ha  comprado 

Vd.  otra  bicicleta  ? 
Necesitaban  mas  dinero  para 

comprar  las  joyas. 
Hablo    en    voz    baja,    pero 

oi  todo  lo  que  dijo. 
Sientese  Vd.  a  mi  lado. 


26 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


There  will  not  be  much  diffi- 
culty in  finding  out  his 
address. 

To  tell  the  truth,  I  forgot  to 
ask  for  the  bill. 

Which  of  these  bookshave  you 
read?  This  one,  or  that  one? 

Take  care  what  you  are  doing. 

Take  care,  or  you  will  fall. 

I  would  do  it  for  you  with 
pleasure,  if  I  had  time. 

We  want  to  ask  you  some- 
thing. 

Did'  you  see  what  they  were 
doing  ? 

Did  you  not  say  I  was  to  copy 
and  send  off  the  letters  ? 

It  is  neither  good  for  you, 
nor  for  me. 

He  acted  under  my  advice. 

She  died  the  next  morning. 

Look  on  the  next  page. 

He  refused  to  help  me,  al- 
though I  asked  him  to. 

Did  you  not  tell  me  that  you 
were  satisfied  ? 

I^advise  you  not  to  say  any- 
thing about  it. 

The  house  is  too  small  for 
us. 

The  greater  part  of  the  houses 
in  this  town  are  built  of 
wood. 

I  shall  not  wait,  as  they  did 
not  say  when  they  would 
be  back. 

I  shall  come,  unless  the 
weather  is^very  bad. 


No  habra  mucha  dificultad  en 
hallar  sus  senas. 

En  verdad,  olvide  pedir  la 

cuenta, 
<j  Cual  de  estos  libros  ha  leido 

Yd.  ?   £  este  6  ese  ? 
Tenga  cuidado  con  lo  que  hace. 
Tenga  cuidado,  6  se  caera. 
Lo  haria  por  Vd.  con  gusto. 

si  tuviera  tiempo. 
Deseamos  preguntarle  algo. 

I  Ha  visto  Vd.  lo  que  hacian  ? 

£  No  dijo  Vd.  que  yo  debiai 

copiar  y  mandar  las  cartas  ? 
No    es  bueno  para   Vd.,  ni 

para  mi. 

El  obro  bajo  mi  consejo. 
Murio  a  la  maiiana  siguiente.' 
Mire  Vd.  la  pagina  siguiente. 
Rehuso  ayudarme,  aunque  se 

lo  pedi. 
<;  No  me  han  dicho  Vds.  que 

estaban  satisfechos  ? 
Le  aconsejo  a  Vd.  que  no  diga 

nada  de  ello. 
La  casa  es  demasiado  pequena 

para  nosotros. 
La  mayor  parte  de  las  casas 

de    esta    ciudad    son     de 

madera. 
No  esperare,  pues  no  dijeron 

cuando  volverian. 

Vendre,  a  menol  que  haga 
muy  m$l  tiempo. 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTElCCIg". 


27 


Do  not  go  away  until  it  leaves 

off  raining. 
See  whether  my  umbrella  is 

behind  the  door. 
Put  the  wine  and  the  fruit  on 

the  table. 
The  child  has  thrown  its  toys 

under  the  table. 
Throw  it  out  of  window. 
Go  on  with  your  work  ;  there 

is  still  a  great  deal  to  be 

done. 
Jt  rained  a  great  deal  here 

yesterday. 
The    weather  will  soon  get 

warmer. 

That  is  not  the  way  to  do  it. 
"We  shall  come   as  soon   as 

we  have  put    our    papers 

straight. 
LThe  servant  has  disarranged 

them. 

He  has  hardly  done  anything. 
It  is  not  worth  my  while  to 

buy  another  one. 
I  hope  to  see  you  again  to- 
morrow morning. 
You  do  not  look  well^ 
Are  you  in  a  hurry  ? 
I  am  not  very  busy  to-day. 
We  gave  him  all    that   we 

had. 
We  did  what  we  could  to 

persuade  them. 
Nothing  we  could  say  to  him 

convinced  him. 
This  room  is  twenty  feet  long, 

and  ten  broad. 


No  so  vaya  Vd.  hasta  que  cese 

de  Hover. 
Mire  Vd.  si  mi  paraguas  esta 

d'etras  de  la  puerta. 
Ponga  Vd,  el  vino  y  la  fruta 

encima  de  la  mesa. 
El  nino  ha  tirado  sus  jugue- 

tes  ciebajo  de  la  mesa, 
Tirelo  Vd.  por  la  ventana. 
Siga   Vd.    con    su    trabajo; 

todavia   hay    mucho  ^  qu* 

hacer. 
Ayer  llovio  mucho  aqui. 

Pronto  hara  mas  calor. 

Ese  no  es  el  modo  de  hacerlo. 
Vendremos  luego  que  haya- 

mos      arreglado     nuestros 

papeles. 
La  criada  los  ha  desarreglado. 

Apenas  ha  hecho  algo 

No    vale    la   pena    de    que' 

compre  otro. 
Espero  volverle  a  ver  manana 

por  la  manana. 
Vd.  no  tiene  buena  cara. , 
^  Tiene  Vd.  prisa  ? 
No  estoy  muy  ocupado  hoy. 
Le  dimos  todo  lo  qiie  tenia- 

mos. 
Hicimos  cuanto  pudimos  para- 

persuadirles. 
Nada  de  lo  que  podiamos  de- 

cirle  le  convencia. 
Este  cuario  tiene  veinte  pies 

de  largo,  y  diez  de  ancho. 


28 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


How  high  is  this  house  ? 

I  am  tired  of  listening  to  him. 

How  do  you  generally  go  to 

your  office  ? 
Sometimes  by  rail,  and  some" 

times  by  omnibus. 
Which  is  the  quickest  way  ? 
There  is  not  much  difference. 
He  does  not  know  how  the 

word  is  spelt. 
When  are  you  going  to  take 

your  holidays  ? 
I  shall  leave  England  in  a 

few  days. 
What   do   you  think   of  the 

weather  we  have  had  dur- 
ing the  last  fortnight  ? 
1  cannot  promise  to  lend  you 

both  songs, 
The    gentleman   who   called 

here  wanted  to  know  why 

you  had  not  sent  the  things 

he  ordered. 
They  used  to  live  here  some 

years  ago. 
Let  us  go  on  the  other  side  of 

the  street. 
Which  is  the    nearest    way 

(to  go)  to  the  river  ? 
They  would  not  be  satisfied. 

if  we  did  what  they  ask. 
What  are  the  four  seasons  of 

the  year  called  in  Spanish  ? 

They  are  as  follow  :  Spring, 
Summer,  Autumn,  and 
Winter. 

He  could  not  do  it,  even  if 
he  wanted  to. 


i  Que  altura  tiene  estacasa  ? 
Estoy  cansado  de  escucharle. 
I  Como  va  Vd.  generalmente 

a  su  oficina  ? 
A  veces  por  el  ferro-carril,  y 

a  veces  por  el  omnibus. 
<;  Cual  es  el  caminomas  corto  ? 
No  hay  mucha  diferencia. 
No  sabe  como  se  deletrea  la 

palabra. 
<?  Cuando    tendra    Vd.     sus 

vacaciones  ? 
Dentro  de  algunos  diassaldre 

de  Inglaterra. 
I  Que  piensa  Vd.  del  tiempo 

que    tenemos    desde  hace 

quince  dias  r 
No  puedo  prometer  prestarle 

ambas  canciones. 
El  caballero   que  vino   aqut 

queria  saber  por    que  no! 

habia  Vd.  enviado  los  arti- 

culos  que  pidio. 
Vivian    aqui    hace    algunos 

an  os. 
Vamos  por  el  otro  lado  de  la 

calle. 
i  Cual  es  el  camino  mas  corto 

para  ir  al  rio  ? 
No  estarian  satisfechos,  si  hi- 

cieramos  lo  que  piden. 
I  Como  se  llaman  en  espariol 

las  cuatro  estaciones  del  afio? 
Son  las  siguientes:    Prima- 

vera,     Verano,  .  Otoiio,    e 

Invierno. 
No    podria   fiacerlo,  aunque 

quisiera. 


.USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


29 


I  have  not  had  much  oppor- 
tunity of  speaking  Spanish 
since  I  came  back  to 
England. 

How  long  were  you  in  South 
America  ? 

I  was  there  nearly  six  months. 

You  ought  to  speak  Spanish 
fairly  well. 

Excuse  me  for  keeping  you 
waiting  so  long. 

They  went  home  without 
asking  leave. 

Have  you  heard  what  hap- 
pened last  night  ? 

As  you  were  not  there,  we 
went  away  at  once. 

Would  you  advise  me  to 
accept  the  money  ? 

Write  and  tell  them  not  to 
come. 

He  came  after  I-  Jiad 
started. 

I  am  glad  you  are  better. 

I    wonder   (=who     knows) 

what  they  Tvill  bring. 
Did  anybody  call  to  see  me 

while  I  was  out  ? 
,A    gentleman    enquired   for 

you,  but  he  woqid  not  tell 

me  his  name. 
Tell  me  what  you  want,  and  I 

will  give  it  to  you  if  I  can. 
I  was  very  much  surprised 

when  you  told  me  that. 
He  never  pays  what  he  owes 
Give  me  some  more  apples, 

if  there  are  any. 


No   he  tenido  mucha  opor- 

tunidad     de     hablar     es- 

panol  desde  que    volvi  a 

Inglaterra. 
<j  Cuanto  tiempo  estuvo  Vd. 

en  Sud  America  ? 
Estuve  alii  casi  seis  meses. 
Vd.  debe  hablar  espanol  bas- 

tante  bien. 
Dispenseme  Vd.  que  le  haya 

hecho  aguardar  tan  to  tiempo. 
Se    fueron  a  casa  sin  pedir 

licencia. 
I  Ha  oido  Vd.  lo  que  paso 

anoche  ? 
Como  Vd.  no  estaba  ^lli,  nos 

f  uimos  al  instante. 
<?  Me    aconsejaria    Vd.  *  qne 

acepte  el  dinero  ? 
Escribales  para  decirles  que 

no  vengan. 
Vino  despues  que  yo  habia 

partido. 
Me  alegro  de  que  Vd.  6e  halle 

mejor. 
<;  Quien  sabe  lo  que  traeran  ? 

I  Vino  alguien  a  verme  mien- 

tras  estaba  f  uera  ? 
Un  caballero    pregunt6  por 

Vd.,  pero  no  quiso  decirme 

su  nombre. 
Digame  lo  que  necesita  Vd., 

y  se  lo  dare  si  puedo. 
Me  sorprendi  mucho  cuando 

Vd.  me  dijo  eso. 
Nunca  paga  lo  que  debe. 
Deme  Vd.  mas  manzaiias,  sj 

las  hay. 


30 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


I  slept  nearly  all  day. 

You  must  have  been    very 

tired. 
Do  not  go  out  at  the  same 

time  as  the  other  clerk. 
Do  not  sell  it  for  Jess  than 

twelve   shillings  and  six- 
pence. 
I  very  much  doubt  whether 

they  will  give  me  so  much 

for  this  ring. 

The  fire  has  not  gone  out  yet. 
This  word  is  not   spelt  cor- 
rectly. 

Whose  turn  is  it  ? 
It  was  not  my  turn. 
They  have  just  reached  home. 
Whom  has  he  married  ? 
She   is  going  to  marry  her 

cousin. 
It  is  not   worth   more  thsftTf 

five  pesetas. 
How  much  have  you  paid  for 

this? 
I  will  pay  you  as  soon  as  I 

possibly  can. 
"Jake  it  upstairs  at  once. 
Did  you  go  thereon  horseback? 
No  ;  we  all  went  on  foot. 
They  have  gone  by  coach. 
Everyone  said  ati   the    time 

that  it  was  impossible. 
Now  it  appears  to  be    easy 

enough. 
When  will  the  performance 

take  place  ? 
You    should   try    to    speak 

Spanish  oftener. 


Dormi  casi  todo  el  dia, 

Vd.  debe  haber  estado  muy 

cansado. 
No  saiga  Vd  a  la  misma  hora 

que  el  otro  depend iente. 
No  lo  venda  Vd.  por  menos 

de    doce    chelines  y  seis 

peniques. 
Dudo  mucho  que    me    den 

tan  to  por  esta  sortija. 

[todavia. 

El  fuego  no  se  ha  apagado 
Esta   palabra   no    esta    bien 

deletreada. 
I  A  quien  le  toca  ? 
No  me  tocaba  a  mi. 
Acaban  de  llegar  a  casa. 
I  Con  quien  se  ha  casado  ? 
Ella    se    va  a  casar  con  su 

primo. 
No  vale  mas  de  cinco  pesetas. 

I  Cuanto  ha  pagado  Vd.  por 

esto? 
Le  pagare  a  Vd.  tan  pronto 

como  me  sea  posible. 
Llevelo  arriba  al  instante. 
i  Fue  Vd.  alii  a  caballo  ? 
No  ;  todos  f  uimos  a  pie. 
Han  ido  en  coche. 
Todo  el  mundo  dijo  entonces 

que  era  imposible. 
Ahora    parece    ser    bastante 

facil. 
t  Cuando  se  celebrara  la  f  un- 

cion  ? 
Vd.   debia    procurar    hablar 

espaiiol  mas  amenudo. 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


31 


They  could  not  agree  among 

themselves. 
How  long  has  your  brother 

been  in  Spain  ? 
Where  is  he  going  to  next  ? 
He  is  going  to  Italy,  but  he 

will  not  stay  there  long. 
Read  the  letter  to  me  again. 
We  were  very   sorry  not  to 

find  them  at  home. 
It  may  be    so,    but  I  very 

much  doubt  it. 
It  was  raining  very  hard  when 

we  went  out. 
It  thundered  a  great  deal  last 

night. 

Did  it  lighten  yesterday  ? 
Perhaps  it  will  snow  to-morrow. 
Did     it     hail      much     this 

morning  ? 
It  is  freezing  hard. 
I    think   it    will    thaw    to- 
morrow. 
We  do  not  believe  what  she 

has  just  told  us. 
I  have  not  enough  paper  to 

finish  my  lesson 
Unfortunately,  you  did   not 

know  it  in  time. 
It  is  not  very  long  since  it 

happened. 
How  long   did  you  stay  in 

Parte  ? 
This  bridge  is  very  old  ;  it  is 

hardly  safe. 
There  will  not  be  any  difficulty 

in  finding  another  one. 
Tell  me  if  I  may  keep  it. 


No  podian  convenir  entre  si. 

i  Cuanto  tiempo  hace  que  su 

hermano  esta  en  Espana  ? 
,;  Adonde  va  luego  ? 
Va  a  Italia,  pero  no  se  que- 

dara  alii  mucho  tiempo. 
Vuelva  Vd.  a  leerme  la  carta. 
Sentimos  mucho  no  hallarlos 

en  casa. 
Puede  ser  que  si,  pero  lo  dudo 

mucho. 
Llovia    muy   fuerte    c'uando 

salimos. 
Anoche  trono  mucho. 

I  Relampagueo  ayer  ? 

Quizas  nevara  ibanana. 

I  Ha  granizado    mucho    esta 

manana  ? 

Esta  helando  muchisimo. 
Creo  que  deshelara  manana. 

No  creemos  lo  que  acaba  de 

decirnos. 
No  tengo.bastante  papel  para 

acabar  mi  leccion, 
Por  desgracia,  Vd.  no  lo  supo 

a  tiempo. 
No  hace  mucho  tiempo  que 

sucedio. 
i  Cuanto  tiempo  se  quedo  Vd. 

en  Paris  ? 
Este  puente  es  muy  viejo  ; 

apenas  esta  seguro* 
No  habra  ninguna  dificultad 

en  hallar  otro. 
Digame  si  puedo  guardarlo. 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


Do  not  trouble  yourself  about 

that. 
How  soon  shall  we  arrive  at 

the  house  ? 
I  would  not  pay  so    much 

for  that  picture. 
*  I   called  on  you   yesterday, 

but  you  were  out. 
Drink  out  of  this  cup  ;  there 

is  no  other. 
Whose    umbrella    did    you 

borrow  ? 
Is  this  dog  yours,   or  your 

brother's  ? 

Did  you  go  to  town  on  foot  ? 
No,  we  went  by  rail. 
My  -train  is    nearly  always 
i  late. 
I  thought  the  weather  would 

change. 

How  cold  it  is  to-day  ! 
She  has  got  a  head-ache. 
This  child  had  the  tooth-ache 

last  week. 
Do  not  fail  to  come  by  half 

past  seven. 

I  have  sent  for  a  porter. 
Go  and  fetch  me  a  cab. 
I  shall  leave  here  to-morrow 

morning. 
It  is  very  dusty. 
\  There  was  not  much  mud. 
Can  you  speak  any    foreign 

language  ? 
This  word  is  not.  pronounced 

as  it  is  spelt. 
How  much  does  the  account 

come  to  ? 


No  se  moleste  Vd.  por  eso. 

i  En  cuautotiempollegaremos 

a  la  casa  ? 
No  queria  pagar    tanto  por 

ese  cuadro. 
Fui  a  verle  ayer,  pero  Vd. 

estaba  f  uera. 
Beba  de  esta  taza  ;  no  'hay 

otra. 
I A  quien  hapedido  Vd.  pres- 

tado  el  paraguas  ? 
£  Es  este  perro  suyo,  6  de  su 

hermano  ? 

I  Fue  Vd.  a  pie  a  la  ciudad  ? 
No  ;  f  uimos  por  el  f  errocarril. 
Mi    tren    esta    casi  siempre 

retrasado. 
Crei  que  cambiaria  el  tiempo. 

i  Que  frio  hace  hoy  ! 
Ella  tiene  dolor  de  cabeza. 
Este    nino    tenia    dolor    de 

muelas  la  semana  pasada. 
No  deje  Vd.  de  venir  a  eso  de 

las  siete  y  media. 
He  enviado  por  un  mozo. 
Vaya  a  buscarme  un  coche. 
Saldre    de  aqui  manana  por 

la  manana. 
Hay  mucho  polvo. 
No  habia  mucho  barro. 
i  Sabe     Vd.     hablar     algun 

idioma  extranjero  ? 
Esta  palabra  no  se  pronuncia 

corao  se  deletrea. 
i  A  cuanto  llega  la  coenta  ? 


COKYBRSATIONAL  SENTENCE!. 


I  hare  not  seen  him  for  six 

months. 

He  is  going  tocall  on  his  lawyer. 
You  do  not  visit  us  very  fre- 
quently. 
There  isn't  room  for  so  many 

people  in  this  room. 
Why  did  you  let  him  go  away 

before  having  done  all  the 

work  ? 
He  was  carrying)  the  box  on 

his  head. 
Where   does   this   road  lead 

to? 

You  ought  to  take  more  care. 
Is  this  all  the  wine  there  is 

left? 
I  hope  you  are  not  making  a 

mistake. 

When  were  these  houses  built? 
Show  the  man  your  ticket  as 

you  go  in. 
We  lost  our  train,  although  it 

was  ten  minutes  late. 
The  weather  was  very  fine 

when  the  children  went  out. 
Afterwards  it  rained  a  great 

deal. 
I  should  like  to  speak  to  you 

before  I  go  away. 
I  never  feel  well    in    cold 

weather. 

Why  do  you  not  sit  down  ? 
We  are  in  a  great  hurry. 
It  is  impossible  for  me  to 

leave  business  earlier. 
My  father's  business  compels 

him  to  travel  a  great  deal. 


Hace  seis  meses  que  no  le  he 

visto. 

Va  a  ver  a  su  abogado. 
Vd.     no     nos     visita     muy 

frecuentemente. 
No  cabe  tanta  gente  en  este 

cuarto. 
I  For  que  le  ha  dejado  Vd. 

irse  antes  de  haber  hecho 

todo  el  trabajo  ? 
Llevaba  la  caja  sobre  la  ca- 

beza. 
<;  Adonde  va  (or  conduce)  este 

camiiio  ? 

Vd.  debieratenermascuidado. 
t  Es  este  todo  el  vino    que 

queda  ? 

Espero  que  Vd.  no  se  equivoca. 
[casas  ? 

<;  Cuando  se  edificaron  estas 
Muestre  Vd.  al  hombre    su 

billete  al  entrar. 
Perdimos  nuestro  tren,  aunque 

iba  diez  minutos  retrasado. 
Hacia    muy     buen     tiempo 

cuando  salieron  los  ninos. 
Despues  llovio  mucho. 

Quisiera  hablarle  a  Vd.  antes 

de  irme. 
Nunca  me    siento    bien    en 

tiempo  frio. 

£  For  que  no  se  sientan  Vds.  ? 
Estamos  muy  deprisa. 
Me  es  imposible  salir  de  los 

negocios  mas  temprano. 
Lasocupacionesdemi  padre  le 

obligan  a  viajar  muchisimo. 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


He  was  in  London  at  the  end 

of  last  month. 
"When  you  came  back,  it  was 

very  late. 
How  is  this  phrase  translated 

into  Spanish  ? 
I  am  afraid  it  will  rain  during 

the  day. 
'  Have  you  at  last  been  able  to 

find  his  address  ? 
I  thought  you  knew  French 

and  German. 
I  can  read  books  written  in 

Spanish  and  Italian. 
He  cannot  speak  either  of  the 

languages. 
We  do  not  know  whether  they 

will  take  our  advice. 
I  cannot  understand  why  it 

is  not  here. 
It  is  a  pity  you  cannot  Stay 

any  longer. 

What  is  the  reason  of  that  ? 
This  rule  has  several  excep- 
tions. 
In  my  opinion,  this  chain  is 

$ie  cheapest. 
They  will  pay  me  the  balance 

next  month. 
The  boys  would  not  be  quie^ 

although  I  told  them  to. 
'  Tell  them  again,  and  we  will 

see  whether  they  obey  you. 
What  is  the  price  of  a  return 

ticket  ?  [to  travel  ? 

By  what  class  are  you  going 
I  generally  travel  third  class. 


Estuvo  en  Londres  a  fines  del 

mes  pasado. 
Cuando  Vd.  volvio,  era  muy 

tarde. 
I  Como  se  traduce  esta  frase 

en  espanol  ? 
Temo  que  llueva  durante  el 

dia. 
I  Ha  podido  Vd.  al  fin  hallar 

su  direccion  (or  sus  senas)  ? 
Orel  que  Vd.  sabia  frances  y 

aleman. 
Puedo  leer  libros  escritos  en 

espanol  e  italiano. 
No  sabe  hablar  ninguna  de 

ambas  lenguas. 
No  sabernos  si  tomaran  nues- 

tro  consejo. 
No  puedo  comprender  por  que 

no  esta  aqui. 
Es  una  lastima  que  Vd.  no 

pueda  quedar^e  mas  tiempo. 
I  Cual  es  el  motivo  de  eso  ? 
Esta  regla  tiene  varias  excep- 

ciones. 
En  mi  opinion,  esta  cadena 

es  la  mas  barata. 
Me  pagaran  el  saldo  .el  mes 

que  vjene. 
Los  ninos  no  querian  callarse, 

aunque  se  lo  mande. 
Vuelva  Vd.  a  mandarselo,  y 

veremos  si  le  obedecen. 
<;  Cual  es  el  precio  del  billete 

de  ida  y  vuelta  ? 

<j  En  que  clase" va  Vd.  a  viajar  ? 
Por  lo  general,  viajo  en  ter- 
cera  clase. 


,  USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


35 


It  is  cheaper,  and  the  carria- 
ges are  very  comfortable. 

We  should  like  you  to  wait 
for  us. 

Be  careful,  or  else  you  will 
hurt  yourself. 

He  seemed  very  much  sur- 
prised at  seeing  you  here. 

Let  me  carry  it  for  you. 

If  you  move  a  little  this  way, 
there  will  be  room  for 
everybody. 

iThe  servant  stole  this  money 
from  his  master. 

Those  bottles  are  full  of  wine. 

Put  the  glass  here,  near  this 
one. 

Are  there  any  friends  of  yours 

here  this  evening  ? 
What  do  you    think  of  the 

climate  of  tnis  country  ? 
Sit  round  the  fire. 
Have  you  ever  been  in  Spain  ? 

I  should  very  much  like  to 

spend  a  few  weeks  there. 
Tell  the  man  to  come  in. 
That  is  the  house   we1  used 

to  live  in. 

What  is  it  they  are  making  ? 
This  is  the  smallest  watch  I 

have  seen. 
Show  me  the  clock  you  bought 

a  few  days  ago. 
It  only  cost  me  thirty  shillings. 
Do- not  tell  them  so  on  any 

account. 
He  knew  nothing  about  it. 


Es  mas  barato,  y  los  coches 

son  muy  comodos. 
Quisieramos    que     Vd.    nos 

esperase. 
Tenga   Vd.    cuidado,    6    se 

lastimara. 
Parecio  sorprenderse  mucho 

al  verle  aqui. 

Dejeme  que  lo  lleve  por  Vd. 
Si  Vd.  se  corre  un  poco  hacia 

aqui,     habra     lugar     para 

todos. 
El  criado  robo  este  dinero  a 

su  amo.  [vino. 

Esas  botellas  estan  llenas  de 
Ponga  Vd.  el  vaso  aqui,  cerca 

de  este. 
4  Hay  aqui  esta  noche  algunos 

amigos  de  Vd.  ? 
I  Que  piensa  Vd.  del  clima  de 

este  pais  ?  [f  uego. 

Sientense  Vds.  al  rededor  del 
,;  Ha  estado  Vd.  alguna  vez  en 

Espana? 
Me  gustaria  mucho  pasar  al- 

gunas  semanas  alii. 
Diga  Vd.  al  hombre  que  entre. 
Esa  es  la  casa  en  que  yiviamos. 

<j  Que  es  lo  que  estan  hacienda  ? 

Este  es  el  reloj  mas  pequeno 
que  he  visto. 

Muestreme  el  reloj  que  corn- 
pro  Vd.  hace  algunos  dias. 

Solo  me  costo  treinta  chelines. 

No  se  lo  diga  Vd.  de  ningun 
modto. 

No  sabia  nada  de  tllo. 


3G 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


She  has  gone  to  the  shop  her- 
self,   on    account    of    the 

mistake  in  the  bill. 
Come  nearer  the  table ;  I  should 

like  to  show  you  something. 
I  usually  work  an  hour  a  day 

at  home.  [price. 

They  have  gone  to  enquire  the 
This  way. — That  way. 
Which  way  ? 
You  all  seem  very  tired. 
My  companion  is  tired  too. 

[tea? 

Will  you  take  another  cup  of 
If  you  lose  this  piece  of  paper, 

we  will  give  you  another. 
My  brother  has  obtained  a 

good  situation.  [to  ?, 

Where  is  the  coachman  going 
Where  do  you  come  from  ? 
We  saw    him    last    Sunday 

morning.  .[week. 

She  will  come  next  Tuesday 
I  do  not  suppose  they  will  be 

back  until  next  month. 
The  concert  will  take  place 

to-morrow  evening. 
Did  you  hear  from  your  father 

yesterday  morning  ? 
He  will  go  home  again  early 

next  week. 
Where  were  your  cousins  last 

week  ? 
He  never  comes  before  the 

end  of  the  month. 
Who  is  there  ?    It  is  I. 
It  is  not  he.    Is  it  they  ? 
It  is  you.  Is  it  not  your  uncle? 


Ella  misma  ha  ido  a  la  tienda, 

a    causa   del    error  en  la 

cuenta. 
Acerquense  Vds.  mas  a  la  mesa; 

quisiera  mostrarles  algo. 
Acostumbro  a  trabajar  una  hora 

en  casa  cada  dia.  [cio. 

Han  ido  a  inf ormarse  del  pre- 
Por  aqui.—  For  alii. 
i  For  donde  ?          [cansados; 
Vds.  parecen  estar  todos  muy 
Mi  companero  tambien  esta 

cunsado.  [de  te  ? 

<?  Quiere  Vd.  tomar  otra  taza 
Si  pierde  Vd.  este  pedazo  de 

papel,  le  daremos  otro. 
Mi  herniano  ha  logrado  una 

buena  colocacion. 
I  Adonde  .va  -el  cochero  ? 
^  De  donde  viene  Vd.  ? 
Le  vimos  el' Domingo  pasado 

por  la  manana. 
Vendra  del  martes  en  ocho  dias. 
No  supongo  que  vuelvan  hasta 

el  mes  que  viene. 
El    concierto     se    celebrara 

'manana  por  la  noche.. 
(jRecibio  Vd.noticias  de  su  pa- 
dre ayer  por  la  manana  ? 
Volvera  a  casa  a  primeros  de 

la  semana  que  viene. 
<;  Donde  estaban  susprimos  de 

Vd.  la  semana  pasada  ? 
Nunca  viene  hasta  fines  del 

mes. 

I  Quien  esta  ahl  ?    Soy  yo. 
No  es  el.    ^  Son  ellos  ? 
Es  Vd.    i  No  es  su  tio  de  Vd.  ? 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


Do  not  put  on  your  gloves. 
Ask    what ,  the     messenger 

wants. 
Ask  whether  you  may  .keep  it. 

It  is  not  time  to  leave  off  yet. 
Tell  the  boy  to  make  haste. 

He  would  not  make  haste. 
It  hardly   ever  snows  here, 

even  in  the  severest  winters. 
Are  you  sleepy  ? 
I  am  very  sleepy. 
The  sun  is  not  shining: 
The  moon  was  shining  last 

night. 

It  is  not  daylight.     It  is  night. 
The  sun  is  getting     Is  the 

moon  rising  ?         [drawer. 

Nothing  is  missing  from  this 

How  much  a  yard  is  this  silk  ? 

[walk  ? 

Are  you  disposed  to  go  for  a 
They    haye    gone    to    dress 

themselves, 
He  will  change  his  opinion 

when  he  hears  that. 
I  am  very  much  obliged  to  you. 
On  returning  home,  I  found 

the  letter.  [certain. 

He  told  me  he  knew  it  for 
Do  not  pay  any  attention  to 

that. 
It  is  necessary  to  pay  attention 

to  what  the  teacher  says. 
The  children  would  not  dare 

to  go  into  the  garden  with* 

out  permission. 


No  se  ponga  Vd.  los  guantes. 
Pregunte  Vd.  lo  que  quiere  el 

mensajero. 
Pregunte  si  *lo    puede    Vd. 

guardar. 

No  es  tiempo  de  cesar  aiin. 
Diga  Vd.    al    chico  que    se 

apresure. 

No  queria  apresurarse. 
Apenas  nieva  aqui,  aiin  en  los 

inviernos  mas  crudos. 
i  Tiene  Vd.  sueiio  ? 
Tengo  mucho  sueiio. 
No  hace  sol. 
Hacia  luna  anoche. 

No  es  de  dia.    Es  de  noche. 
El   sol    se   pone.    <;  Sale    la 

luna  ? 

Nada  falta  de  este  cajon. 
<;  Cuanto  vale  una  yarda  de 

esta  seda  ?  [paseo  ? 

«;  Tiene  Vd.  ganas  de  dar  uu 
Han  ido  a  vestirse. 

Al    saber  eso,    cambiara  de 

opinion. 

Le  estoy  muy  agradecido. 
Al  volver  a  casa,  encontre  la 

carta. 

Me  dijo  que  lo  sabia  de  cierto. 
No  haga  Vd.  caso  de  eso. 

Es  necesario  prestar  atencion 
a  lo  que  dice  el  maestro. 

Los  niiios  no  se  atreverian  a 
entrar  en  el  jardin  Bin 
permisO. 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


I  beg  you  will  show  it  to  us 

at  once. 
I  cannot  pronounce  very  well 

yet.  [takes. 

I  am  afraid  of  making  mis- 
He  will  probably  reply    by 

re  turn,  of  post. 
He  is  in  the  habit  of  coming 

once  a  week. 
I  used  to  be  in  the  habit  of 

meeting  him  every  day. 
Come  upstairs.— Come  down- 
stairs. 

Please  walk  upstairs. 
Mr.  N —  lives  next  door. 
Do  not  fail   to  be   there   at 

noon. 
I  seldom  used  to  go  to  bed 

before  midnight. 
Ask  this  man  where  the  en- 
trance is. 
We  could  not  find  the  way 

out  for  some  time. 
To-morrow  is  a  holiday. 
Did     you     enjoy     yourself 

during  your  holidays  ? 
You  must  not  stay  where  you 

are.  [umbrella  ? 

Don't  you  know  your  own 
I  am  not  quite  sure  whether 

it  is  mine,  or  not. 
Have  you  given  anything  to 

the  waiter  ? 
I  suppose  that  the   concert 

will  soon  be  over. 
I  suppose  so  too. 
Whose  turn  is  it  to  pay  to-day  ? 
It  is  yours. — Mine,  I  think. 


Le  ruego  que  nos  lo  muestre 

al  instante. 
No    puedo  pronunciar  muy 

bien  todavia. 
Temo  equivocarme. 
Probablemente  contestara   a 

vuelta  de  correo. 
Acostumbra  a  venir  una  vez 

por  semana. 
Acostumbraba  a  encontrarle 

cada  dia. 
Suba  Vd.—Baje  V4. 

Sirvase  Vd.  subir.  [del  lado. 
El  Senor  N —  vive  en  la  casa 
No  falte  Vd.  alii  al  mediodia. 

Rara  vez  me  acostaba  antes  de 

media  noche. 
Pregunte  Vd.  a  este  hombre 

donde  esta  la  entrada. 
No  pudimos  hallar  la  salida 

por  algiin  tiempo. 
Manana  es  fiesta. 
i  Se  divirtio  Vd.  durante.sus 

vacaciones  ?. 
Vd.  no  debe  quedarse  donde 

esta.  [raguas  ? 

i  No  conoce  Vd.  supropio  pa- 
No  estoy  bien  seguro  si  ed 

mio,  6  no. 
I  Ha  dado  Vdr  algo  al  mozo  ? 

Supongo  que  pronto  acabara 

el  concierto. 
Tambien  lo  stipongo  yo. 
<;  A  quien  le  toca  pagar  hoy  ? 
Le  toca  a  Vd. — A  mif  me  parece. 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


39 


It  is  not  your  brother's  turn. 
We  are  greatly  obliged  to  you 

for  this  visit. 
Let  me  know  as  soon  as  you 

can.  [trouble. 

It  caused  us  a  great  deal  of 
I  assure  you  it  is  impossible. 

I  shall  fall  asleep  directly  I 

lie  down. 
You  had    better  go  to  bed 

soon. 
Tell  the  children  not  to  go 

away  yet.  [the  river. 

We  walked  along  the  bank  of 
Your  coat  is  hanging  behind 

the  door. 
Go  on  with  your  work. 

It  is  not  a  question  of  money, 

but  of  time. 
There    must   be  some  better 

way  of  arranging  it. 
There  is  no  doubt  about  that. 
Repeat  these  words  after  the 

teacher.  [vice. 

He  would  not  follow  my  ad- 
Everybody  was  asking  after 

you. 
The  child  has  fallen  asleep,  in 

spite  of  the  noise. 
Have  you  cut  your  finger  ? 
He  only  writes  to  us  once  a 

month* 
What  did  she  say  about  that 

when  she  last  wrote  ? 
Please  pass  me  a  clean  plate. 


Nole  toca  a  su  hermano. 
Le  agradecemos  a  Yd*  mucho 

esta  visita. 
Hagamelo  Vd.  saber  tan  pronto 

como  pueida. 
Nos  molesto  mucho. 
Le  aseguro  a  Yd.  que  es  im- 

posible. 
Me   dormire  en  cuanto  me 

acueste. 
Es  mejor  que  se  vaya  Vd.  a 

la  cama  pronto. 
Diga  Yd.  a  los  ninos  que  no  se 

vayan  aiin. 

Andabamos  a  lo  largo  del  rio. 
Su  levita  esta  colgada  detras 

de  la  puerta. 

Siga  Yd.  con  su  trabajo  (or 

Continue  Yd.  su  trabajo). 
No  es  cuestion  de  dinero,  sino 

de  tiempo. 
Debe  haber  algiin  otro  modo 

mejor  de  arreglarlo. 
No  hay  duda  alguna  sobre  eso. 
Repita  Yd.  estas  palabrafl  des- 

pues  del  maestro. 
No  queria  seguir  mi  consejo. 
Todo  el  mundo  preguntaba' 

por  Yd. 
El  niiio  se  ha  dormido,  a  pe- 

sar  del  ruido. 

I  Se  ha  cortado  Yd.  el  dedo  ? 
Solo  nos  escribe  una  vez  al 

mes. 
<;Quedijo  ella  sobre  eso  cuando 

escribio  la  ultima  vez  ? 
Sirvase  Yd.  pasarme  u^i  placo 

limpio. 


40 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


It  is  no  use  to  say  that. 

See  whether  you  can  borrow 

another  copy  of  the  book. 
We  have  sent  him  to  borrow 

a  dictionary. 
There  is  no  need  to  make  so 

much  haste. 
I  was  very  much  surprised 

that  you  did  not  come. 
They  were  looking  attentively 

at  each  other. 

After  all,  it  does  not  matter. 
I  cannot  see  the  necessity  for 

doing  it  again. 
Will  you  change  this  cheque 

for  me  ? 
I  will  take  half  in  gold,  and 

the  other  half  in  silver. 
Thank  you. — Don't  mention  it. 
It  is  some  time  since  he  wrote 

to  me. 

We  saw  them  not  long  ago. 
What  is  there  to  eat  ? 
There  is  nothing  ready  now. 
We  are  in  a  great  hurry. 
We  shall  arrive  about  2  o'clock. 
He  is  the  same  age  as  his 

cousin.  [house. 

I  saw  him  as  he  passed  by  the 
However  difficult  it  may  seem, 

you  must  try  to  do  it. 
The  more  I  give   him,  the 

more  he  wants. 
The  English,  as  well  as  the 

foreign  letters*  have  been 

posted. 
How  much  is  the  postage  of  a 

letter  from  here  to  Spain  ? 


No  sirve  de  nada  decir  eso. 
Vea  Vd.  si  puede  tomar.preb- 

tado  otro  ejemplar  del  libro. 
Le  hemos  mandado   a  pedir 

prestado  un  diccionario. 
No  hay  razon  para  darse  tanta 

prisa. 
Extrane  mucho  que  Vd.  no 

viniese. 
Se  miraban  atentamente  unos 

a  otros. 

Al  fin  y  al  cabo,  no  importa. 
No   puedo   ver  la  necesidad 

de  hacerlo  de  nuevo. 
<:  Quiere  Vd.  cambiarme  este 

cheque  ? 
Tomare  la  mitad  en  oro,  y  la 

otra  mitad  en  plata. 
Gracias. — No  hay  de  que. 
Hace  algun  tiempo  que  me 

escribio.  [tiempo. 

Los  vimos  no  hace    mucho 
(i  Que  hay  para  comer  ? 
No  hay  nada  listo  ahora. 
Estamos  muy  de  prisa. 
Llegaremos  a  eso  de  la  dos. 
Tiene  la  misma  edad  que  su 

primo. 

Lo  vi  cuando  paso  por  la  casa. 
Por  dificil  que  parezca,  Vd, 

debe  probar  a  hacerlo. 
Cuanto    mas    le     doy,    mas 

quiere. 

Tanto  las  cartas  inglesas  como  ^ 
las     extranjeras    se     nan. 
echado  al  correo. 
<i  Cuanto  vale  el  f  ranqueo  de 
una  carta  de  aqui  a  Espana  ? 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


41 


With  regard  to  the  assertion 

he    made,    we    must    see 

whether  it  can  be  proved. 
I  tied  the  parcel  tightly,  so 

that  the  things  should  not 

come  out. 
Notwithstanding    this,      the 

string  broke.  [gave  him. 
He  always  spent  what  we 
You  shall  be  served  in  five 

minutes.  [ing  so  fast. 

There  is  no  pleasure  in  walk- 
The  table  is  almost  in  the 

middle  of  the  room. 
The  boy  deserves  a  prize. 
There    are    many     reasons 
\    which  would  take  a  long 

time  to  explain. 
They  explained  everything  to 

me,  so  that  I  might  know 

what  I  had  to  say. 
Perhaps  they  will  start  during 

the  week.  [accident. 

According  to  him,  it  was  an 
Can  I  do  anything  else  for 

you? 

He  did  it  for  [instead  of]  you. 
My  business  will  prevent  me 

from  coming  very  often. 
The  result  is  not  generally 

known  yet.  [soon. 

«  I  hope  you  will  come  again 

The  numbers  in  this   street 

from  twenty  upwards  are 

on  the  opposite  side. 
We  expect  her  every  moment. 

They  must  be  somewhere. 


Respecto  a  la   asercion   que 

hizo,  hemos  de  ver  si  puede 

probarse. 
Ate  el  paquete  fuertemente, 

para  que    las   cosas  no  se 

saliesen. 
A  pesar  de  esto,  el  bramante 

se  rompio.  [dabamos. 

Siempre  gastaba   lo    que  le 
Seran  Vds.  servidos  dentro  de 

cinco  minutos.  [deprisa. 
No  hay  placer  en  andar  tan 
La  mesa  esta  casi  en  el  centro 

del  cuarto.  [mio. 

El  muchacho  merece  un  pre- 
Hay    muchas    razones     que 

serian  muy  largas  de  ex- 

plicar. 
Me  lo  explicaron  todo,  a  fin 

de  que  pudiese  saber  lo  que 

tenia  que  decir. 
Tal  vez  partiran    durante  la 

semana. 

Segiin  el,  f  ue  una  desgracia. 
<?  Puedo  hacer  algo  mas  por 

Vd.? 

Lo  hizo  por  Vd. 
Mis  negocios  me  impediran 

venir  muy  amenudo. 
El   resultado    no  se    conoce 

bien  todavia. 

Espero  que  volvera  Vd.  pronto. 
Los  niimeros  de  esta  calle  del 

veinte  para  arriba  estan  en 

el  otro  lado. 
La  esperamos  de  un  momento 

a  otro. 
Deben  estar  en  alguna  parte. 


USEFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  SENTENCES. 


There  is  a  great  deal  of  dif- 
ference between  the  mean- 
ings of  the  words. 

They  are  very  polite  to  every- 
body, [he  went  out. 

Tt  is  not  five  minutes  since 

These  cups  and  saucers  are 
partly  clean,  land  partly 
dirty. 

,It  is  a  very  bad  habit  of  mine. 

You  ought  lo  learn  this  list  of 
words  by  heart. 

I  generally  see  him  on  Satur- 
days. [Sundays. 

He  only  wears  this  coat  on 

Can  you  count  from  one  to  a 
hundred  without  looking 
at  the  book  ? 

Put  it  somewhere  else. 

The  mistake  is  really  very 
serious. 

H£  was  here  hot  long  ago. 

It  often  happens  that  no  one 
comes  the  whole  day. 

Did  you  stay  k>ng  in  South 
America? 

I  was  there  for  three  years. 

It  is  good  practice  to  read 
aloud  every  day. 

I  do  not  understand  Spanish 
well  enough  to  do  it. 

Try  to  express  your  thoughts 
in  the  simplest  way. 

[phrases. 

Avoid  long  and  -complicated 

Choose  sentences  which  can 
be  translated  into  Spanish 
for  word. 


Hay  mucha  diferencia  entre 

los     significados     de     las 

palabras. 
Son  muy  corteses  con  todo 

el  mundo.  [salio. 

No  hace  cinco  minutos  que 
Estas  tazas  y  platillos  estaii 

medio    limpios    y    medio 

sucios.  [mala. 

Es  una  costumbre  mia  muy 
Deberia  Vd.  aprender  de  me- 

moria  esta  lista  de  palabras. 
Generalmente    le     veo    los 

Sabados.  [Domingos. 

£olo  lleva  esta  chaqueta'  loa 
I  Puede  Vd.  contar  de  uno  a 

ciento  sin  mirar  el  libro  ? 

Pongalo  Vd.  en  otra  parte. 

El  error  es  en  verdad  muy 
serio.  -[tiempo. 

Estuvo  aqui  no  hace  mucho 

Sucede  amenudo  que  nadie 
.viene  en  todo  el  dia. 

I  Estuvo  Vd.  mucho  tiempo  en 
la  America  del  Sur  ? 

Estuve  alii  durante  tres  anos. 

Es  buona  practica  leer  en  alta 
voz  todos  los  dias. 

No  comprendo  el  espanol  bas- 
tante  bien  para  hacerlo. 

Trate  Vd.  de  expresar  sus  pen- 
samientos  de  la  manera 
massencilla.  [complicadas. 

Evite  Vd.  las  f rases  largas  y 

Escoja  Vd  sentencias  que 
puedan  traducirse  al  es- 
panol palabra  por  palabra. 


USEFUL  COMMERCIAL  SENTENCES.  43 

SPANISH    COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE. 

The  Date  at  the  head  of  letters  is  written  thus  : 
LondreSj  12  (de)  Abril  de  1912.    Madrid,  1*  (de)  Agosto  de  1911,  etc. 

(See  *  SPANISH  SIMPLIFIED,"  paragraph  90.) 

The  date  is  followed  by  the  name  of  the  person  or  firm  to  whom  the 
letter  is  addressed. 

In  the  full  address  on  the  envelope,  the  number  of  the  house  is  put 
after  the  name  of  the  street,  thus  -^—Calle  de  Quevedo,  (num.y  15. 

The  following  are  the  ordinary  methods  of  commencing  letters  :— 


SIK,  DEAR  SIR 
GENTLEMEN,  DEAR  SIRS 
MADAM,  DEAR  MAD  AM 


Muy  sefior  mio 
Muy  seftores  mios 
Muy  sefior  a  mia 


[The  three  foregoing  are  the  ordinary  business  forms  of  address.] 


Sir  (writing  to  a  person  of  title  or 

distinction) 
Sir  (to  a  superior  holding  a  high 

official  position) 

Madam,  Dear  Madam  (to  a  friend) 
Dear  Henry,  Peter,  etc. 
My  Dear  Sister 
My  Dear  Friends 


Excelentmmo  senor  (abbreviated  to 

Exmo.  Sr.) 
llustrisimo  seworfabbrevd.to  lllmo. 

Senor)  ;  QiMuy  ilustre  sefior 
Apreciable  8enor(it  )a 
Querido  Enrique,  Pedro,  etc. 
Querida  hermana  mia 
Queridos  amigos  mios 


There  are  various  forms  for  concluding  letters,  all  of  them  effu- 
sively  polite,  and  so  long  and  cumbrous  that  the  initial  letter  only  of  many 
of  the  words  is  employed.  The  following  ending,  which  is  equivalent  to 
"YOUBS  TBULY"  or  "YOUBS  FAITHFULLY,"  is  the  best  to  employ 
in  ordinary  business  correspondence, 

Soy  de  Yd.  atto  S.  S. 

Q.  B.  S.  M. 

(This  is  an  abbreviation  of  Soy  de  Vd.  atento  seguro  servidor,  que 
2>esa  sus  manoe  :  literally,  "  I  am  your  attentive  faithful  servant,  who  kisses 
your  hands."  Soy  and  atto.  must  be  changed  to  somos  and  attos.,  and 
yd.  to  Vds.,  when  necessary. 

If  aflmo.  (abbreviation  of  afectisimo,  most  loving)  is  substituted  for 
atento,  or  y  afectisimo  inserted  after  atento,  in  the  preceding  phrase,  it 
becomes  somewhat  less  formal,  and  corresponds  to  "YOUBS  SINCEBELY." 

The  equivalent  to  "  YOTTBS  BESPECTFULLY  "  is : 

Su  respetuoso  servidor  (written  in  full)  Q.  B.  S.  M. 

In  writing  to  a  superior,  when  in  English  "YOUB  OBEDIENT 
SEBVANT  "  would  commonly  be  employed,  the  usual  ending  (written  in 
full)  is  Dios  guarde  a  Vd.  muchos  anos :  literally,  God  preserve  your 
worship  many  years.  In  writing  to  a  friend,  the  usual  endifag  is  S.  S. 
y  amigo  (your  servant— su  servidor— *nd  friend).  For  an  ordinary  letter, 
not  strictly  a  formal  business  one,  to  a  person  with  whom  the  writer  has 
a  slight  acquaintance  only,  su  atento  tervidor  is  sufficient. 


44 


USEFUL  COMMERCIAL  SENTENCES. 


COMMERCIAL  PHRASES. 


I  am  in  receipt  of  your  letter 

of  the  14th  inst.  ;— of  the 

1st  ult. 
Referring  to  your  favor  of  the 

9th  ult, . . . 
In  reply,  I  have  the  pleasure 

to  inform  you ... 
Some    of    the    things    were 

rather  damaged. 
Nearly  all  the  goods  suffered 

serious  damage  in  transit, 
[return  of  post. 
Send  it  to  me  without  fail  by 
I  hope  to  receive  it  by  the 

7th  of  next  month,  at  the 

latest. 
I  am  greatly  in  want  of  the 

first    three    items  on  the 

list. 
The  delay  in  sending  off  the 

goods  causes  me  consider- 
able inconvenience. 
In  your  last  letter,  you  pro- 
mised to  allow  us  a  discount 

of  5  per  cent. 
You  have  only  taken  off  2^ 

per  cent. 
Our  prices  are  in  all  cases 

strictly  nett. 
Your     consignment    arrived 

safely  ^yesterday. 
I  will  send  you  a  cheque  as 
"soon  as  I  receive  the  goods. 
We  shall  be  obliged  by  your 

remitting  the  balance. 
Kindly  send  us  your  price 

list,  conditions,  etc. 


Obra  en  mi  poder  su  carta  del 

14  del   corriente  ; — del   1° 

del  proximo  pasado  (p.pdo). 
Respecto  a  su  apreciable 

(apble.)  del  9  del  mes  pasado. 
En  contestation  tengo  el  gusto 

de  manifestable . . . 
Algunos  de  los  articulos  es- 

taban  algo  deteriorados. 
Casi    todos    los  generos   su- 

frieron  gran  averia  en  su 

transporte.  [de  correo. 
Enviemelo  Vd.  sinf  altaa  vuelta 
Espero  recibirlo  para  el  *7 

del  mes  que  viene,  a  mas 

tardar. 
Me  hacen  mucha  f alta  los  tres 

primeros   articulos    de    la 

lista. 
El  retraso  en  el  despacho  de 

las  mercancias  meperjudica 

mucho. 
En  su  ultima,  prometio  Vd. 

concedernos  un  descuento 

de  5  por  ciento. 
Solo  nos  ha  descontado  Vd. 

un  dos  y  medio  por  ciento. 
Nuestros  precios  se  entienden 

fiiempre  estrictamentenetos. 
Su  consignation  llego  ayer 

sin  novedad. 
Leremitirea  Vd.  un  cheque  en 

cuanto  reciba  los  generos. 
Le  agradeceremos  nos  remita 

el  importe  del  saldo. 
Sirvase  Vd.mandarnossu  lista 

de  precios.  condiciones,  etc. 


USEFUL  COMMERCIAL  SENTENCES. 


Please  let  me  know  your 
lowest  terms  for  cash  on 
delivery ; — on  receipt  of  the 
goods. 

How  much  will  the  packing, 
carriage,  and  customs  duty 
amount  to  ? 

Do  your  best  to  see  that  the 
cost  of  carriage  is  as  low  as 
possible. 

By.  book  post — by  parcel  post 
— in  a  registered  letter. 

You  may  draw  on  us  at  three 
months. 

The  bill  is  payable  at  sight. 

Kindly  send  us  a  cheque  at 
your  earliest  convenience 
for  the  amount  due. 

[overdue. 

This  account  is  six  months 

We  cannot  wait  any  longer  ; 
be  .good  enough  therefore 
to  forward  the  amount 
without  further  delay. 

We  shall  be  greatly  obliged 
by  your  sending  us  a  remit- 
tance by  an  early  post. 

I  have  several  large  accounts 
to  meet  next  week. 

[dishonored. 

The  bill  has  been  returned 

I  have  already  applied  to  you 
several  times  for  a  settle- 
ment. 

I  shall  have  to  take  legal  pro- 
ceedings to  recover  the 
amount  due. 

YTe  think  it  right  to  inform  you 
at  once. 


Sirvase  Vd.  indicarme  BUB 
condiciones  mas  favorables 
para  pago  al  contado  ; — al 
recibo  de  los  generos. 

I  A  cuanto  subiran  los  gastos 
de  embalaje,  transporte,  y 
derechos  de  aduana  ? 

Haga  Vd.  lo  posible  para  que 
los  gastos  de  transporte  sean 
lo  mas  reducido  posible. 

Como  impresos — en  paquete 
postal — en  carta  certificada. 

Puede  Vd.  girar  a  nuestro 
cargo  a  tres  ipeses. 

La  letra  es  pagadera  a  la  *vfsta. 

Tengan  Vds.  la  bondad  de  re- 
mitirnos  lo  antes  posible 
un  cheque  por  la  cantidad 
vencida.  [meses. 

Esta  cuenta  vencio  hace  seis 

JJo  podemos  esperar  mas  ;  por 
lo  tanto  le  suplicamos  que 
nos  remita  el  importe  cuanto 
antes. 

Le*  agradeceremos  infinito  nos 
remita  el  importe  por  uno 
de  los  primeros  correos. 

Tengo  que  satisfacer  algunas 
cuentas  de  consideration  la 
semana  proxirna.  [acogida. 

La  letra  ha  sido  devuelta  mal 

Ya  me  he  dirigido  a  Vd.  en 
dif  erentes  ocasiones  para  la 
liquidation. 

Tendre  que  recurrir  a  la  ley 
para  la  satisfaction ,  de  la  * 
deuda. 

Creemos  cpnvenientecomuni- 
carselo  a  Vd.  al  inoment/o. 


46 


USEFUL  COMMERCIAL  SENTENCES. 


Herewith  we  send  you  sam- 
pler of  both  qualities. 

Your  esteemed  order  is  duly 
to  hand. 

Your  instructions  shall  receive 
our  best  attention. 

No  invoice  was  enclosed  with 
the  goods. 

The  boxes  were  nearly  all 
broken,  and  their  contents 
much  damaged  by  water. 

The  goods  -were  very  care- 
lessly packed. 

We  charge  two  per  cent,  to 
cover  the  cost  of  packing. 

"There  is  always  great  delay 
in  the  execution  of  these 
orders.  [prompt  reply . . . 

Awaiting    the     favor    of?  a 

Belying  on  your  promise,  I 
undertook  to  deliver  the 
goods  by  Monday  next. 

[should  pay  the  duty, 

It  was    arranged    that    you 

You  promised  to  send  off  the 
first  part  of  the  order  a 
week  ago. 

Let  me  know  at  once  when  I 
may  depend  on  receiving 
the  remainder  of  the  order. 

Mr. . .  .*  of  Cadiz,  has  kindly 
favored  me  with  your  ad- 
dress. 

For  references  you  can  apply 
to  the  firm  of  ... 

If  you  take  a  gross  at  a  time 
we  will  allow  you  an  extra 
2^  per  cent,  discbunt. 


Con  la  presente  le  enviamos 

muestras  de  ambas  calidades* 

Su  estimado  pedido  ha  llegado 

debidamente  a  nuestro  poder. 

Sus  instrucciones  seran  ob- 

jeto    de    nuestra     mayor 

atencion. 
No  acompanaba  a  los  generos 

f  actura  alguna. 
Casi  todas  las  cajas  estaban 

rotas,  y  sus  contenidos  muy 

averiados  por  el  agua. 
Las  mercancias  se  embalaron, 

con  muy  poco  cuidado. 
Cargamos  dos  por  ciento  para 

cubrir  los  gastos  de  embalaje* 
Siempre  hay  gran  retraso  en 

la  ejecucion  de  estos  pedi- 

dos.  [pronta  contestacion. 
Esperando  verme  honrado  con, 
Confiando  en  su  promesa,  me 

comprometi  a  entregar  los 

generos    para     el      lunes. 

proximo.  [los  derechos. 
Se  convino  que  Vd.  pagaria 
Hace  una  semana,  prometio 

Vd.  despachar  la  primera 

parte  del  pedido. 
Indiqueme  Ycl  al  momenta 

cuando  puedo  coniar  con  el 

resto  del  pedido. 
El  Sr.  ...,  de  Cadiz,  ha  tenido- 

la  bondad  de  favorecerme 

con  sus  senas  de  Vd. 
Para  informes  pueden  Vds* 

dirigirse  a  la  casa  de  . . . 
Si  toma  Vd.  una  gruesa  de  una 

vcz,  le  concederemos  un  des- 

cuento  extra  de^^porciwito. 


USEFUL  CGlffMERCIiL  SENTENCES. 


47 


The  terms  quoted  do  not  in- 
clude carriage. 

Our  agent  informs  us  that  the 
firm  has  been  established 
many  years. 

It  is  reported  that  the  bank 
has  suspended  payment. 

If  the  tea  finds  a  ready  sale, 
I  shall  give  you  larger 
orders  afterwards. 

There  is  no  demand  for  such 
articles  in  this  market. 

We  have  recently  opened  a 
branch  in  Barcelona. 

This  is  only  a  trial  order. 

I  have  been  appointed  sole 
agent  for  the  sale  of  this 
machine  in  Spain. 

You  had  better  carry  it  for- 
ward to  the  new  account. 

We  are  quite  willing  to  open 
a  monthly  or  quarterly  ac- 
count, if  you  prefer  it. 

[last  invoice. 

There  was  a  mistake  in  the 

The  bill  of  lading  has  not  yet 
come  to  hand. 

The  cheque  was  payable  to 
bearer,  not  to  order. 

I  cannot  make  any  reduction 
in  the  quoted  prices,  except 
the  usual  discount  for  cash 
at  a  month. 

I  unfortunately  have  none  of 
the  common  sorts  in  stock 
at  the  present  time. 

We  only  supply  the  trade, 
and  do  no  retail  busi- 
ness. 


En  las  condiciones  indicadas 
no  se  incluye  el  transports 

Nuestro  agente  nos  informa 
que  la  casa  cuenta  ya  inu- 
chos  anos  de  existencia. 

Se  dice  que  el  banco  ha  sus- 
pendido  pagos. 

Si  el  te  halla  buena  salida,  en 
lo  futuro  les  hare  pedidoa 
de  mayor  consideration. 

No  hay  salida  para  tales  arti- 
culos  en  este  mercado. 

Acabamos  de  abrir  una  sucursal 
en  Barcelona.  [ensayo. 

Este  pedido  no  es  mas  que  un, 

He  sido  nombrado  agente  ex- 
clusivo  para  la  venta  de 
esta  maquina  en  Espana* 

Seria  mas  conveniente  que  lo 
pasara  Vd.  a  cuenta  nueva. 

Estamos  dispuestos  a  abrir 
una  cuenta  mensual  6 
trimestral,  si  asi  lo  prefiere 
Vd.  [fdctursu 

Hubo  un  error  en  la  ultima. 

El  conocimiento  no  se  ha  re* 
cibido  todavia. 

El  cheque  era  pagadero  al 
portador,  no  a  la  orden. 

No  puedoconcederninguna  re- 
duction en  los  precios  coti- 
zados,  excepto  el  descuento- 
corriente  por  pago  mensual. 

For  desgracia,  hoy  no  tengo 
en  deposito  ninguna  de  las 
calidades  comunes. 

Solo  surtimos  al  comerciof 
y  no  efectuamos  ninguna. 
transaction  al  por  menor. 


48 


USEFUL  COMMERCIAL  SENTENCES. 


We  have  debited  you  with 
the  balance. 

Kindly  credit  me  with  the 
value  of  the  returned  goods. 

We  send  you  a  draft  payable 
one  month  after  date,  in 
settlement  of  last  month's 
account. 

Please  endorse  it,  and  honor 
it  on  maturity. 

Ship  the  bales  by  the  next1 
steamer. 

Do  not  send  the  boxes  by 
rail,  but  by  steamer  ;  the 
latter  means  of  transit 
comes  cheaper. 

In  accordance  with  your  re- 
quest, I  ericlose  a  duplicate 
invoice. 

I  trust  you  will  excuse  the 
delay. 

Do  you  deliver  free  on  board 
in  London  ? 

We  are  thinking  of  chartering 
an  entire  steamer,  and  must 
calculate  how  much  cheaper 
the  expenses  of  freight 
would  be  than  if  we  shipped 
in  small  consignments. 

The  shares  of  this  company 

are  not  to  be  recommended 

just  now. 
It  would  be  wise  to  wait  until 

the  publication  of  the  yearly 

balance  sheet. 

Our  commission  is  5  per 
cent.,  if  you  put  the  neces- 
sary sums  at  our  disposal. 


Le  hemos  adeudado  en  cuenta 

el  saldo. 

Sirvase  Vd.  abonarme  en  eta.  el 

valor  de  los  generos  de  vueltos. 

Le  remitimos  una  letra  paga- 

dera  a  treinta  dias    fecha, 

para  liquidar  la  cuenta  del 

mes  pasado. 
Sirvase  Vd.  endosarla,  y  aco- 

gerla  a  su  vencimiento. 
Embarque  Vd.   las  balas  por 

el  proximo  vapor. 
No  mande  Vd.  las  cajas  por 

f erro-carril,  sino  por  vapor ; 

este  medio  de    transporte 

resulta  mas  barato. 
De  conf  ormidad  con  su  deseo. 

adjunto  una  factura  dupli- 

cada. 
Espero  se  servira  Vd.  dispen- 

sar  el  retraso. 
<j  Hace  Vd.  la  entrega  franco 

a  bordo  en  Londres  ? 
Estamos  pensando  en    fletar 

un  vapor  completo  y  hemos 

de    calcular    cuanto    mas 

economico  nos  tesultaria  el 

precio  del  flete  que  cuando 

embarcamos  por  pequenas 

partidas 
Las  acciones  de  esta  compania 

no  son  muy  recomendables 

ahora. 
'Seria  prudenteaguardar  hasta 

que  publiquen  el  balance 

anual. 
Nuestra  comision  es  de  5  %  si 

Vds.  ponen  a  nuestra  disposi- 

cion  las  sumas  necesurias. 


KEY 

TO  THE 

SPANISH 
GRAMMAR 

SIMPLIFIED 


PHILADELPHIA 

DAVID    McKAY,    Publisher 

604-8  S.  Washington  Square 


SPECIAL  NOTICE 


To  simplify  the  Irregular  Verbs,  we  have  omitted  from 
the  Grammar  the  Tenses  which  need  not  be  learnt  if  our 
rules  (pars.  52  and  117)  on  the  formation  of  Tenses  have 
been  mastered.  These  rules,  which  are  original  and  copy- 
right, enable  the  Student  to  form  any  other  Tense  correctly. 


[Key  to  Lesson  I. 

EXERCISE  L— 1.  they  (MASC.)  have  ;  2.  have  I  ?  3.  have 
I  not  ?  4.  she  has  not ;  5.  have  we  (MASC.)  ?  6.  you  (SING.) 
have  not ;  7.  have  they  (FEM.)  not  ?  8.  have  you  (PLUR.)  ? 
9.  we  (MASC.)  have  not. 

10.  ella  tiene  ;     11/7  no  tienen  ellos  ?      12.  <?  tiene  Vd.  ? 

13.  yo  no  tengo  ;      14.  Yds.  no  tienen  ;      15.  <;  no  tengo  yo  ? 
16.  nosotros  tenemos  ;  17.  <;  no  tienen  Yds.  ?  18.  ella  no  tiene. 

EXERCISE  II. — 1.  padres  ;  2.  libros  ;  3.  nueces  ;  4, 
senores  ;  5.  lapices  ;  6.  plumas  ;  7.  ciudades  ;  8.  hombres  ; 

9.  luces  ;  10.  tias  ;  11.  iglesias  ;  12.  leyes  ;  13.  sombreros. 

EXERCISE  III. — 1.  un  hermano  ;  2.  una  hermana ; 
3.  unos  hermanos  ;  4.  unas  hermanas  ;  5.  el  hermano  ;  6.  los 
hermanos  ;  7.  la  hermana  ;  8.  las  hermanas  ;  9.  las  casas  5 

10.  el  agua  ;      11.  un  ala  ;     12.  lo  hermoso  ;     13.  un  padre  ; 

14.  los  libros  ;     15.  una  pluma  ;     16.  el  lapiz  ;     17.  la  tinta  ; 
18.  unos  lapices  ;  19.  una  aldea. 

EXERCISE  IV.— 1.  I  have  not  a  book.  2.  Has  he.  the 
pens,?  3.  We  have  a  house.  4.  You  (PLUR.)  have  some 
pens  ;  we.  have  some  books. 

5.  Vd.  tiene  un  hermano.  6.  El  pajaro  tiene  doa  alas, 
7.  Vds.  no  tienen  los  libros.  8.  <?  No  tiene  el  la  tinta  ?  9.  La 
madre  tiene  dos  casas.  10.  Yo  no  tengo  una  pluma,  pero  mi 
amigo  tiene  unas  plumas.  11.  <;  Tiene  el  la  carta  ?, 


Key  to  Lesson  II. 

EXERCISE  I. — 1.  del  hombre  ;  2.  a  un  hombre  ;  3.  de  la 
iglesia  ;  4.  del  agua  del  pantano  ;  5.  a  un  libro  ;  6.  de  las 
madres  ;  7.  a  las  piedras  ;  8.  de  unas  cartas  ;  9.  de  las  alas  de 
un  pajaro  ;  10.  a  unos  libros  ;  11.  de  unos  pajaros  ;  12.  a  una 
casa  ;  13.  al  libro  ;  14.  de  la  tinta  ;  15.  de  los  hermanos  ; 
16.  de  las  alas  de  los  pajaros  ;  17.  el  libro  del  muchacho  ; 
18.  el  caballo  de  un  soldado  ;  19.  los  caballos  del  soldado. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. — 1.  (Nosotros)  homos  escrito 
unas  cartas.  .2.JVd.jio_ha  visto  las  casas.  3  I  No  tenemos 


(nosotros)  los  sombreros  ?  4.  &  Tiene  la  iglesia  un  altar  ? 
5.  (Yo)  he  visto  el  altar  de  la  iglesia.  6.  Los  reyes  tienen  los 
cal^allos.  7  <j  Quien  ha  tornado  la  tinta  ?  8.  El  hombre 
tiene  un  haeha.  9.  El  buque  tiene  un  ancla.  10.  £  Ha  dado 
el  criado  una  silla  al  caballero  ?  11.  Yo*  no  tengo  un  sobre, 
pero  mi  hermano  tiene  unos  sobres.  12.  £  Que  han  hecho 
Vds.  ?  13.  £  Ha  visto  Vd.  los  jardines  del  rey  ?  14.  Los 
hombres  tienen  unos  caballos.  15.  £  Por  que  no  ha  eserito 
Vd.  las  cartas?  16.  Un  hombre  ha  hablado  con  el  criado. 
17.  <;  No  tenemos  (nosotros)  un  libro  para  la  mujer  ?  18.  Si, 
tenemos  un  libro  y  dos  plumas.  19.  (Nosotros).  no  hemos 
visto  la  casa  del  hombre.  20.  Las  inuchachas  no  han  tornado 
las  plumas.  21.  Vd.  tiene  unas  cartas.  22.  Vd.  no  tiene  los 
libros.  23.  El  hermano  de  la  muchacha  no  ha  escritb 
carta  al  caballero. 

*  This  yo,  being  emphasized,  cannot  be  omitted 


Key  to  Lesson  III. 

EXERCISE  I. — 1  mi  jardin  ,  2.  su  tinta  ;  3.  su  tinta  ; 
4.  su  tinta  ;  5.  nuestro  vaso  ;  6.  nuestra  aldea  ;  7.  mi  tia  ; 
8.  mis  tias  ;  9.  su  gato  ,  10.  sus  gatds  ;  11.  nuestros  guantes  ; 
12:  sus  zapatos  ,  13.  sus  hermanas  >,  14.  sus  hermanas  ;  15.  su 
dinero  ;  16.  mi  criado  ,  17.  nuestras  manos  ;  18.  sus  ojos  ; 
19.  su  deseo ;  20.  su  deseo  ;  21.  sus  nombres  ;  22.  su  pluma 
(de  VoLf)  ;  23.  su  libro  (de  Vd.)  ;  24.  su  casa  (de  Vds.)  ;  25. 
sus  manos  (de  Vd.)  ;  26.  sus  manos  (de  Vds;)  ;  27.  No  ha  roto 
BU  pipa.  28.  <;  Han  tornado  los  ninos  los  guantes  de  Vd.  ? 
29.  «J  Ha  tornado  Vd.  su  dinero  ? 

EXERCISE  II.— -1.  we  are ;    2.  they  are  not ;    3.  am  I  ? 

4.  she  is  not ;  5.  are  we  not  ?  6.  I  am  not ;  7.  are  you  ? 
8.  you  (PLUR.)  are  not. 

9,  i  es  ella  ?  10.  el  no  es  ;  11. «?  no  son  ellas  ?  12.  Vds. 
son  ;  13.  i  no  es  Vd.  ?  14.  <;  somos  nosotros  ?  15.  <j  no  soy  yo  ? 
16.  (yo)  soy  ;  17.  ella  no  es ;  18.  (yo)  no  soy. 

f  In  a  complete  sentence,  the  de  Vd.,  de  Vds.,  is  seldom  required. 


5 

'  EXERCISE  III.— 1. 1  am  not ;    2.  is  he  ?    3.  are  we  not  ? 

4.  you  are  not ;  5.  are  they  ?  6.  are  you  ?  7.  you  (PLUR.)  are. 
8.  estamos  ;  9.  <;  no  esta  Vd.  ?  10.  ellas  no  estan  ;  11. 
i  estoy  yo  ?  12.  Vds.  estan  ;  13.  <;  no. esta  el  ?  14.  ella  no 
esta ;  15. «;  estamos  nosotros  ?  16.  Vd.  no  esta  ;  17.  no  estoy  ; 
18.  i  esta  Yd.  ? 

EXERCISE  IV.— 1.  No  somos  obreros.  2.  <?  Esta  Vd.  listo  ? 
3.  (Ellas)  est£in  aqui.  4.  <;  Es  Vd.  soldado  ?  5.  No  estoy 
escuchancio.  6.  <;  Quien  esta  en  la  calle  ?  7.  Es  muy  laborioso,. 

8.  Soy  inglesa.      9.  No  soy  italiano.      10.  Estamos  hablando 
con  su  primo.     ll.<jNo  son  (ellos)  principes  ?    12.   Somos 
marineros.       13.  (El)  no  esta  escribiendo.      14.  Es  cartero* 
15.  No  estamos  fumando.       16.  <j  Es  Vd.  espaiiol  ?      17.  Son 
mis  tios.    18.  Mi  tia  no  esta  aqui.    19.  (Ella)  no  esta  en  casa. 
20.  Estamos  aguardando.    21.  Es  profesor. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE.—!.  Niiestros  amigos  estan  en  el 
jardin,  buscando  sus  perros.  2.  <?  Es  Vd.  el  tio  de  mi  amigo  ? 
3.  No,  senor,  no  soy  su  tio,  soy  su  padre.  4.  Mi  amigo  esta 
en  la  calle,  fumando  un  cigarro.  5.  <;  Quien  esta  alii  ?  6.  <;  Que 
estan  Vds.  buscando  ?  7,  Estoy  escribiendo  una  carta  a  su 
padre  (de  Vd.).  8.  Sus  hijos  (de  Vd.)  estan  creciendo  mucho. 

9.  El  hermanq  de  mi  amigo  no  es  laborioso.     10.  <;  Tiene  Vd. 
un  criado  ?  11.  Nuestra  hermana  es  habil.    12.  Su  madre  (de 
Vd.)  esta  en  el  jardin.  13.  Mis  zapatos  estan  en  el  suelo,  cerca 
de  la  silla-      14.  Vds.  no  son  soldados.      15.  Mi  libro'esta  en 
el  cajon.     16.  <;  Esta  fumando  su  herniano  de  Vd.  ?     17.  <;  A 
quien  ha  escrito  Vd.  una  carta  ?     18.  No  estamos  estudiando 
nuestras  lecciones. 


Key  to  Lesson  IV. 

EXERCISE  I.— 1.  bueno  (MASC.  SING.),  buena  (FEM. 
SING.),  buenos  (MASC.  PLUR.),  buenas  (FEM.  PLUR.) ;  2. 
caro  (M.  S.),  cara  (F.  s.),  caros  (M.  P.),  caras  (F.  P.)  ;  3.  capaz, 
capaz,  capaces,  capace?  ,  4.  aplicado*,  aplicada,  aplicados, 
aplicadas  ;  or  laborioso,  laboriosa,  laboriosos,  laboriosas  \ 


$ 

5.  f  ranees,  f rancesa,  franceses,  f rancesas  ;  6.  facil,  facil,  faciles. 
faciles ;  *  7.  barato,  barata,  baratos,  batatas  ;  8.  seco,  seca, 
secos,  secas ;  9.  valiente,  valiente,  valientes,  valientes  ;  10. 
frio,  fria,  frios,  f rias ;  11.  calido,  calida,  calidos,  calidas  ; 
12.  aleman,  alemana,  alemanes,  alemaaas  ;  13.  dificil,  dificil, 
dificiles,  dificiles ;  14.  ingles,  inglesa,  ingleses,  inglesas ; 
15.  pesado,  pesada,  pesados,  pesadas  ;  16.  persa,  persa,  persas, 
persas  ;  17.  un  buen  caballo  ;  18.  buenos  caballos  ;  19.  tina 
mala  pluma ;  20.  malas  plumas  ;  21.  una  leccion  dificil ; 
22.*  lecciones  dificiles. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. — 1.  Sus  amigos  no  son  va- 
lientes.  2.  La  modista  francesa  ha  vendido  un  sombrero 
barato.  3.  Nuestras  lecciones  son  muy  faciles.  4.  <?  Tiene 
Vd.  un'  buen  criado  ?  5.  No,  senor,  mis  criados  no  son 
buenos.  6.  He  visto  a  un  soldado  valiente.  7.  Tengo  came 
f ria.  8.  Somos  marineros  ingleses.  9.  <;  For  que  no  estan 
Vds.  estudiando  sus  lecciones  ?  10.  Las  muchachas  alemanas 
son  f  elices.  11.  i  A  quien  ha  dado  Vd.  sus  libros  ?  12.  He 
dado  mis  libros  espanoles  al  primo  de  mi  amigo.  13.  Nues- 
tra  leccion  es  muy  dificil.  14.  ^  Como  esta  Vd.  ?  15.  Muy 
bien,  gracias;  pero  he  estado  enfermo.  16.  Su  (or  la) 
hermana  de  Vd.  no  esta  enferma.  17.  Sus  tias  (de  Vds.)  son 
muy  habiles.  18.  Sus  hermanos  estan  enfermos.  19.  Su 
amiga  (de  Vd.)  es  italiana.  20.  No  es  italiana,  es  espafiola. 
21.  <j  Qu6  ha  hecho  Vd.  con  mi  libro  ?  22.  Est4  sobre  la  mesa. 


Key  to  Lesson  V. 

EXERCISE  I. — 1.  compro;  2.  Vd.  compra;  3.  (el) 
compra ;  4.  compramos ;  5.  Vds.  compran ;  6.  (ellos) 
compran  ;  7.  (el)  toma ;  8.  hallamos  ^  9.  hallo ;  10.  (ellas) 
toman;  11.  Vd.  halla;'  12.  Vds.  toman;  13.  fuma;  14. 
fuman  ;  15.  Vd.  lleva ;  16.  llevo ;  17.  enviamos ;  18.  Vds. 
envian. 

EXERCISE  II.— 1.  bebo;  2.  Vd.  bebe;  3.  (el)  bebe; 
4,  babenios;  5.  Vds.  beben;  6.  (ellos)  beban;  7.  cree; 


£  creemos  ;  9.  comen  ;  10.  como ;  11.  Vd.  aprende ;  12.  Vds. 
creen  ;  13.  aprende  ;  14.  poseo  ;  15.  poseen 

EXERCISE  III.— 1.  recibo  ;  2.  Vd.  recibe  ;  3.  (el)  recibe  ; 

4.  recibimos  ;  5.  Vds.  reciben  ;  6.  (ellos)  reciben  ;  7.  escribe  ; 
8.  escribimos  ;    9.  Vd.  surte  ;    10.  surto  ;    11.  divide  ;    12. 
dividimos  ;  13.  Vds.  escriben  ;  14.  surtimos. 

EXERCISE  IV. -1.  Vd.  halla,  Vd.  no  halla;  2.  i  hall  a 
Vd,  ?  4  no  halla  Vd.  ?  3.  los  hombres  beben,  los  hombres  no 
beben  ;  4.  %  beben  los  hombres  ?  <;  no  beben  los  hombres  ? 

5.  descubrimos,  no  descubrimos  ;     6.  <j  descubrimos  (noso- 
tros)?     £  no  descubrimos  (nosotros)  ?     7.  recibo,  no  recibo  ; 
8.  i  recibo  (yo)  ?  <;  no  recibo  (yo)  ?     9.  la  muchacha  debe,  la 
muchacha  no  debe  ;     10.  &  debe  la  muchacha  ?    <;  no  debe  la 
muchacha  ? 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE.—!.  <;Debe  Vd.  digero  a  mi 
amigo  ?  2.  No  debo  dinero  a  su  amigo.  3.  El  criado  espafiol 
llama  a  BU  perro.  4.  No  fumamos  cigarros.  5.  El  discipulo 
aplicado  aprende  facilmente  sus  lecciones.  6.  <;  Que  desea 
BU  madre  (de  Vd.)  ?  7.  i  No  trabajan  (ellas)  bien  ?  8.  <jQuiea 
vive  en  la  casa  de  su  tia  ?  9.  Mis  primes  viven  alii,  pero  mi 
tio  esta  en  Madrid.  10.  El  oficial  bebe  un  vino  delicioso. 
11.  Recibimos  cartas  de  los  tios  de  Vd.  (or  sus  tios)  cada  dia 
(better; 4  todos  los  dias  '='  all  the  days.')  12.  No  deseo  un 
baston,  porque  tengo  un  paraguas.  13.  Creemos  que  sus 
'muestras  estan  en  la  tienda.  14.  £  Cuanto  dinero  debemos  ? 
15.  Creo  que  debemos  cuatro  chelines  al  tendero,  y  tres 
(chelines)  al  criado.  16.  Tal  vez  no  fuma.  17.  <;  Quien 
presta  dinero  a  mi  amigo  ?  18.  Yo  presto  amenudo  dinero  a 
su  amigo.  19.  <;  A  que  hora  sale  el  tren  para  Londres  ?  20. 
Mi  tren  no  sale  todavia.  21.  No  temo  el  castigo  ;  no  es  muy 
grande.  22.  Los  muchachos  no  tiran  piedras.  23.  Vd.  no 
bebe  cerveza.  24.  <:  No  comprende  Vd.  la  leccion  ?  25. 
Comprendo  las  lecciones  muy  bien.  26.  <(  Comprenden 
(ellos)  su  explicaci6n  ?  27.  4  D6nde  viven  sus  primos  (de 
Vd.)  ?  aS.Jtfi  prima  vive  en  Madrid,  y  yo  (vivo)  en  Londi-ea, 


8 

Key  to  Lesson  VI. 

EXERCISE  I. — 1.  ese  or  aquel  muchacho ;  2.  estas 
mujeres  ;  3.  esos  or  aquellos  sobres  ;  4.  esta  mesa  ;  5.  esa  or 
aquella  iglesia  ;  6.  esas  or  aquellas  calles  ;  7.  estos  caballos  ; 
8.  esta  tinta  ;  9.  este  gato  ;  10*  esos  or  aquellos  cuadros  ;  11. 
ese  or  aquel  pan  ;  12.  esta  ciudad  j  13.  estos  niimeros ;  14.  esa 
flenora  ;  15.  no  estamos  seguros  de  eso  ;  16.  no  creo  esto. 

EXERCISE  II. — 1.  fumando,  fumado;  2.  debiendo, 
debido  ;  3.  viviendo,  vivido  ;  4.  preguntando,  preguntado ; 
5.  leyendo,  leido ;  6.  <?  no  ha  tenido  Vd.  ?  7.  no  estoy 
teniendo  ;  8.  siendo  soldados  ;  9.  estando  en  el  cuarto  (or  la 
habitacion)  ;  10.  no  habiendo  escrito  la  carta ;  11.  £  Ha 
estado  Vd.  en  Espaiia  ?  12.  Jtf  o  hemos  sido  marineros.  13. 
(Ella)  no  esta  leyendo.  14.  <z  Que  esta  (el)  bebiendo  ?  15. 
<j  Donde  ha  estado  el  hombre  ?  16.  i  No  son  valientes  los 
eoldados  ingleses  ?  17.  <?  No  esta  hablando  esta  sefiora  (or 
no  esta  esta  senora  hablando*)  ?  18.  Mi  tio  no  ha  llegado. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. — 1.  <;  No  ha  leido  Vd.  esa  carta  ? 

2.  (j  Por  que  no  esta  ese  muchacho  estudiando  sus  lecciones  ?* 

3.  Esos  criados  han  bebido  una  botella  de  buen  vino,  y  cinco 
(botellas)  de  cerveza  alemana.    4.  <«  Estan  f  umando  cigarros  ? 
5.   Habiendo  leido  el  librp,  lo  enviare  a  mi  hermano.  6. 
<i  Cuanda  sale  el  buque  ?        7.  <J  Cuanto  dinero  ha  enviado 
el  comerciante  a  su  banquero  ?        8.  <?  No  han  aprendido  los 
discipulos  estas  lecciones  ?  9.  Estos  sobres  blancos  son  de  mi 
tio.      10.  Esas  senoras  son  mis  sobrinas.      11.  El  profesor 
espanol  esta  hablando  ahora,  12.  Estoy  leyendo  un  periodico 
frances.     13.  Hemos  estado  en  el  campo.      14.  Estas  botellae 
no  estan  llenas.  15.  He  sido  carpintero.     16.  <?  Ha  tenido  Vd. 
tiempo  para  leer  esta  carta  ?    17.  £  Ha  olvifiado  Vd.  esto  ?    18. 

*  As  pointed  out  in  par.  32  of  the  Grammar,  the  construction  in  such 
sentences  is  usually  optional,  and  is  merely  a  question*  of  taste  and  euphony. 
To  avoid  needless  repetition,  only  one  way  is  given  in  this  Key  ;  but  such 
constructions  as  ^Por  qu6  no  esta  estudiando  sus  lecciones  ese 
jnuchaclio  ?  are  quite  permissible., 


<?  Estan  esae  seftorae  buscando  un  coche  ?  10.  £  Oreo  Yi 
cso  ?  20.  No  comprendo  esto.  21.  No  cstando  satisfecho 
con  el  libro,  lo  v^ndere.  22.  No  es  f  eo  aquel  perro  ? 


Key  to  Lesson  VII. 

EXERCISE  •  I.— 1.  <;  cual  caballero  ?  2.  <;  cuales  caba- 
lleros  ?  3.  <;  cual  silla  ?  4.  <;  cuales  calles  ?  5.  <;  que 
nombre  ?  6.  <;  cual  zapato  ?  7.  <?  que  hombres  ?  8.  |  que 
ruido  !  9.  <;  cual  tren  ?  10.  j  que  niebla  !  11.  j  que  lastirna  ! 
12.  <<  cual  mujer  ?  13.  <;  cuales  dias  ?  14.  <?  cuales  lamparas  ? 
15.  <;cual  taza  ?  16.  \  que  sombreros  !  17  £  De  quien  es  este 
cuchillo  ?  18.  <;  De  quien  es  esta  tinta  ?  19.  ^  De  quien  son 
amigas  estas  seiioras  ?  20.  <;  De  quien  es  esto  ?  21.  ;  Que 
muchachos  tan  holgazanes  !  22.  \  Que  error  tan  grande  !  23. 
<;  Cual  es  el  precio  de  esto  ?  24.  <;  Cual  es  el  numero  ? 

EXERCISE  II. — 1.  ha  comprado  ;  2.  <;  ban  comprado 
(ellos)  ?  3.  no  he  comprado  ;  4.  <;  no  ha  comprado  Yd.  ?  5. 
^  han  hablado  (ellas)  ?  G.  la  muchacha  ha  hablado  ;  7.  <;  ha 
escrito  el  medico  ?  8.  el  comerciante  no  ha  vendido  ;  9.  i  no 
han  llcgado  los  buques  ?  10.  no  he  comido  ;  11.  £  no  ha 
enviado  el  tendero  ?  12.  Td.  ha  escrito  ;  13.  Yds.  han  visto ; 
14.  £  no  han  hallado  (ellos)  ? 

EXERCISE  III. — 1.  Hemos  visto  a  un  general  muy 
celebre.  2.  £  Han  hallado  Yds.  a  sus  amigos  ?  3.  <;  Tiene  el 
hermanos  ?  4.  He  visto  a  aquel  seiior  en  Madrid.  5. ,;  Espera 
Yd.  a  sus  sobrinas  hoy  ?  6.  No  esperamos  cartas.  7.  Estamos 
buscando  nuestras  llaves.  8.  <;  Esta  .Yd.  buscando  a  su 
eobrino  ?  9.  No  he  visto  hoy  al  rey. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE.—!.  <:  Ha  hallado  Yd.  a  mi 
hermano  en  el  jardin  ?  2.  £  Cual  libro  ha  tenido  Yd.  ? 
<?  De  quien  es  ese  caballo  ?  4.  <:  Que  hombre  no  ama  a  BU" 
madre  ?  5.  <;  De  quien  es  este  paraguas  ?  6.  ,:  Han  visto 
Yds.  a  los  viajeros  ingleses  ?  7.  ;  Que  reloj  tan  barato  ha 
comprado  Yd.  esta  manana  ?  8.  El  dependieute  ha  recibido 


10 

ese  dinero.  9.  t  Quien  esta  f  umando  en  este  cuarto  ?  10. 
ha  enviado  los  generos  a  tiempo.  11.  j  Que  leociones  tan 
faciles  tiene  Vd.  !  12.  £  Para  quien  son  estas  cartas  ?  13. 
«;  A  quien  ha  prestado  Vd.  su  cuchillo  ?  14.  <;  Quienes  son 
estos  hombres  ?  15.  Que  gente  hay  en  la  casa  ?  16.  <:  No  ha 
llamado  Vd.  a  la  criada  ?  17.  <;  Cuales  tazas  ha  roto  (ella)  ? 
18.  i  En  cual  cuarto  ha  hallado  Vd.  la  tinta  roja  ?  19. 1  Que 
pluma  tan  mala  es  esta !  20.  <:  Cnales  desea  Vd.  ?  21.  Cual 
es  el  camino  a  la  estacion  ?  22.  <;  Cual  es  la  causa  de  su 
silencio  ?  23.  <j  Cuales  son  sus  planes  ?  24.  «;  Que  es  eso  ? 


Key  to  Lesson  VIII. 

EXERCISE  I. — 1.  Este  baston  no  es  mio.  2.  <j  Es  esa  casa 
de*  41*  ?  3.  Estas  cartas  son  nuestras.  4.  Sus  discipulos  (de 
Vd.)  son  aplicadop,  y  los  mios  son  holgazanes.  5.  Estos 
lapices  son  de*  ella*.  6.  Nuestra  amiga  esta  aqui,  pero  la  de* 
ella*  no  ha  llegado  todavia.  7.  Esa  Have  es  mia.  8.  Nuestras 
leccibnes  son  diticiles,  pero  las  de*  ellos*  son  muy  faciles. 

EXEECISE  II. — 1.  mis  mesas  de  roble  y  (las  de)  caoba ;  2. 
querida  madre  mia  (simpler y  mi  querida  madre) ;  3.  una  tia 
suya  (clearer y  una  tia  de  el)  ;  4.  mis  deseos,  los  suyos,  y  los  de 
ellos  ;  5.  Este  es  un  trabajo  suyo.  6.  Es  un  dependiente  mio. 
7.  <;  Es  de  Vds.  este  jardin  ?  8.  Esas  Haves  no  son  de  Vd.,  sou 
mias.  9.  i  Es  de  Vd.  este  periodico  ?  10.  Son  anngoa 
nuestros  (or  nuestros  amigos).  11.  Ese  no  es  error  mio  ;  es  c 
ella.  12.  Ni  su  tienda  ni  la  de  su  vecino  estan  abiertas. 

EXERCISE  III.— 1.  we  shall  be  ;  2.  will  he  not  have,  ? 
3.  will  you  (PLUR.)  speak  ?  4. 1  shall  not  receive ;  5.  you 
will  not  drink  ;  6.  will  she  find  ?  7.  they  will  write. 

8.  £  tomare  (yo)  ?  9.  Vd.  no  tendra ;  10.  <?  seran  (ellos)  t 
11.  no  estaremos  ;  12.  dividira  ;  13.  Vd.  no  habra  vendido  j 
14.  fumaran  15.  i  habremos  enviado  ?  16.  <j  tendr6  (yo)  ? 

*  Better  than  suya,  suyos,  suya.  suyas.  Such  constructions  as  i  &} 
SXlva  esa  casa  ?  are  correct  grammatically  ;  but  the  meaning  is  clearer 
li  de  4lt  de  Vd.,  de  ellos,  etc,  are  employed* 


ir 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE.—!.  El  profesor  ha  corregido 
'mis  temas,  pero  no  los  de  Vd.  2.  <j  D6nde  estara  Vd. 
manana  ?  3.  Mi  amigo  sera  medico.  4.  No  tendre  bastarito 
dinero.  5.  Hablaremos  a  su  padre  de  Vd.  6.  <;  Ouanto 
recibira  Vd.  ?  7.  Mi  amigo  ha  vendido  su  casa,  y  la  de  su 
hi  jo  ;  vivira  ahora  en  la  ima.  8.  Comprare  una  mesa  y  seis 
sillas.  9.  Ese  error  sera  muy  grave.  10.  Romperan  aquella 
ventana.  11.  No  comprare  esta  casa.  12.  Habre  enviado  sus 
pedidos  y  los  de  sus  vecinos.  13.  Su  hermana  ha  hallado  sus 
sortijas  de  oro  y  (las  de)  plata.  14.  Aqui  esta  mi  baston  ; 
d6nde  esta  el  de  Vd.  1^.  15.  Hemos  visto  a  nuestra  madre,  y 
a  la  suya,  pero  no  a  la  de  ella.  1-6.  Sera  f alta  de  el,  no  de  Vd. 

17.  i  For  que  ha  traido  Vd.  su  paraguas,  y  no  el  mio  ? 

18.  Guardaremos  este  reloj,  y  venderemos  el  otro. 


Key  to  Lesson  IX, 

EXERCISE  L— 1.  El  cafe  esta  mas  frio  que  el  te.  2.  Ese 
hombre  es  mas  f  uerte  que  Vd.  3.  Las  manzanas  no  estan 
mas  maduras  que  las  peras.  4.  Esta  agua  no  esta  (or  es, 
according  to  meaning)  mas  fria  que  la  ptra.  5.  Londres  es  mas 
grande  que  Paris.  6.  <;  No  es  la  ciudad  de  Madrid  mas 
pequeiia  que  Paris  ?  7.  Esta  cerveza  es  muy  buena,  pero  el 
Yino  es  mejor.  8.  No  recibire  menos  de  cinco  chelines.. 
9.  Esta  casa  es  mas  barata  de  lo  que  Vd.  cree. 

EXERCISE  II. — 1. 1  Es  el  mas  holgazan  de  sus  criados  de 
Vd.  2.  Es  muy  dificil.  3.  Ese  cuadro  es  el  mas  hermoso 
de  la  coleccion.  4.  Esta  agua  es  la  mas  clara.  5.  Estas 
ventanas  son  las  mas  pequeiias.  6.  El  error  mas  pequeno 
tiene  a  veces  consecuencias  muy  graves.  7.  Nuestra  casa  es 
la  mas  convenient^ 

EXERCISE  III.— 1.  <>  Ha  recibido  Vd.  tanto  dinero  hoy 
como  ayer  ?  2.  Su  hi  jo  de  Vd.  es  tan  habil  como  laborioso.  3. 
Estas  sillas  son  tan  baratas  como  esas.  4.  i  Tiene  Vd.  tantas 
pluma's  como  yo  ?  5,  Esta  senora  no  es  tan  alta  como  Vd. 


12 

6.  Ha  traido  tantos  regalos  como  ella.  7.  No  hemos  couuprado 
tantos  muebles  como  Vd. 

EXERCISE  IV. —1.  vendi;  2.  ^compraron  (ellos)  ?  3. 
Yds.  recibieron  ;  4.  <;  no  llego  (ella)  ?  5.  no  tuvieron ; 
6.  i  estuvo  (el)  ?  7  <;  temimos.  (nosotros)  ?  8.  fume  ;  9.  no 
hallamos  ;  10.  Vd.  no  fue"  ,  11.  £  envio  Vd.  ?  12.  <;  no  hube 
(yo)  ?  13.  escribimos  ,•  14.  Vds.  no  hubieron  aprendido ; 
15,  £  No  estuvieron  (elios)  en  el  cuarto  ? 

Key  to  Lesson  X. 

EXERCISE  I. — 1.  La  casa  que  Vds.  ban  comprado  es  mas 
conveniente  que  la  mia.  2.  <j  Es  este  el  capitan  cuyo  buque 
Vd.  ha  visto  ?  3.  El  seiior  que  hablo  con  los  niiios  es  su  tio. 
4.  No  estamos  seguros  cuales  guardara.  5.  El  muchacho  a 
quien  liemos  visto  esta  enfermo.  6.  Ha  olvidado  Vd,  el 
nombre  del  caballero  (or  senor)  con  quien  vivo?  7.  Ha 
leido  la  carta  que  recibi,  lo  que  es  una  lastima.  8.  El  caballo 
que  he  comprado  no  es  muy  f  uerte.  9.  He  traido  seis  libros, 
los  cuales  prestare  esta  tarde  al  hermano  de  Vd.  10.  No,  no 
es  este  senor  quien  esta  fumando. 

EXERCISE  II.— 1.  Let  us  drink  [some]  water.  2.  Sell 
your  horse.  3,  Do  not  let  us  wait.  4.  Do  not  buy  these 
cigars.  5.  Do  not  let  us  keep  these  samples.  6.  Do  not 
smoke  (PLUR.)  yett  7.  Be  in  time.  8.  Have  pity  I  9.  Take 
this  chair. 

10.  Presto  (Vd.)*  suparaguasa  miprimo.  IL.Deje  (Vd.)* 
hablar  al  muchacho.  12.  Comamos  ahora.  13.  Que  esperen 
(ellos).  14.  Que  compre  el  vestido.  15.  Este  (Vd.)*  alii 
esta  tarde.  16.  Envie  (or  mande)  Vd.  los  paquetes  a  mi  casa. 
17.  Tenga  Vd.  la  bondad  de  aguardar  un  poco, 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE.—!.  Tome  Vd.  el  paraguas  que 

jesta  en  el  rincon.    2.  No  rompa  Vd.  los  platos  que  compre 

ayer.     3.  No  olviden  Vds.  de  comprar  te,  cafe,  y  azucar,     4. 

No  preste  Vd.  dinero  a  ese  hombre.     5.  Comamos  esta  fruta. 

*  Optional  always  in  Imperative,  but  better  inserted. 


6.  Mire  Vd.  esas  tiendas.  7.  No  rompa  Vd.  ese  vaso.  8.  No* 
hablemos  a  ese  hombre.  9.  La  persona  para  qnien  trabaja 
esta  aqui.  10.  Los  oficiales  a  quienes  ha  hallado  Vd.  abajo 
estaran  aqui  manana.  11.  El  pan  que  Vd.  comio  es  tan  bueno 
como  este.  12.  No  ban  recibido  los  peri6dicos  que  envie,  lo 
que  es  muy  estrano.  13.  Adivine  Vd.  cual  de  las  mucbacbas 
es  la^nejor.  14.  He  ballado  varies  documentos  importantes* 
los  cuales  enviare  a  nuestro  abogado.  15.  No  conteste  Vd.  a 
esa  pregunta.  16.  <;  Son  ellos  quienes  estan  trabajando  ? 
17.  No  sea  Vd.  tan  descortes. 


Key  to  Lesson  XL 

'  EXERCISE  I. — 1.  Vd.  tenia  ;  2.  <?  noestaban  fumando  ?or 
I  no  f umaban  ?  3.  no  dividia ;  4.  <J  estaba  comiendo  ?  or 
£  comia  ?  &.  era  ;  6.  no  estabamos  ;  7.  <j  no  habian  Vds. 
tornado  ?  8,  <?  no  f  umaba  Vd.  ?  9.  no  eramos  ;  10.  i  habia 
comido  ?  1L  estaba  escucbando,  or  escuchaba  ;  12.  <j  leia 
Vd.  ?  13.  estabamos  tobajando,  or  trabajabamos  ,  14.  ^  no 
estabatf  llamando  ?  15.  Eran  amigos  mios.  16.  No  tenia 
tiempo.  17.  Habiamos  olvidado  su  nombre. 

EXERCISE  II,— J.^  recibirian ;  2.  no  hallaria ;  3- 
<;  creeria  Vd.  ?  4.  tendriamos ;  5.  no  babria  vendido ;  6. 
i  seria  ?  7.  Vd.  no  estaria ;  8.  i  no  babrian  bablado  Vds.  ?  9. 
romperiamos ;  10.  no  escribiria ;  11.  enviariamos ;  1^. 
',;  aprenderia  Vd.  ? 

EXERCISE  III.— -1.  para  ellaT  2.  bacia  nosotros  ;  3.  por 
el ;  4.  de  Vd. ;  5.  sin  ellas  ;  6.  con  Vds. ;  7.  en  el ;  8.  a  mi ; 
9.  a  ella  ;  10.  de.  ellos  ,  11.  conmigo  ,  12.  por  nosotras  5  13. 
sin  el ;  14.  contra  Vd. ;  15.  entre  si ,  16.  para  ellos  ;  17.  con 
ella  ;  18.  para  si. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE.—!.  Estabamos  trabajando  con 
el.  2.  Estudiariamos  espanol.  3.  La  leche  estaba  en  el  jarro. 
4,  i  Hablaria  Vd.  al  comercfante  ?  5.  El  papel  no  era  bueno, 
p«ro  lag  plumas  eran  muy  Duenas.  6,  Han  estado  siempre 


11 

conmigo.  7.  i  Quxen  era  el  capitan  de  este  buque  ?  8.  <j  No 
teniamos  siete  sillas  en  este  cuarto  ?  9.  <j  No  fu6  Vd.  quien 
ha  traido  este  regalo  para  mi  ?  10.  Las  cucharas  no  eran 
nuestras.  11.  Fueron  estos  soldados*  quieues  ganaron  la 
batalla.  12.  £  No  era  temprano  cuando  llego  ?  13.  <j  Compraria 
Vd.  estos  cuchillos  y  tenedorss  ?  14.  No  guardaria  ese 
vestido.  15.  Hablaba  siempre  de  si.  16.  No  viajabamos  sin 
el.  17.  t  A  qu6  bora  comia  Vd.  ?  18.  Lleve  Vd.  a  sus 
ninos  consigo. 

Key  to  Lesson  Xlf. 

EXERCISE  I. — 1.  La  tenemos  2.  Los  ha  tornado.  3. 
<j  Me  comprende  Vd.  ?  4.  Lo  coniprare  manana.  5,  El 
tendero  no  nos  cree.  6.  f  £e  ha  pagado  Vd.  la  cuenta  ? 
7.  Los  hemos  visto  en  la  calle.  8.  No  los  aguardaria.  9.  Lo 
habria  Vd.  vendido  ?  10.  Mi  amigo  las  guardara.  11.  Su  tio 
(de  Vd.)  nos  habia  olvidado.  12.  Le  hablare  esta  tarde. 

EXERCISE  II. — 1.  Me  lo  enviaban  cada  dia.  2.  t  Nos  los 
ha  enviado  ?  3.  Le  ha  escrito  a  ella  y  a  su  madre.  4.  Su 
tia  me  ha  hablado  a  mf,  pero  no  a  Vd.  5.  <j  Se  lo  leyo  ayer  ? 
6.  El  banqnero  se  lo  prestara  a  ellosr  pero  no  a  su  abogado. 
7  ^  Se  lo  ha  explicado  Vd.  (a  ellos)  ?  8.  No  se  lo  he 
explicado  todavia,  pero  se  lo  explicare  esta  noche.  9.  Les 
vendemos  a  Vds.,  no  a  ellos.  10.  Nos  la  vendera  manana. 
11.  El  dependiente  no  me  las  ha  explicado. 

EXERCISE  III.— 1.  Leamelo  Vd.  2.  Leame  Vd.  la  carta. 
3.  Leanos  Vd.  esa  carta.  4.  No  nos  las  lea  Vd.  5.  Vendales 
Vd.  su  reloj.  6.  No  le  envie  Vd.  la  carta.  7.  C6mprenlo 
Vds.  8.  i  Estaba  hablandole  (or  Le  estaba  hablando)  a  Vd,* 
6  a  su  padre  ?  9.  Presteselo  Vd.  10.  No  le  preste  Vd. 
dinero.  11.  No  es  facil  comprenderle.  12.  Ensenenselo  Vcb. 
13.  No  se  lo  eneenen  Vds.  14.  Que  me  escuche. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE.—!.  Mirele  Vd.  a  el,  no  a  mi. 
2*  D6jerne  Vd.  tenerlo.  3.  i  For  qu6  le  ha  vendido  Vd.  su 


15 

sortija  ?  4.  No  los  olvidara.  5.  <j  Nos  lo  deben  ?  6.  Nole 
escuche  Vd.  7.  No  nos  las  ha  traido.  8.  Le  prestaba 
dinero  a  Vd.,  pero  no  a  mi.  9.  &  Cuando  lo  compraran  Vd&  ? 
10.  <j  Quien  lo  ha  hecho  ?  11.  <j  Cuanto  dinero  le  debemos  ? 

12.  Se  los  he  prestado  a  ella,      13.  Los  tendra  maiiana.      14. 
Vendanselos  Vds.     15.  No  me  lo  envie  Vd.    16.  £  Nos  lo 
debe  ?     17.  <;  Guardemoslo.      18.  £  Le  espera  Vd.  hoy  ? 

Key  to  Lesson  XIII. 

EXERCISE  I.— 1.  seguramente ;  2.  baratamente ;  3» 
pesadamente  ;  4.  frianiente  ;  5.  habilmente  ;  6.  valiente- 
mente  ;  7.  alegremente ;  8.  doblemente  ;  9.  purainente. 

EXERCISE  II. — 1.  Copie  Vd.  cuidadosamente  los  nom- 
bres.  2.  Estan  escuchando  aiin  ?  3.  Ayer  compre  un  reloj, 
y  maiiana  lo  vendere.  4.  Este  hombre  no  trabaja  siempre, 
bien.  5.  Apenas  habia  acabado  mi  trabajo,  cuando  mis 
amigos  llegaron.  6.  Bebemos  siempre  te  y  cafe.  7.  Maiiana 
recibh*emos  ocho  libras. 

EXERCISE  III. — 1.  No  tendre  ninguna  dificultad.  2.  Ni 
mi  esposo  ni  mi  hi  jo  estan  arriba.  3.  El  criado  no  ha  traido 
ni  cafe  ni  -te.  4.  Nadie  esta  abajo.  5.  No  encontre  a  nadie 
en  el  jardin.  6.  Ninguna  casa  seria  bastante  grande.  7. 
Nada  es  mas  seguro.  8.  Este  muchacho  no  comprende  nada. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE.—!.  Tengo  aqui  un  vestido  azul. 
2.  Apenas  aguardo  un  minuto.  3.  Tal  vez  recibire  manana 
unos  regalos.  4.  Ese  parroquiano  ya  ha  comprado  la  lampara. 
5.  Les  hablare  de  seguro  esta  noche.  6.  <;  No  hallo  Vd.  aqui  mi 
paraguas  ?  7.  Nadie  esta  escuchando.  8.  Rehuso  firmemente 
continuar.  9.  A  veces  bebo  cerveza,  pero  nunca  bebo  vino. 
10.  Deseo  principalmente  hablarle  a  el,  no  a  su  socio.  11. 
Hablo  clara  y  energicamente.  12.  <;  Espera  Vd.  hoy  una  carta  ? 

13.  No  es  de  ninguna  conftecuencia.  14.  No  cfee  nada.  15*.  No 
hallaron  a  nadie  en  casa.    16.  Nunca  he  leidtf  libro  mejor 

H.K.S.S.. 


m 

Key  to  Lesson 

EXERCISE  I. — 1.  treinticinco  (or  tremta  y  cinco)  nifios  ; 
2.  diecinueve  dias;  3.  seis  semanas ;  4.  doce  meses*;  5. 
gchentiocho  aiios ;  6.  un  minuto ;  7.  una  semana ;  8. 
noventisiete  libras  ;  9.  veintitres  chelines ;  10.  dieciocho 
peniques  ;  11.  cuarentidos  duros  ;  12.  ciento  siete  libros ; 
13.  quinientos  setentitres  chelines ;  14.  mil  trescientas 
cincuentiuna  casas  ;  15.  cinco  mil  doce  horas  ,  16  dieciseis 
mil  setecientas  sesenticuatro  millas  ;  17.  cien  millones  de 
libras,;  18.  cien  escuelas  ;  19.  cinco  millones  doscientos 
ochentiseis  mil  cuatrocientos  quince  habitantes. 

EXERCISE  II. — 1.  las  once ;  2.  las  ocho  menos  vein- 
ticinco  ;  3.  las  diez  y  media  ;  4.  las  once  menos  cuarto  ;  5.  la 
una  y  cinco  ;  6.  las  ocho  menos  diez  ;  7.  Son  las  nueve  y 
cuarto.  8.  ^  Es  la  una  ?  9.  No  son  las  doce  todavia.  10.  Son 
las  tres  menos  diecinueve. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE.—!.  <?  Que  hora  es?  2.  No  se 
,que  hora  es.  3.  Son  las  doce  y  media.  4.  El  tren  sale  a  las 
ocho  y  veintitres.  5.  Ha  viajado  doscientas  ochentiuna 
millas.  6.  Tenemos  en  el  banco  mil  novecientas  cinouenti- 
cuatro  libras  diecisiete  chelines  y  seis  peniques.  7.  Este  pais 
tiene  cien  millones  de  habitantes.  8.  Les  he  prestado  mil 
!ochocientas  cincuenta  libras.  9.  No  hay  cien  buenos  soldados 
en  el  regimiento.  10.  Estara  aqui  a  la  una  menos  diez.  11. 
Son  las  doce  menos  cuarto.  12.  Ese  comerciante  tiene 
quinientas  mil  libras.  13.  Catorce  mil  ochocientos  cincuenta 
goldados  pelearon  en  esa  batalla.  14.  No  son  las  tres  y  cuarto 
todavia.  15.  Han  enviado  noventidos  paquetes  ;  £  no  es 
verdad  ?  16.  £  Cuantos  dias  hay  en  una  semana  ?  17.  Hay 
siete  dias,  ciento  sesentiocho  horas,  6  diez  mil  ochenta 
minutos  en  una  semana.  18.  <j  Cuales  son  los  nombres  de  log 
dias  ?  19.  Domingo,  Lunes,  Martes,  Miercoles,  Jueves, 
Viernes,  Sabado.  20.  Hay  doce  meses,  6  trescientos 
eesenticinco  dias  en  un  aiio.  21.  Los  meses  son :  Enero 
Febrero,  Marzo,  Abril,  Mayo,  Junio,  Julio,  Agosto,  Sep« 
tiembre,  Octubre,  Noviembre,  Diciembre, 


n 

Key  to  Lesson  XV. 

EXERCISE  I.— 1.  los  primeros  habitantes ;  2.  la  octava 
parte ;  3.  el  decimo  error ;  4.  la  quinta  tienda  ;  5.  las 
segundas  clases ;  6.  la  septima  calle  a  la  derecha ;  7.  la 
tercera  ventana  a  la  izquierda  ;  8.  el  quince  (15)  de  Octubre ; 
9.  el  primero  (1°)  de  Mayo  ;  10.  el  veinticinco  (25)  de  Agosto; 
11.  Pio  nono  ;  12.  Isabel  segunda  ;  13.  Carlos  doce;  14. 
Paris,  18  de  Junio  1907,  or  Junio  18  de  1907. 

EXERCISE  II.— 1.  No  he  hallado  nada.  2.  Un  hombre 
rico  tiene  siempre  inuchos  amigos.  3.  Lo  miraban  cada  diez 
minutos.  4.  <;  Cuantas  libras  le  debo  a  Vd.  ?  5.  No  beba  VcL 
toda  el  agua.  6.  <?  Ha  comprado  Vd.  hoy  algunos  libros  ? 
7.  <j  Hay  alguien  arriba  ?  8.  Se  lo  vendimos  (a  ellos)  el 
otro  dia.  9.  Vd.  tiene  demasiados  perros. 

EXERCISE  III. — 1.  un  mal  viaje  ;  2.  un  gran  ruido ; 
3.  una  chimenea  grande  ;  4.  un  gran  favor  ;  5.  San  Pablo ; 
6.  el  tercer  muchacho  en  la  primera  clase  ;  7.  Hay  un  poco 
de  cafe,  pero  no  tengo  ni  azucar  ni  leche.  8.  Nunca  gasta 
dinero  aqui.  9.  Tengo  una  mala  pluma,  pero  buen  papel. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE.—!.  Alejandro  primero  murio  el 
primero  de  Diciembre  de  1825.  2.  £  Cuanta  tinta  hay  en  los 
tinteros  ?  3.  Este  es'  un  buen  muchacho,  pero  los  otros  no 
han  hecho  ningun  trabajo.  4.  Es  el  primero  de  su  clase,  la 
cual  es  muy  grande.  5.  Mis  primas  son  casi  siempre  las 
primeras  en  la  lista,  y  mi  hermana  es  la  ultima.  6.  <;  Quien 
fue  el  primer  rey  de  Espaiia?  7.  Copie  Vd.  cada  cuarto 
renglon.  8.  <j  Cuantas  palabras  han  escrito  Vds.  ?  9. 
Catalina  segunda  nacio  el  dos  de  Mayo  de  1729,  y  murio  el 
diecisiete  de  Noviembre  de  1796.  10.  Esta  es  la  primera  vez 
que  he  hallado  a  alguien  en  casa.  11.  La  segunda  leccion  es  la 
mas  dificil.  12.  Al  contrario,  cred  que  las  primeras  lecciones 
son  muy  faciles,  y  que  la  octava  es  la  mas  dificil.  13.  i  No 
cree  Vd.  que  los  ultimos  capitulos  de  este  libro  son  muy 
divertidos  ?  14.  Fue  una  gran  reina.  15.  Este  es  el  primer 


18 

error  que  he  hecho  hoy.  16.  He  llenado  este  tintero,  y  ml 
hermano  ha  llenado  todos  los  otros.  17.  <?  Cuantos  hermanos 
tiene  Vd.  ?  Tengo  solamente  uno. 


Key  to  Lesson  XVI, 

EXERCISE  I. — 1.  Prestele  Vd.  algunas  herramientas.  2. 
Tenemos  (un  poco  de)  sal,  pero  no  tenemos  ni  mostaza  ni 
pimienta.  3.  <?  No  ha  encontrado  Vd.  a  nadie  ?  4.  £  Ha  traido 
el  mozo  pan  y  queso  ?  5.  Mi  esposa  (or  seiiora)  ha  com- 
prado  algunos  muebles.  6.  <;  No  ha  visto  Vd.  hoy  unas 
nmestras  ?  7.  Este  discipulo  no  tiene  tinta.  8.  Esa  criada 
ha  roto  algunos  platos,  pero  no  ha  roto  ningun  vaso.  9.  Me 
ha  dado  algunos  regalos  para  mi  hija. 

EXERCISE  II. — 1.  me  Iavar6  ;  2.  no  nos  estamos  lavando ; 
3. 1  no  se  han  lavado  ?  4.  Vd.  se  cansara  ;  5.  se  f elicitarfa  ; 
6.  no  Be  cansen  Vds. ;  7.  £  se  ha  lastimado  ?  8.  <;  no  se  han 
lastimado  Vds.  ?  9.  se  f  elicitan  ;  10.  lavense  Vds. ;  11.  los 
obreros  se  cansaban  ;  12.  nos  f  elicitaremos. 

EXERCISE  III. — 1.  no  se  queje  Vd. ;  2.  mi  amigo  se  ha 
equivocado  ;  3.  <j  por  que  se  mete  Vd.  ?  4.  me  metere  ;  5.  no 
se  metian  ;  6.  <?  se  ha  escapado  el  hombre  ?  7.  ]  levantese  Vd. 
inmediatamente  !  8.  me  estoy  cansando ;  9.  <:  no  se  ha 
apeado  todavia  ?  10.  nos  levantariamos  ;  11.  alegremonos  ; 
12.  apeese  (or  bajese)  Vd.  aqui ;  13.  se  han  casado. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE.—!.  Ese  dependiente  es  muy 
descuidado,  pero  cree  que  nunca  se  equivoca.  2.  Se  apearon 
a  la  puerta  de  la  iglesia.  3.  No  me  que  jo  de  esto,  sino 
de  eso.  4.  £  Por  que  no  se  lava  ese  muchacho  ?  5. 
No  me  he  equivocado  esta  vez.  6.  Nos  levantamos  cada  dia 
(BETTER,  todos  los  dias)  a  las  seis  y  media.  7.  No  nos 
meteremos  en  eso.  8.  Los  ninos  se  han  comportado  muy 
bien.  9.  Su  amigo  de  Vd.  se  felicito  demasiado  pronto. 
10.  No  se  cansen  Vds.  11.  No  deseamos  cansarnos.  12. 
Ape&nonos  en  esta  estacion.  13.  Me  veudieron  (a  mi)  un  poco 


'tto  buen  tabaoo,  y  a  el  algunos  cigarroi  muy  buenos.  14. 
Eete  es  un  buen  discipulo  ;  raramente  se  equivoca.  15.  ^  A 
que  bora  se  levantan  ?  16.  Nos  apearemos  a  la  puerta  del 
hotel.  17.  Se  levanta  siempre  demasiado  tarde.  18.  No  se 
meta  Vd.  en  estos  asuntos.  19.  <?  Cuando  se  casaran  ?  20.  Ya 
&e  ban  casado.  21.  i  For  que  no  se  levanta  Vd.  ? 


Key  to  Lesson  XVII. 
EXERCISE  I,-— 1.  no  son  creidos  ;  2.  <;  no  es  Vd.  temida  ? 

3.  fuimos  llamados  ;  4.  <;  es  araada  ?  5.  los  vasos  seran  rotos  ; 
6.  la  ventana  f  ue  rota  por  el  criado  ;      7.  la  reina  es  amada  ; 
8.  i  no  §oy  creido  ?    9.  no  son  amados. 

EXERCISE  II.— -1.  Se  Gambia  dinero  extranjero  en  esa 
tienda.  2.  <;  Se  prestan  estos  libros  para  leer  ?  3.  Se  cree 
que  la  reina  esta  muy  enferma.  4.  Se  venden  estas  naranjas 
a  seis  peniques  la  docena.  5.  Esos  amos  son  respetados  de 
sus  criados.  6.  Aqui  se  vende  leche.  7.  Aqui  se  venden 
cigarros.  8.  La  caja  fue  hecha  por  este  carpintero.  9.  Se 
teme  que  el  accidente  sera  grave.  10.  Se  presta  dinero. 

11.  Las  cartas  seran,  escritas  por  el  dependiente.    12.  Se 
espera  que  llegara  manana. 

EXERCISE  III.— 1.  creyeron;  2.  paguemos;  3.  no  lo 
recojamos  ;  4.  alcance  ;  5.  toquemos  ;  6.  que  lo  recoja ;  7. 
I  venzo  ?  8.  leyo  ;  9.  no  lei ;  10.  goce  ;  11.  toquelos  Vd. ; 

12.  no  los  toquen  Vds. ;    13.  no  llegue  Vd.  demasiado  tarde  ; 
14.  p&gueme  Vd. ;   15.  que  pague  ;   16.  toque  ;   17.  Venzamos 
esta  dificultad.   18.  Recoja  Vd.  esa  manzana,    19.  Busquemos 
un  coche.    20.  Dirija  Vd.  las  cartas.      21.  No  toque  Vd.  esos 
libros. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE. — 1.  Aqui  se  vendon  periodicos. 
2.  Pague  Vd.  al  carpintero.  3.  Esta  ventana  no  f  u6  rota  ayer.* 

4.  Llegue  el  diez  de  Diciembre.      5.  Luego  que  le  alcanc6,  le 

*  =nobody  broke  it  yesterday.  Esta  ventana  no  estaba  rota, 
etc.*s  the  window  was  not  broken  (when  I  saw  it), 


20 

rfiable.  '6.  Recoja  Vd.  esa  piedra ;  deseo  examinarla.  7.  Ore-' 
yeron  que  me  habia  equivocado.  8.  Sin  duda  los  paquetes 
seran  hallados  por  el  muchacho.  9.  El  parte  fue  enviado  a  los 
capitanes.  10.  Cojamos  esta  barandilla  ;  la  escalera  no  esta 
muy  segura.  11.  No  toquemos  los  papeles,  porque  los 
desarreglaremos.  12.  Se  dirijio  a  su  amigo,  pero  no  recibio 
ninguna  contestacion.  13.  Se  cree  que  ha  naufragado  un 
buque.  14.  Una  buena  madre  es  amada  de  sus  hijos. 
15.  Fueron  heridos  por  los  soldados.  16.  Se  duda  si  tendra 
bastante  paciencia.  17.  Avance  cuidadosamente  hacia  la 
cabeza  del  caballo.  18.  Se  creia  que  el  parte  habia  llegado. 
19.  No  se  reciben  equipajes  aqui. 

Key  to  Lesson  XVIII. 

EXERCISE  I. — 1.  cerremos  ;  2.  no  cierre  Vd. ;  3.  cuesta  ; 
4.  costaran  ;  5.  no  muevo  ;  6.  <<  movemos  ?  7.  pierden  ;  8.  no 
perdemos  ;  9.  llueve  ;  10.  <j  no  esta  lloviendo  ?  11.  volvere  ; 
12.  <j  no  contaba  Vd.  ?  13.  <j  muestra  el  nino  ?  14.  no  nos 
muestre  Vd.  ;  15.  pensariamos  ;  16.  £  piensa  Vd.  ?  17.  no 
lo  niego  ;  18.  muestreme  Vd.  ;  19.  sentemonos  ;  20.  <j  Por 
que  no  se  sienta  Vd.  ?  21.  <?  Cree  Vd.  que  helara  manana  ? 
22.  Volvamos  a  casa  ;  pronto  llovera.  23.  Si  le  encuentro,  le 
^ablare.  24.  Volverian  a  las  nueve  y  media.  25.  Ahora  no 
truena.  26.  <j  Por  que  no  vuelve  su  criado  ?  27.  Si  lo  niegan, 
no  les  creere.  28.  <j  No  ha  encendido  el  fuego  todavia  ?' 

EXERCISE  II. — 1.  en  trabajar;  2.  despues  de  haber 
aguardado  ;  3.  plata  u  oro  ;  4.  hijos  e  hijas  ;  5.  hijos  6  hijas ; 
6.  antes  de  salir ;  7.  sin  beber ;  8.  antes  de  prestarlo  ; 
9.  herinanos  y  hermanas ;  10.  despues  de  haberme  mostrado 
su  musica  e  instrumentos  ;  11.  en  mostrarselos  ;  12.  diez  u 
once  chelines  ;  13.  Cambie  Vd.  esta  taza  por  la  otra.  14.  No 
es  culpa  mia,  sino  de  el.  15.  El  buque  no  ha  llegado  hoy, 
pero  tal  vez  llegara  manana. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE.—!.  Su  amo  no  aprueba  su 
conducta.  2.  Antes  de  recomendar  e\  libro,  lo  examinare. 


21 

3.  Lo  compraron  sin  examinario.  4.  Grei  que  lloverfa.  5. 
Despues  de  haberme  sentado,  conte  los  hechos  e  incidentes 
de  mi  viaje.  6.  <;  Es  su  cuarto  de  Vd.  claro  u  obscure  ?  7.  No 
me  mostro  a  mi  su  billete,  sino  a  Vd.  8.  <•  Niega  Vd.  que  los 
descubrimientos  e  invenciones  de  este  siglo  han  sido  muy 
\itiles  ?  9.  Empecemos  ahora.  10.  No  empiece  Vd.  todavia  ; 
no  estoy  listo.  11.  No  encienda  Vd.  el  fuego  en  mi  cuarto, 
pero  cierre  las  ventanas.  12.  Si  vuelvo  a  tiempo,  explicare 
todas  mis  opiniones  e  ideas.  13.  Muestreme  Vd.  lo  que  tiene 
en  la  mano.  14.  Tengo  siete  u  ocho  chelines  en  mi  bolsillo. 
15.  Me  vendio  su  sortija  por  sesenta  duros.  16.  Volvio  la 
semana  pasada.  17.  No  vuelva  Vd.  sin  hablarle.  18.  Calientese 
Vd.  antes  de  salir.  19.  <?  Cuanto  recibio  Vd.  por  su  reloj  ? 
20.  Despues  de  haber  hecho  su  trabajo,  volveran.  21.  Nos 
recomendo  una  gramatica,  pero  hemos  oMdado  el  titulo.  22. 
Mi  almuerzo  me  cuesta  aproximadamente  dos  chelines  cada 
dia.  23.  El  mio  me  cuesta  mas. 


Key  to  Lesson  XIX, 

EXERCISE  I.— 1.  di  ;  2.  no  dare  ;  3.  i  sabe  Vd.  ?  4.  no 
fue  ;  5.  £  sabran  ?  6.  no  doy  ;  7.  supieron  ;  8.  vamos  ;  9.  no 
ee  ;  10.  yendo  ;  11.  voy  ;  12.  Vd.  no  daba ;  13.  <;  sabian  ?  14. 
i  vayase  Vd. !  15.  <j  se  va  Vd.  ?  16.  no  damos  ;  17.  no  den 
Vds. ;  18.  ]  sepa  Vd. !  19.  \  vayanse  Vds. !  20.  Demosle  esta 
gramatica.  21.  El  profesor  esta  dando  una  leccion.  22. 
Vayan  Vds.  a  su  casa  pasado  manana.  23.  Denoslo  Vd. 
pronto.  24.  Se  lo  dimos  a  Vd.  la  semana  pasada.  25.  ,;  No 
ira  su  primo  de  Vd.  esta  noche  ?  26.  <j  Lo  sabe  Vd.  ? 
27.  No  se  quien  ha  ido  a  comprarlos. 

EXERCISE  II. — 1.  veamos ;  2.  dijeron  ;  3.  no  veo  ;  4.  £  no 
diremos  ?  5.  dicen  ;  6.  veia ;  7.  no  vemos  ;  8.  <;  que  esta 
diciendo  ?  9.  Vd.  vio  ;  10.  hemos  dicho  ;  11.  no  diga  Vd- 
12.  viendo  ;  13.  i  dijimos  ?  14.  no  vea  Vd. ;  ^  15.  no  digo  ; 
16.  Vaya  a  ver  quien  esta  en  el  jardin.  17.  Digame  si  esta 
Vd.  cansada.  18.  No  me  ha  dicho  nada. 


22 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE.— 1.  El  capitan  no  dio  nada 
a  los  marineros.  2.  Me  dijeron  que  su  dependiente  no  tenia 
ninguna  experieixeia.  3.  Digamosles  lo  que  pensamos.  4. 
No  se  si  van  todos  los  dias  (better  than  cada  dia)  por  ferro- 
carril.  5.  Cuando  voy  al  campo,  los  veo.  6.  Veamos  quien 
ha  ido  a  casa.  7.  No  comprende  lo  que  estan  diciendo.  8. 
Voy  a  explicarselo.  9.  Vamos  a  ver  a  nuestro  tio.  10.  Vaya 
Vd.  a  ver  quien  esta  a  la  puerta.  11.  Sabia  varios  idiomas, 
pero  los  ha  olvidado.  12.  Digame  Vd.  cuando  volvera. 
13.  i  Por  que  no  nos  dicen  la  verdad  ?  14.  Vaya  Vd.  a  casa  ; 
eu  padre  desea  verle.  15.  Si  veo  al  hombre,  le  dire  lo  que  Vd. 
desea.  16.  Fuiuios  a  Londres  el  aiio  pasado.  17.  Iban 
amenudo  al  teatro.  18.  Nunca  vemos  a  nuestros  amigos 
hasta  la  noche.  19.  i  Por  que  no  le  da  Vd.  una  silla  ?  20. 
I  Quien  le  ha  dicho  eso  ?  21.  Le  digo  que  es  verdad. 
22.  Cuando  le  vi,  iba  a  casa.  .  23.  Lo  sabre  pronto.  24..  Nunca 
se  lo  doy.  25.  Ire  manana  a  la  estacion,  26.  No  se  lo  d6  Vd. 
a  el,  sino  a  mi. 

Key  to  Lesson  XX. 

EXERCISE  I.— 1.  pondria ;  2.  no  hago  ;  3.  hagamos ;  4.  no 
pongan  Vds. ;  5.  <j  valgo  ?  6.  no  valen  ;  7.  Vd.  ha  puesto  ; 
8.  haremos ;  9.  <j  valdra  ?  10.  poniendo  ;  11.  no  hicieron  ; 
12.  hacemos ;  13.  £  puso  Vd.  ?  14.  no  pongo ;  15.  valgamos  : 
16.  i  no  valdria  ?  17.  <;  Donde  los  pondremos  ?  18.  No  lo 
haga  Vd.  todavia.  19.  Pongalos  Vd.  en  el  rincon.  20.  <;  Pone 
aqui  sus  cartas  ?  21.  No  los  hacia.  22.  <•  Que  ha  hecho  Vd. 
esta  manana  ?  23.  No  estoy  haciendo  nada. 

EXERCISE  II. —1.  hace  veinte  anos ;  2.  valdria  mas; 
3.  no  hay  mnguna  dificultad ;  4.  alii  esta  su  sombrero  ; 
5.  <;  hacia  calor  ?  6.  No  habia  ninguna  silla ;  7.  <j  habia  un 
tren  ?  8.  <•  no  valdra  ?  9.  hace  una  hora ;  10.  alii  estan 
nuestros  primos ;  11.  ^  no  es  seguro  ?  12.  <*  hari,  viento  ?  13. 
no  habrd  bastante  pan  ;  14.  no  hace  calor  hoy  ;  15.  no  habia 
ningun  error  ;  16.  <:  hace  f rio  ?  17.  <j  no  valia  mas  ?  18.  <i  hay 


28 

agua  ?   19.  alii  esta  la  estacioiy,  20.  hace  ecis  mtses ;   21. 
Necesitaba  dinero,  pero  no  lo  tenia. 

EXERCISE  III.— 1.  son  muy  estimados ;  2.  <?  esta  Vd. 
fatigada  ?  no  mucho ;  3.  un  mal  muchacho  ;  4.  un  mu- 
chacho  muy  malo  ;  5.  £  hace  tanto  viento  como  ayer  ?  6.  no 
estoy  tan  satisfecho  como  Vd. ;  7.  un  pintor  muy  celebre  ; 
8.  Kara  mucho  frio.  9.  £  Nc^hacia  mucho  calor  ?  10.  No  fue 
muy  aplaudido.  11.  i  Es  muy  amada  la  reina  ?  12.  No  tengo 
tanto  dinero.  13.  Fue  tan  odiado  como  su  padre. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE.— 1.  Haga(me)  Vd.  el  favor  de 
esperar  un  poco.  2.  <?  Vale  este  cuadro  tanto  como  el  otro  ? 
3.  Habia  varios  niiios  que  estaban  haciendo  ruido.  4.  Ponga 
Vd.  vino  sobre  la  mesa.  5.  Espero  que  no  hara  taiito  viento. 
6.  Lo  hare  manana,  si  tengo  tiempo.  7.  Estos  hermosos 
muebles  se  hicieron  cien  anos  ha.  8.  Pondra  .flores  en  la 
ventana.  9.  El  rey  no  es  tan  estimado  como  la  reina.  10. 
Creo  que  manana  hara  mucho  calor.  11.  Los  puse  en  la  caja 
hace  una  semana.  12.  No  hay  sitio  para  poner  nuestros 
sombreros.  13.  <;  Lo  ha  puesto  Vd.  aqui  ?  14.  Alii  esta  el 
foaston  ;  deselo  Vd.  15.  No  habra  bastante  tiempo  para 
hacerlo.  16.  Nunca  lo  hago.  17,  Habia  un  cuadro  que  fue 
muy  admirado.  18.  Esos  son  los  cuadros  que  fueron  tan 
admirados.  19*  Los  viajeros  estaban  cansados2  pero  no 
mucho.  20.  No  he  puesto  nada  en  las  cajas.  21.  <j  Que  esta 
poniendo  dentro  del  cajon  ?  22.  <?  for  que  no  hace  su 
trabajo  ?  23.  Lapongo 


Key  to  Lesson  XXI. 

EXERCISE  I.— 1.  queriendo  ;  2.  no  quiero  ;  3.  ,;  pudo-? 
4.  no  querremos  ;  5.  <;  puede  ?  6.  <;  no  querran  ?  7.  <?  quiso 
Vd.  ?  8.  pudimos ;  9.  podriamos  ;  10.  pudiendo  ;  11.  <;  no 
quieren  Vds.  ?  12.  podia  ;  13.  no  queremos  ;  14.  no  podra  ; 
15.  i  querria  ?  16.  ^  podemos  ?  17.  Vd.  no  puede  ;  18. 
querian  ;  19.  i  quiere  Vd.  ?  20^-  no  podria  ?  21.  no  podemog ; 


24 

22.  Vd.  no  puede  dudarlo.  23.  No  pude  llegar  a  (or  en) 
tiempo.  24.  No  sabia  hablar  espanol.  25.  £  No  sabe  leer  el 
nino  ? 

EXERCISE  II. — 1.  Los  hemos  convidado  a  comer  con 
nosotros.  2.  Empezo  a  Hover.  3.  No  puedo  contegtar.  4. 
I  Quiere  Vd.  darme  su  tar j eta  ?  5.  Le  escribi  ayer,  para 
decirle  .que  Vd.  habia  llegado.  6.  Fuimos  a  ver  a  su  tio  (de 
Vd.)  ayer.  7.  Parece  ser  imposible.  8.  No  intento  mirarlos. 
9.  Ha  traido  la  carta  a  casa  para  leerla.  10.  Ensenaba  a  nadar 
a  mis  niiios.  11.  Hagame  Vd.  el  favor  de  darme  un  vaso  de 
agua.  12.  Cesen  Vds.  de  hablar. 

EXERCISE  III. — 1.  Debemos  ir  a  casa.  2.  Vd.  no  .debiera 
hacer  eso.  3.  Vd.  tendra  que  aguardar  hasta  la  tarde.  4. 
I  Cuanto  trabajo  tiene  Vd.  que  hacer  (or  ha  de  hacer  Vd.)  ? 

5.  Tenian  (or  Tuvieron)  que  salir  sin  comprar  sus  >  billetes. 

6.  <;  Debe  Vd.  copiarlo  ?     7.  Tiene  varias  cosas  que  hacer. 
8.  No  tendriamos  que  pagar  tanto  dinero  como  Vd.     9.  No 
debieran  f  umar  tanto. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE.—!.  Los  soldados  debieran  obe- 
decer  al  oficial,  pero  no  lo  hacen  siempre.  '2.  <j  Por  que  no 
quiere  Vd.  mostrarmeel  cuadro  ?  3.  No  quiero  ponerloaqui. 
4.  £  Quiere  Vd.  decirle  su  nombre  ?  5.  No  puedo  prestarle 
este  libro  ;  no  es  mio.  6.  No  tenia  nada  que  hacer.  7.  Debo 
enseiiarle  a  hablar  mas  correctamente.  8.  Pudimos 
acabarlo  ayer.  9.  Podriamos  acabarlo  manana.  10.  No  han 
podido  hallarlos  todavia.  11.  Lo  hemos  dicho  para  per- 
suadirle.  12.  Quisieron  aprender  a  hablar  espanol.  13. 
Corra  Vd.  a  ver  quien  esta  a  la  puerta.  14.  No  podiarnos  (or 
pudimos)  aguardar  para  verle  ;  teniamos  que  irnos.  15. 
Queria  guardar  todo  el  dinero  para.  si.  16.  No  querra  volver 
sin  recibir  una  respuesta.  17.  Vd.  debiera  darme  mas  tiempo. 
18.  &  Pudo  el  abogado  comprender  ?  19.  Esperamos  recibir 
una  respuesta  manana.  20.  Me  escribio  para  decir(me)  que  se 
habia.  equivocado.  21.  £  Podria  Vd.  enviarnos  los  generos 
hoy  ?  22.  Debemos  preguntar  ahora  'a  nuestro  amo.  23. 


25 

Toy  a  darselos,  para  demostrarle  que  no  estoy  ofendido.  24. 
Vd.  no  debe  cantar  tan  alto^  25.  <:  No  sabe  hablar  aleman 
su  amigo  (de  Vd.)  ?  26. ,;  No  deberia  Vd.  convidarlos  a 
comer  ?  27.  £  Cuando  sabre  dibujar  tan  bien  como  Vd.  ? 
28.  No  se  tocar  el  piano. 

Key  to  Lesson  XXII. 

EXERCISE  I. — 1.  oigo  ;  2.  no  venga  Vd. ;  3.  i  anduvieron  ? 
4.  Vd.  no  saldra ;  5.  vendran  ;  6.  vine  ;  7.  andabamos  ; 
8.  salido  ;  9.  viniendo  ;  10.  i  oimos  ?  11.  no  salgamos ; 

12.  andando  ;    13:  no  vengo  ;   14.  <;  vienen  Vds.  ?     15.  no 
oyeron  ;    16.  Vd.  oira ;    17.  oyendo ;    18.  veniamos  ;    19. 
oigamos  ;  20.  %  no  sale  ?  21.  £  venimos  ?  22.  vendria ;   23.  no 
salgan  Vds.  ahora.  24.  He  venido  a  verle  (a  Vd.).  25.  Me  ha 
oido  hablar.    26.  Anduvo  muy  deprisa.     27.  Salgo  a  ver  la 
ciudad.    28.  Vendremos  la  semana  que  viene.      29.  Me  oyo 
perf ectamente,  porque  hable  despacio.  30.  Vengo  a  explicar- 
selo  a  Vd.      31.  Trate  Vd.  de  oir  lo  que  se  dice.      32.  ^No  se 
oye  amenudo  el  ruido  desde  aqui. 

EXERCISE  IT.— 1.  jugamos  ;  2.  <;  no  juega  Vd.  ?  3.  es- 
cribia;  4.  ^  han  abierto  ?  5.  no  traemos  •;  6.  no  traigan  Vds. ; 
7.  cabe  ;  8.  no  cabian  (or  cupieron)  ;  9.  no  hemos  impreso  ; 
10.  no  caiga  Vd.  •  11.  Vd.  no  ha  traido  ;  12.  esta  cubierto  ; 

13.  £  no  ha  vuelto  todavia  ?     14.  imprimamoslo  ;    15.  no  los 
abro  ;   16.  no  cabra  ;    17.  he  traido  ;   18.  no  traigo  ;   19.  Vd. 
caera  ;  20.  no  juegue  Vd. ;  21.  cubralos  Vd. ;  22.  caigo  ;  23. 
Todo  el  dinero  cabe  en  esta  caja.  24.  Traigamelo  Vd.  ahora. 
25.  Espero  que  caeran.    26.  <;  Quiere  Vd.  abrir  la  ventana  ? 
Ya  esta  abierta.    27.  No  quepo  en  este  -coche.     28.  Aqui  se 
imprimen  toda  clase  de  libros  extranjeros.     29.  Traiganos 
Vd.  la  contestaci6n  lo  antes  posfble.      30.  <;  For  que  no  se 
cubre  Vd.  ? 

EXERCISE  III. — 1.  segurisimamente  ;  2.  felicisimo  ; 
3.  felicisimamente  ;  4.  rarisimos  ;  5.  bonisimas  ;  6.  muy 
honorables  ;  7.  con  muchisimo  gusto ;  8.  Mis  perros  son 


26 

fidelisimos.  9.  Estos  nines  son  bonisimos.  10.  Su  contestaci6n 
es  utilisima.    11.  Es  un  trabajo  facilisimo. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE.--!.  Traigamelos  Vd.  lo  antes 
posible.  2.  Nunca  viene  muy  temprano.  3.  Debieramos 
darselo.  4.  Vd.  debiera  esperar  un  poco.  5.  No  volvera 
antes  de  las  seis.  6.  Volvieron  el  mes  pasado.  7.  Volveremos 
manana  por  la  mafiana.  8.  Tendremos  que  abrir  todas  las 
ventanas  enseguida  9.  Abra  Vd.  los  cajones.  10.  Las  cosas 
cabran  en  esta  caja.  11.  Espero  que  volveran  pronto.  12. 
Debera  (or  Tendra  que)  traermelo  manana  por  la  manana. 
J.3.  A  que  hora  volverd  el  coche  ?  14.  Tengo  que  salir  a 
comprar  varias  cosas.  15.  £  Por  que  anda  Vd.  tan  despacio  ? 
16.  Espero  que  vendran  a  vernos  la  semana  que  viene.  17.  Es 
casi  imposible  oic  el  ruido.  18.  Los  ninos  estan  jugando 
ati&jo.  19.  El  tren  sale  siempre  a  las  ocho  y  media.  20. 
Nunca  los  trae  bastante  temprano. 


Key  to  Lesson  XXIII. 

EXERCISE  I. — 1.  Vd.  pidio  ;  2.  no  repetimos  ;  3.  <j  reira  ? 
4.  no  elijan  Vds. ;  5.  sonriendo  ;  6.  Vd.  reia ;  7.  £  no  rige 
Vd.  ?  8.  seguimos ;  9.  No  se  sabe  si  puede  impedirlo.  10. 
I  Por  que  esta  Vd.  riendo  ?  11.  No  ria  Vd.  12.  Siganos  Vd. 

EXERCISE  II.— 1.  <;  consintio  ?  2.  no  sugeri ;  3.  i  que 
sugirio  Vd.  ?  4.  no  herimos  ;  5.  consentiran  ta'mbien  ;  6.  No  lo 
difiera  Vd. ;  7.  £  Cual  de  los  dos  prefiere  Vd.  ?  8.  £  No  mentia  ? 

9.  Ahora  se  arrepiente  (or  se  esta  arrepintiendo).    10.  £  No 
sintio  Vd.  el  golpe  ?     11.  Arrepintamonos.     12.  Lo  sentimos 
mucho.     13.  Siento  much$  molestarle. 

EXERCISE  III. — 1.  contradecira  ;  2.  no  se  duerma  Vd. ; 
3.  dormimos  ;  4.  murieron  ;  5.  no  convinieron  ;  6.  mu- 
riendo  ;  1,  dormi ;  8.  Vd.  moriria  ;  9.  i  no  dormian  Vds.  ? 

10.  i  habia  supuesto  ?  11.  no  contrahagamos  ;  12.  Muri6  algo 
joven,    13. ,;  Duerme  Vd.  alguna  vez  por  la  tarde  ?    14.  <J  No 
estan  durmiendo  los  ninos  ?    15.  Supongo  que  si. 


27 

EXERCISE    IV.— 1.  compra  ;    2.temed;    3.  hallas  ;    4. 

I  debeis  ?  5.  no  temes  ;  6.  enviabais  ;  7.  romperas  ;  8.  no 
harias  ;  9.  habeis  venido  ;  10. 1  estas  lista  ?  11. ,;  no  has  puesto  ? 
12.  i  que  tienes  ?  13.-  fuisteis  ;  14.  escribid  ;  15.  <;  estais 
escuchando  ?  16.  <;  quereis  venir  ?  17.  no  tendreis  ;  18.  no 
tuviste ;  19  <;  habiais  esperado  ?  20.  muestramelo  ;  21. 
hacedlo  ;  22.  <;  no  eres  ingles  ?^  23.  no  sois  obreros.i 

EXERCISE  V. — 1.  tomad;  2.-notomeis;  3.  escribe-;  4.  no 
escribas  ;  5.  vete  ;  6.  idos  ;  v  7.  hablame  ;  8.  no  nos  babies  ; 
9.  no  te  canses  ;  10.  no  os  canseis  ;  11.  aprended;  12.no 
aprenduis.  13.  Compra  este  reloj.  14.  No  veridas  este  reloj. 
15.  Prestadme  vuestro  paraguas.  16.  No  leas  la  carta.  17.  Leela. 

COLLECTIVE  EXERCISE,—!.  Me  pidio  cinco  chelines.  2. 
Se  los  dare  esta  tarde.  3.  Muestreme  lo  que  Vd.  h$i  elegido. 
4.  Sirvase  Vd.  tomar  asiento.  5.  Cuando  llegue,  los  ninos 
estaban  durmiendo  (or  dormidos).  6.  Le  pedire  algo.  7. 
Repitalo  Vd.  8.  <j  Qliiere  Vd.  seguirme  ?  9.  Nunca  nos 
corrige,  cuando  nos  equivocamos.  10.  Sirvanse  Vds.  esperar  un 
poco.  11.  Uno  de  los  dos  ha  mentido,  pero  no  se  cual.  12. 
Lo  encuentro  dificilisimo.  13.  Siente  mucho  que  no  podra 
venir  esta  noche.  14.  <;  Cuando  murio  ?  15.  Sirvase  (Vd.) 
decirme  la  hora  exacta.  16.  No  puedo  decirselo  (or  decir- 
sela)  ;  mi  reloj  no  anda.  17.  Siento  mucho  ese  accidente. 
18.  No  haga  (Vd.)  ningiin  ruido  ;  ainbos  estan  dormidos 
(or  durmiendo).  19.  Supongo  quellegaran  pronto.  20.  Repita 
io  que  Vd.  ha  dicho.  21.  Consintio  enseguida.  22,  Se  rieron 
cuando  les  dijimos  eso.  23.  Nos  impidio  de  verlo. 


Key  to  Lesson  XXIV. 

EXERCISE  I.-l.4crezco;  2.  no  crece?  3.  no  lucio ; 
4.  i  cnecen  ?  5.  no  conozco  ;  6.  no  reconozca  Vd. ;  7. 
nacieron  ;  8.  produjimos  ;  9.  traduzcamos  ;  10.  <•  no  cuezo  ? 
11.  i  luzca  Vd. !  12.  dedujeron  ;  13.  <;  cocia  Vd.  ?  14. «;  Cuando 
cio  Vd.  ?  15." /;  Parezco  estar  cansado  ?  16:  Tra^uciran  ertft 


28 

en  media  hora.   17.  No  conozco  el  precio,  18.  <*  Conoce 
Vd.  a  este  seiior  ?    19.  No  le  reconozco. 

EXERCISE  II.— 1.  «;  distribuye  Vd.  ?  2.  huyeron  ;  3. 
siguiendo  ;  4.  no  atribuyo  ;  5.  sigo  ;  6.  no  seguimos ;%  7.  Vd. 
destruira ;  8.  £  no  distinguirian  Vds.  ?  9.  arguyo  ;  10.  Vd.  no 
distribuia ;  11.  Sirvase  Vd.  seguirlos  (or  seguirlas).  12.  No 
destruya  Vd.  estos  documentor 

EXERCISE  III.— 1.  PRES.  SUBJ.  tenga,  tengas,  tenga  ; 
tengamos,  tengais,  tengan.  IMPF.  SUBJ.  tuviese,  tuvieses, 
tuviese;  tuviesemos,  tuvieseis,  tuviesen.  FUT.  SUBJ. 
tuviere,  tuvieres,  tuviere ;  tuvieremos,  tuviereis,  tuvieren. 
CoND.  SUBJ.  tuviera,  tuvieras,  tuviera ;  tuvieramos, 
tuvierais,  tuvieran. 

2.  PRES.     haya,  hayas,  haya ;  hayamos,  hayais,  hayan. 
IMPF.    hubiese,  hubieses,  hubiese  ;     hubiesemos,  hubieseis, 
hubiesen.   FUT.     hubiere,  hubieres,  hubiere ;    hubieremos, 
hubiereis,  hubieren.       COND.  hubiera,  hubieras,  hubiera ; 
hubieramos,  hubierais,  hubieran. 

3.  PRES.  sea,  seas,  sea  ;  seamos,  seals,  sean.    IMPF.  f uese, 
f ueses,  f uese  ;  fuesemos,  f ueseis,  fuesen.    FUT.  f uere,  f ueres, 
f  uere  ;  f  ueremos,  f  uereis,  f  ueren.       COND.     f  uera,  f  ueras, 
fuera  ;  f ueramos,  f uerais,  f ueran. 

4.  PRES.    este,  estes,  este  ;  estemos,  esteis,  esten.      IMPF.: 
estuviese,  estuvieses,  estuviese  ;  estuviesemos,  estuvieseis,  es- 
tuviesen.  FUT.  estuviere,  estuvieres,  estuviere  ;  estuvieremos, 
estuviereis,  estuvieren.       COND.    estuviera,  estuvieras,  es- 
tuviera  ;  estuvieramos,  estuvierais,  estuvieran. 

5.  PRES.  tome,  tomes,  tome  ;     tomemos,  tomeis,  tomen. 
IMPF.      tomase,    tomases,  tomase ;     tomasemos,  tomaseis, 
tomasen.       FUT,     tomare,  tomares,   tomare;    tomaremos, 
tomareis,  tomaren.     COND.  tomara,  tomaras,  tomara ;  toma- 
ramos,  tomarais,  tomarao. 


29 

6.  PRES.   beba,  bebas,  beba  •     bebamos,  bebais,  beban- 
IMPF.    bebiese,  bebieses,    bebiese ;     bebiesemos,  bebieseie, 
bebiesen.       FUT.    bebiere,  bebieres,  bebiere ;     bebieremoe, 
bebiereis,    bebieren.       COND.    bebiera,  bebieras,    bebiera ; 
bebieramos,  bebierais,  bebieran. 

7.  PRES.  -de,  des,  de  ;   demos,  dels,  den.       iMPP.  diese, 
dieses,  diese  ;  diesemos,  dieseis,  diesen.      FUT.  diere,  dieres, 
diere  ;  dieremos,  diereis,  dieren.    COND.  diera,  dieras,  diera  ; 
dieramos,  dierais,  dieran. 

PRESENT.  IMPERFECT.     FUTURE.         CONDIT. 

8.  escriba,  etc.  escribiese,  etc.  escribiere,  etc.  escribiera,  etc. 

9*  vea,  etc.  viese,  etc.  viere,  etc.  viera,  etc. 

10,.  venga,  etc.  viniese,  etc.  viniere,  etc.  viniera,  etc. 

11.  pueda,  etc,  pudiese,  etc.  pudiere,  etc.  pudiera,  etc. 

12.  vaya,  etc.  f  uese,  etc.  fuere,  etc.  fuera,  etc. 

13.  diga,  etc.  dijese,  etc.  dijere,  etc.  dijera,  etc. 

14.  muera,  etc.  muriese,  etc.  muriere,  etc.  muriera,  etc. 

Key  to  Lesson  XXV. 

EXERCISE  L— 1.  <j  Desea  que  (ella)  lo  lea?  2.  Desean 
que  Vd.  acepte  esto.  3.  No  desearan  que  lo  ^guardemos.  4. 
Desea  que  nos  quedemos  alii.  5.  No  deseamos  que  nos  oigan. 
6.  £  Desea  Vd.  que  cierre  la  puerta  ?  7.  <;  Que  desea  (el)  que 
haga  ?  8.  Desean  que  paguemos  la  cuenta  enseguida. 

EXERCISE  II.— 1.  No  es  necesario  que  nos  pague  mucho. 
2.  Es  necesario  que  saiga  al  instante.  3.  Es  posible  que  el 
dinero  sea  suyo.  4.  §entimos  que  no  nos  haya  hallado.  5. 
Teme  que  venga.  6.  <;  Es  necesario  que  les  escribamos  ?  7. 
^  Quiere"  'Vd.  que  abra  las  ventanas  ?  8.  i  Quiere  (el)  que 
lo  pongamos  aqui  ? 

EXERCISE  III.— 1.  despuesque  venga  a  vernos ;  2.  para 
que  no  cueste  demasiado;  3.  antes  que  hagan  el  trabajo. 
4.  Cuando  reciba  su  contestacion,  se  la  en^enare  (or  mostrare). 


80 

5.  Le  esperare  (a  Vd.),amen6cJ  que  llueva.  6.  Cuando  llegue, 
le  hablare.  7.  Les  enviaremos  los  generos  cuando  tengamos 
tiempo.  8.  Aviseme  cuando  este  Vd.  desocupado.  9.  Espere 
Vd.  hasta  que  esten  listos.  10.  Les  pagaremos  antes  que  lo 
hayan  terminado  (or  antes  que  lo  terminen).  11.  Pagaran  su 
cuenta  cuando  tengan  mas  dinero.  12.  Cuando  viene  a  verme, 
nunca  permanece  (or  se  queda)  mucho  tiempo.  13.  Cuando 
vuelvan,  se  lo  explicare.  14.  Siempre  me  habla  cuando  me  ve. 

EXERCISE  IV.— 1.  No  creo  que  desee  salir.  2.  No  dijo' 
si  podi'ia  hacerlo.  3.  No  creenaos  que  reciba  ningiin  premio. 
4.  i  No  es  probable  que  puedan  verlo  ?  5.  £  No  espera  Vd.  que 
su  primo  venga  pasado  manana  ?  6.  No  esperamos  que  lo 
traigan.  7.  No  es  necesario  que  copiemos  las  direcciones  que 
nos  did. 


Key  to  Lesson  XXVL 

EXERCISE  I. — 1.  No  crei  que  hubiese  venido.  2.  De- 
seariamos  que  no  hubiesen  empezado  (or  comenzado).  3. 
Desearia  que  no  estuviese  aqui.  4.  <j  Deseaba  (el)  que  lo  hi- 
ciese  ?  5.  No  fue  necesario  que  hablasen.  6.  Hubiera  negado 
que  su  hermano  estuviese  alii.  7.  Quisiera  tener  mas  dinero. 

EXERCISE  II. — 1.  Le  ayudaria,  si  estuviese  menos 
ocupado.  2.  Lo  copiaria,  si  tuviese  mas  tiempo.  3.  Les 
pagariamos  enseguida,  si  tuviesemos  bastante  dinero.  4.  Si 
estuviese  aqui,  se  los  daria.  5.  Trabajaria  mejor,  si  tuviese 
mejores  herramientas.  6.  Pregiinteles  Vd.  si  estaran  en  la 
estacion  esta  noche.  7.  <*  Sabe  Vd.  si  vive  en  Madrid  ahora  ? 


HOME  USE 

CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 
MAIN  LIBRARY 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 
1 -month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling  642-3405. 
6-month  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing  books 

to  Circulation  Desk. 
Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4  days  prior 

to  due  date. 

ALL  BOOKS  ARE  SUBJECT  TO  RECALL  7  DAYS 
AFTER  DATE  CHECKED  OUT. 


REG.  Cut, 


'75 


AIITfl  DISC  SFP  1  1  '0(1 


LD2 1 — A-40m-8,'  75 
(S7737L) 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


U.C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


'•  '!•••  Mill  IK 

COD3323037 


